|
|
| Line 17: |
Line 17: |
|
| |
|
| =Text= | | =Text= |
| {{#Wiki_filter:i Log # TXX-6020 i File 0 10068 TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING COMPANY SKYWAY TOWER 40S NORTH OLIVE STREEF. LB. 81. DALLAS. TEXA8 75301 October 10, 1986 l | | {{#Wiki_filter:}} |
| "'$ % if?,,TM E, Director of Nuclear Reactor Regulation Attention: Mr. Vince S. Noonan, Director Comanche Peak Project i Division of Licensing U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, D. C. 20555
| |
| | |
| ==SUBJECT:==
| |
| COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION (CPSES)
| |
| DOCKET NOS. 50-445 AND 50-446 CPRT CHECKLISTS
| |
| | |
| ==Dear Mr. Noonan:==
| |
| | |
| ,. Enclosed are revisions to be included in the manuals previously submitted which describe the use of CPRT Checklists. Instruction sheets and revisions are provided for your two controlled copies and ten uncontrolled copies.
| |
| Any future revisions to these procedure manuals will be sent to your attention. Should you have any questions please contact myself or John Beck.
| |
| Very truly yours, 18 &
| |
| W. G. Counsil JCH/amb
| |
| /
| |
| /
| |
| 8610270002 861010 PDR ADOCK 05000445 lb A PDR T' g
| |
| 7 A 11111sl0% OF TFX A.% E T11.11193 Fi t CTRIC (D%IP t %1'
| |
| )
| |
| | |
| )-
| |
| wg . ..
| |
| Instruction Sheet No. 2 DAP Checklists Remove Insert Volutne No. Notes Table of Contents Table of Contents, Rev.1 I Behind Tab DAP-CS Series ]
| |
| DAP-C/S-G016,Rev.2 DAP-C/S-G016,Rev.3 I Behind Tab DAP-CS Series DAP-C/S-G043,Rev.1 DAP-C/S-G043,Rev.2 I Behind Tab DAP-CS Series DAP-C/S-G045,Rev.0 DAP-C/S-G045,Rev.2 I Behind Tab DAP-CS Series DAP-C/S-S152,Rev.0 DAP-C/S-S152,Rev.1 I Behind Tab DAP-CS Series Table of Contents Table of Contents, Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-004,Rev.1 DAP-E-004,Rev.2 II Behind Tab l DAP-E Series 4 DAP-E-011,Rev.0 DAP-E-011,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-012,Rev.0 DAP-E-012,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-013,Rev.0 DAP-E-013,Rev,1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-014,Rev.0 DAP-E-014,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-015,Rev.0 DAP-E-015,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-016,Rev.0 DAP-E-016,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-017,Rev.0 DAP-E-017,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-018,Rev.0 DAP-E-018,Rev.1 II Behine' eb a
| |
| DAP-E Series DAP-E-019,Rev.0 DAP-E-019,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series pg. 1 of 3
| |
| \\ j
| |
| | |
| + .
| |
| DAP-E-020,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-021,Rev.0 II Behind TatI-DAP-E Series DAP-E-022,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-023,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-024,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-025,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-026,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-030,Rev.0 DAP-E-030,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-031,Rev.0 DAP-E-031,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-032,Rev.0 DAP-E-032,Rev.1 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-040,Rev.1 DAP-E-040,Rev.2 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-041,Rev.1 DAP-E-041,Rev.2 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-042,Rev.1 DAP-E-042,Rev.2 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-044,Rev.1 DAP-E-044,Rev.2 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-045,Rev.1 DAP-E-045,Rev.2 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-046,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-047,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-048,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series pg. 2 o' 3
| |
| \ __
| |
| | |
| +. .
| |
| DAP-E-049,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-050,Rev.0 II. Behind Tab-DAP-E Series DAP-E-051,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-052,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-053,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series DAP-E-054,Rev.0 II Behind Tab DAP-E Series Table of Contents Table of Contents,Rev.1 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-019,Rev.0 DAP-M-019,Rev.1 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-022,Rev.0 DAP-M-022,Rev.1 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-028,Rev.0 DAP-M-028,Rev.1 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-029,Rev.0 DAP-M-029,Rev.2 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-050,Rev.0 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-075,Rev.0 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series DAP-M-077,Rev.1 IV Behind Tab DAP-M Series pg. 3 of 3
| |
| \
| |
| | |
| ;4 1
| |
| 1 ATTACHMENT A
| |
| , Mechanical checklist Forms DAP CHECKLIST j FORM N0. BEL. DATI TITLE -
| |
| j DAP-M-001 0 2/25/86 System Arrangement i DAP-M-002 UNASSIGNED l DAP-M-003 0 2/28/86 NPSH DAP-M-004 0 2/28/86 Maximum / Minimum Flow
| |
| { DAP-M-005 0 2/25/86 Overpressure Protection Screening DAP-M-006 0 3/13/86 Steam Flow DAP-M-007 0 3/13/86 Heat Removal Capacity
| |
| ; DAP-M-008 0 3/13/86 Water Supplies j DAP-M-009 0 2/25/86 Motor-driven Pump l DAP-M-010 0 2/25/86 Turbine Driver
| |
| } DAP-M-Oll UNASSIGNED j DAP-M-012 0 2/25/86 SG 1 solation Valves DAP-M-013 0 2/25/86 Steam to Turbine Driver Valves I DAP-M-014 0 2/25/86 SWS Isolation Valves DAP-M-015 0 2/25/86 Pipe and Piping Components DAP-M-016 0 2/25/86 Flow Control Valve DAP-M-017 UNASSIGNED
| |
| ]
| |
| DAP-M-018 0 3/13/86 Flow Limiting Orifice DAP-M-019 O -2/25/86
| |
| _ Single Failure /FMEA DAP-M-020 0 2/25/86 Support Systems i DAP-M-021 0 3/10/86 Class 5 Piping DAP-M-022 0'l 2/27/8'6 HELB DAP-M-023 0 2/25/86 Flooding--Internal DAP-M-024 0 2/25/86 Flooding--External DAP-M-025 0 2/25/86 Missile Protection DAP-M-026 0 3/3/86 Seismic Qualification DAP-M-027 0 3/3/86 Pump & Valve Operability DAP-M-028 FI later- a HVAC System Performance DAP-M-029 IA laters HVAC Components DAP-M-030 THROUGH DAP-M-034 UNASSIGNED DAP-M 035 0 later Control Room Habitability DAP-M-036 UNASSIGNED l DAP-M-037 1 5/9/86 Miscellaneous Components 1
| |
| ( lo /
| |
| | |
| i DAP CHECKLIST FORM N0. BIL. DAIE TITLE DAP-M-038 THROUGH DAP-M-040 UNASSIGNED DAP-M-041 1 5/15/86 Miscellaneous Components DAP-M-042 THROUGH DAP-M-049 UNASSIGNED DAP-M-050 g: 4ater 7 ^ System / Component Safety Classification DAP-M-051 0 4/2/86 Source Tems DAP-M-052 0 4/1/86 Transport and Diffusion DAP-M-053 0 4/1/86 , Environmental Qualification DAP-M-054 0 4/30/86 Cesign 8ase Accidents DAP-M-055 UNASSIGNED DAP-M-056 0 4/1/86 Shielding DAP-M-057 0 4/1/86 Control Room Radiation Analysis DAP-M-058 UNASSIGNED DAP-M-059 0 3/20/86 Overpressure Protection DAP-M-060 0 later Calculation Checklist DAP-M-061 THROUGH DAP-M-062 UNASSIGNED l DAP-M-063 0 3/26/86 Combustible Gas Control t DAP-M-064 0 4/10/86 Containment Sump Design DAP-M-065 0 3/20/86 Welding
| |
| . DAP-M-066 0 4/24/86 Postulated Offsite Chemical Releases DAP-M-067 THROUGH DAP-M-068 UNASSIGNED l DAP-M-069 0 2/25/86 Radiattion Monitoring DAP-M-070 0 5/30/86 Post-Accident Sump Chemistry I
| |
| DAP-M-071 0 3/26/86 Containment Pressure / Temperature
| |
| ! Analysis DAP-M-072 UNASSIGNED DAP-M-073 0 later Miscellaneous Thermal / Hydraulics DAP-M-074 0 later Mechanical Errection DAP-M-075 0 +eter7 1 Specification Checklist DAP-M-076 0 3/26/86 Subcompartment Pressure /Termper-ature Analyis DAP-M-0XX 0 later Seismic Qualification Spec. , ~ '' '
| |
| 7 . g c,. ,
| |
| u ;
| |
| .1_
| |
| . m.s L r " ' "
| |
| 2 O
| |
| _________________-________J
| |
| | |
| s (r) m s SEstem a nteu tut
| |
| * M 80eg EstealS8 utente aw k
| |
| * tese h an. ge,,
| |
| h goes 4preses toes triserle mmeare See Cemnen t AA Sasuret sessrepsten Si nol e Fa i l ure/FMEA prieary soferasses REFERENCE CESCRIPTION SAT /tMSAT/
| |
| E3. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS 0.0 AA) Criteria Nos: 5, 27, 38, 39, 59, 81, 83, 85, 88, 90, 93, 102, 126, 129, 130, 139, 140 and 161. ,
| |
| 1.0 Does any ccat>ination ot HELB, loss of of faite This postulated event envelopes single power and single failure exist to prevent failure, evaluations to stopty at least two sufficient flow to two effective stems intact steam generators for main steam and generators? (38,39,83,129,130) fee &ater break initiating events.
| |
| A. Can any single line break be postulated Determine by postulating P iping breeks that would prevent att feedwater flow to more Dws.2323-MI-020 in att lines between att fee & ster than one steam generator 7 (140) 6 isolation valves and stems generators that flow can be prevented to a maximun of one stems generator for a single break location. Document review with a completed failure modes and effects analyses. (FME4)
| |
| : 8. Can any single line break be postulated that would prevent flow from more than one Dug.2323-MI-020 Postulated breaks in lines between att AFW pap to two or more intact steam 6 three AFW ptmps and the steam generators? generators using FMEA technigJes.
| |
| Verify for each break that the following condition camot result: loss of all flow to two steam generators from more than one AFW ptsp.
| |
| C. Can any single active failure be Using the results from items 1A and 1B The single failure evaluation for AC and DC postulated that would prevent flow from more Dwg.2323 MI-020 above, review all active AFW ccuponents power systems is performed by the electrical 1 DAP FORM DAP M-019, REV. 1, 08/14/86 I 4 9
| |
| w
| |
| | |
| b O u MStes etwas stamagess OscutISE mesta Soviener
| |
| * tese mese me. g,,,
| |
| mester ames ag y oong :
| |
| triserie mamers See Comment AA ge,s,,g go,,,gy tten Si nol e Fa i l u re/FMEA Priemry soferesses REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO.CR!iERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCMMENTS l than one AFW ptmp or to more than one intact 6 via FMEA techniques to verify that for and IEC (DSAP XI) review.
| |
| steam generator? (139) any postulated single active component falture in the AFW system that att AFW flow is not prevented to more than two
| |
| * 1 intact steam generators. Verify via i FMEA technigJes that a single failure in NVAC instrument air, safety chilled water, or service water can not cause the loss of AFW flow to more than two j intact steam generators.
| |
| 4 2.0 Does an active valve (s) exist in the cannon Dwg.2323-MI-020 Verify by inspection, that no active l main fee &ater lines? (59) 6 valves exist in the common main
| |
| . feedwater Iines that would cause a single failure to stop att AFW flow to j a steam generator.
| |
| 3.0 Does the design of the AFW regulator control Spec. MS 600 Verify by inspection that the AFW Review of vendor documents is documented in valves permit valve closure in the event of a regulator valves can be closed and DAP-M-011.
| |
| secondary systen break and fait cpen on toss remain closed for a 30 minute period in of power or toss of alr? (81) the event of a secondary system break coincident with loss of instrument air and fait open on toss of power or loss j of instrument air.
| |
| l 1
| |
| 4.0 Is a diverse (minisue 2 s/g.) and adequate Dwg.2323-MI-020 Review design to verify a steam stgply The adeqJacy of the steam stopty as a 2 DAP FORM DAP-M-019, REV.1, 08/14/86 h
| |
| e e
| |
| | |
| / [ - -
| |
| C. s V SEstes e n eau t enasasses CIEEELISS men a aw w
| |
| * anse shame ina.
| |
| g ,,
| |
| 8haster Sees Ayyeguet g ,g, triserie aishers See Comment AA gamuret toesripelas S i nal e Fa i l u re /FMEA Priemry soferenses -
| |
| . REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PACE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENT S steam stgply provided to the turbine driven 6 from two separate steam generators motivating force for the turbine driven ptmp AFW ptmp? (27,85,88,90) Catc. 202 23 exists, is evaluated in DAP-M 010.
| |
| Spec. MS 600 verify that the steam sigply valves -
| |
| fait open on loss of power or loss of air sigply.
| |
| 5.0 is each turbine driven pump flow control Dwg. Inst. Air verify that a safety related The* detailed verification of calculation valve eqtairped with an air acetamatator? (93) Cate.IC 005 accuna.tator systen has been provided IC-005 is documented in DAP-M 011.
| |
| Air Acc. Spec. and sized to permit remote maruel operation for 30 minutes after a loss of instrument air.
| |
| 6.0 Can AFW flow be achieved to at L steam Dwg.2323-MI-020 verify the followirgI coincident with a generators with a loss of all AC power? 6 Loss of att AC power (DC power is (27,85) CPSES MUREG avaltable) by review of the NUREG 0737 0737 Item response or performing an independent II.E.I.I FMEA:
| |
| | |
| ===Response===
| |
| Spec. MS 600, 1. Att valves in the turbine driven i MS 20C pusp flow path fait open (none throttled).
| |
| Spec.MS-7 2. The turbine driven ptmp will operate providing at least 470 GPM to two S/G.
| |
| 3 DAP FORM DAP M-019, REV.1, 08/14/86 g
| |
| | |
| /m -
| |
| )
| |
| s \
| |
| l aES8M WWOmf M gm sam a n ass anomaa j sev6amme tese meet es. g,,,
| |
| ! smocaer anse agy, es :
| |
| triesele enaeers See Comment AA m
| |
| Genseel Seasrepelenlinale Fai1ure/FMEA Priamey sofer esse 1
| |
| P REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION CDeENTS NC/NA l
| |
| ! Electrical Verify that no active components rely Dwg.2323 MI 020 on any stoport system except DC power 6 to perform the intended fmction.
| |
| * a l
| |
| 7.0 Does any camination of main steam tine Calculations Review calculations 206-6M and 206 6T Interface with contairunent response rtpture inside contairunent, toss of of fsite 206-6M, 206 6T for maximum flowrote conditions and checklist.
| |
| power, and single fatture exist ediich asstaptions. Perform review of AFW increase the AFW flow to the faulted toop in system via FIEA techniges or alternate i excess of containment pressure evaluation means to verify that the modelled asstaptims? (83) conditions are valid.
| |
| l 8.0 Structures, systems and components important Dwes: Review the CPSES design to determine to safety shall not be shared among ruclear shared systems. Verify that for those power imits miess it can be shoto that such systems or portions of systems that are sharing wiLL not impair their ability to shared that no adverse safety impacts perform their safety fmetions. result. Included in this review is the j
| |
| assurance that in the event of an
| |
| ! accident in one mit an orr4rty shutdown and cooldown of the remaining j i mit can be achieved.
| |
| , 9.0 Redtndancy of cooting water source is ensured Dwg.2323-M-0206 verify by inspection of drawings that a by a connection with the SWS, idiich is of diverse and independent water source Safety Class 3 design. can be provided from the condensate 4 DAP FORM DAP M 019, REV. 1, 08/14/86 e
| |
| | |
| -~
| |
| S T
| |
| A N E
| |
| * E M .
| |
| M M
| |
| (
| |
| 6 F C 8
| |
| /
| |
| / 4 e 1 r / /
| |
| 8
| |
| _ u T A 0 l S A i N N ,
| |
| , U /
| |
| a wFe 1
| |
| / C T N .
| |
| A V S E R
| |
| l a . ,
| |
| 9 n 1 0
| |
| i
| |
| _ S M -
| |
| P n
| |
| e A S l D ep M R
| |
| i O ts F
| |
| m P e u A g
| |
| ng s D g , N g a,t e O a e , r N I n
| |
| e s , e e m O T I A e s m a, E y m T P
| |
| I C
| |
| I F . 5 t s Nse R I k C R n S a G
| |
| I an E D
| |
| W t Ng F 0
| |
| eg E st a g st r e u o t
| |
| t c s S aa Ns e*esA m nA aa )
| |
| E t
| |
| C .
| |
| A n E P C
| |
| e N ,
| |
| m E T
| |
| * R N m E E .
| |
| o F E M C R C L
| |
| O e D
| |
| (
| |
| e
| |
| _ S e
| |
| s
| |
| _ s r s e a mr i f a o e
| |
| r e ri y e s m e r r i
| |
| adse m v ai i e eh r r ast P
| |
| . 8 A
| |
| I R
| |
| E T
| |
| I R
| |
| C.
| |
| O ,
| |
| N w
| |
| | |
| 1 m
| |
| O s y - . -
| |
| DESIGil llEVihW EVAL.IIATIOll CllECKLIST llut-1BER llEVEIllER DATE SilElW 110 llEV CilECKEl! _
| |
| 11 ATE Al'I'llOVA1,_,_
| |
| DATE CillTEllI A Ilull!!EllSilLJ08J2J03, GEllEllAl' DESCRII'T10ll Protection of AITI systera l'IllllAltY ItEl'EllEllCES _
| |
| ' from Ef fect1of IIEIJ1 ho. Af TRIBUTES REVIEWED REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT / COMMENTS (DoctmENT, PAGE) Of VERiflCATION (MSAT -
| |
| IfC/NA 1 Nave all high energy lines, as PIPING SPEC. Verify that att lines with HDA M077.0 (.1,.3,.4) defined in BIP APCSS 3-1,been TSAR maximaan operating temperature identified? > 200 degrees farenheit or (4) samisman operating pressure >
| |
| 275 psig during normat plant operation, as listed in the piping design spec., have been identified in FSAR Table T3.68 1. Perform selective review of the DSG (Damage Study Grote) evaluations to determine that these tines were evaluated.
| |
| 2 Are any high energy lines FSAR From verified list of high capable of affecting the AFW PIPING DWGS HDA M077.0( .1, .3, .4) energy lines, check piping, System? ELEC. DWGS electrical, and itC drawings (4, 52, 108) IRC DWGS to determine proximity of AFW system components to high energy lines or perform field walkdown of AFW system to check for proximity of high energy Lines.
| |
| DA P Form DI\f- W O U , gev l , 7//o/rf
| |
| | |
| l p&
| |
| a (m \
| |
| N.Y DESIGli IIKVIElf EVAIJIATIOII CllECKLIST llullBER llEVEltJER DATE SilEl?T 110 ItEV CIIECI' Ell DATE Al'I'llOVA L DATE ClllTERI A fluttilEllSJJWQBJJ3, GEllEllAL DEscitIFI'IOll Protection of AM1 System PRIllMtY ItEFElti;IlCES frcin Effects of IIElB NO. ATTRIBUTES REVIEWED REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT / COMMENTS (DOCUMENF, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAll0N UNSAT NC/NA 3 For each high energy 1ine PIPIMG DWGS Review TNE procedJres and/or HDA N077.0 (.1, .3,.4) potentially affecting any AFW DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUAil0NS piping stress analysis to conponent; verify that a verify that break exclusion dynami: piping analysis was This review is Limited to zone and Terminal End Break verifying the existence of an perf ormed, to identif y break Locations were postulated in adequate program for selecting eactusion zones and terminal accordance with FSAR Terminal end break locations, end breaks. requirements. Also check and determining their effects.
| |
| (4, 116) whether these were included in HDA M077.0 (.1,3,.4) the DSG room /line evaluations.
| |
| 4 For each high energy Line PIPING DWGS Review THE procedures and capable of etlecting any AFW PIPING STRESS AN4 LYSIS This review is Limited to and/or piping stress.gnalysis verifying the existence of a Couponent, we' if y that a DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUAi!ONS to verify that intermidiate dynamic pire.e antysis was TME PROCEDURES calculation and that adequate break locations were direction was provided to perforam:d, and intermediate postulated in accordence with correctly select intermediate break locations were correctly FSAR requirements (FSAR section break locations. The piping selected.(4, 116) 3.68.2.1.2), and included in and supports (DSAP IX) review DSG room /line evaluations. is verifying the piping stress calculations HDA M077.0(.1,.3,.4) 5 Were the type of breaks DSG ROOl*/LINE EVALUATIONS Verify by review of the DSG HDA M077.0( .1, .3, .4 )
| |
| postulated at the locations THE PROCEDURES ROOM /LINE evaluations and INE determined in items 3 and 4 procedures that the break correct? types postulated conform to (4, 116)
| |
| FSAR commitments (FSAR Section
| |
| , 3.68.2.1.3).
| |
| DA P Fem MP* M '0W 7' 'I ju I i
| |
| | |
| m !
| |
| ) - -
| |
| ,. q ~J DESIGli REVJ Eli EVAL,IIATIOli CllECKLIST llutIBER
| |
| * REVElllElt DATE SIIEET 110_ REV CIIECl;Elt DATE APPilOVAI, DATE CRITERI A IIUltilEllSA_1)(im]Q3J2J03, GEllEllAL DESCRIPTIO!! Protection of APd Syst_ga Pill!!All'1 ItEFEREllCES frca Effects of li f lJ1 NO. AIIRIBUIES REVIEWED REFERENCE DESCRIPilON SAT / COMMENIS (Doct41ENI, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION UNSAI NC/NA 6 for the breaks locatior.s STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS Review This review is limited to considered, d>es @ysical TNE PROCEDURES analysis / evaluations / procedure verifying the existance of hardware exist to eliminate PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS s to verify that whip calculations and that adequate the formation of a plastic DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUATIONS restraints are direction was provioed in hinge and to control the pipe ZONE OF INFLUENCE DWGS installed,gaalified, and designing and locating whip movement. adequatley located. restraints. The (4, 52) civil / structural (DSAP VIII) review is verifying the whip restraint design. HDA M077.0(.1,.2,.3) 7 Were the directions of the DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUATIONS Review DSG evaluations and HDA M079.0(.1,.2,.3) jets ard piping ZONE OF INFLUENCE DWGS zone of influence drawing to movements.resulting from the verify the postulated rupture breaks determined in items 3 oriantation and piping and 4 correctly applied 7 movement conforms to the (4, 116) postulated rtpture type criteria.
| |
| 8 Were ALL targets impacted by DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUATIONS Verify by field walkdowns that HDA 79.0(.1,.2,.3) jet ispiruementand pipe 20NE OF INFLUENCE DWGS att impacted components have 83.0(.1.3) movement identified 7 been identified and 1isted in (4, 116) the DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUATIONS.
| |
| Includes review for water spray & intrusion.
| |
| M P Form on P- M - o & J ev. l 'Ipo rg
| |
| | |
| ,,, 'A CN ( )
| |
| ~ ~
| |
| (
| |
| DESIGII ItEVIEli RVAI.llAT10!I CIIECKLIST llullBER ItEVElllER_ DATE SIIEET 110 IREV CllECl Elt DATE API'ItOVAL DATE CIIITEltI A IlullllEllSJ,_11fi,_108,_52m103 GEllEllAL DEScitlPflO!I Protection of AFW System PillflAltY ItEFEltEllCES fran Effects of IlEID NO. AIIRIRIJIES REVIEWED REFERENCE DESCRaril0N SAT / COHHENIS (OnCUMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAllON UNSAT NC/NA 9 for break locations affecting the Afu system; a.Does physical prota tion PIPING DWGS exist for protecting AFW Verify try review of drawings This review is limited to ELEC. DWGS or by field ulkdown that components from pipe movement 18C DWGS verifying the existance of appropriate physical qualitied barriers to protect due to restrained ard CIVIL DWGS unrestrained pipes? protection (enclosures, safety related equipment. HDA (4, 52, 108) barriers, shields) exists. 83.0(.1,.3)
| |
| : b. Does FA ysical protection PIPING DWGS exist against jet ispingment Verify by review of drawings This review is limited to ELEC. DWGS or by field walkdown that damaging AfW components? IRC DWGS verifying the existence of (4, 52, 108) appropriate physical qualified barriers to protect CIVIL DWGS protection (enclosures, FSAR safety equipment. HDA barriers, shields) exists.
| |
| * 83.0(.1,.3)
| |
| DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUATIONS
| |
| : c. Mas alternative analysis PIPING DWGS Review FSAR comunitments and been performed in lieu of ELEC. DWGS This evaluation includes physical protection against DSG evaluations to determine single failure and loss LLC DWGS if proximity was identified offsite power concurrent with the ef f ects of jet ispingment CIVIL DWGS and property determined by and/or pipe whip incitating the HELB in accordance with cteutative ef fects?(4,108)
| |
| FSAR analysis to be acceptable as the requirements of SRP 3.6 to DSG ROOM /LINE EVALUAiiONS is. Verify the existence of a achive safe shutdown. HDA shutdown evaiuation. 78.0(.1,.3,.4), 83.0(.1,.3)
| |
| DAP For<n one-M - n 7 p v. g 2 to y
| |
| | |
| x
| |
| .I f
| |
| t DESIGli IllWIhH !?VAI AIATIOli CIIECKLIST llutitlEft It E V E I U Elt DATE SilElf!' 110 ItEV CllECKEll __
| |
| DATE APPitOVAI, DATE CIIITEllI A IlllllllEltSJJ1UQBJ2JQ3, GEllEllAL i3E5CitLPr10ll Protection of ARE Syston Pilll1AltY llEFEllEllCES fran Effects of IIEIE NG. AIIRIBUTES REVIEWED REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT / COMMENIS (DOCUMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICAi10N UNSAi NC/NA
| |
| : d. Mas the resulting enviroracntal ef fects of high energy line tweaks been correctly modeled and evaluat6d for:
| |
| (4)
| |
| : 1. Pressure? FSAR Review compartment The egaipment verification (4, 103, 108) NELB CALCS pressurization catcs to checklist verifies that safe confirm the flow modet shutdown egaipment is assumptions. Verify that these gaalified for NElB conditions.
| |
| results are correctly NDA 81.0 reflected in the FSAR, the agalpment qualification
| |
| , program, and the compartment
| |
| , design calculations.
| |
| ii. Temperature? FSAR Revicw NEtt temperature cales The egaipment gaatification (4*103,108) and verify that these results checklist verifies that NELB CALCS are correctly reflected in the safeshutdown equipment is FSAR,the equipment qualified for NELO conditions.
| |
| gaat ification program, and HDA 81.0 the building NVAC response, FSAR Review NELB humidity cales in The review of flooding iii* Humidity NELB CALCS compartsnmt and verify that resulting from pipe cracks and (4* 103* 108) these results are correctly breaks is preformed in the reflected in the FSAR and in mechanical flooding checklist.
| |
| the ec,uipment gaatification NDA 81.0 progsan.
| |
| iv. Radiation? FSAR Review NELS radiation cates NDA 81.0 (4, 103, 108) NELB CALCS (iAare applicable) and verify that these results correctly reflected in the FSAR and in the equipment qualification program.
| |
| f f fOrP' Nf"N~0$ fCU ,
| |
| | |
| l y -
| |
| I s
| |
| DESIGli IIRVIEW EVAI.IIATIOli CllECKLIST !!Ull13ER ltEVElllElt 1) ATE StilmT 110 ItEV CllECKElt 11 ATE API'ROVAI,___ DATE CR ITElt I A IlllllllEllS.4,_116, 1.08,_52. 10.~1 GEllEllAL DMScillPTIOll Protection _of ARJ Sygtem PillllAltY REFEREllCES frcun Effect;s of IlEIR No. AIIRIBUIES REVIEWt'D REFERENCE DESCRIPilOll SAT / COMMENTS (DOCUMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAll0N LNISAT NC/NA 10 Will a rupture in the DWG 2323 MI-0206 Verify that the proposed MDA non-safety glass portion of PIPING DWGS rtpture will not result in a the main or by-pass feedwater 77.0( .1, .3, .4 );78.0( .1, .3, .4 );
| |
| line upstreas of the loss of att AFW flow to two 83.0(.1,.3),
| |
| steam generators.(NDA 81.0) non-return valve result in the toss of all AfW flow to all toops as a consequence of the break?
| |
| (4, 52, 108, 140)
| |
| DAP form DA f ~ M' # N
| |
| , Rn l, 7 /0/76
| |
| | |
| e - e-'
| |
| k useen asusse mesmosas .
| |
| SummL85 Esses asweemer tese esos an. See.
| |
| i shester Gene W Sees griestle shetsreEAO~OA*N~OON Nf Y'I OREEfE0 0EEEF0F SOES Ib YAd- YEN pygen,y 7_ PEM6fM4AJ M C N O'e )
| |
| ) i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION MC/NA CCMMENTS
| |
| }
| |
| 1.0 Quality standard ard records shall be in 1. Review apptigable desip documents l accordance with the reqJirements of App A (DC and references used in them to ensure
| |
| ] 1 to CfR Part 50. The component safety pr9er implementation of A@. A (DC 1.
| |
| }
| |
| classifications are also shom on the flow diagrass presented with their respective 2. Ensure that classifications are sections. sham on flow diagrams per GDC 1.
| |
| l 2.0 Desi e bases for protection against natural 1. Review applicable design documents p enomena shall be inaccordance with the A @ and references used in them to ensure A (DC 2. proper implementation of A@. A (DC 2.
| |
| I
| |
| , 4.0 Envirormental anr1 missite desis bases shall 1. Review applicable design documents j meet the regairements of A@. A CDC 4. and references used in them to ensure proper implementaion of App. A GDC 4.
| |
| I j 5.0 Sharing of structures, systems, and .1. Review applicable design doctments components shall meet the reqJirments of A m. and references used in them to ensure I A (DC 5. proper implementation of A@. A (DC 5.
| |
| l
| |
| ! 6.0 Control room design shall meet the Appendix A,GDC19 covered in more detait
| |
| ! reqJirements of App. A GDC 19. herein.
| |
| i l
| |
| I CfM028R0 1
| |
| 1 DAP FORM DAP-M-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| /
| |
| | |
| m . .
| |
| Checklist N er DAP-CLC-M- I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoCtmENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COG 4ENTS 7.0 The CPSES design meets the regJirements of 1. RegJirements of R.G.1.52 are Revision 1 (7/76) of Regulatory Guide 1.52, covered in detail herein, as irdicated in FSAR Table 6.5.1, except for "in place testing" criteria, for which we 2. Review the specifications, system shall meet Part 5 of Revision 2 (3/73). drawings and flow diagrams to ensure ANSI /ASME M509-1960 and ANSI /ASME N510-1960 that the following ANSI regairements shall be used for field testing of have been implemented in the design; atmospheric cleanup (nits in place of the older versions of these codes referenced in Sufficient permanently-instatted hatide this Regulatory Guide. and 00P injection and samplire ports to permit accurate testing in accordance with ANSI N510. Sampling ports shall be located dowrstream of each NEPA bank and teatream of the second NEPA bank.
| |
| Likewise sampling ports shall be provided adjacent to adsorbers.
| |
| mere regJired for proper challenge agent mixire and/or sampling, sultiple intet or cuttet distritmJtion manifolds shall be provided to allow injection and samplire per ANSI M510.
| |
| Sufficient test canisters (see Aprendix A) or other means of obtaining samples of used adsorbent shalt be installed in the adsorber system to provide a represer.tative determination of the CfM028R0 2 DAP FORM DAP-N 028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| n m . .
| |
| ) (
| |
| %J R.J g Checklist Number DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOctMENT, PACE) CF VERIFICAil0N NC/NA C04MENTS response of the adsorbent. Test canisters shall be installed in a tocation d ere they will be exposed to the same air flow conditions as the adsorbent in the system, and shall be fitted with representative adsorbent fram the same toss of adsorbent as that of the system. A minimJa of six test canisters is rec % for each adsorber bank. Access shall be provided between banks of ra5=iants in the housing to permit gfiysical inspection of both sides of each bank:
| |
| co monents shall not be instatted back to-back on the same or opposite sides of the same mountire frame or on adjacent momting frames which are so close as not to permit adegante access space between banks.
| |
| 8.0 Assumptions for evaluating the habitability Review applicable design documents and of a nuclear power plant control roas during references to ensure proper a postulated hazareus chemical release shalt implementation of R.G. 1.78.
| |
| be in accordance with the regJirements of R.G. 1.78.
| |
| i 9.0 Protection of nuclear power plant Control Review applicable design documents and
| |
| ' ~
| |
| CFM028R0 3 DAP FORM DAP M-028, REV.'1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| ^ . .
| |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-M-REFERENG DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF WERIFICAil0N NC/NA CDeqENTS Roan operators against an accidental chlorine references to ensure implementation of release. Shatt be in accordance with the the correct revision of R.G. 1.95.
| |
| regJirements of R.G. 1.95 Rev. 1.
| |
| 10.0 Air Moving and Conditioning Association Review pressure drop calculations to (AMCA). Fans are rated and tested in ensure that they reflect usage of fan accordance with this standard. curves based on AMCA certification regJirements.
| |
| 12.0 The sy: tem is equipped with four (4) modular Confirm gJantity and percent loading air-conditioning units. Each is rated at 50 fram aplicable WAC fled system percent of the Control Room WAC and diagrassand specification.
| |
| fittration system capacity.
| |
| 13.0 Redsidant fans, filtration tsiits and Verify from electrical one tine air-conditioning units are powered from diagrams that redsident safety related separate Class 1E tnJses. WAC ogJipment are powered from separate Class 1E buses.
| |
| 14.0 Each pair of air-conditioning uilts is Confirm separation from the aplicable physically separated by a dividing fire welt. WAC system drawings.
| |
| 15.0 100% redundant egJipment is provided for the Confirm fran Fluid System Diagram that fottowing: the indicated redJndancy has been provided.
| |
| CFM028R0 4 DAP FORM DAP-M 028', REV." 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-M- I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATICM NC/NA COWENTS (1) Control room asketp air st4 ply fans; (2) Control room exhaust fans; (3) Control room complex kitchen exhaust and toilet exhaust fan; (4) Emergency pressurization air supply filtration mits and fans; (5) Emergency filtration mits and fans.
| |
| 16.0 Control Roas outside air intake daupers Confirm redadency of mentioned despers CPX-VADPGJ-14 and 15 are 100% redadant. fram flow diagram.
| |
| 17.0 System camponents and dactwork are seismic Confirm from flow diagram that stbject Category I and ANS Safety Class 3. (RG. WAC System en=panents and ductuork are 1.29, Rev 2) identified as Seismic Category I and ANS Safety Class 3.
| |
| 18.0 All NSR daspers are set to f ail-safe or are confirm from flow diagram (or logics if provided with emergency air bottles. not indicated on flow diagram) and provide saportive discussion as necessary.
| |
| I CFM028a0 5 DAP FORM DAP M-028,' PEV.'1, 08/29/86 t
| |
| | |
| Checklist ber DAP-CLC-M- I REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N 5AT/UWSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAE) 0F VERIFICATI(* WC/hA CoeENTS 19.0 Isolation despers are desispied to close Confirm closure time from ecpaipment within 10 seconds of chlorine detection. specification and from calculation (see criterion 190 herein).
| |
| 20.0 Chlorine detectors are capable of detecting verify the indicated capability from one spo chlorine in air ty volume. the chlorine detector specification.
| |
| 21.0 An ionization detector is located in each verify from flow diagram or system fresh air intake to detect smoke. & awings that each fresh air intake includes an ionization type amoke detector.
| |
| 23.0 Six percent outdoor air is ackled to the 1. Review the calculation for the Control Roan air-conditioning uiits at att minimum outside air regaired for odor times to provide for oxygen depletion, odor control, taakage and oxygen control, and leakage, replacement.
| |
| : 2. Verify same on flow diagram.
| |
| 24.0 The Control Roan is pressurized at an Review the calculation to confirm the overpressure of 0.125 in. wg. charing normal given C.R. over pressure.
| |
| and energency modes of operation.
| |
| CFM028R0 6 DAPFORMOAP-M-028IREV.1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| O O
| |
| ' ~
| |
| ChecklistNYmberDAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeENTS 25.0 During emergency recirculation, overpressure 1. Verify fan flow rate from flow is accomplished by introd;cing up to 800 cfm diagram of filtered air from the air-cleantp unit.
| |
| : 2. Verify overpresrurization flow rate from control room pressurization caicutation.
| |
| 26.0 l# der Control Room normat operation; one Verify the indicated components status maketp air stpply and one main exhaust fan mder the C.R. normat operating mode are operating, and their associated despers from flow diagram.
| |
| are open, the emergency filtration system is isolated, and its bypass dasper is open, and one kitchen and toilet exhaust fan also operates.
| |
| l 27.0 Control Room HVAC system emergency
| |
| * recirculation mode is as follows:
| |
| : a. Makeup air suspty fan and att exhaust fans stop.
| |
| : a. Verify from flow and logic diagrams
| |
| : b. Att exhaust danpers close. that stbject fans stop chiring the emergency recirculation mode.
| |
| : c. Emergericy filtration tsilts isolation and bypass dampers are positioned such that 16%
| |
| of the recirculated air flow is directed b. Verify closure of dampers from flow through each of the filters and booster fans, and logic disgram.
| |
| ~
| |
| CFM028R0 7 OAP FORM DAP-M-028, REV.'1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| C . .
| |
| \'
| |
| Checklist N er DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS and the triits start.
| |
| : c. Confirm in review of air flow rate
| |
| : d. Both amergency pressurization stq)ly fans and fan capacity calculation, start, except daring high chlorine ard smoke detection. ihe air is directed throteh the d. Confirm by reviet'ng logic diagrams emergency filtration mit. that the regJired operating conditions are met.
| |
| 28.0 Within eight (8) hours of the Control Room Confirm from Tech Spec that this HVAC system switching to the emergency regairement is incorporated in the recirculation, the operator stops one prodecures.
| |
| pressurization ard one filtration mit.
| |
| 29.0 The Control Room air conditioning units are Confirm from component spec that the CR direct expansion, refrigerant type suitable air-conditionirg mits are of the DX for refrigerant R 12. type, desispied for using an R-12 refrigerant.
| |
| 30.0 Each pair of Control Room HVAC Confirm from flow diagram that each air-conditioning mits condensers have an pair of CR air-conditioning condenser independent cooling unter source. has an independant cooltre water source.
| |
| 31.0 Failure modes for isolation valves and Review flow and logic diage ws, and dampers are set so that their failure does analyze isolation despers failure modes
| |
| ~
| |
| CFM028R0 8 DAP FORM DAP-M-028,' REV.'1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| O i
| |
| Checklisti._'xr
| |
| ( ODAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeqENTS not rerder the system inoperative. and conditions. Ensure that such failure will not result in loss of intended system faction.
| |
| 32.0 The Control Room HVAC system is desisped to confirm that all heat loads are remove heat generated by the e@ ipment, accomted for in reviewing Control Room computers, lighting, persomel, and so forth Heat Load calculation.
| |
| and to provide a safe operating condition for personnel.
| |
| 33.0 Control Room overpressure is maintained by 1. Confirm the capability of mo&Lating exhaust damper CPX-VADPMJ-05 or so&lating the s4 ject despers from CPX VADPMJ 06 & ring normal operation. epecification, and logic diagree.
| |
| : 2. Cmfirm fram flow diagrams that the system arrangement would provide the overpressurization capabilities een the s 4 ject despers are mo& lated as described.
| |
| 34.0 Control room overpressure is maintained by 1. Confirm the capability of mo&lating emergency pressurization mo& lating the s Wject despers from dasper CPX VADPOU-22 or CPX VADPOU 23 & ring specification, and logic diagrams.
| |
| anergency recirculation and ventilation modes. 2. Confirm from flow diagrams that the system arrangement would provide the CfM028R0 9 DAP FORM DAP-M 028,' REV.'1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist Number DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCMMENTS overpressurization capabilities then the stbject despers are modulated as described.
| |
| 35.0 Operation of the emergency ventitation mode Confirm from flow and logic diagrams is required to replenish the oxygen content that capabilities are provided for in the Control Room atmos #wre during the operisting the emergency wentillation emergency recirculation mode. campanents and drawire outside filtered air into the control roon & ring the emeripncy recirculation mode.
| |
| 36.0 The control Roan makeup fan is operated at 1. Confirm from flow and logic brief intervals & ring the emergency diagrams that 3800 cfm outside filtered ventilation mode, provided no chlorine is air could be dram into the control detected, to stpply filtered outside air room & ring the emergency ventilation (3800 cfm) to the Control Room Ccuplex. The mode.
| |
| sein, toilet, and kitchen exhaust fans are also operated simultaneously. 2. Confirm from logic diagram that the above capability is blocked if chlorine is detected in the outside air.
| |
| : 3. Confirm from flow and logic diagram, that the main, toilet ard kitchen exhaust fans are operated slaultaneously during the emergency ventitation mode.
| |
| CFM028R0 10 DAP FORM DAP-M-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| I Checklist Number DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCU4ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA COSIENTS 37.0 Saksequent to the automatic initiation of the confirm from logic diagram that emergency recirculation mode, the operator provisions have been made in the design can regain manual control over the system to enable the operator to regain manual fram the Control Room ventilation panels. control as described.
| |
| 38.0 Flow messurement instrumentation is provided Confirm from flow diagram (or fras domstream of the energency filtration mits system drawires if not shom on flow to balance flow through the carb m filters diagram) that subject instrumentation darire surveitlance testing. has been provided as described.
| |
| 39.0 Should of fsite power f ait, the Control Room Confirm the capapbility of automatic air-coMitioning system is designed to switchover, as indicated, from Lcgic automaticatty switch to the emergency diagrams.
| |
| recirculation mode of operation.
| |
| 40.0 All exhaust fans for the Control Room NVAC Confirm from flow diagram that all CR systen are eqJipped with isolation dampers. exhaust fans are egJipped with isolation despers.
| |
| 43.0 Fire dangers automatically isolate the Verification done mder Fire Protection affected areas to prevent spreading of fire DAP effort.
| |
| and shut off the oxygen.
| |
| CFM028R0 11 DAP FORM DAP-N'025,' REV.' 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| p s
| |
| )
| |
| G v l Checklist Number DAP-CLC-M-l REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS 44.0 Outside air intake louver damage will not Confirm from system drawings that impair the ftnctioning of the air intake for damaged parts will neither be carried the Control Room HVAC system. through nor will restrict air flow.
| |
| 45.0 continuous surveillance of radiation dose Confirm the provision of red edent area levels in the Control Room is provided by radiation annitors for contiruous redsident aree radiation monitars. surveillance of radiation dose levels in the CR from flow diagram.
| |
| 47.0 Seismic design classification shall be in Confirm from flow diagrrun that all ,
| |
| a:cordance with the regJirements of R.G.1.29 syster components are classified as seismic Cateocry I.
| |
| 48.0 Compon=stt Cooling Water System stpplies Confirm from Comparent Cooling Water cooling water for the Control Room HVAC flow diagram and capacity calculations.
| |
| air-conditioning toits condensers.
| |
| 49.0 The plant ventitation systems are designed to Review the calculation to confirm that provide an envirornentally suitable and the environmental desisp in the control radiologically safe envirorssent for roan trder normat and post accident continuous persomet occtpancy in the Control conditions provides the given Room under normal and postaccident conditions conditions, and to ensure that maximum radiological exposures to the general ptblic following a DBA are within guideline limits.
| |
| CFM028R0 12 DAP FORM DAP-N'-028, REV'
| |
| . 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| I Checklist umber DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS 50.0 The Control Room air conditioning and Confirm fran flow and logic diagrams ventitation systen is a recirculation systemi that the Control Roon NVAC system daring post LOCA operation. operates in the recirculation mode post LOCA.
| |
| 51.0 The Control Room air-conditioning and 1. Level of airborne contamination is ventilation system is designed to control the covered ty others (Non NVAC).
| |
| level of airborne contamination in the Control Room atmosphere and to control the 2. Review the calculation to ensure temperature and humidity for persomet safety that the design temperature and and comfort. humidity in the control room meet the regJirements for personnet safety.
| |
| 52.0 The infiltration rate een the Control Room Review the calculation to confirm the is isolated will be less than half the given enfiltration and infiltration exfiltration rate e en pressurized to 0.125 rates e en the control room is inch water gauge. pressurized to 0.125 in. w.g.
| |
| 53.0 Doors in the Control Room pressurizaticri zone Confirm opening direction of doors from are designed to open against positive Architectual drawires and door pressure to ensure closure at all times. schedales.
| |
| 54.0 The Control Room air-conditioning systen Confirm from systan drawings that; conpanents are laid out to allow access by CFM028R0 13 DAP FORM DAP M'028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| Pn. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS Control Room persomet for manual operation 1. All operable dampers are accessible of the egaipment, particularly dampers daring to the control room personnel.
| |
| marmal and emergency conditions.
| |
| : 2. All fire dagwrs are accessible for reseting.
| |
| Also confirm from specifications that operable dampers are ecpaipped with manual operators.
| |
| 55.0 Average daily maximum surface temperature Verify inclusion of data in control (ambient at the site) % degrees F. room air caiditioner load calc.
| |
| 56.0 Extrane anximum surface temperature (ambient Verify inclusion of data in control at the site) 108 degrees F. room air conditioning load calc.
| |
| 57.0 Average daily ministas surface temperature Does not affect WVAC system desipi.
| |
| (ambient at the site) 35 degrees F.
| |
| 58.0 Extreme miniaun surf ace temperature (ambient Verify inclusion of data in control at the site) room heating requirement calculation.
| |
| 4 degrees F.
| |
| 59.0 Control Room air-conditioning system is Confirm system classification from flow CFM028R0 14 DAP FORM DAP-M 028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| s . .
| |
| Checklist Number DAP-CLC-M-REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (D00DIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA COtMENTS seismic Category I. Classified in accordance diagram, and verify that e pipment were with the re girements of GDC2, ASetE S&PV specified accordingly.
| |
| Code, Section VIII, Division 1 and 2, July 1974.
| |
| 60.0 Fluid syste components important to safety Confirm system classification from flow are classified in accordance with the ANSI diagram.
| |
| 4 N18.2 1973, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Desi p of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants classification.
| |
| 62.0 ASME Code class 2 and 3 components and Verify that applicable components have component s e ts are designed and been specified accordingly.
| |
| fabricated in accordance with ASIE SAPV Code, Section III re girements.
| |
| 63.0 Sufficient red e dency in e pipment and power Review system arrangement and verify s e ttes is provided to enable the system to that; sustain a single active component failure 1. A single failure of an active without loss of safety fmetion. component will not prevent the system i from performing its function mder any mode.
| |
| : 2. Re&ndancy is provided accordingly.
| |
| : 3. System is powered from a class-1E CFM02aRO 15 DAPFORMDAP-N-025,REV'.'1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| /~% . .
| |
| ChecklistRerDAP-CLC-M- h I l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS source 1
| |
| 64.0 Instrtmentation and controls which verify the required instrumentation incorporate audible md visual stanns enable capability from the ! & C design.
| |
| the operator to continuously monitor system performance and alert him in the event of system malfunction.
| |
| 65.0 The envirorsnental conditions limitations for Verify that :
| |
| the Control Roan are as follows:
| |
| : 1. Data incorporated correctly in Heat Temperature, degrees F 75 + or -5 DS Load calculations.
| |
| Pressure, in. we. + 0.125 Relative humidity % 35 to 50 2. Data incorporated in egJipment Radiation environment FSAR Aspendix 3A, specifications.
| |
| Table 5 1 66.0 The lower limit operating atmospheric Verify that data has been considered in pressure is -1.5 psig. control room pressurization calculation.
| |
| 67.0 The control Room pressurized envelcpe 1. Verify from architectural and includes the Control Room and all areas structural drawings.
| |
| adjacent to the Control Roan on Elev. 831' 6" of electrical and control txailding containing 2. Review the calculation to ensure plant information and equipment that may be that all areas of the pressure bomdry CFH028R0 16 DAP FORM DAP M'-028, REV."1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| g o . .
| |
| Checklist ber DAP-CLC-M- V I REFERENCE DESCRIPi!ON SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS needed dsing an emergency including kitchen, are included.
| |
| sanitary facilities, and campater roans.
| |
| 69.0 Control Room design is based upon the safe By others, occupation of the Control Roan envelope daring normat operation and for a period of not less than 30 days after loss of-coolant accident (LOCA).
| |
| 72.0 Radiation monitors used to switch the Control 1. Verify from flow diagrams and Roan air-conditioning system into the systen drawings that stbject radiation emergercy recirculation mode are located in monitors are located were indicated.
| |
| the plant ventitation discharge vent stacks and in the Control Room outside-air intakes. 2. Verify from logic diagrams that the The outside-air intake monitors tare] tocated schject radiation monitors are capable at opposite sides of the Control Building. of switching the Control Room Air-conditioning system into the emergency recirculation mode.
| |
| i l 74.0 Chlorine gas monitors are located at the 1. Verify tocation of monitors from control room outside-air intakes to switch flow diagram.
| |
| the air-conditioning systan to the isolation mode in the event of a toxic gas release. In 2. Verify from logic diagram that this mode, the affected outside-air intake is monitors are designed to close the isolated and its associated Control Roan assocaited outside air intake, and emergency pressurization unit is automatically stops the associated CFM028R0 17 DAP FORM DAP-N'-028,'REV.' 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| g . .
| |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCtmENT, PAGF) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeqENTS automatically stopped. Control Roam amargency pressurization utit.
| |
| 75.0 During a postulated chlorine gas release, the Review damper posittorValignment in cont ml Room operates at ancient pressure. flow diagram and verify that no pressurization condition could be postulated & ring auch a condition.
| |
| 76.0 The Control Room heating, ventilating, and Verify from flow diagram, calculations, air conditioning (WAC) and filtration and architectural drawings that the CR equipment room is pressurized and may regsire WAC bowidery includes the filtration infregent access by a Control Room operator equipment room and that it is during an emergency condition. accesalble from the mein control room.
| |
| 78.0 The capability of closing the air & cts of Verify.from flow diagram and the control room with despers and thus architectural drawings that provisions isolating the control room should be have been made in the CR NVAC design to considered in the evaluation of control room isolate all intake and eahaust ducts habitability. with dampers.
| |
| 79.0 In the calculation of the rate of Review the calculation for control room infiltration with the control room isolated infiltration to ensure that the and not pressurized, use of the following assumptions given in the criteria were assumptions is suggested: (1) A pressure used.
| |
| differential of 1/8 inch water gauge across all teak paths. (2) The maximun design CFM028R0 18 DAP FORM DAP M 028, REY. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| n Checklist Ih ler DAP-CLC-M- o >-
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COgENTS pressure differential for fresh air W rs
| |
| . on the suction side of recirculation fans.
| |
| 1 80.0 Isolation systems and filtration e g ipment verify from flow diagran that should meet the single f ailure criterion. sufficient redLndancy has been provided in the design of the CR NVAC isolation and filtration components and that such components will meet the single failure i
| |
| criterin rewirements.
| |
| I 81.0 To account for the possible increase in air Confirm that stbject 10 cfm has been exchange due to ingress or egress, an included in calculation for control additional 10 cfm of tofiltered air should be room infiltration.
| |
| assumed for those control rooms without airlocks.
| |
| l l
| |
| 82.0 Ismediately after control roan isolation, the Verify from logic diagrams that the at anergency recirculating charcoal filter or desi p of emergency recirculation e@ivalent ewipment designed to remove or charcoal filters include provisions for otherwise limit the accumulation of chlorine their immediate start and operation within the control room should be started tp following control room isolation.
| |
| and operated.
| |
| 83.0 The gross leakage characteristic of the 1. Confirm that testing is specified control room should be determined ty to verify these parameters.
| |
| CFM028R0 19 DAP FORM DAP-M'-028, REY. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| ' h Checklist NN!!ber DAP-CLC-M- "'
| |
| )
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1DIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS pressurizing the control roaa to 1/8 irch water sage and determining the pressurizatim 2. Review the calculation to assure flow rate. (The use of a higher pressure that 1/8" wg pressure was used to differential is acceptable provided the flow' determine the pressurization flow rate.
| |
| rate is conservatively adjusted to correspond to 1/8-inch water gage.) For air exchange rates of less than 0.06/hr, periodic verification testing should be performed. An acceptable method for periodic testing would be the use of a permanently instetted calibrated pressurization fan. The system would have a knom pressure-versus-flow characteristic so that tt.6 Leak rate could be determined by measuring the control room pressure differential. Testing should be corducted at least every six months and af ter any major alteration that may affect the control room Leakage.
| |
| 84.0 The air sigply apparatus should meet the Verify from flow diagram, and single f ailure criterion and be desigiated specification for air st4 ply apparatus.
| |
| Seismic Category I.
| |
| 86.0 If a chlorine container having an inventory Verify the manual isolation capability-of 150L8S or less is stored more than 100 of the Control Room tnder the given meters from the control room or its fresh air corditions from logic diagrams, inlets, the capability for manual isolation CFMC28R0 20 DAP FORM DAP M'-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| l Checklist er DAP-CLC-M- v REFERENCE DESCRIPT!(m SAT /imSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS of the control roaa should be provided.
| |
| 87.0 The control room, incitding its associated verify classification of s 4 ject HVAC equipment and all equipment needed to equipment as Seismic Cats;;ory I from maintain the control room within safe flow diagram, habitability limits for personnel and safe environmental limits for vital egaipment are desi pated as Seismic Category I. They should be desi r ed to withstand the effects of the Safe Shutdoim Earthgaake and remain functicnal.
| |
| 89.0 The redsidant atmosphere clearup systens 1. Verify redLndency and separation should be @ysically separated so that damage from flow diagram, system drawings and to one system cbes not also cause damage to architectural layout drawings.
| |
| the secord system. The generation of missiles from high pressure equipment 2. Confirm that subject system rupture, rotating machinery failure, or components are protected fram any natural @enomena should be considered in the missiles generated as described.
| |
| design for separation and protection.
| |
| 91.0 If the atmos @ere cleanup system is stbject Evaluate pressure surges postulated and l to pressure surges resulting from the ensure that components are postulated accident the system should be specified to with stand such pressure.
| |
| protected fram such surges. Each component I should be protected with such devices as CFM028R0 21 DAP FORM DAP-M 028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| m O -
| |
| * s Checklist ber DAP-CLC-M-v i i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(N NC/NA CO#ENTS pressure relief valves so that the overett system will perform its intended fmetion
| |
| & ring and af ter the passage of the pressure surge.
| |
| 97.0 Outdoor air intake openings should be Review NVAC system drawings and verify equi m ed with touvers, gritts, screens, or that such provisions have been made in similar protective devices to minimize the the CR outdoor air intake openings.
| |
| effects of high winds, rain, snow, ice, trash, and other contaminants on the operation of the system. If the atmosphere surrounding the plant could contain aignificant environmental contsiminants, such as & sts and residues from smoke cleantp systems from adjacent coal burning power plants or in&stry, the desisp of the systen should consider these contaminants and prevent them from affecting the operation of any atmosphere cleantp system.
| |
| 100.0 Adsorption smits f metion efficiently at a 1. Review the calculation for heater relative humidity of 70%. If heaters are size and assure that the selected used on secondary systems, the heating heater will re&ce the humidity to 70%.
| |
| section should reduce the relative humidity of the incoming atmosphere from 100% to 70% 2. If no heater has been provided
| |
| & ring postulated DBA conditions. A review calculation to confirm that prototype heating element should be qtattfied relative humidity of incoming air shatt CFM028R0 22 DAP FORM DAP M 02',
| |
| 8 REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-H-REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS mder postulated DBA conditions, not exceed 70%.
| |
| Consideration should be given in systes desim to minimizing beater control malf metion. The heater should not be a potential adsorbent ignition source.
| |
| 101.0 Materials taed in the prefilters should Verify that compcnents have been withstand the radiation levels and specified accordingly.
| |
| envirorunental conditions prevalent charing the postulated DBA. Prefilters should meet UL Class 1 regJirements and be listed in the current UL Building Materials List. The prefilters should have not ".ess than a 40%
| |
| atmospheric chist spot ef ficiency rating (Section 9 of the ASHRAE Standard 52, 'wethod of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter".)
| |
| 106.0 The design of the adsorber section should Review flow diagram and specification consider possible iodine desorption and to determine that an acceptable method adsorbent autoignition that may result from has been used and to ensure that it radioactivity irdaced heat in the adsorbent satisfies the single failure criterion and concomitant temperature rise. Acceptable regJirments.
| |
| designs incitde a low-flow air bleed system, cooling coils, water sprays for the adsorber section, or other cooling mechanisms. Any
| |
| ~
| |
| CFM028R0 23 DAP FORM DAP M'028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| p f} - -
| |
| U Checklist er DAP-CLC-M-
| |
| \
| |
| / I t
| |
| l l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATIM NC/NA CmMENTS cooling mechanism should satisfy the single failure criterion. A low-flow air bleed systaa should satisfy the single failure criterion for providing low-humidity (less than 70% relative humidity) ccoling air flow.
| |
| 109.0 Ductwork should be designed in accordance Review spec to confirm that ductuork is with the reccmendations of Section 2.8 of specified to aset the ree W tions ORNL NSIC-65. of section 2.8 of ORNL-NSIC 65.
| |
| 128.0 Upon actuation of the Control Room Verify closure of despers and switching air-conditioning system to isolation mac% of to recirculation mode as described from operation (as outlined in FSAR Section 9.4), flow and logic diagrams, the exhaust daspars and the contasainated outside air intake despers close; the air conditioning system switches to complete recirculation.
| |
| 129.0 The Control Roaa air-conditioning and Verify from NVAC dystem drawings and filtration toits, fans, daspers, chict work, architectural drawings that stbject and associated egJipment essential to the components are housed in a operation of the control room HVAC and missite protected structure.
| |
| Filtration System are located within a missite protected structure.
| |
| CFM028R0 24 DAPFORMDAPM'-028,REVT1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| l Checklist NLeber DAP-CLC-M-l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA COMENTS j
| |
| 130.0 The control room is maintained at an 1. Verify from flow diagram that overpressure of 0.125-in. water gauge (wg). system arrangement has provisions for
| |
| [Except dJring chlorine detection isolation.] pressurization as described.
| |
| : 2. Review the calculation to confirm that the control room MVAC system is desi ped to maintain the given pressure.
| |
| 132.0 The maxisua flow rate of the pressurization Verify :anximum flow rate indicated from unit for emergency operaticri is 800 cfa. flow diagram, specification, and fan pressure drop calculation.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| 133.0 Control room boundary leakage rates shalt be 1. Confirm compliance with FSAR Table in accordance with FSAR table 6.4-4. 6.4-4 .
| |
| : 2. Review the calculation to verify the control room bomdry tankage rates.
| |
| i 134.0 The Control Room Air-Conditioning System is Verify automatic switching of automatically switched to the emergency air-conditioning system as described recirculation mode upon failure of instrument from logic diagrams also ensure that air or offsite power or tpon receipt of a the CR NVAC design includes provisions control room high radiation signal, a plant for annust switchire of the vent stack high-radiation signal, a safety air-conditionirg system to the CFM028R0 25 DAP FORM DAP-M'028,' REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist er DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOttMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFa3 TION WC/NA COME NTS injection signal, a emergency recirculation mode.
| |
| high-level-of-chlorine-gas-escape signal, or a smoke detection signal. In addition, the system may be marually switched to the Control Ro m ventilation panels.
| |
| 135.0 The Control Room Air-Conditioning System is Verify automatic switching under the switched automatically when going from normal conditions given from logic diagrams.
| |
| operation to the emergency recirculation made of operations.
| |
| 136.0 The emergency recirculation mode is 1. Verify isolation capability ly considered the optisun emergency mode. reviewing system drawings and During this ande of operation, the Control architectural layout drawings.
| |
| Room envelope is isolated and pressurized to ensure a safe envirornent for the operators 2. Verify pressurization capability mder shutdom conditions. Switching to the from flow diagram and calculations.
| |
| emergency ventilation mode can only be done maruelty, and only from the emergency 3. Verify controls from logic and flow recirculation mode, diagrams.
| |
| The Control Roan Air Conditioning can also be automatically switched to the isolation mode fr a any of the other operating modes.
| |
| 137.0 Radiation monitors are provided in the 1. Verify nLaber and location of CFM028R0 26 DAP FORM DAP M-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| 3 .
| |
| Checklist PGiber DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CfMMENTS Control Roas outside air intakes (a total of monitors from system drawirgs, two per intake) of the Control Room erwetope to outamatically switch to the isolation mode 2. Verify isolation and auto-centrol of operation. capability from flow and logic diagrams.
| |
| 138.0 The air exchange rate for the Control Roca 1. Review the calculation for control HVAC envelope, based on infiltration of 400 room air exchange rate.
| |
| cfm and a net volume of 424,802 cubic feet, is less than 0.06 per hour dich complies 2. Confirm net volume given from with the intent of Regulatory Guide 1.95. calculations.
| |
| 141.0 Control Room pressure is measured by the Verify provision of penamnently pennanently instatled differential pressure installed differential pressure transmitters. transmitters from system drawings or flow diagram.
| |
| 142.0 The Control Roan HVAC and filtration systems Verify from Heat Load and air mechanical egaipment rooms are maintained conditioning / heating calculations.
| |
| between 40 degrees F and 104 degrees F dry bulb.
| |
| 143.0 The emergency filtration units are provided 1. Verify location of dampers from with isolation daspers. flow diagram.
| |
| : 2. Verify that desper is gasketed from I
| |
| CFM028R0 27 DAPFORMDAP-N-028,REV.1, 08/29/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| I ImV) Checklist ber DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS specification.
| |
| 145.0 Chlorine is the only toxic gas stored at or Review the calculation for hazardous in the vicinity of the site. chemicals to make sure that no other chemicals have been considered.
| |
| 146.0 Electric reheat coils are provided for the Verify from flow diagram that electric computer rooms, the production stpervisors heaters are provided as described.
| |
| of fice, and the main console areas and are powered by the non safety related electrical bus.
| |
| If,7.0 The Control roan atmos @ere clearup mits Review the specification to ensure that conform to the criteria established in iodine adsorber regJirements conform Regulatory Guide 1.52 REV 1, July 1976. with NRC R.G. 1.52 Rev. I 148.0 If smoke is detected in either one of the Verify closure of Wrs span Control Room fresh air intakes, the detection of smoke,as described, from respective intet and outlet Control Room air flow and logic diagram.
| |
| cbet dmpers may be closed and air recirculated in the Control Room.
| |
| l
| |
| ! 150.0 Charcoal adsorbers are provided with fire 1. Use of a water deluge system is l protection water deluge systems idiich operate addressed in this h=mt mder CFM028R0 28 DAPFORM0,4?-N'025,REV'.1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| A -
| |
| * i <
| |
| I ChecklistAerDAP-CLC-M- V REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCuqENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CQeENTS automatically tpon receipt of a criterion no. 162.
| |
| high-temperature signal from an adsorber bed.
| |
| Actuation of the system also activates an 2. Verify from flow and logic diagram alarm in the control Room. that the water dettee systems operate automatically tpon receipt of a high-temperature signal fram an adsorber bed.
| |
| 151.0 Control roan instrumentation ambient Verify from calculations that control temperature does not reach 120 degrees F room instrumentation ambient
| |
| & ring the short periods of system temperature does not reach 120 F taider malfmetion prior to the actuation of the the conditions postulated.
| |
| stansy mits.
| |
| 153.0 Ductwork and filter are tested in accordance verify by reviewing spec. that chactwork with ANSI M510, 1975 and inistry standards. and filters have been specified accordingly.
| |
| 154.0 Outdoor Desi m conditions are: 102 degnes F Review applicable calculations to DB/80 degrees F WB Summer Desip temperature, ensure that given data has been 110 degrees F DB/80 degrees F WB, extrane isplemented.
| |
| sunner temperature; 20 degrees F, winter design temperature, O degrees F extreme winter temperature; 66 degrees F DB, amuel average temperature; 20 degrees F DB, daily average tesperature range; 32 degrees North latitude; 810' elevation; 15 a@ average wind CFM028R0 29 DAP FORM DAP-M-028, REV.1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| - ~
| |
| O ChecklistRerDAP-CLC-M-I r3 C}
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCutENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION WC/NA COeENTS velocity.
| |
| 155.0 Prefitters design parameters at rated air 1. Review applicable celcs to verify velocity are: initial (clean) resistance, that rated pressure drops have been 0.16 in wg; operating (dirty) average implemented.
| |
| resistance, 0.45 in wg; efficiency in accordance with Air Filter Institute method, 2. Review specs to ensure that given 82%; efficiency in accordance with National holding capacities, pressure drops and Bureau of Standards method, 82%; &at holding efficiencies have been specified.
| |
| capacity, 175 grans/ft sgaare.
| |
| 156.0 HEPA Filters Design Parameters at 1000 cfm 1. Review applicable cales to verify air flow capacity are: air flow resistance that rated press, drops have been clean,1.0 in we.; air flow resistance dirty, implemented.
| |
| 2.0 in wg; DOP test, 0.05% penetration from 100 to 20% capacity, increase in penetration 2. Review specs to ensure that given at 20% capacity shall not exceed 0.01%. data has been specified accordingly.
| |
| 157.0 Iodine adsorber design parameters are: 1. Review applicable cales to verify materlat is impregnated cocorut charcoal that rated press. drops have been (8x16 mesh grarules); air clean-Lp filter implemented.
| |
| efficiencies are in accordance with Branch Technical Position ETS811-2 and ESF air 2. Review specs to enuare that given clean-tp filter efficiencies are in data has been specified accordingly.
| |
| accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.52 Rev. 1; CFM028R0 30 DAP FORM DAP-i 028, REV.' 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| g Checklist er DAP-CLC-M- C' REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COtMENTS mininun contact time is 0.25 sec.; minim a weight of carbon, 250 lbs per 1000 cfm of air; leakage acceptance test require R 11 (or R 112 as an alternate); penetration, 0.05%;
| |
| and bed depth, 4 in. thick.
| |
| 160.0 The ESF Control Room emergency pressurization 1. Verify inclusion of desister and uiits each contain a danister and electric electric heater from flow diagram.
| |
| heater section to ensure that the relative hunidity of the incoming air is maintained 2. Review applicable calculation to below 70%. verify that relative humidity of incomirg air shall not exceed 70%.
| |
| 162.0 A deluge system is provided to extinguish a Review spw to ensure that ;' Auge fire caused by the presence of activated system has been specified for the charcoal in the cleante mit adsorber stbject eteamp uilts.
| |
| section.
| |
| 163.0 All atmosphere cleantp units housings have Confirm from flow diagrams that each multiple drains idiich are comected to the cleante mit drain connects to the Equipment and Floor Drainage System (see equipment and floor drainage system.
| |
| Figure 6.5-1).
| |
| l 166.0 Adequate radiation protection daring access 8y others.
| |
| ! and occtpancy of the Control Room shall be CFM028R0 31 DAP FORM DAP M-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| O p - -
| |
| )~ Checklist L iber DAP-CLC-% ,, _ U '
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS provided in accordance with (DC 19, 60, and i 61 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.
| |
| 167.0 Each emergency filtration mit is designed to Verify given capacity and ratio fram handte 16 percent of the re@ ired air flow applicable calculation.
| |
| supplied within the Control Roan envelope.
| |
| This percentage is based on attowing the Control Room volume to be fittered approximately once every hour.
| |
| 168.0 HEPA filters and iodine adsorbers used in the Review specifications to ensure that control Roam atmos @ ere cleanup fitter trains sasject components are specified in comply with th*e construction and efficiency accordance with the re @irements of re@ irements of MRC Re ptatory Guide 1.52, R.G. 1.52 Rev. 1 REV. 1.
| |
| 169.0 Ductwork is of the zero-teakage type, 1. Review spec to ensure that & cts designated seismic Category I, and protected are specified to be zero leakage type, fram pipe d ip damage as described in FSAR desi pated seismic category I.
| |
| Section 3.6.
| |
| : 2. Review system drawings to ensure that ducts are protedted form pipe whip (if any).
| |
| 171.0 A pressure differential switch is located Verify free flow and logic diagrams CFM028R0 32 DAP FORM DAP M'028, REV'. 1, 08/29/86 4
| |
| | |
| Checklist m'ber DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClaqENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CapetENTS i
| |
| across each fan with a Control Room alarm for that a pressure differential switch is low fan differential pressure. provided for each fan to ftmetion as i described.
| |
| 173.0 Each ESF filter hotsing is constructed in Review spec. to ensure that E$i filter accordance with the design recpairements of housings are specified to meet the ORNL-NSIC-65. regairements of ORNL-MSIC-65.
| |
| I 176.0 The total air volume (being recirculated) in Review applicable calculation for the control room ccuplex is 3.219 E 5 f t-3. verification of given total air volume.
| |
| i 177.0 Refrigerant piping and ttbes are designed in Review applicable specfication and accordance with ASIE B42 and 888. verify that the given standard is leptamented.
| |
| 178.0 Condenser design shall be in accordance with Review applicable specification and l
| |
| ASNE III, Code Class 3. verify laplementation of the given code.
| |
| I t
| |
| ! 185.0 Systems sich contain radioactivity shall be This amties to charcoal filter j designed with: (a) Capability to permit plenJus. Review spec to verify that
| |
| ! appropriate inspection and testire of the control room charcoal filter components important to safety. (b) plenums are specified to comply with Appropriate contairinent, confinement, and the requirements of R.G. 1.52 Rev. 1 CFM028R0 33 DAP FORM DAP-M'-028, REV''1,
| |
| . 03/29/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| Ch:cklist r DAP-CLC-M _ s i
| |
| j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C00ENTS filtering .ystems.
| |
| 186.0 Control of Releases of Radioactive materials Review flow diagrame and specifications to the Environme7t shall meet the to verify that the control room and regairements of App. A GDC 60. fuel storage facilities exhaust charcoal filters ard plenues are specified to comply with the l regairements of R.G.1.52 Rev.1 and 1.13 Rev. 1'respectively.
| |
| i 188.0 m en the makeup air flow rate regJired to verify that control room pressurization pressurize the control room is calculated, a calculations are based on a 1/4 inch positive pressw e differential of 1/4 inch water gampe prassure differential.
| |
| water gauge should be assumed in the control
| |
| ; room relative to the space surro d ire the I control room.
| |
| l 190.0 The following control room protective features should be included:
| |
| . a. Quick-response chlorine detectors located in the fresh' air inle's. Within 10 seconds after arrival of the i.hlorine, s. Verify inclusion of chlorine detection should initiate comiene closure of detectors in the fresh air inlets and isolation dampers to the contral room. their interface with the CR isolation dampers from flow and logic CFM028R0 34 DAP FORM DAP M 028, REv. 1, 08/29/86 1
| |
| | |
| Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-l I
| |
| REFERENCE DGCRIPTI(m SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS i
| |
| i
| |
| : b. A normat fresh air make @ rate of less diagrams.
| |
| than one air change per hour. The fresh air intet should be at least 15 meters above a. Verify the 10 seconds action from grade. calculations and specifications.
| |
| : c. Low-teskage construction with an equivalent air exchance rate of less than 0.06 per hr. den at t penetrations are exposed to a 1/8-inch water gauge pressure b. Verify fresh make y rate from differential. Construction details should be calculation.'
| |
| provitted u show that this limit is met.
| |
| I
| |
| : b. Verify location of fresh air intet
| |
| : d. Low leakage dampers or valves instatted from architectural drawines, on the upstream side of recirculation fans or l
| |
| other locations dere negative systeam pressure exists and dere inteakage from j chlorine contaminated outside air is j possible.
| |
| : c. Verify the air exchange rate from the calculations.
| |
| i
| |
| : c. Verify infiltration rate from test results.
| |
| : d. Verify location of despers as CFM028R0 35 DAP FOAM DAP-N-028, REV. 1, 08/29/86
| |
| | |
| \ Checklist ber DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO.CRITIRIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS described from flow diagram.
| |
| : d. Verify that low teakage type danpers have been specifled.
| |
| 191.0 Ventitation e@ipment for the control Room Verify isolation of CR from the and for the adjacent zones should be reviewed surrotmding atmosphere upon detection i
| |
| to ensure that ethanced air exchange between of a chlorine release frce flow the isolated control room and the outside diagrams and system drawings.
| |
| will not occur (e.g., if there is a chlorine release, exhaust fans should be stopped and/or isolated from the Control Room ventilation zone by Low-leakage despers or valves).
| |
| l 1
| |
| ! 204.0 control room e w ipment heat toads shall be in Review calculation to ensure that at t accordance with Westinghouse P!P Vol. 12-1. toads given in the stbject P!P are incitsied.
| |
| 1 1
| |
| 4 210.0 A remote chlorine detector trip signal should Verify from calculation, time re w ired 1 accomplish automatic isolation of the control for chlorine to travet from detector to
| |
| { room before chlorine' arrives at the isolation isolation danper, and review spec, to
| |
| ; despers. The detector trip signal should ensure that closure time specified for also set off an alarm and provide a readout the isolation dampers is less than the in the control room. An alternative to the j above mentioned chlorine travel time.
| |
| installation of remote detectors would be to CFM028R0 36 DAP FonM DAP M-028, REV. 1, 08/29/M
| |
| | |
| . r Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-l l
| |
| 1 l
| |
| i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UN3AT/
| |
| i NO. CRITERIA (DocuqENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CapeENTS l provide an isolation systen using local i detectors but having an isolation time of effectively zero.
| |
| 1 400.0 Att flow rates and design data given on the Check data indicated'on the flow flow diagram shall be sipported by a valid diagrams against calculations to source. compare its validity.
| |
| I i
| |
| i 1
| |
| 4 e
| |
| I l
| |
| l t
| |
| i 1
| |
| 1 -
| |
| l CFM028R0 37 DAP FORM DAP-M-028, REY. 1, 08/29/86 4
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| i }
| |
| . assess assoas suasmas ., ,
| |
| MM b M sew.
| |
| m W asse s ,s w s. 6 assesse emnertsesen -- -
| |
| p =_e 4. -1 -- it. Am M inary __ .__
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| CD. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAi!ON NC/NA CCMMENTS 1.0 Quality standard and records shall be in Review the specifications to ensure accordance with the regairements of App. A that the stbj'ect components were (DC 1 to CFR Part 50. The component safety specified in accordance with Alp. A CDC l classifications are also sho m on the flow 1.
| |
| diagrans presented with their respective sections.
| |
| 1 7.0 The CPSES desipi meets the requirements of Review the specification to ansure the Revisia) 1 (7/76) of Regulatory Guide 1.52, air filtration and adsorption mits as indicated in FSAR Table 6.5.1, except for were specified and designed to the "in place testing" criteria, for which it attributes listed.
| |
| shal1 meet Part 5 of R.G. 1.52 Revision 2 I (3/78). ANSI /ASME M509 1980 and ANSI /ASE N510-1980 shalt be used for field testing of atmospheric cleanup mits in place of the 8 older versions of these codes referenced in this Regulatory Guide. -
| |
| 10.0 Air Moving and Conditioning Association Review the epecification to ensure the (AMCA). Fans are rated and tested in fan was specified and desigled to AMCA accordance with this standard. standards. -
| |
| 13.0 Redsidant fans, filtration units and . Review electrical elementary drawings air-conditioning units are powered from, for component power source. I separate Class 1E buses.
| |
| l C-io i 0,P ,0R 0,P. .., Rm. 2, Oene,e6 l
| |
| | |
| , Ch cklist N DAP-CLC-M-I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCleqENTS 1
| |
| 4 17.0 System components and dactuork are seismic Review the specification to ensure that j Category I and ANS Safety Class 3. (RG. aelsmic desipi conditions were 1.29, Rev 2) incttsted.
| |
| 1 19.0 Isotation despers are designed to close Review the specification for damper within 10 seconds of chlorine detection, closure tier within 10 seconds of I
| |
| chlorine detection after accomting for signal processing time.
| |
| 29.0 The Control Room air-conditioning mits are Review the specification to assure the l direct expansion, refrigerant type suitable mits have DX colts and use R-12 for refrigerant R-12. refrigerant.
| |
| t 30.0 Each pair of Control Room MVAC Review the component cooling water nir-conditioning units condensers have en diagram and verify each pair of mits independent cooling water source. has an independent water source.
| |
| 31.0 Failure undes for isolation valves and Review the systen drawing to assure daspers are set so that their failure does that the design is such that the not render the system inoperative. failure of 9 damper or an isolation valve does not render both trains of the systen inoperative.
| |
| CHC110 2 DAP FORM DAP M 029, REV. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| 1 m . 2. .
| |
| g Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS 33.0 control roan overpressure is maintained by Review the flow diagram to determine mo&lating exhaust %r CPX-VADPMU-05 or that modulating the athject dampers CPX-VADPptJ 06 daring normal operation. will maintain overpressure in the Control room within design limits.
| |
| 34.0 Control roan ove pressure is maintained ty Review the flow diagram to determine mo&latirg emergency pressurization damper that modalating the subject dampers CPX VADPOU-22 or CPX VADPOU-23 during will maintain overpressure in the emergency recirculation and ventilation control room within modes. design limits.
| |
| 41.0 All control valves and dampers are egalpped Review the specification to assure that with manuel operators. all control valves and dampers are specified with manuel operators.
| |
| 44.0 (htside air intake Louver damage will not Review the flow diagram to ensure that impelr the f metioning of the air intake for outside air intake louver dammet could the Control Room HVAC system. not impair the air flow to the control room air handlers, i 46.0 Isolation Ws CPX VADPp&OS, Review the specification to ensure that CPX-VADPpW O6, CPX-VADPOU-27 and damper leekage rates are given as CPX-VADPOV-28 shall not exceed the leak rates stated i's the criteria.
| |
| given in FSAR Table 6.4-4.
| |
| i CHKM10 3 l DAP FORM DAP M 029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTime SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| i NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeqENTS 4
| |
| 47.0 Seismic desip classification shall be in See Itan #17, this checklist.
| |
| accordance with the regJirements of R.G.
| |
| 1.29.
| |
| i 48.0 ra pnoent Cooling Water System stpplies Review the component ceoling water c wling water for the Control Room NVAC system and verify that the control room
| |
| } air-conditioning tr.its condensers. air conditionire units condensers are styptied from the system.
| |
| 49.0 The plant ventitation systems are desi p ed to Review the calculation to determine the provide an envirornentatty suitatde and environment desip in the control room I radiologically safe envirorument for m der nonent and poet accident continuous personst occtpancy in the control conditions. Peview the specification i Roan under norant and post accident to ensure the filtration mits vill i
| |
| conditions and to ensure that maximum provide a radiologically safe 1
| |
| i radiological exposures to the general ptblic environment, j following a D8A are within guideline limits.
| |
| i 62.0 ASME Code Class 2 and 3 components and Review the specification to ensure that component s e ts are designed and the control room MVAC components ard l fabricated in accordance with ASIE B&PV Code, component supports are Code Class 2 and j Section III regJiraments. 3.
| |
| 1 R).O Habitability systens ensure that the Review the specification for filtration
| |
| ~
| |
| CHKM10 4 DAP FORM DAP-M-029,' REV.'2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDgENTS personnet occtpying the control Rone will not mit design parameters, to ensure they be esposed to radiation doses exceeding 5 ran will meet the desi m requirements.
| |
| mote body gemas dose, 30 ren thyroid d>se, and 90 rea beta skin dose.
| |
| 71.0 Airborne radioiodine is limited to levels Review the specification to ensure that compatible with the dose criteria given in the radiolodine levels are limited to FSAR, saksaction 6.4.1.1, based on the or less than those given in the FSAR.
| |
| radiolodine releases given in FSAR Table 6.4-2, and a containment teak rate of 0.1%
| |
| for the first 24 hours following an accident and one-half this value for the balance of ths accident.
| |
| 73.0 Isolation despers close within ten seconds of Review the calculation for damper chlorine detector trip signet, and the closure time, review the drawing for Control Room HVAC system automatically system operation.
| |
| switches to the isolation mode of operation.
| |
| The systen also automatically switches to emergency recirculation if a radiation detector faits.
| |
| 75.0 During a postulated chlorine gas reteese, the Review the Tech Spec for NVAC Control Control Room operates at ambient pressure. room mode of operation dring a chlorine gas release.
| |
| CHKM10 5 DAP FORM DAP M-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-1 l REFEREN DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCL3eENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATim NC/NA CGeENTS i
| |
| 84.0 The control room air stypty fans should meet Review drawing for redmdant air stypty the single f ailure criterion and be equipannt. Verify that seismic design desipiated Seismic category I. conditions were inctided in the r specifications and that the air stypty
| |
| ! equipment are designated as seismic category I on the flow diagram.
| |
| 85.0 The isolation system components should be of Review the specification to verify that a gaelity that ensures high reliability and gaatity classification was included.
| |
| availability.
| |
| i l 88.0 Atmosphere cleante systems designed and Review the flow diagram and component f installed for the purpose of mitigating drawing to ensure att components listed j accident doses should be red e dent. The in the
| |
| ! systems should consist of the following criteria are provided and they are in I segaential components: (1) demisters, (2) the proper segaence.
| |
| ) prefitters (demisters may serve this function), (3) NEPA fitters before the I adsorbers, (4) iodine adsorbers (impregnated l
| |
| activated carbon or equivalent adsorbent such
| |
| ! as metet zeolites), (5) NEPA fitters af ter I
| |
| the adsorbers, (6) ducts and valves, (7)
| |
| ! fans, and (8) related instrumentation.
| |
| f desters are regJired when the humidity is to be controlled before filtration.
| |
| CHKM10 6 DAPFORMDAP-M-029)REV.2, 08/28/86 i
| |
| i l _ _ _
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l
| |
| 90.0 All compments of an Review the flow diagram to identify engineered-safety-feature atmosphere cleerup those compcnents uhosefailure could system should be designated as seismic result in the release of significant Category I if failure of a component would gaentities of fission prochscts. Review lead to the release of significant quantities the specification to enswe that of fission prodacts to the working or outdoor seismic and safety categories were environments. Included for those components.
| |
| 91.0 If the atmosphere cleeruJp system is sehject Review the specification to verify that to pressure surges resviting from the pressure protection devices are f postulated accident the system should be provided so that any postulated l protected from such surges. Each component preesure surges would not adwrsely l should be protected with such devices as affect overall system operation.
| |
| j pressure relief valves so that the overall
| |
| ; systen will perform its intended facetion
| |
| { daring and af ter the passage of the pressure surge.
| |
| 92.0 In the mechanical destys of the system, the Review the specification to enaw e that high radiation levels that may be associated the radiation levels the unit will be with buildJp of radioactive anterlats on the exposed to are contained in the systen ccuponents should be given particular specification.
| |
| consideration. System construction materials should effectively perfone their intended function under the postulated radiation levels. The effects of radiation should be i
| |
| CHKM10 7 DAP FORM DAP M 029,' REV. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-'
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAfl0N NC/NA COMENTS considered not only for the desisters, fans, NEPA filters, adsorbers, and heeters, tmst also for any electrical ineutetton, controls, joining engwuruis, dampers, gaskets, and other organic containing materlats d ich are necessary for operation daring a postulated DSA.
| |
| 93.0 The volumetric air flow rate of a single Review the drawing to determine the air cleante train should be timited to flow rates thru the fitter trains in approximately 30,000 cfm. If total system att andes of operation are within the air flow in excess of this rate is recpJired, specified limits.
| |
| sultiple trains should be used. For ease of maintenance, a fitter layout consisting of three 1000 cfm NEPA fitters high and ten wide is preferred.
| |
| 94.0 The atmosphere cleante system should be Review the drawing to assure that the instrumented to signat, alarm, and record instruments are provided and signet, pertinent pressure drops and flow rates at alarm, and record in the control room.
| |
| the control room.
| |
| 95.0 Atmosphere cleantp system housings and Review specification to ensure that chictwork should be designed to exhibit on teskage rates and testing recpJirements tests maxisun total teskage rate as defined are incitated as per ANSI N509 and N510.
| |
| in Section 4.12 of draft standard ANSI N509.
| |
| CHKM10 8 DAP FORM DAP-M-029, REV. 2, 06/28/86
| |
| | |
| i
| |
| ( ) ~ -
| |
| ( Checklist N DAP-CLC-M- y i
| |
| I I
| |
| i l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICM NC/NA CCDOENtS
| |
| ) Duct and housing teak tests should be
| |
| ! performed in accordance with the I
| |
| recommendations of Section 6 of ANSI i N510 1975.
| |
| l l 99.0 The desisters installed in Review the specification to ensure the engineered-safety-feature atmosphere clearup desisters meet the criteria.
| |
| systems .hould meet gJetification regJirements similar to those found in MSAR l 71 45, " Entrained Moisture Separators for Fine Water-Air-Steen Service: Their Performance, Development and Status.
| |
| Demisters should meet imderwriters' j Laboratories (UL) Class 1 regJirements.
| |
| 100.0 Adsorption mits fmetion efficiently at a Review the calculation for heeter size, relative humidity of 70%. If heaters are assure selected heater will redace the used on secondary systems, the heatire humidity to 705. Review the section should reduce the relative humidity specification to ensure that of the incoming atmos # sere from 1001 to 701 gastification regJirements were dJring postulated dea conditions. A included. Ensure that the adsorption prototype heating element should be gJatified mit heater section is not a potential mder postulated dea condities. ignition source.
| |
| Consideration should be given in system design to minimizing heater controt metfunction. The heater should not be a potectial adsorbent ignition source.
| |
| CHKM10 9 DAP FORM DAP-M-029, REV.'2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| i Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-i
| |
| )
| |
| i
| |
| { REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CapeENTS l
| |
| i 101.0 Meteriets used in the prefitters should Review the specification to assure the withstand the radiation levels and fitters meet the criteria, environmental corditions prevelent during the postuistod DOA. Prefitters should meet UL Class 1 re wirements and be listed in the
| |
| ' current UL Buildire Meterists List. The prefitters should have not less than a 40%
| |
| atmospheric dJat spot efficiency rating ,
| |
| i iSection 9 of the ASNRAE Standard 52, N ethod 4
| |
| of Testire Air Cleaning Devices used in Generet Ventitation for Removing Particulate
| |
| : Metter".)
| |
| i i 102.0 The NEPA filters should be steel cased and Revich the specification to assure the l desipied to military specifications NEPA 1.&ters meet the criteria.
| |
| ) MIL-F-5106m and MIL-F-510798. The NEPA j filters should satisfy the rewirements of I
| |
| UL-586. The NEPA filter separators should be .
| |
| l capable of withstanding iodine removat sprays I if the etmospiere cteerse system wiLL be
| |
| ?
| |
| exposed to such sprays following a DSA. NEPA filters should be tested irdividantly by the appropriate Fitter Test Facility listed in the current Energy Research and Development Administration (formerly USAEC) Health and Safety Buttetin for the Filter Unit CHEM 10 10 DAP FORM DAP-M 029, REY. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Ch:cklist N DAP-CLC-M-d*
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS Inspection and Testing Service. The Filter Test Facility should test each filter for penetration of dioctyt phthalate (DOP) in accordance with the recommendations of MIL F 51068D and MIL-STD-282.
| |
| 103.0 Filter and adsorber momting frames should be Review specification to assure filter constructed and desi red in accordance with mit construction is in accordance with the recommendations of Section 4.3 of the criteria. Review drawing to ensure ORE-NSIC-65. Filter and adsorber banks tf. t the filter and adsorber banks are should be arranged in accordance with the arraised in accordance with ORE recommendations of Section 4.4 of r.tendards.
| |
| ORE-NSIC-65.
| |
| 104.0 Systen filter housings, including floors and Review specification to assure the doors, should be constructed ard designed in construction requirements are met.
| |
| accordance with the ree W tions of Sections 4.5.2, 4.5.7, and 4.5.9 of ORNL-NSIC-65.
| |
| 105.0 Water drains should be designed in accordance Review specification to assure the with the recomumendations of Section 4.5.6 of drains are provided as per ORNL ORNL-MSIC-65. re w irements.
| |
| 106.0 The desi p of the adsorber section should Review the specification to assure that consider possible iodine desorption and the deise of the adsorber section CHKM10 11 DAPFORMDAP-M-029,RE[.2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| k Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /WSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCI. MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS adsorbent autoignition that say result from prevents iodine desorption or absorbent radioactivity-indaced heat in the adsorbent autolgnition. Verify that any active and concomitant temperature rise. Acceptable cooling mechanian satisfies sirgte designs include a low-flow air bleed system, failure incitafing possible toss of air cooling coils, water sprays for the adsorber flow.
| |
| . section, or other cooling mechanisms. Any
| |
| ; cooling mechanism should satisfy the
| |
| ! single-failure criterion. A low-flow air f bleed systen should satisfy the l single-falture criterion for providing tow humidity (less than 70% relative humidity) cooling air flow.
| |
| 107.0 the high efficierry air filtration system Review snecification to assure the fan, fan, its mounting, and the ductwork its momting and its comections should be desired and dactuork comections are in compliance constructed in accordance with the d
| |
| with the recpairements.
| |
| I recommendations of Section 2.7 of ORNL-NSIC-65.
| |
| 108.0 The fan or blower used on the cleanup systen Review the specification to ensure that should be capable of operating tsider the system operating mode environmental environmental corditions postulated, conditions are included.
| |
| including radiation.
| |
| 109.0 Ductuork should be designed in accordance Review the specification to ensure that CHKM10 12 DAPFORMDAP-M'-ON,REV.'2, 08/28/86 1
| |
| | |
| Checklist N r DAP-CLC-M-1 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS i
| |
| q with the recommendations of Section 2.8 of .the high efficiency air filtration l ORNL-NSIC-65. systems are deslyied in accordance with ORNL - NSIC -65.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| 110.0 Ducts and housings should be laid out with a Review specification for housirgI minima of ledges, pretrusions and crevices design. Review specification for that can cotlect dust and moisture and can straightening vene design and impede persomet or create a hazard in instattation.
| |
| performance of their work. Straightening vanes should be instatled to assure representative air flow measurement and uniform flow distribution through clearup components.
| |
| 111.0 A visual inspection of ;he ESF atmosphere Review the specification to ensure that cleante system and att associated cagonents testing provisions are initiated as per l should be made before each in-place airflow ANSI M510.
| |
| j distribution test, DOP test, or activated j carbon adsorber section teak test in
| |
| { accordance with the provisions of Section 5 of ANSI M510-1980.
| |
| 4 l
| |
| l j 112.0 The activated carbon aasorber section should Review the specification for leak test be teak tested with a gaseous halogensted regstrements.
| |
| hydrocarb n refrigerant in accordance with Section 12 of ANSI N510-1980 to ensure that CHC10 13 DAPFORMDAP-N029,REi.2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| Chscklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (C Mt30ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENtS bypass leakage through the adsorber section is less then 0.05%. Af ter the test is completed, air flow through the mit should be maintained mtil the residant refrigerant gas in the effluent is less than 0.01 ppe.
| |
| Adsorber leak testing should be conducted (1) initially, (?) at least once per 18 months thereafter, (3) following removat of an adsorber sample for laboratory testing if the integrity of the adsorber section is af fected, and (4) following painting, fire, or chemical release in any ventitation zone consumicating with the system.
| |
| 113.0 For ease of maintenance, the system desigm Review component drawires for proper should provide for a minimum of three linear clearances, to ensure the ra=ranent can feet from momtire frame to momting frame be maintained.
| |
| between harts of cogonents. If components are to be replaced, the dimension to be provided should be the maximun length of the ,
| |
| component plus a minisun of three feet.
| |
| 114.0 The system design should provide for Review the vendor drawing for test permanent test probes with externet probe tocations to ensure =4=rf =te l connections. Preferably, the test probes consideration of listed criteria.
| |
| should be manifolded at a single convenient
| |
| , location with die consideration given to CHKM10 14 DAP foist DAP-M 029, REV. 2,
| |
| { 08/28/86 l
| |
| | |
| m -
| |
| : 2. -
| |
| Ch:cklist N O DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICBI NC/NA COSENTS balancing of Line lengths and diameter to produce reliable test results for refrigerant gas, resistance, flow rate, and dioctyl gdithalate (DOP) testing.
| |
| 115.0 The air flow distribution to the NEPA filters Review the specification for in place and todine adsorbers should be tested in testing criteria.
| |
| place for miformity initially and af ter maintenance affecting the flow distribution.
| |
| The distribution should be within + or - 20%
| |
| of the average flow per mit. The testing shou;d be coruimted in accordance with the provisions of Section 9 of American Conference of Governmental Nygienists, "Inistrial Ventitation" 14th Edition,1976 and Section 8 of ANSI N510-1980.
| |
| 116.0 The in-place DOP test for NEPA fitters should Review the specification to ensure that conform to Section 10 of ANSI M510-1980. NEPA in-place DOP testing for NEPA filters filter sections should be tested in place (1) conforms to ANSI N510.
| |
| Initially, (2) at least once per 18 months thereafter and (3) foltowing pointing, fire, or chemical release in any ventitation zone consumicating with the system to confirm a penetration of tess than 0.05% at rated flow.
| |
| An engineered, safety-feature air filtration system satisfying this condition can be CHKM10 15 DAPFORMDAPM'029,REV$2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M _
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIF TI(31 SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS considered to warrant a 991 removat efficiency for particulates in accident dose evaluations. HEPA filters that fait to satisfy this condition should be replaced with filters qualified pursuant to regulatory position C.3.d of R.G. 1.52. If the NEPA filter bank is entirety or only partially replaced, an in place DOP test should be conducted.
| |
| If any welding repairs are necessary on, within, or adjacent to the ducts, housing, or momting frames, the filters and adsorbers should be removed from the housing during such repairs. The repairs should be coupleted prior to periodic testing, filter inspection, and in-place testing. The use of silicone sealants or any other temporary patching materlat on filters, housing, momting frames, or ducts should not be attowed.
| |
| 117.0 Structural and mechanical desipi of high Review specification to ensure that the efficiency air filtration system ducts for high pressure dact design is in positive pressure systems and accordance with SMACNA recpairements, negative-pressure systems that operate at static pressures of 2irW.G to -2in W.G. can be in accordance with the SMACNA high CHKM10 16 DAP FORM DAP-M'-029, REV.' 2, 08/28/86 4
| |
| r
| |
| | |
| e-Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/NA CopeENTS velocity duct desi p annual section 2, Jan.
| |
| 1969.
| |
| 118.0 Recoussended structural rewirements for Review specification to ensure that negative-presstre metal &ctuork are listed negative pressure &ctwork construction on Table 2.7 of ORNL-MSIC 65 (2.8.1). details are per CRNL recpairements.
| |
| 119.0 Welded joints are preferred to mechanicat Review specification to ensure that the joints in contaminated exhaust dtztwork. dactuork construction details use welded joints for potentially contameneted enhanJet &ctwork.
| |
| 120.0 nechanical chactwork joints must be provided Review specifications for &ctuork at strategic points for flexibility of construction details.
| |
| erection and dismanttirgi.
| |
| 121.0 Longittadinal seems in cksetwork should always Review specifications for dJetwork be welded. construction detaits.
| |
| 122.0 FLenge f aces on chJctwork joints should be Review specifications for &ctuork fress 1 1/2 to 2 in. wide, bolt holes should construction details.
| |
| be spaced a maxieue of 5 in. on center and should straddle the vertical axis of round CHKM10 17 DAP FORM DAP-M'029, REV. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| k Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTlal SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (00CtmENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATIO NC/NA COEENTS dacts.
| |
| 123.0 Drains are needed in each chamber of the Review construction drawing for drain amergency filter housing, each drain saast frass the filters, have its om water seat or trap.
| |
| 124.0 The use of botted-on removable penets for Review specification to assure the access to filter compartments should be proper type access doors are furnished.
| |
| avoided for even the sentlest filter housings because of the time toss eAen necessary to get into the housing (the time loss could be disastrous in the event of a fire) and because rusts tend to rust or freeze af ter a few months of service. Sliding doors should never be used for filter housfrgs because they camot be seated and because they could be jassmed with any distortion of the housing.
| |
| 125.0 Steel housings should, if possible, have Review the specification to ensure that steel floors welded contirumusty to the watts the housing construction was specified of the housing. In no case should the and desiytod to the attributes Listed.
| |
| housing be instatted on a wood floor or on a floor having toss than a 3-hr fire rating. A chamel or I beam welded to the floor is recommended to raise the filter momting frame off the floor. m en steel housings are CHKM10 18 DAP FORM DAP-M'-029, t v.' 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| I'2 .
| |
| Ch:cklist 4 r DAP-CLC-M- I i
| |
| l l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LmSAT/
| |
| ' No. CRITERIA (DOQMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 4
| |
| l d
| |
| j instalted on concrete floors, curbs should be j provided under the momting frame and watts.
| |
| j An seedded member must be provided in the I curb under tha mo mting frame and is desirable in the watt curts to enable the watt to be seet welded also. As a minimum rewirement for steet housings frutetted on concrete, the watIs shoutd have a cantirsna
| |
| ; perimeter angte welded on the outside, with the leg pointing away from the housfrg and botted to the concrete on 12-in. centers.
| |
| . % ter" the uiderside of the angte with a f silicone seelant before touerire the housing to the floor, and caulk the joint with
| |
| ! silicone seelant on the inside after the hotaing is bolted doest The concrete surfaces aust be etched with suriatic acid, and the steet surfaces must be rust free ard cleened with methyl ethyt ketone (EK) or acetone before cautking, or the joint will fait in :.ervice.
| |
| i Floors of fitter houstres should be pitched t
| |
| about 1/4 to 3/8 frVfoot to a drain. The section of flooring between two banks of i
| |
| components sust be considered as a separate i
| |
| fIcor and be s1oped and dralned
| |
| . independently. Tops of curbs sust be pitched f away from the steel to prevent corrosion from i CHKM10 DAP FORM DAP-M-029, REV. 2,
| |
| ) 19 08/28/86 l
| |
| i l
| |
| | |
| ) Chrcklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAil0N NC/NA CGOENTS standing water. Concrete floors must be smooth and free of cracks and spells, as j discussed mder masonry and concrete housings. Floors sust be free of obstructions ard raised items that would be 1 hazardous to worheen.
| |
| 126.0 Sturdy hinged doors with rigid, close fitting Review the specification to ensure that casings and positive latches should be proper door construction was specified provided. Door gaskets sust maintain and desiped to the attributes listed.
| |
| ahermetic seat tmder positive and negative pressure egant to at leest fan cutoff j pressures. Doors sust open outward, and, as they may have to be opened against suction, q means for " breaking the vacuun a or for mechanically assisted opening is desirable.
| |
| l Doors should have heavy-&ty hinges and positive latching devices operable from j insi& and outside. Means for locking, preferably a padlock, should be provided to prevent mouthorized entry. The stiffness of h ors is luportant, as flexible doors can be sprtog when opened against suction or attowed to slam shut under load. Provision of an air tock at the entry to the housing will eliminate problems of opening doors against suction and stamning and also, if large l enough, provide an intermediate work area for CHKM10 20 DAP FORM DAP-M'029, REY. 2, 08/28/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| Ch::cklist r DAP-CLC-M-i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| , NO. CRITERIA (DGCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS l
| |
| personnet & ring filter change. Marine J bulkhead doors of the type shown are j recomumended. The door should have a minlaum
| |
| ] of two dogs. Neoprene door gaskets, ASTM
| |
| ! D1056 grade SCE 45 to 30/40 & rometer, are
| |
| ! recossmended.
| |
| ! 127.0 A door should be provided to each compartment Review specification to assure doors 1 of the filter housing d ere unintenance or are provided for each filter inspecticn may take place. compartment.
| |
| I 1 131.0 All Control Room HVAC shutoff and isolation Review specification to ensure that l despers are of the zero teakage tyte. Control room MVAC shutoff and j isolation dampers are specified and j designed as zero teskage dampers.
| |
| )
| |
| 1 j 147.0 The Control room atmos $ere clearup units Review the specification to ensure that J conform to the criteria established in the clearne init housing construction l Respelatory Guide 1.52 REV 1, July 1976. conform to the provisions of Regulatory l Guide 1.52.
| |
| I l
| |
| l l 150.0 Charcoat adsorbers are provided with fire Review the drawings to ensure that the j protection water deluge systems idiich operate charcoal ackorber deluge system automatically Lyon receipt of a actuates automaticatty teon receipt of i
| |
| high temperature signal from an adsorber bed. a high temperature signet. Verify that l
| |
| l l CHKM10 21 DAP FOftM DAP-M'-029, REV.' 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| , Checklist r DAP-CLC-M-I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C00ENTS Actuation of the system also activates an actuation of the deluge system alarm in the Control Room. activates an alene in the Control room.
| |
| 152.0 Heating and cooling coils are tested in Review specifications to assure the I
| |
| accordance with the marmfacturer's standards. test rewirements are included.
| |
| l 153.0 Ductuork and filter are tested in accordance Review specifications to assure test l with ANSI N510, 1975 and industry standards. rew irements are included as per ANSI N510.
| |
| ) 155.0 Prefitters design parameters at rated air Review the specifications to ensure l
| |
| velocity are: initial (clean) resistance, that the filter desiyt parameters
| |
| ; 0.16 in ug; operating (dirty) average listed in the criteria are included.
| |
| l resistance, 0.45 in ug; efficiency in l accordance with Air Filter Institute method,
| |
| ! 82%; efficiency in accordance with National l Bureau of Standards method, 82%; cost holding capacity, 175 grams /ft sp are.
| |
| l 156.0 NEPA Filters Design Parameters at 1000 cfm Review specification to ensure that the air flow capacity are: air flow resistance filter design parameters listed in the clean, 1.0 in us.; air flow resistance dirty, criteria are included.
| |
| 2.0 in wg; DOP test, 0.05% penetration from 100 to 20% capacity, increase in penetration at 20% capacity shalL not exceed 0.01%.
| |
| CHKM10 22 DAP FORM DAP-M-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| ] Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-l l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS i
| |
| 157.0 Iodine adsorber design permueters are: Review the specification to ensure that i esteriet is impregnated coconut charcoat the filter design parameters listed in (8x16 mesh grarutes); air clean-@ fitter the criteria are included.
| |
| efficiencies are in accordance with Branch Technical Position ETS8112 and ESF air clean- @ filter efficiencies are in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.52 Rev. 1;
| |
| +
| |
| minimum contact time is 0.25 sec.; minimum weight of carbon, 250 lbs per 1000 cfm of i air; teakage acceptance test recpaire R-11 (or i R-112 as an alternate); penetration 0.05%;
| |
| and bed depth, 4 in. thick.
| |
| j j 158.0 The ventitation systems are desired to Review the specification to ensure that i ensure that the maximum airborne filtration tsilt general criteria is radioactivity levels for normal and incitsiad.
| |
| l anticipated operationet occurrences are within the limits of 10 CFR Part 20, Appendi.x j B, for areas within the plant structures and for restricted areas on the plant site where workers and visitors are permitted.
| |
| 1 I
| |
| 160.0 The ESF Control Roam emergency pressurization Review the specification to assure that mits each contain a demister and electric the recpJired components are provided.
| |
| CHKM10 23 DAP FORM DAP M-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 i
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| i NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/WA CGeqENTS i
| |
| heater section to ensure that the relative Verify that the htmidity design
| |
| ,' humidity of the incoming air is maintained parameter is less that 70% RM.
| |
| below 70%.
| |
| 111.0 Each of the Control Room amergency filtration Review the specification to assure that i and pressurization atmos @ere clearne mits the test connections for the required housing is furnished with test connections teak tests are provided.
| |
| 1 for DOP teak testing of the NEPA filters and refrigerant Leak testing of the charcoal bed iodine adsorber section.
| |
| I 162.0 A deluge system is provided to extinguish a Review the specification to ensure that fire caused by the presence of activated an adsorber section deluge system is charcoat in the cleanup mit adsorber included.
| |
| ; section.
| |
| I i
| |
| l 163.0 ALL atmosphere cleant, mits housings have Review the drawing to assure drains are a ltiple drains d ich are connected to the provided.
| |
| Equipment and Floor Drainage System (see Figure 6.5-1).
| |
| i 164.0 Each atmosphere clearne mit is provided with Review the drawing to assure the l a pressure indicator. High differential pressure indicators are provided and j pressure across the entire unit actuates an I
| |
| alare in the control room.
| |
| CHEM 10 24 DAPFastDAPM'025,REV.2, 08/22/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| Ch:cklist Nu DAP-CLC-M- d REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /LEISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS stare in the Contret Room.
| |
| 115.0 Each fitter section in atmosphere eteers, Review the droutrip to assure the imits has provisions to monitor its cun pressure irdicators are provided.
| |
| status with a local differential pressure indicator.
| |
| 168.0 NEPA filters and iodine adsorbers Laed in the Review the specification to assure the Control Room atmosphere cleerup fitter trains filters meet the construction and compty with the construction and efficiency offieiency respiraments.
| |
| regJirements of NRC Regalatory Guide 1.52, REV. 1.
| |
| 169.0 Ductuork is of the zero-teakage type, Review the ductuork specification to designated seismic Category I, and protected ensure that teekage recpirements and from pipe d ip damage as described in FSAR selemic classifications are incitded.
| |
| Section 3.6.
| |
| 170.0 Each adsorber bed has a temperature Review the specification for a monitoring system d ich indicates bed temperature annitoritig system dich temperature and actuates a high temperature indicates m d actuates in accordance alarm in the Control Room in accordance with with criteria regJirements.
| |
| the teaperatures listed in FSAR Table 6.51.
| |
| CHKM10 25 DAP FORM DAP-N-02'9, REY. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist Num AP-CLC-M-REFEREN DESCRIPTICM SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 172.0 It is not necessary to record or monitor Review the specification to assure that ctuospheric clearup (nit's filter flow and stares are provided in accordance with pressure drops from the Control Room. Regulatory Guide 1.52.
| |
| W=te alanas are provided to conform with the intent of NRC Regulatory Guide 1.52 REV.
| |
| 1, System Desi m criterie, 2g.
| |
| 173.0 Each ESF filter housing is constructed in Review the specification to assure the accordance with the desim recpairements of regairements for construction are met.
| |
| OtNL-NSIC-65.
| |
| 177.0 Refrigerant piping and ttbes are designed in Review the specification to ensure that accordance with ASE 842 and 888. refrigerant pipine and times are specified and designed to ASE 542 and 888.
| |
| 178.0 Condenser desi m for the control room air Review specification to ensure that the conditioners shall be in accordance with ASME condenser is a Code Ctess 3 component.
| |
| III, Code Class 3.
| |
| 179.0 The design specification shalt include the Review the specification to ensure that
| |
| )
| |
| identification of the type of component. the component type is given.
| |
| I 180.0 The design specification shall include the Review the specification to ensure that CHKM10 26 DAP FORM DAP M'029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| N -
| |
| Ch:cklist Nu DAP-CLC-M- /o 7 I
| |
| )
| |
| 1 REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCtMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATI(Bl NC/NA CGWENTS I
| |
| desi p requirements including the toedings for the Class 3 components, all i and the appropriate Desip and Service Limits applicable service loadings are I for each component. The Design and Service specified unless they are less than the I Loadings shalt be established considering att desi p loadings specified.
| |
| plant or system operating corufitions j anticipated or postulated to occur during the j intended service life of the component or steport. For Ctess 3 rag = wnts, other than piping, Service Loadings are not required to be identified den the Design Pressure ard Desi m mechanical Loads result in stresses of j greater as eitude, relative to the attawable stress or stress intensity at the Desi p j Temperature, than would the Service Loadings I
| |
| relative to the allowebtes for the appropriate Service Levet. e en this is not the case, and for piping, Service Loadings shall be identified in the Design Specification.
| |
| i l
| |
| l 181.0 The desim specification shalt include the Review the specification and compare l envirorumental corditions including radiation. the environmental corditfore with those given in the EQ Envirorumentet Tables.
| |
| i 182.0 The design specification shalt include the Review the specification to ensure it code classification of tre items covered, contains the condenser code
| |
| , classification.
| |
| i l
| |
| l CHKM10 27 DAP FORM DAP M 029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 I
| |
| | |
| . 2. .
| |
| Ch:cklist N DAP-CLC-M-1 I
| |
| i i
| |
| J I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTI M SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| ., No. CRITERIA (D00MNT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI W NC/NA COBOENTS 4
| |
| J l
| |
| 1 l
| |
| )
| |
| 183.0 The desiyt specification shalt include Review the specification to ensure that material re@irements incitading impact tests material recpairements and impact tests
| |
| ! ndien applicable. are specified.
| |
| l 184.0 For impact testing the lowest service Review the specification to ensure that
| |
| ; temperature is the minimum temperature of the impact testinR is specified at the j fluid retained by the component or, "touest service temperature." Review
| |
| ] alternatively, the calculated voltmetric the calculation that established this i
| |
| aversee metat tagerature espected during temperature to ensure that it does not
| |
| ; nonnat operation ndienever the pressure within encoed the temperature expected daring the component exceeds 20 percent of the nonmal operation edienever the pressure preoperational system hydrostatic test exceeds 20% of the hydro pressure.
| |
| pressure. For anteriets with thickness exceeding 2 1/2" consideration shalt be given
| |
| ]i to hydrostatic test.
| |
| i.
| |
| 'l 1 185.0 Systems editch contain radioactivity shall be Review the specification for the i designed with: (a) Capability to permit appropriate recpairements.
| |
| j appropriate inspection are testing of
| |
| ! cogenents importar.t to safety. (b)
| |
| Appropriate containment, confinement, and filtering systems.
| |
| i 187.0 Quality crois Classifications and standards Review specification references for CHKM10 28 DAP FORM DAP M-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 1
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| Ch:cklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA _, (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeENTS
| |
| ( for idater, Stema, and Radioactive Weste this criteria.
| |
| containing components of Nuclear Power Plants,1973 shalt meet the regairements of R.G. 1.26.
| |
| l 192.0 The desi p w* sn engineered-safety-feature Review the specification to ensure that
| |
| ] atmosphere clearg system should be based on annimum system operating parameters and
| |
| ; the menisua pressure differential radiation its cbrations are specified.
| |
| l dose rate, relative humidity, maximas and
| |
| ) miniaun tagerature, and other conditions
| |
| ) resulting from the postulated DgA and on the cbration of such conditions.
| |
| l l
| |
| 193.0 The desi p of each systen should be based on Review the specification to ensure that
| |
| ]
| |
| the radiation dose to essential services in radiation reg 4irements integrated over the vicinity of the adsorber section the 30-day period foltouing the
| |
| ; integrated over the 30-day period foltouing postulated DgA is included.
| |
| l the postulated DBA. The radiation source tenu should be consistent with the assumptions foud in Residatory Guidse 1.3, 1.4 and 1.25. Other ergineered safety l features, including pertinent components of essential services such as power, sir, and controt cables, should be adequately shielded froun the atmosphere cleerg systems.
| |
| i 4 CHKM10 29 DAP FORM DAP-M'-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 i
| |
| | |
| p m -
| |
| Z Ch:cklist NeJ
| |
| * DAP-CLC-M-(QI l
| |
| i l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTIm SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATim NC/NA CDeENTS .
| |
| 196.0 The design of each adsorber should be based Review the specification for iodine
| |
| ]
| |
| on the concentration and relative ab e dence rep irements.
| |
| i of the iodine species (etamental, j particulate, and organic), iAlch should be
| |
| ] consistent with the assgtions fomd in Regulatory Guides 1.3,1.4 and 1.25.
| |
| i l
| |
| l 195.0 Fitter ard adsorber harts should be arranged Review vendor arraneament drawing for l In accordance with the recommendations of compliance with ORNL.
| |
| l Section 4.4 of ORNL-MSIC-65.
| |
| l 1%.0 Each origiret or replaceaant batch of Review the specification for compliance impregnated activated carbon used in the with this criteria.
| |
| l adsorber section should meet the j w atification and batch test resutts st guerized in Table 2 of R.G.1.52, Rev.1.
| |
| ; The adsorber system should be desipwd for an i j average atmosphere residence time of 0.25 see per two inches of adsorbent bed. The
| |
| ; adsorber should have the capacity of loading 2.5 sqp of total iodine (radioactive plus stable) per gram of activated carbon. No i
| |
| more than 5% of impregnant (50 se of impregnant per gram of carbon) should be used. The radiation stability of the type of carbon specified should be demonstrated and i
| |
| , ClarM10 30 DAPFORMDAP-M'-ON,REV.2, 08/28/86 1
| |
| I 1
| |
| 2
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-i l
| |
| I i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 4
| |
| 5 j certified (see Section c.1.b of R.G. 1.52, i Rev. I for the design source tere).
| |
| l l
| |
| ]
| |
| 197.0 If tray or pleated-bed adsorbent cannisters Review the specification for cannister j are used in the adsorbent section, they details.
| |
| j should be designed in accordance with the j recommandstim of AACC CS-8T, " Tentative l
| |
| Standard for Nigh-Efficiency Gas-Phase
| |
| ; Adsorber CetIs", July 1972. The activoted carbon should be totatty restrained in the adsorber. A qtatification test on a
| |
| ; prototww adsorber should be performed in
| |
| ! accordance with paragrapi 7.4.1 of CS-8T except that the safe shutdoun eerthcpake parameters particular to the site should be I
| |
| imed. The adsorber should be tested both before and after the quotification test and should show no significant increased penetration e en chattenged with a gaseous
| |
| )
| |
| halogenated hydrocarbon refrigerant in j accordance with USAEC Report DP-1082, July 1%7.
| |
| )
| |
| 1 1
| |
| j 198.0 To keep radiation exposures to operating Review specifications for filtration
| |
| { persomet as low as is reesonably achievable, imit housing teakage recpirements.
| |
| i the atmosphere clearse system should be i desipwd to control teakage and permit CleKM10 DAP F0aN DAP-M-029, REY. 2, 31 08/28/86 i
| |
| | |
| ____ -____ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ --. - ~ _ . . .
| |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-i l
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /talSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1mIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICBI NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| j maintenance in accordance with the guidelines I
| |
| of Regulatory Guide 8.8.
| |
| .l l
| |
| 199.0 Accessibility of ccuponents and maintenance Review specification for maintenance should be considered in the desips of provisions.
| |
| j atmosphere cleante systems in accordance with
| |
| ] the recommendations of Sections 2.5.2, 2.5.3, 5 and 2.5.4 of Onut-uSIC-65, January 1970.
| |
| j 200.0 The activoted cartion adsorber section of the Review the specification for carbon 9
| |
| atmosphere cleante system should be assipied absorber design regairements.
| |
| the decontamination ef ficiencies given in Tabte 3 of Regulatory chaide 1.52 REV.1 for i elemental iodine and organic lodides if the fottoming corditions are met:
| |
| ! 1) The adsorber section meets the conditions j given in regulatory position C.5.d of
| |
| * Regulatory Guide 1.52 REV.2 (See FSAR 1A(s) for R.G.1.52 and amSI).
| |
| : 2) New activated carbon meets the physicat
| |
| ; property specifications given in Table 2 of
| |
| . Regulatory Guide 1.52, REV.1 and
| |
| : 3) Representative samples of used activated carbon pass the laboratory tests given in CHEM 10 32 DAP FOINE DAP-N'029, REV.' 2, 08/28/86 l
| |
| t i
| |
| l 1
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-
| |
| [
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(MI SAT /tseSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1SENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(NI HC/MA CDeENTS Tabte 3 of Regulatory Guide 1.52, REV.1.
| |
| If the activated carbon faits to aset any of the atxyve corditions, it should not be used in engineered-safety-feature adsorbers.
| |
| 201.0 The efficiency of the activeted carbon Review specification for laboratory adsorber section should be determined by testing of the carbon absorber.
| |
| taboratory testirg of represetative samples of the activated carbon exposed simultaneously to the same service conditions as the adsorber section. Each representative saapte should be not less than two inches in both length and diameter, and each saiple shoutd have the saane gantification and batch test characteristics as the system adsorbent. There should be a sufficient raaber of representative saaptes located in parettet with the adsortier section to estimmte the amoe t of penetration of the system sh throupout its service Life.
| |
| The destys of the samplers should be in accordance with the re % tions of Appendix A ANSI M509 - 1980. W wre the systen activated carbon is greater than two inches deep, each representative sampling station should consist of enough two-inch samples in series to ept the thickness of CHKM10 33 DAP FORM DAP-N-029, REY. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Ch:cklist N DAP-CLC-M- b REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tmeSAT/
| |
| mo. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIGI NC/uA CGeENTS ,
| |
| the systes adsorbent. Once representative samples are removed for laboratory test, their positions in the sampling array should
| |
| ~
| |
| be blocked off.
| |
| 202.0 Laboratory tests of representative samples Reviou the specification to ensure that should be conducted, as indicated in Tabte 3 the laboratory testire procedres are of Regulatory Guide 1-52 Rev.1, with the in accordance with Asssi N509.
| |
| test gas flow in the same direction as the flow & ring service conditform. Simitar laboratory tests should be performed on an adsorbent sample before toading into the adsorbers to establish an initiet point for comparison of future test reeutts. The activated carbon adsorter section should be replaced with new tsiused activated carbon meeting the pysical property specifications of Table 2 (of R.G. 1.52 Rev. 1) after the isst representative sagde has been removed and tested or if any proceeding representative sample has fail ~ to pass the tests in Table 3.
| |
| 205.0 Duct construction for the ESF tmit system Reviou the specification fer duct shall be as foltous: construction details.
| |
| o Sheet-metal thicknesses of elbows and CHKM10 34 DAPFORMDAP-M'-02h, REY.2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-
| |
| ]
| |
| l
| |
| ; REFERENE DESCRIPil m SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| HD. CRITERIA (DOC 18ENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI M NC/WA CGOENTS
| |
| }
| |
| a transitions should be one or two gage rssters
| |
| ) thicker than straight rtms, 1
| |
| I o Sheet-metal thickness of transitions
| |
| : should be based on the mejor diameter.
| |
| o The sheet-metal thickness for ressui dets is based on meially aweitable rotted sheets and include attousness for eccentricity and corrosion.
| |
| o Wwn &am or extrssted teirg is used, periaissible matt thickness can be l considerably less the those shone in Table 2.7 of caut-uSCI-65; however, Sched. 5 or 10 pipe is recommanded in mest applications because of the ease of weldirg and avaltabitity.
| |
| o Sheet-metal thickness toss than 26 gage (US) is not recommanded for rotted-sheet
| |
| , construction.
| |
| i o Interundiate reinforcements should have intermittent velds on opposite sides of the anste.
| |
| o The total length of the intermittent velds should be someidhat greater than the CMKM10 35 DAP FORM DAP-M"-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86 I
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CI.C-M-i
| |
| * REFERENCE DESCRIPTICRI SAT /tsSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DoctsqENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(Es NC/NA CDGENTS total circueference of the dicts.
| |
| o Spirst-melded ckst can be used in considerably thirmer untt thickness than rotted-sheet dict or tahing because the spiral ueld acts as a reinforcement; heuever, it is not recommanded towre soisture or corrosive fumes may be present.
| |
| o Flarges at the and of Act sections for mechanical joints and reinforcement should be joined by a continuous saal weld at the det etrance erud reinforced with intermittent melds at the back of the flarge.
| |
| 206.0 Ductuort asst be pressure tested ieder Review the specification to ensure that regative pressures of at least 1.5 times the the d etwork testing conditions stated ammisam fan static pressure and at the norumL in the criteria are included.
| |
| operating temperature. Proof pressure must be held at least 12 hrs. After the negative-pressure test the ductuork should be pressurized to about 3 in. WE positive and teak tested with a soap-inAitde solution or a halogen teek detector. The test pressure sust be maintained smtil every joint has been inspected.
| |
| Cusc10 36 DAP FORM DAP-M-029, REY. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| f
| |
| ( ChecklistNu4DAP-CLC-M-
| |
| ) .
| |
| w I
| |
| i l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctsIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(El NC/N4 Ct3eENTS 1
| |
| 207.0 Sof t-solder joints are not permitted in Review the specification for dictuork
| |
| * l distuork joints. joint corstruction.
| |
| 208.0 maarter-indi-thick neoprene geskets (40 to 60 Review the specification to ensure Shore A darometers) are usuntly suitable for &ctuort joint gasket type.
| |
| dactuort joints.
| |
| {
| |
| 209.0 Large dacts should be constructed with the Review specification to ensure that
| |
| ) necessary strength to resist not only enternal pressures or toads for targe I
| |
| operating pressures but also enternet toads dacts were fictuded.
| |
| ; imposed by snou (if instatled outdiors),
| |
| I thermal expension, and persamet ustking or cliebing on them.
| |
| J 211.0 rampanents of systemis comected to Review the specification to ensure that I compartments that are isdiented daring a the tomest and highest subient postulated accident should be designed for temperatures were inctisind.
| |
| k postaccident effects of both the tomest and hiWiest outdoor tageratures used in the plant desiyt.
| |
| 228.0 The NVAC egaipment is desiysed to operate in Review specification to ensure the and to maintain the Fuel Nandling Building ecpJipment has been specified to meet
| |
| ) regsired ambient conditions. the design recpairements.
| |
| C RM10 37 OAP F0aN DAP-M'-029, REv. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| x p ~
| |
| j Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-(
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTItal SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NC/N4 CCDeHTS 233.0 The FNS enhatst system compties with the Review the Fle enhaast system for envirormentat and components design criteria, cceptience with R.G. 1.140.
| |
| the gaatification testing provisions, and the intent of system desi p criteria promalgated in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.140.
| |
| 234.0 Att of the Fuet Building air e daust system Reviou the specification for the FNB is non-ractear-safety-related ard seismic enhaust system classification.
| |
| Category II.
| |
| 235.0 The air intet towers and ducts leading to seview the specification and flow the primary plant wentitation system are diagrams for the touwers and ducts in desired to Seismic Category II recpirements the FNB's classifications.
| |
| ard to withstand the tornsch toads and tornado-retated eissiIe conditions described in section 3.3.2 of the FSAR.
| |
| 900.0 Specification shalt implement Fan Desip Review the specification for air flous Regairements. and static pressures of fans CPX-V4Fu!D-01, CPK V4FNID-03, CPM-VAFNAV-37, CPM-VAFNCB-05, and (PM-VAFNCS 23. Ceapare the specification desi p conditions uih the flow diagram and calculations as CMEM10 38 DAP FonM DAP-N-029, REV'
| |
| . 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /ISISAT/
| |
| : m. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA C N NIS regJired.
| |
| 901.0 Air corditionirg taits shalt meet the Review the specification for air specification desip regairements. conditionire unit CPM W Act3-01 perforumnce regairements. Compare the specification desip ccmditions with the flow diagram ard calculations as regaired.
| |
| 902.0 Atuospheric c1een-@ units sha!I seet the Review the specification for specification design regairements. atmospheric clean-@ imits CPM-WRJPK-011, GM-WFUPK-22 AND CPM-W FUPK-24 performance regJirements.
| |
| Compare the specified conditions with the flow diagrams and calculation as regaired.
| |
| 903.0 Specification shalt implement the Fire Damper Review the specifications for fire desip regairements. W ratings, flows ard type. Review dagers CPX-WCRFD-41 AND 10. Compare the retires etc. with the flow diagrams ard calculations as regsired.
| |
| 904.0 Specification shalt implement the opposed Review the specifications for dumper tdade damper design regairements, ratings, air flows and operation.
| |
| Review dampers CPM-VADPOU-14, 44,17,10 CMC 10 39 OAP FORM OAP-M'-029, REV'
| |
| . 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI M SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICPTION mC/uA CDeENTS and 27. Compare the ratings etc. with the calculations and flow diagrams as re gired.
| |
| 905.0 specifications shalt implement the Gravity Review the specification for dumper Dampers desip requirements, retirgs, air flows and operation.
| |
| review dumpers CPK-WapPGU-05, 03, and D I WADPGC-05. Compare the ratings etc. with the calculatiors and flow diagrams as respaired.
| |
| 906.0 specifications shalt implement the Review the specification for dauper Damper / Check valves desip respairements. retires, air flows aruf operation of damper CPM-V40PCK-06 Caspare the retirgs etc. with the calculations and flow diagrams as respaired.
| |
| 907.0 specification shalt implement the Circutar Review the specification for dumper gutterf ty Dampers destyi requirements. retirgs, air f tous and operation of dumpers DI ve0PgC-11. Compare the ratings etc. with the calculations and flow diagrams as recpaired.
| |
| l 908.0 Ductuork shalt implement the Ductuork Review the specification for Ductuork Construction design re@irements. Construction recpairamenta for Type 1, CMKM10 40 DAP FumM DAP-N-029, REV. 2, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist N DAP-CLC-M-j REFEREIICE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l IIO.CRITERI A (DoctsIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION IIC/ IIA CGeENTS i
| |
| i i
| |
| 1 Type 4 ard special construction.
| |
| ;j Coopere the respairments with the flow
| |
| { diagrams and calculations as recpaired.
| |
| i
| |
| ! 909.0 lensieue static pressure &ap thru the Control aeview the epocification for a Roan e daust system penthouse ehetL be
| |
| ) penthemse pressure drop. Cougare the implemented. pressure drop with the calculation.
| |
| 1 l 910.0 Ductuork access doors shall be provided at Review the dactwork system drawings to I
| |
| att deepers, housings, arut other components ensure access doors are indicated dere regairing service and inspection. needed.
| |
| ! 911.0 Grittes, registers and diffusers shalt be Review the specification to ensure the property specified in accordance with grittes, registers and diffusers are j irdastry practice. adecpastely specified.
| |
| l 1
| |
| 1 i
| |
| i i
| |
| i I
| |
| l i
| |
| 1
| |
| ; CmI10 41 DAPFORMDAP-M-ON, REY.2, 08/28/86 1
| |
| _ _ _ ___ __a
| |
| | |
| p
| |
| ) IIESICll 111 CllECKb1ST llUll0Elt I liVAblJAT10ll
| |
| ('' )
| |
| ~
| |
| 4}
| |
| ItEVElifEtt DATE glggg;g. ggg gggy CilECKElt '__.__ DATE Al'1'ItOVAb IJATE Cit 1TElt1 A IIUllDEllS]U GEllEllAL DESCit11'T10lIUUAL1'lY CIM.IPTIN;Sil'IGT1ul l'itillAltY ltEFEltEllCES.AtlSLiliti.2- 1913,_ Alls 1__lli.la-.
| |
| 1975. F!Mit lit,_ m e d i a W J EYSTilli!.Mll.itil1K.ELTE1Y ggggg.g,g REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /tJNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCtMENT, PACE) 0F VERIFICAIION NC/NA Cat 1ENIS l the system must be deslywted as an ANS Safety ANS! 18.2 The system criteria designates Ctess (SC) system. the SC.
| |
| The flow diagrvum is stanpet!
| |
| Vestinghouse Class I nuclear Criteria safety-related.
| |
| Plasit Interface criteria designates the safety class.
| |
| 2 The system is designated with the arprcpriate SC. The diagran is susked with the agpropriate system SC.
| |
| The interface system SC is provided and corresponds with the Interface system diagram.
| |
| 3 Class 5 will be used for run-suxlear safety (NNS) FSAR Amessi 53 The system pipirag drawings pipe tism s located in Selsmic Category I ullt show the locotton of pipe structures, and erpipment in the ,
| |
| buildings. Parts of the system piping outside Category I shall be desipinted NNS.
| |
| DAP Form [//P-N- OTO Ilev. O ,
| |
| 7 /7/ 1 Ob
| |
| | |
| s .A .
| |
| DEH1 Elf itW HVALUNI' Lull CllECKb1ST llullBElt ItEVRLilElt DATH _ !!!!Elfl* IlO llRV
| |
| ) CIIECI'Elt DATE Al'I'ItOVAL DATE Cit 1TEll1A IlUllDEllS30 (IEllEllAL DEScit11"r10llGUALflY CliUP'CLMISIFICATiul I
| |
| l'Ill!IAltY ltEFEltEllCES.alELHill 2- l9H,_AIU1_Ill.2a_. E_YSRI1/_LUllMil}ff SAFE 1Y 1975. F!Mit 111, _k_hexheit_51 KL&41Elc_AItMI j
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPIION SAT /tW5Af/
| |
| $ NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F DERIFICATION NC/NA COP 9ENIS i
| |
| 1 4 Interconnecting camponents that fit between etess ANS 18.2, 2.3.3 the systese diagram will show definitions shett be the higher classification. changes in safety ctess. The 4
| |
| egJipment shall be the higher 1
| |
| safety class or be separated by a barrier. The higher etess mitt esteed to and inctide the cited berrier.
| |
| 5 the esplication of barriers.
| |
| ANS 18.2, 2.3.3.1 laien a berrier is identified, it shalt conform to one of j
| |
| following definitions:
| |
| : 1. For a possive membrane- the membrane shall be categorized i
| |
| in the higher class. No I
| |
| arklitionet barrier is regilred.
| |
| : 2. For any class to e lower safety etess a barrier may be:
| |
| : a. e safety or retlef volve
| |
| 'U j 4 c.ncir
| |
| : b. two normeIty open veIwes in 3
| |
| series provided that en active felture of a single vetve
| |
| , combined with a felture of a lower class emquient coutJ not prevent (1) orderly reactor shutdown or (2) e 2
| |
| i Dhp Form D/IP-M- os'o Pw- -
| |
| O - l i U 15 i
| |
| | |
| _ _ _ - - - - _ _ _ - . . _ _ _ _ = - - - . ..- -
| |
| n -
| |
| D f?!Ilf"If It i MVA LI.fNI't.i til (
| |
| CllECI'.1,1ST llUlll1 Ell
| |
| ; itEVElllElt DATH U'lHlit' ll0 ItEV
| |
| ; CIIEcl;Elt DATE Al'l'ItOV Als DAT13 Cit 1TElllh Ilul111 Ells 10 t;EllEllAls DEScitlPr10lIQUAbi'lY G10VFCIASSIF'ICATitti l'ltillAltY ltEFEltEllCES.NIS1_1110.2 _1913,_NISL10.2iL 191'L FM.lU, _&_htctdtet1L_53 EJS_lUl&Vil3Jtillif JAE ElY
| |
| .[.'LeSSJr_,LC1111_Ltl I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPIION 5AT/tBISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (00C1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIllCATION l' NC/NA CG9ENIS i-systein safety insiction of a higher class systeem, or 337 lat*f 8d j
| |
| the release to the enviroriment of gaseous activity nonnelly rerpired to be held for decey, j 3. For a Safety Class 1 to safety class 2- one possive or two active flow restrictlrig devices. An exception is the i
| |
| t leekof f freus the RC Pump seet systein tdiere the Intercorriection betweert Safety Class 1 esulINes camponents contelns two or more seats in l
| |
| i i
| |
| series and the leekoff to
| |
| ! toeste disposal cositelns rio j '
| |
| Isolettert vetves.
| |
| I
| |
| : 4. For a safety Class 1 or Class 2 camponeed of the reactor cootent pressure boundary to any lower safety I
| |
| class- two normally closed j valves in series.
| |
| I
| |
| : 5. For Safety Class 2 outside the RC Systein pressure bouruiery or for Safety Class 3
| |
| ; to any lower safety class:
| |
| l,
| |
| : s. one nonnelly closed velve, or 3
| |
| DAP Fom h4P- M- OSD Pev. O r 7 / #7 / I'
| |
| | |
| 4 -
| |
| CllEct Lif3T 1)ESit!!!
| |
| llUlluHitIQElf HVALUAT1Ulf s 1
| |
| ItEVElllElt DATH UllHET IIU ltEV i
| |
| ellect:Elt DATE Al'I'ItuvA L DATE clI1TElt1 A flullHE8? slo GEllBitAL DE5ciliFfiUjiOUAbflY CIUJI'TLASSIFICAT1ut
| |
| { l'ItLIIAllY HHFEltEllCE5.MISI 1118.2-JS13,_Nr.3L1U.2a ._ JiYstulig.X_uMIIiff SLW171Y 191'i,_fShllJll,_ fi_hitil!!Ottilit._53 LiliSSitialltti REFEREIICE DESCRIPIItal HO. CRIIER1A SAf/UltSAf/
| |
| ; (DottMElli PAGE) OF WRIfICAI1011 llc /NA CCP9EWIS i
| |
| l i 4cxiver
| |
| : b. one noemet14efen veive, If Itoe$kfelture any tower class cegoeient would not prevent achievenuset of the minlaue safety fisetlers of the
| |
| )
| |
| l highegetessorifitsfailure i
| |
| could4result les ascentrotted I release of gescous activity normetty heId ior decay, or
| |
| : c. no velves are necessary if (1) felture of the teuer etess components witI tiot resutt in
| |
| ; loss of eefety fisction of the higher etess component or (2)
| |
| ! uncontrolled reteese to the environment of gaseous activity normetty held for decay.
| |
| l
| |
| ; 6 ouellfleetion of Barrier Velves. ANS 18.2, 2.3.3.2 For normally qui volves that j
| |
| serve es a barrier, the
| |
| ]
| |
| closure time mant be such that for any postulated failure of a tower class congionent outside the Interface botsdary, the safety system itsetion of the higher safety system ullt be snintained med i
| |
| j mp Form /)AP-N-O5o nev. o , 7 / 17 / 86 1
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| O a .-
| |
| i j CllECKLIST DEnittil llullDElt it9if MvaLUAT1ull itEVE1HElt DATH silEHT 110 ItEV CIIECKElt DATE Al'l'ItuVAL DATE Cit 1TElt1A IldiiUEE570 GEllEttAb UE5CitIFr16ijQUAbr1Y Glull5TlASSIF'1CATitti
| |
| { l'IllllAltY llEFEltEllCESANSLHitL2- 191.1,_NEL.lll.2a liyElRILW113,15!UiMKlY .
| |
| j 1975. F.cAlt Ill, & Antictith:33ttidl flg iSJE L @ lAl j REFERENCE DEstaIPI!011 SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| Iso. CRITERIA (00CtSEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAIION IIC/NA C091ENIS l
| |
| orderiy resetor shutdours ulIt riot be prevented. For a check j wetve to gaellfy as the Safety 1
| |
| Ctess 1 interface boundary, i
| |
| the vetve naast be tocated
| |
| { Inolde the reactor centeirament.
| |
| 1, e
| |
| i i
| |
| i 5
| |
| 1 j IRP Form dAIP-)/-BSO Rev. O , 7/7/68 1
| |
| )
| |
| I ,
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| Mete M M .
| |
| g ' O ~,,
| |
| aseteer h M "
| |
| a m. asse grieerte mamaset.intert fruum N1 M W 088 ~ ~
| |
| p =_e a_- i - - - .a _- _s - . chilly s
| |
| ! M __
| |
| l i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UCAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS i
| |
| I i
| |
| ) 1.0 Quality standard ard records shatt be in Review the specifications to ensure accordance with the regJirements of App. A that the stbject components were
| |
| ] GDC 1 to CFR Part 50. The component safety specified in accordance with App. A j classification are also showi on the flow @C. 1.
| |
| ] diagrams presented with their respective
| |
| ! sections.
| |
| l, 17.0 System components and dJctuork are seismic Review the specification to ensure that
| |
| ! Category I and ANS Safety Class 3. (RG. Seismic design conditions and safety I
| |
| 1.29, Rev 2) class are incitased.
| |
| j 177.0 Refrigerant pipire and ttbes are designed in Review the specification to ensure that accordance with ASPE B42 ard 588. refrigerant piping and ttbes are tpecified and designed to ADE B42 &
| |
| , 088.
| |
| l .
| |
| I j 178.0 Condenser design shall be in accordance with Review the specification to ensure that j ASME III, Code Class 3. the condenser is a Code Class 3 component.
| |
| l j
| |
| 179.0 The design specification shall include the Review the specification to ensure that j identification of the tyoe of component. the component is property identified.
| |
| 180.0 The desi<p specification shalt include the Review the specification to ensure that CFM077RO 1 DAP FORM DAP-M-077, REV.1, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| Checklist Nu: DAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCueENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION COMENTS lMC/NA desi p requirements including the loadings for the class 3 components att and the appropriate Design and Service Limits applicable service loadings are for each component. The Design and Service specified taless they are less than the Loadings shall be established considering att design loadire specified.
| |
| plant or system operating conditions antici pted or postulated to occur during the intended service life of the component or sigport. For Class 3 components, other than piping, Service Loadings are not required to be identified d en the Design Pressure and Design mechanical Loads result in stresses of greater meritude, relative to the attowable stress or stress Intensity at the Desi m Temperature, than would the Service Loadings relative to the attouables for the appropriate Service Level. leen this is not the case, and for piping, Service Loadings shall be identified in the Design Specificatlon.
| |
| 181.0 The desi m specificc' tion shalt include the Review the specification and compare environmental conditions including radiation. the enviroruuntal conditions with those given in the EQ Environmental Tables.
| |
| l 182.0 The design specification shall include the Review the specification to ensure it code classification of the items covered. contains the ASME Code Classification.
| |
| CFM077RO DAP FORM DAP M D77,' REV. '1, 2 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| ChecklistNuODAP-CLC-M-REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO.CRiiERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 183.0 The design specification shalt include Review the specification to ensure that material recpJirements incttsfing impact tests material requirements and ispect testo d en applicable. are specified.
| |
| 184.0 For impact testing the touest service Review the specifications to ensure temperature is the minisun temperature of the that Ispect testing is specified at the fluid retained by the couponent or, lowest service temperature. Review the atternatively, the calculated volumetric calculation that established this everage metal temperature expected during - temperature to ensure that it does not nonnel operation idwnever the pressure within exceed the temperature espected daring the component exceeds 20 percent of the nonmat operation adwnever the pressure preoperational system hydrostatic test exceeds 20% of the Nydro Test Pressure.
| |
| pressure. For materlats with thickness l exceeding 2 1/2" consideration shall be given to hydrostatic test.
| |
| 187.0 Quality Group Classification and Standards Review specification references for for unter, Steen, and Radioactive Weste this criteria.
| |
| containing components of Nuclear Power Plants,1973 shall meet the recpJirements of R.G. 1.26.
| |
| 213.0 Each chiller is rated for 100 tons of Review the specification to verify that refrigeration at design conditions. the chitter is rated for a minlaus of 100 tons at desipi conditions.
| |
| ~
| |
| CFM077R0 DAP FORM DAP-M OTT,' REV. '1, 3 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| I p , - -
| |
| Checklist Nu DAP-CLC-M-l l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 214.0 The heat sink for the safety chilled water Review the system flow diagran to systen is the safety related component ensure that the couponent cooling water cooling water system. system provides the cooling water for the chillers.
| |
| 215.0 The regaired camponent cooling water flow is Review the calculation to verify the 300 GPM at design conditions, water flow to the chitters is 300 g a at design conditions.
| |
| 216.0 The chillers are designed in accordance with Review the specificaiton to detenine ASIE B&PV code, Section Ill and Vill, that the appropriate ports of the chitter are desiped in accordance with ASIE BSPV code, sections III & VIII.
| |
| 217.0 The design specification shall include the Review the specification to ensure the definition of the bomderles. components bomderles are identified.
| |
| 218.0 Desip toeding caubinations and stress limits Review the specification for toedirg for AS8E B&PV components are as provided in and stress limits for ASME components FSAR Tables 3.98 1A and 3.98-2. to ensure they meet the FSAR criteria.
| |
| 219.0 Bolts for ASME 8&PV component supports Review the specification for bolts for shall meet the following: components to ensure that they meet the CFM077R0 4 DAP FORM DAP M-077, REV.1, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| p l -
| |
| Checklist Nul d DAP-CLC-M- .
| |
| )
| |
| i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION WC/NA C(DpfMTS requirements of the FSAR.
| |
| : a. Normat and Upset conditions - The design limits are as per ASME B&PV Code, Section III, Article XVII-2460.
| |
| 4
| |
| : b. Emergency condition - The bolt attowables as used in normat and w set conditions.
| |
| l
| |
| : c. Faulted Condition - The bott attowables for normat and m eet conditions are increased by a factor which is the tower of 1.2(Sy/Ft) or 0.7
| |
| , (Su/Ft). However, the total allowable stress
| |
| ; shat t not exceed 0.9 Sy in any case.
| |
| I 1
| |
| 700.0 A. The specification shalt 19 ement t the Review the specification for chiller chiller design requirements listed: desim regairements. Compare the desi p conditions with the flow a) Refrigeration capacity / water chitter, diagrass and calculations as required.
| |
| l 100 tons b) Maximan CCW water pressure drop per condenser, 17ft. w.g.
| |
| c) Maximan Chitled Water water pressure drop per evaporator at rated flow, CFM077RO 5 DAP FORM DAP-M d77,' REV. '1, 08/28/86
| |
| | |
| m m .I- -
| |
| Checklist Nu(, DAP-CLC-M-l l
| |
| l l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l No. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS 15ft. w.g.
| |
| j d) Maximum water temperature rise per l
| |
| condenser, 10 F y e) Normat maximum condenser intet water l temperature, 105 F f) Accident Maximum condenser intet water temperature 135 F g) Chitted water sigply temperature, 55 F i
| |
| j h) Chitted water return temperature,
| |
| ; 65 F
| |
| ! i) Condenser CCW water regairements per two parallel connected condensers (per CPSES Lkiit) 600 GPM (per chiller condenser) 300 GPM j j) Maximun chitted water re@irements (per CPSES Unit) 480 GPM (per chitter Unit) i k) Chilled water design pressure - 150 f>ij CFM0/7RO 6 DAPFORMDAP-M-07[,REV.'1, 08/28/86 I
| |
| | |
| CIHattSE EBEEE swee r eene swa mm. e.,
| |
| mener seee as y - se :
| |
| e geleeria anseers #1 FROM DAP-CR-M-00I JCrvi emeneet enesttystese GENERIC SPECIF ICAI lUN ftleerr esferesses e o re vi iev REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. ATTRIBUTE (DOC 1 MENT, PACE) 0F VERIFICATION HC/NA COWENTS 1.0 The imuts are correctly selected ard Verify that specified reting of incorporated into the specification, espfp ent is consistent with deelm
| |
| . Incitding appr@riate desim criteria and h - nts. -
| |
| comalteent requirements.
| |
| The specificetton is consistent with appilcable calcutettons or evetuations.
| |
| 2.0 speelfleetion re @ lresents are consistent Review doelm and fletd chanises egelnet with deslen or fleLd change h-nts idifch spectfled ecpfpasnt.
| |
| Ispact the specified e@ lpment.
| |
| l 3.0 The opptIcebte codes, standards, eruf Check applicable codse and standards .-
| |
| regulatory requirmente, including issue and are incita$ed in the specifications.
| |
| addende, are property identified.
| |
| 4.0 Service conditions are identified correctly. Verify that service condition specified are consistent with the desim Irput.
| |
| i e
| |
| 5.0 service etessification ard performance are verify that spectfled equipment is i correctly specified, idwre agrapriate. consistent with the sizing calcutetton.
| |
| 6.0 Erwironmental conditions (normet, abrerieel, Verify that envirorsaantal condition and accident) are specified correctly. specified are consistent with the .
| |
| CtH075RO 1 DAP FORM M 075, REY. O, 07/02/86 n *
| |
| * s* ,
| |
| , 0
| |
| | |
| vi ,
| |
| s.
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTitNI SAT /tstsAT/
| |
| NO. ATTRIBUTE (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATItNI CDOENTS NC/NA duelp fryuts I .
| |
| 7.0 Instelted life requiremente are speelfled. Verify that the instetted Life are spectffed.
| |
| ,+.
| |
| 8.0 The specified perte, egalpeant, and processee verify that specified parts are are suitobte for the re@lred opplication are suitobte, compettbte with each other and the doelen emirorumentet conditions to iAlch the enteriet will be exposed.
| |
| 9.0 %=te maintenance features and Verify that saintenance features are
| |
| ^
| |
| recpsirmeents are epocified, specified.
| |
| 10.0 Acceselbility and other deel p provisions are verify that ee'ntenance features are W=te for the perfoneance of needed spectfled.
| |
| maintenance, repelr, eruf the in-service inspection espected to be regaired daring the plant life.
| |
| 11.0 W=to pre-operational and =%mt Verify that the test recpJf rements have periodic test regairements are oppropriately been specified.
| |
| opecified and/or design provisions included.
| |
| CFM075R0 2 DAP FORM M 075, REY. O, 07/02/86
| |
| | |
| . . s i
| |
| 1 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. ATTRIBUTE (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 CDgENTS NC/NA ,
| |
| i 12.0 Deely) and ogJipment gJellfication Verifythatehlpuentquellfleetion
| |
| . . rogsframents, incitafine seismic and ragJirments have been specified.
| |
| l environmental, are specified correctly.
| |
| l 13.0 Nonstandarti prodJction tests are identified verify that nonstandard prodtetton md/or suitetdy drecribed. tests are correctly specifled.
| |
| 14.0 The scope of requirements is specified Verify that the scope regJirasents is cleerty. epecified correctly.
| |
| ! 15.0 Wort not included is detineated. Verify that work not included Is correctly specified.
| |
| (
| |
| l 16.0 Pouer etspty requirements are addressed, Verify that power rogsfrements are ,
| |
| l either those to be provided by the Purchener correctly addressed.
| |
| ! and/or those required to be provided by the Vendor.
| |
| 17.0 Deelyn and construction (etails are listed verify that regatred details are dere appropriate. adequately specified.
| |
| 18.0 Nomting requirements or speclet instettetton verify that instettation requirements CFM075R0 3 DAP FonM M 075, REV. O, 07/02/86
| |
| | |
| 9 REFERENG DESCRIPTI(m SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| ! NO. ATTR1sUTE (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIG1 NC/MA C(MMENTS conditions are specified. are % tely specified.
| |
| 19.0 Interface regJirements are epocified. Verify that vendor / purchaser interface regJiremar.ts are adegante.
| |
| s 20.0 Adequate identification regairements are Verify that adequate Identification specified. regairements are specified.
| |
| I 21.0 Regairements for record preparation, review, Verify that h==vtetion regsirements j opprovet, retention, etc., are adegantely are adegastely specified, specifled.
| |
| 1 22.0 Drawings, documentation, date, and Verify that hwetion admittet information regstred from the verdor are regstruments are adegantely specified.
| |
| epecified.
| |
| 23.0 Drawings, h W etton, date, and Review the list of documente regaired infonsstion regsfred from the Vendor has been to be edesittet by the vender. Verify provided, and hos been reviewed and approved egelnet the vendor document index that by the appropriate parties, selected documents were semittet.
| |
| Verify that h =ents have evidence of being reviewed and approved by appropriate partlos.
| |
| CFM075a0 DAP FORM M 075, REY. O, 4 07/02/86
| |
| | |
| '. *d 4
| |
| i REFERENCE DE5m!PTION SAT /UNSAT/ }
| |
| No. ATTRIBUTE (DOCLIEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 4
| |
| l 24.0 Drawings, documente, data, and inferention Verify that vendor near==nts are ,
| |
| j -
| |
| provided by the Vendor, representire the conelstent with the specification.
| |
| I egsfgnment optied, are consistent with spectfIcetton regairements, s
| |
| l 25.0 W=to handling, storage, cleanfrg, Verify that hendting, storage, !
| |
| packaeIns, and shipping regairemente are cleanire, packagins, and shi pins l specified. regairements are adegate.
| |
| 26.0 The apropriate gaelity and gastity assurance Verify the adegancy of the gatity regairements are specified. assurance regairements.
| |
| 1 I 27.0 The specification has been checked and Verify that the specification has have j approved by the originating orgenlaation, been checked and aproved by the originating organization.
| |
| 28.0 he appropriate, the specification is Verify that the specification designated safety-related. eefety-related claeof fication is
| |
| ; appropriate.
| |
| 29.0 Desim review has been performed and Verify that the specification has documented. reviewed commeneurete with the leportance and smigaeness of the CFM075R0 5 DAP FORM M 075, REV. 0, 07/02/86
| |
| | |
| . - ?.
| |
| J, Oo
| |
| ; REFERENCE DESOtIPTION SAT /tAISAT/
| |
| ] NO. ATTRIBUTE (DorufMT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NC/NA CGgENTS t
| |
| l l The entent of the design verification or desim. ,
| |
| l review le canonneurste with the leportance of j
| |
| the desip to eefet), its co glexity, degree l of standardfretion, rotation to
| |
| ; state-of-the art, and sletterity with previously proven dest es.
| |
| 30.0 thanges in the specification were e 4}ected verify that speelfleetion changes have i to desip control eeesures commensurate with been revleued and their approvet i those apptled to the originot speelfleetions. documented.
| |
| I 1
| |
| i l
| |
| I 1
| |
| I l
| |
| l l CFN05R0 6 DAP FORM M 05, REV. O, 07/02/86
| |
| | |
| ATTACHMENT C Civil Structural Checklist Forms FORM NO. REY _,. DATE IIITAE ,
| |
| DAP-C/S-G001 3 5/2/86 Structural Steel Criteria DAP-C/S-G002 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G010 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G0ll 2 5/2/86 Cont. Loads and Comb.
| |
| DAP-C/S-G012 4 6/5/86 Intl. Str. Loads DAP-C/S-G013 2 5/3/86 Int. Str. Conc. Load Comb.
| |
| DAP-C/S-G014 3 5/2/86 Int. Str. Steel Load Comb.
| |
| DAP-C/S-G015 3 5/2/86 Other Category 1 Loads DAP-C/S-G016 /3 5/3/8Y Other Category 1 Conc. Load Combinations DAP-C/S-G017 3 5/2/86 Other Category 1 Steel Load Combinations DAP-C/S-G018 2 5/15/86 Foundation Loads and Load Combinations DAP-C/S-G019 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G020 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G021 3 5/2/86 Computer Modeling DAP-C/S-G022 2 5/2/86 Hand Calculations Os DAP-C/S-G023 4 -
| |
| 5/23/86 Seismic Subsystems DAP-C/S-G024 3 5/2/86 Equiv. Static Analysis DAP-C/S-G025 1 5/2/86 Missile Impact Analysis DAP-C/S-G026 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G030 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G031 4 6/5/86 Supports and Anchorage DAP-C/S-G032 1 5/2/86 Baseplate / Anchor Bolt DAP-C/S-G033 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G040 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G041 1 5/2/86 Thermal Analysis of Concrete Structures DAP-C/S-G042 0 4/25/g6 Internal Pressure Analysis DAP-C/S-G043 ,l'1 5/4/06 Wind Loads Determination /
| |
| Distribution DAP-C/S-G044 1 5/2/86 Tornado Loads Determination /
| |
| , Distribution DAP-C/S-G045 '
| |
| di 4/2 86 Seismic Load Determination /
| |
| Distribution DAP-C/S-G046 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G060 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G061 1 5/2/86 Specification Preparation DAP-C/S-G062 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G070 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G071 0 5/2/86 Testing DAP-C/S-G072 0 4/25/86 Heavy Load Drop Analysis DAP-C/S-G073 0 5/2/86 Computer Code Benchmarking 1
| |
| --r----
| |
| | |
| DAP CHECKLIST FORM N0. E DAIE IIILE DAP-C/S-G074 0 5/2/86 Special Studies .
| |
| DAP-C/S-G075 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G090 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-G091 0 3/5/86 Design Control and Interface DAP-C/S-G092 THROUGH DAP-C/S-G100 UNASSIGNED Note: C/S Series "S" checklist forms start at S101.
| |
| DAP-C/S-S101 4 5/2/86 Containment Concrete Design DAP-C/S-5102 4 5/2/86 Other Category 1 Structures Concrete Design DAP-C/S-S103 1 5/2/86 Reactor Building Internal Concrete Structural Design DAP-C/S-5104 0 2/26/86 Containment Airlock and Equipment Hatch Openings DAP-C/S-5105 1 5/2/86 Containment Mat Design DAP-C/S-S106 0 4/25/86 Foundation / Basement Walls O DAP-C/S-S107 THROUGH DAP-C/S-S110 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-5111 4 5/2/86 Cable Spreading Room Steel Design DAP-C/S-S112 5 6/5/86 Pipe Rupture Restraints DAP-C/S-S113 1 5/2/86 Jet Shields / Jet Impingement DAP-C/S-5114 2 6/5/86 Containment Liner and Anchorage Design and Analysis i DAP-C/S-S115 0 3/15/86 Misc. Steel Design DAP-C/S-5116 THROUGH DAP-C/S-5120 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-S121 2 5/2/86 HVAC Supports Design DAP-C/S-S122 3 5/2/86 Crane Supports DAP-C/S-S123 3 5/2/86 Equipment Supports DAP-C/S-5124 3 5/2/86 Penetration Sleeve Supports i DAP-C/S-S125 3 5/2/86 Missile Restraint Doors and Hatches Anchorage DAP-C/S-S126 1 5/22/86 Seismic Restraints for Removable Shield Walls DAP-C/S-5127 3 5/2/86 SG Lateral Restraint DAP-C/S-S128 0 3/5/86 Misc. Supports DAP-C/S-5129 0 5/2/86 I&C Tubing Supports DAP-C/S-S130 0 5/2/86 Fual Transfer Tube Support j DAP-C/S-S131 THROUGH DAP-C/S-5151 UNASSIGNED DAP-C/S-5152 9' i 3/5/84 Outdoor Seismic Category 1 Tanks DAP-C/S-S153 0 2/15/86 Buried Duct Banks and Tunnels 2
| |
| D !
| |
| | |
| 6 ATTA NT C '
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. I of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 254, 255 General Description
| |
| - Lood Combinations for Other Category 1 Concrete Structures C/S-G016 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 1.0 Load Combinations for Service Load Conditions considered? (254) 1.1 U = 1.4D + 1.7L l.2 U = 1.4D + 1.7L + l.9Feqo 1.3 U = l.4D + l.7L + l.7W If thermal stresses due to To and Ro are present:
| |
| 1.4 U = 0.75 (1.4D + l.7L + To + l.7Ro) 1.5 U = 0.75 (1.4D + l.7L + 1.9F eqo
| |
| + l .7T
| |
| +1.7fY)o 1.6 U = 0.75 (1.4 D + l .7L + l .7 W + l .7To
| |
| + l .7Ro) 1.7 L considered for full value or com-plete obsence?
| |
| Additional combinations in the obsence of L:
| |
| 1.8 U = 1.2 D + l .9F eqo TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G016, Rev. 3, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| ., ATTA NT C (q Mj DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CWCKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 2 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Ch:cker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 254, 255 Ceneral Description Lood Combinations for Other
| |
| . Category 1 Concrete Structures C/S-G016 Primary References Reference Description of Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 1.9 U = l .2 D + 1.7 W 2.0 Load Combinations for Factored Load Conditions considered? (254,255) 2.1 2.2 U=D+L+To+Ro+Feqs b U = D + L + To + Ro+Wt 2.3 U=D+L+To+Ro + 1.5Pa 2.4 U = D + L + To + Rq+1.25P a
| |
| + 1.0(Yr + Yj + Ymi + 1.25Feqo 4 2.5 U=D+L+To+Rq + I .0P o Ll\
| |
| + 1.0(Yr + Yj + Ymi + 1.0Feqs 2.6 L is considered for full value or complete obsence?
| |
| 2.7 is the maximum value of the follow-ing, including appropriate dynamic factor used, unless a time history analysis is performed to justify otherwise? (255)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G016, Rev. 3, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| O ATTA NT C C/
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 3 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 2S4, 255 General Description Lood Combinations for Other Category i Concrete Structures C/S-G016 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.7.1 Fur P a 2.7.2 For To 2.7.3 For Ra 2.7.4 For Yj 2.7.5 For Y r 2.7.6 For Y m 2.8 If local stresses caused by the concen-troted foods Yr, Yj, Ym exceed the allowables:
| |
| No loss of function of any safety-relot-ed system? (255) 3.0 For foods which may vary, the values (within the possible range) which pro-duce the most critical combination of loading are used in design. (255)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/5-G016, Rev. 3, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C .
| |
| DESIGN REVEW EVALUATOON
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CECKLIST NUAGER Revi:wer Date Sheet No. I of 3 Rev.
| |
| Check:r Date Approval Date Crit:rio Numbers 014-017, 039 General Description Wind Loads Determination / Distribution C/S-G043 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 1.0 is basic maximum wind velocity of 80 mph at 30 ft above ground considered for seismic Category I d structures? (014) 2.0 is o gust factor of 1.1 applied to the wind velocities? (014) 3.0 is the wind velocity distribution for various height zones above the
| |
| : ground in accordance with Table I i of ASCE paper No. 3269? (015)
| |
| : 4.0 is the dynamic wind pressure q calculated based on q = 0.00256V2 ?
| |
| (015) 4.1 is Table 4(f) of ASCE paper
| |
| ; 3269 used for shape co-effi-4 cients of the Containment and Cylindrical tanks? (0IS)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Fonn C/S-G043, Rev. 2', 8/15/86
| |
| | |
| e .
| |
| O-ATTAANT C \- -
| |
| DESIGN REVEW EVALUATOON SUMA4ARY CECKLIST NUAGER Revi;wer Date Sheet No. 2 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Check:r Date Approval Dote Crit:rio Numbers 014-017, 039 Ceneral Description Wind Loads Determination / Distribution C/S-G043 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 4.2 is a shape co-efficient of I.3 used for rectangular struc-tures? (015).
| |
| 4.3 a. Is the correct positive pressure on the windward walls applied? ,
| |
| : b. Is the correct negative pressure on the leeward walls applied?
| |
| : c. Is the correct negative pressure on the end walls applied? -
| |
| : d. Is the correct uplift on the roofs applied?
| |
| I 5.0 is wind shielding effect that one structure con provide to another neglected? (0I6)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G043. Rev. 2', 8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ("% 4 -
| |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVED EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUhEER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 3 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Dote Crit:rio Numbers 014-017, 039 General Description W;nd Loads Determmotion/ Distribution C/S-G043 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.0 Are the wind loads applied to the structures as static loads? (015) 7.0 Are the wind foods properly trans-ferred to supports by means of floor diaphrogms, walls, braces or by other systems? (Ol7) 8.0 The Service Water intoke Structure is subjected to wind-wave activity on the safe shutdown impounding.
| |
| , A 40-mph wind is assumed coincidental with the probable maximum flood. (039)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G043. Rev. 2', 8/15/86
| |
| | |
| s ,
| |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. I of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-13I, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| A1 tributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verificotion NC/NA Comments 1.0 Seismic input Criterio 1.1 Horizontal site design spectro conform with USNRC RG l.60 Rev.I horizontal spectro.
| |
| (080) 1.2 Vertical spectro conform with Reference 14 of FSAR (Newmork, Blume, Kapur) o Deviation with USNRC RG l.60 Rev. I vertical spectro in frequency region 33-50 Hz is acceptable (080).
| |
| o is there any amplification less than one for frequencies higher than 33 Hz of vertical spectrum?
| |
| 1.3 SSE horizontal spectro are nor-malized to 0.12g ZPA. (080) 1.4 OBE horizontal spectro normal-ized to 0.069 ZP A. (080)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev.2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| i x ATTACI NT C 'v DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 2 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| A1 tributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 1.5 SSE vertical spectro are norma-lized to 0.089 ZPA. (080) 1.6 OBE vertical spectro are nor-malized to 0.04g ZPA. (080) 1.7 Acceleration design time his-tories have duration of 10.24 seconds. (081) o is the duration of the gener-ated time history long enough as compared to the whole period range considered in the spectro?
| |
| I.8 Spectra of the design time his-tories envelope corresponding design spectro for the appropr-iote domping value. This domp-ing value should be shown or have a traceable reference.
| |
| (081) 1.9 Three orthogonal earthquake directions (two horizontal and one vertical) are considered.
| |
| (124) l IN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2, 8/l5/86
| |
| | |
| e ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 3 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 000-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-12S, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 14S C/S-G04S Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.0 Seismic Model Development 2.1 Stif fness Development 2.1.I All significant structrual elements (walls, columns, bracings, etc.) are identi-fied and included in stiff-ness calculations. (087) 2.1.2 Stiffness calculations in-clude both flexural and shear contributions.
| |
| Where only shear struc-tural elements are includ-ed, this is identified.
| |
| 2.I.3 Locations (plan coordi-notes or other reference means) and dimensions of structural elements are identified and referenced to drawings.
| |
| Tm-ca-/ vao DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 4 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checksr Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Colegory I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-I16, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.1.4 Material properties (e.g.,
| |
| E3, Ec, fc) are identified.
| |
| 2.1.5 When a finite element op-proach is used, structural elements (walls, columns, etc.) are explicitly mod-eled (location and dimen-sions). (087) 2.1.6 Have the flexibility of slabs been incorporated in the models for vertical excitation?
| |
| 2.1.7 For review of stiffness evoluotion, use checklist C/S-G021, " Computer Modeling and Analysis."
| |
| 2.1.8 Stiffness results, such as equivalent beam or stiff-ness matrix, are identi-fied.
| |
| I N-U3-/ UJu DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C k DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 5 of 24 Checker Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Crittrio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.1.9 Coordinate system of stiffness model is identi-fied.
| |
| 2.2 Moss Distribution 2.2.I Masses are lumped at structure plan centroids, which are generally dif-ferent from center of stif fness locations.
| |
| 2.2.2 Moss distribution in-cludes, in addition to dead weight of structure, all large equipment and per-monently attached sys-teins. (106) 2.2.3 Rotational inertio effects of base mots and large floor slobs are considered.
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| Cl--ECKLIST NUMBER Review r Date Sheet No. 6 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checksr Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 0S9, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 14S C/S-G04S Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.3 Structural domping for OBE and SSE conditions correspond to values in USNRC RG l.61.
| |
| (082, 130) 2.4 Soil-Structure Interaction ,
| |
| 2.4.1 Soil-structure interaction is modeled using soil stiffness springs for 6 degrees of freedom.
| |
| 2.4.2 All category I structures have rigid mots and are assumed to be founded upon elastic foundations.
| |
| Stiffness of soil springs are calculated using the formulas of Table 3.78-S and 3.78-6 of the FSAR.
| |
| (088, 109, i12) o Are the values calcu-lated correctly?
| |
| 2.4.3 Soil properties used in soil-spring calculations, fN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Review:r Date Sheet No. 7 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Check:r Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-l16, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments obtained from field measurements, are refer-enced. (ll6) 2.4.4 Embedded structures are evoluoted for the in-creased stiffness due to surrounding soil. The added rigidity is calculot-ed using the approach and formulos of Section 3.78.2.4.2 of the FSAR.
| |
| (l l5,118) 2.4.5 Soil mass effects (translo-tional and rotational ef-fective mass of the soil) are included. Formulos 3.7B-2 and 3.7B-3 for added mass are used.
| |
| (088, 109, 114) o Are the associated ef-fective masses and rotary inertia of the rock correctly calculot-ed?
| |
| TN-85-1038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Checker Sheet No. 8 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Crittria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, i18-125, 129-131, 133, 137, I43, 145 Structures C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Verification NC/NA Comments 2.4.6 Soil Damping 2.4.6.1 Radiation damp-ing is calculated using formulos listed in FSAR Table 3.78-7. (088, i10, i13) 2.4.6.2 Hysteretic damp-ing is calculated or justi-fied by reference to em-pirical soil data or re-ports. (088, i10, i13) 2.4.6.3 Effects of radio-tion and internal damp-ings are combined proper-ly. (I 10, i 13) 2.4.6.4 Soil damping, in-ciuding radiational damp-ing, does not exceed 10%
| |
| for horizontal and verti-col modes and 5% for rocking and torsional modes, for SSE or OBE.
| |
| (ll0) po-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C )
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 9 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checkar Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-l16, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G0f5 4
| |
| Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 2.5 Dynamic reduction or conden-sotion of model stiffness and mass characteristics should be identified and justification pro-vided.
| |
| 3.0 Dynamic Analysis Methods 3.1 Seismic category I structures are analyzed using time history analysis or response spectrum method or both. (085) 3.2 For each analysis, including parametric analyses, mode
| |
| : shapes and frequencies up to 33 Hz are included. (099) i r4-US-/ UJu DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date ' Sheet No. 10 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 000-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 3
| |
| rimary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 3.3 Seismic participation factors are listed to evaluate model adequacy. (099) 3.4 Response Spectrum Analysis (089, 100) 3.4.1 Damping used with the in-put response spectra should be identified and justific-Jtion provided.
| |
| 3.4.2 Combination of Modal Responses (125,137,143) o if there are not any closely spaced modes (two consecutive modes have frequencies with difference of more than 10 % of the lower frequency), are the maximum modal responses combined by SRSS? (US NRC Reg.
| |
| Guide 1.92, Rev. I, par. l . l)
| |
| N-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/i5/86
| |
| | |
| ATTACH C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CECKLIST NUMBER -
| |
| Reviewer Date
| |
| :hecker Sheet No. II of 24 Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date
| |
| :riteria Numbers 059, 000-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 imary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments o if there are closely spaced modes, maxi-mum modal responses are obtained by:
| |
| - Absolute sum?
| |
| - Grouping method?
| |
| (Reg. Guide 1.92, Rev. I, para 1.2.1)
| |
| - Ten percent method?
| |
| (Reg Rev. I,Guide 1.92, )
| |
| para 1.2.2
| |
| - Double sum method?
| |
| (Reg Guide 1.92, Rev. I, para 1.2.3)
| |
| ! 3.5 Modal Analysis Time History j Method (090)
| |
| ! 3.5.1 Duration of time j history analysis is at least 10.24 seconds. -
| |
| i l
| |
| L85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86 1
| |
| | |
| y n ATTACH ~oT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 12 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-I16, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, I37, 143, 145 C/S-G(M5
| |
| 'rimary References Reference Description of Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 3.5.2 Integration time history step interval does not ex-ceed 0.01 seconds.
| |
| 3.5.3 Damping associated with the input time history, which matches corres- ,
| |
| ponding design response
| |
| : spectro, should be identi-fied and justified.
| |
| 3.5.4 Source of modal domping values used and method of calculation are refer-enced.
| |
| 3.5.5 Correct time history in-puts for SSE and OBE should be used.
| |
| 3.5.6 Response output is calcu-lated at each time step and maximum values re- .
| |
| toined.
| |
| 4 85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTACH C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Review::r Date Sheet No. 13 of 24 Checker Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087 090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 rimary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 4.0 Porametric Evoluotions (059, Ii1, 129) 4.1 Each category I structure is on-olyzed for OBE and SSE seismic levels.
| |
| 4.2 Soil-structure interaction para-metric analyses are conducted for both OBE and SSE.
| |
| 4.2.I Parametric study on soil spring stiffness includes analysis using best esti-moted values, upper bound values (15% in-crease in shear wave vel-ocity) and lower bound values (15% decrease in shear wave velocity).
| |
| 4.2.2 Only upper and lower bound analyses are re-quired for Fuel Building "
| |
| and Service Water intoke Structure.
| |
| 1-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Revi wer Date Sheet No. 14 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checkcr Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 4.2.3 Parametric study on mass density includes estimat-ed density, and 10% in-crease and decrease.
| |
| 4.2.4 For Containment Build-ing, parametric analyses consider cracked and un-cracked concrete sec-tions. A cracked section should have one-half the thickness of the un-cracked cylinder thick-ness.
| |
| 4.2.5 Combination of para-metric variations are done conservatively.
| |
| 4.2.5.1 Upper bound anal-ysis should include: + 15%
| |
| soil spring stiffness; -10%
| |
| mass density and un-cracked section (for Con-toinment Building).
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| Cl ECKLIST NUMBER
| |
| ' Reviewer Date Sheet No. 15 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criteria Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-I16, I18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References l
| |
| '! Reference Description of Sot /Unsot/
| |
| ! Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments l
| |
| 4.2.5.2 Lower bound on-I olysis should include:
| |
| j -15% soil spring stiffness;
| |
| +10% mass density; and j crocked section (for Con-
| |
| ; toinment Building).
| |
| i
| |
| , 5.0 Analytical results are identified by parametric variations used, seismic level (SSE or OBE) and direction.
| |
| l 5.I Frequencies, mode shapes, and
| |
| [
| |
| seismic participation factors i are identified.
| |
| i 5.2 Peak structure motions (accel-j erotions, displacements) are listed.
| |
| Accelerations should be noted as being either absolute or'relo-tive. ,
| |
| 4 I
| |
| l i
| |
| i TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2 8/15/86 J
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 16 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 000-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-1I6, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 3 rimary References Reference Description of Sot /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 5.3 Structural forces, moments, shears and oxial forces are list-ed.
| |
| 5.4 Soil spring reactions, such as soil shear and vertical foods, and overturning moments should be listed.
| |
| 5.5 Seismic responses representing peak values from three ortho-gonal earthquake directions are combined by SRSS for subse-quent design use. (124) 5.6 Maximum responses obtained using results from the time his-tory method and response spec-trum method should be com-pared. The response spectrum method results are used for design and should be shown to be conservative. (133) '
| |
| M-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| CFECKL1ST NUMBER Rreviewer Date Checker Sheet No. 17 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, I18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.0 Floor Response Spectro 6.1 To generate response spectra of selected locations, modal anal-ysis time history method is used. (090, II9) 6.2 in-structure time history accel-erotions obtained at nodal points must be algebraically added to the input ground acceleration time history to develop the obsolute accelero-tion time history prior to spectro generation.
| |
| o Floor response spectro at 33 Hz have the peak floor acceleration.
| |
| 6.3 The obsolute accelerotion time histories are developed having a maximum time step interval of .
| |
| 0.01 seconds and duration of 10.24 seconds. '
| |
| (N-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86 i
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Checker Sheet No. 18 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-l16, I18-125, Structures I29-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.4 Equipment domping for which the spectro are developed are identified.
| |
| 6.5 Spectro are developed following USNRC RG l.122, Rev. l.-
| |
| 6.5.1 Spectro should be devel- .
| |
| oped at frequency inter-vols corresponding to those listed in RG l.122, Table 1.
| |
| 6.5.2 Spectro are developed at frequencies corresponding to the structural frequen-cies calculated by the seismic analyses in addi-tion to those of RG l.122 Table 1.
| |
| ~
| |
| i i
| |
| 1 I N-85-lOJ8 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVEW EVALUATION SUA4AAARY Cl-ECKLIST NUAEER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 19 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-I16, I18-125, Structures I29-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References t
| |
| Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.5.3 Spectro for a given direc-tion are developed using spectra obtained from the 3 input earthquake di-
| |
| ! rections. Spectral ordi-notes are combined by i SRSS. (124) i 6.5.4 The in-structure spectro 1 envelope the spectra ob-toined from porometric analyses. (II9,129) 6.5.5 Enveloped (or broodened) l peaks have o minimum j + 10% frequency width il with respect to the peak center frequency. (lI9, ;
| |
| I29) '
| |
| i 5
| |
| l l
| |
| l TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| l.
| |
| CEECKLIST NUNBER '
| |
| Review:r Date Checker Sheet No. 20 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 000-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I I
| |
| 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-Il6, 118-125, Stevetures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 rimary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.6 Interpolation Instructure Response Spectro: (120) 6.6.1 The response spectro at any point within the structure for each of three directions are ob-toined correctly by inter-polation/ extrapolation of response spectro for translations, plus addi-tional contributions from torsional and rocking.
| |
| 6.7 Floor-by-Floor Response Spectro are correctly con-structed:
| |
| i 6.7.1 Are the horizontal and i
| |
| vertical response spectro l correctly developed at i the critical locations of each floor of all seismic '
| |
| Category I buildings?
| |
| (121)
| |
| )-85-7038 DAP Form CS-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86 i
| |
| | |
| (D , .
| |
| V ATTACHMENT C N DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CHECKI l'ST NUMBER Ravi:wer Date Sheet No. 21 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category 1 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, i18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 rimary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.7.2 Greatest eccentricity from the center of grav-ity is considered?
| |
| 6.7.3 The values for total acceleration in X, Y, and Z directions are obtained by correct combination?
| |
| 6.7.4 Are the refined floor-by-floor spectro for As-Built Piping Analysis construct-ed correctly? (122) 6.7.5 is the refined response spectro for a purpose other than As-Built piping analysis used? If yes, prior opproval from the engineer obtained? (122) 6.7.6 Typical refined response spectro of critical loco- -
| |
| tions of the Safeguard Building Constructed cor-rectly? (122) 1-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/I5/86
| |
| | |
| ATTACH C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CIECKLIST NUMBER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 22 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Check r Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-116, 118-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G0f iS rimary Raferences Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 6.8 Response spectra of the exact locations of selected subsys-tems correctly constructed?
| |
| (123) 7.0 Documentation 7.1 Computer codes used are iden-tified as being certified and verified.
| |
| 7.2 Computer outputs identify chorocteristics of analysis con-ducted. Included should be:
| |
| structure name, earthquake level, direction, and parametric condition (s) being analyzed.
| |
| Coordinate system reference should be noted.
| |
| 7.3 Design drawings used in devel-oping model stiffness and mass ,
| |
| chorocteristics are referenced, including date and revision.
| |
| 1-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER Revi2 war Date Sheet No. 23 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Check:r Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Analysis of Category I 099, 100, 102, 106, 109-l16, I18-125, Structures 129-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045
| |
| $rimary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed ,
| |
| (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments t 7.4 Design changes made subse-quent to analysis should be identified. Adequacy of model !
| |
| when compared with final design drawings should be eval-voted.
| |
| 8.0 Additional Verifications 8.1 Differential seismic movement of intercennected components considered properly? (096,145) 8.l.I Are the displacements used consistent with the directions of structural excitation being consid-ered in the spectrum analysis?
| |
| N-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST NUMBER R:vi:wer Date Sheet No. 24 of 24 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date Criterio Numbers 059, 080-082, 085, 087-090, 096, General Description Seismic Anoiysis of Category I 099,100,102,106,109-116, l 18-125, Structures I29-131, 133, 137, 143, 145 C/S-G045 Primary References Reference Description of Sat /Unsat/ -
| |
| Attributes Reviewed (Document, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments 8.2 Are seismic loods used for the design of seismic Category I structures correctly obtained by multiplying the response .
| |
| occelerotions with appropriate mosses? (102) ,
| |
| 8.3 Constant static factors such as vertical response loads for the seismic Category i Structures are not useo. Instead, multi-mass dynamic analysis for both horizontal and vertical direc-tions is performed. (131)
| |
| TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-G045, Rev. 2,8/15/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C DESIGN HEVED EVALUAT10N
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| OECKLIST M MRFR Reviewer Date Sheet No. I of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Dase Criterio Numbers 251,252 General Description Outdoor Seismic Category i Tonks C/S-Sl52 Primary References Reference Description of Set /Unses/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed Document, Page) Verification NC#4A Comments 1.0 The storoge tank under review is one of the following: Refueling Water, Condensate, or Reactor Makeup Water? (251) 2.0 is the tank R/C with a stainless steel liner? (251) 3.0 If the tank under review is the Refueling Water Storage Tonk, I does it have on external concrete trough to collect leakage?
| |
| 4.0 Hos the tonk been designed to withstand the effects of a postu-lated missile without loss of func-tion? (25I) 5.0 Were the following loads con-sidered in the design: normal ope-rating, hydrostatic pressure, live IN-65-7038 DAP Form C/S-5152, Rev. 1, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| O ATTA NT C DESIGN REVEO EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CFECKLIST be maRFR Reviewer Date Sheet No. 2 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Dote Appravol DoIe 251,252 Ceneral Description Outdoor Seismic Category i Tonks Criterio Numbers C/S-Sl52 Primary References Reference Description of Set /Unant/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed 0- -- cat, Pagel Verification NC/NA Comments loads on roof, thermol, SSE, wind, tornado, and hydrodynamic loods?
| |
| (251) 6.0 Were the food combinations given in FSAR 3.8.4.3 correctly consid-ered? (251) 7.0 Was the Analysis of Shells of Revolution computer program used for the structural analysis of both oxisymmetric and non-exisym-metric loods?
| |
| 8.0 Was the motion of the contained fluid during on earthquake occounted for by incorporating fluid masses into the computer model of the tank?
| |
| 9.0 Were non-oxisymmetric load cases of wind, tornado and seismic I
| |
| - TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-5152, Rev. 1, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| ATTA NT C O
| |
| Q DESIGN REVIEC EVALUATION
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| | |
| CECKLIST NUAGER Reviewer Date Sheet No. 3 of 3 Rev.
| |
| Checker Date Approval Date 251,252 General Description Outdoor Seismic Category i Tonks Criterio Numbers C/S-Sl52 Primary References Reference Description of Sos /Unsot/
| |
| Attributes Reviewed Occasment, Page) Verification NC/NA Comments superimposed on the axisymmetric food cases to produce the highest design values regardless of the direction of the non-oxisymmetric loads? (2SI)
| |
| : 10. Hos a minimum of 0.25 percent reinforcing steel been provided in the tank walls in both vertical and hoop directions? (251)
| |
| I I.0 Was the tank designed in accordance with ACI 318-71? (252)
| |
| : 12. Use one or more of the following checklists as applicable:
| |
| C/S-G016 C/S-Gol8 C/S-G021 C/S-G022 C/5-G044 C/S-G045 C/S-G051 C/S-Sl02
| |
| , . TN-85-7038 DAP Form C/S-5152, Rev. 1, 7/21/86
| |
| | |
| ATTACMENT D Electrical /I&C Checklist Forms
| |
| : O DAP CHECKLIST j FORN N0. REL. DAIK IIILE i
| |
| ! DAP-E-001 1 4/1/86 Voltage Profiles
| |
| : DAP-E-002 1 4/1/86 Short\ Circuit Currents l DAP-E-003 1 4/1/86 Terminal Voltage
| |
| ; DAP-E-004 . I'> 4fi/86+ ' Cable Sizing
| |
| ; DAP-E-005 1 4/1/86 Diesel Generators and Transformers l DAP-E-006 1 4/1/86 Inverters l DAP-E-007 1 4/1/86 Batteries / Chargers DAP-E-008 1 4/1/86 Load Shedding and Sequencing DAP-E-009 1 4/1/86 Load Transfers -
| |
| l DAP-E-010 0 10/28/g5 AFW Pump Motor
| |
| ! DAP-E-011 9'i 10/28/85 6.9KV Switchgear I DAP-E-012 5t N/;M6' Battery DAP-E-013 gi l0/te/A Penetrations DAP-E-014 6i Id'/E8/8$-- AFW Pump Motor Breaker j DAP-E-015 0t 1d/2h d$ 8KV Cable
| |
| , DAP-E-016 Fl Motor Control Center DAP-E-017 gi %q65 Battery Charger l DAP-E-018 #8 10/28g85 80P Inverter DAP-E-019 .0 \ 10/24/85 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling Pump Motor DAP-E-020 c- hwaInstrument Cable DAP-E-021 L' Latervn.i.. Cable Tray DAP-E-022 C LM5/I Conduit DAP-E-023 0 teter"ra. Cable Terminations and Splices DAP-E-024 o Later m e- Transfer Switch (Power)
| |
| DAP-E-025 o Later6n,~ Distribution Transformers DAP-E-026 o Later6/ ,460V Motor Operator DAP-E-027 THROUGH DAP-E-029 UNASSIGNED DAP-E-030 0 10* M 5 Redundancy DAP-E-031 /I 19 M Independence DAP-E-032 )A 4A/96 m o Separation / Cable Routing DAP-E-033 UNASSIGNED DAP-E-034 0 10/28/85 Environmental Qualification I
| |
| s' i
| |
| | |
| DAP CHECKLIST FORM N0. RE DAII TITLE O DAP-E-035 0 10/28/85 Fire Protection Breaker Coordination .
| |
| DAP-E-036 1 4/1/86 Fire Protection Systems Interaction
| |
| . DAP-E-037 1 4/1/86 Fire Protection Program DAP-E-038 1 3/5/86 Generic Calculation DAP-E-039 1 3/5/86 Generic Specification DAP-E-040 /2 4/1/86^ Fire Protection Shutdown Model
| |
| & Systems DAP-E-041 J% 4/1/86'o> Fire Protection Shutdown Components DAP-E-042 O 4/1/86' ~ Fire Protection Circuit Identification DAP-E-043 1 4/1/86 Fire Protection Associated Circuits DAP-E-044 ,11 4/1/86b s Fire Protection Shutdown Procedures DAP-E-045 ,12 4/1/86 % Fire Protection Shutdown by Fire Area Analysis DAP-E-046 U l beter" m s Mounting / Foundations 0
| |
| ! DAP-E-047 Later %/* Cable Tray DAP-E-048 0 Later'n e~ Conduit DAP-E-049 o Later s Ducts DAP-E-050 0 Later e 8KV Cable Terminations and Splices DAP-E-051 o Later % /~ Low Voltage Cable Terminations and Splices DAP-E-052 U Laterve Equipment Installation Spec.
| |
| DAP-E-053 0 taterw. Cable Pulling Tension DAP-E-054 0 LaterWm. Emergency Lighting DAP-E-055 1 4/1/86 D/G Grounding System Design 2
| |
| O
| |
| (' t J
| |
| | |
| - 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION a
| |
| CHECKLIST NUERER , REY. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLBEENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS i
| |
| 5.0 Class 1E motor-operated valve actor starters Verify for selected MOV feeder cables are provided with thernet overtoads, that cable sizes are consistent with cormected to alarm only, and thenmal aspetic the rating of the starter thermal breakers to trip the starter for sustained as petic breaker.
| |
| I tocked rotor conditions. The motor feeders in such cases are sized such that they are protected by the starter thermal magnetic breakers.
| |
| 4 d
| |
| 46.0 The desi p basis, criteria, NRC re ptatory Review criteria h % tists in FSAR
| |
| ; wides, standards, and other documents that Sections 8.1.4.1 thru 8.1.4.9 that are 4
| |
| are implemented in the design of the applicable to cable sizire and verify safety-related systems (as discussed in that att applicable criteria not
| |
| ] Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as follows: apecificatty mentioned in criteria (see FSA* Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9). E3 47 and E3-48 are included in the Note: Specific criteria from documents referenced herein are contained elseidwre in j this list. Reviewers should refer to the
| |
| ] above mentioned FSAR sections for criteria j not specifically mentioned in this list, as appropriate to each review, i
| |
| j 47.0 Cable ampacities are established based on the Select cable samples from the cable j following: sizing calculations and verify that the aspecities of the cables are adequate.
| |
| : 1. IEEE S-135-1 (IPCEA P-46-426), Power Verify also the short circuit 1 DAP FORM E-004, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N -g G.
| |
| k DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION DECKLIST NLSWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESatIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA -
| |
| (D00MNT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS Cable Ampacities, Vot. I (Copper). capability of the cables.
| |
| : 2. IPEA P-54-440 (NEstA WC-51-1972), Review the calculations per the generic Open-Top Cable Trays Aspecities. calculation checklist.
| |
| : 3. National Electrical Code (NEC),195.
| |
| : 4. Manufacttrers Standards.
| |
| 48.0 Cables are derated in accordance with IPCEA using the saae cables as in Criteria P-46-426 (37), LPCEA P-54-440 (38), the 47.0, verify that the deratirg factor National Electrical Code (195), armi is reasonable tiy reviewire the layout amraafecturers recommandations. The followire of the cable in the Raceemy Schedale factors are considered in determining the and drmeings.
| |
| cable sizes:
| |
| Regaest confirmation of as built
| |
| : t. Normat and emergency load currents, configuration.
| |
| : 2. Short-circuit heeting capacity for 6.9-kV toads and 480-V toads fed from the unit stestations.
| |
| : 3. Voltage regulation.
| |
| : 4. Load factor of 100 percent in dactbarts.
| |
| : 5. Grouping derating.
| |
| 2 DAP FultM E-004, REv. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| _ _ . - _ - _ _ _ . . _ . . - - - _ _ . - - . _ - _ _ _ _ . _ . _ , . . . _ . . . - . - _ . _ . _ . _ - .___._..._..m..__.
| |
| I m;% C.5 ,
| |
| DESlal M VIEW E m smil m i DE MLIST IRE E R ,M V._ ,DATE i
| |
| i MFERENE DEscalPTIm SAT /talsAT/ !
| |
| i MD. CRITERIA (DMRSENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICAfim IIC/WA COWENTS
| |
| : 6. Load diversity. f L
| |
| T. Deratig for fire steps and troy covers. ,
| |
| i
| |
| : 8. Ambient temperature.
| |
| t i
| |
| l l
| |
| l L
| |
| L t
| |
| t l
| |
| [
| |
| t 3 DAP Fa N E-006, REV. 2, 08/13/86 ,
| |
| i i
| |
| ! i-1 . _
| |
| | |
| J J J DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST Ntm8ER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREMM DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITER!A (DOCLMENT, PACE) of VERIFICATION NC/MA COGENTS 1.0 Two independent and redtrdant 6900-V Class 1E Spec. ES-5 Verify that the arrangement of 6900-V, tuses are provided for each mit, each Page 3-3 Class 1E buses is the same as sho m in We of s#yire the required Aspend. 1 FSAlt Fig. 8.3-1.
| |
| safety-related loads to safety shut doen the Page 1 mit following a 08A. Each Class 1E bus can Dwg. El-0001 verify that the 6900-V, class 1E bus be fed from two independent of fsite power Cate. V-3 size is sufficient to sagpty the sources or the dieset generator assiped to Page 4 regaired toads listed in FSAR Tables the bus. Arrangement of buses is shown cr) 8.3-8 and 8.3-9 in order to safety Figare 8.3-1, assip1 ment of emergency toads shutchen the mit foltowing a DSA.
| |
| is indicated in Tables 8.3-8 and 8.3-9.
| |
| 2.0 Interemnections between safety-related Spec. ES 5 Verify that circuit breakers located in (Class 1E) and non-safety-related (non-Class Page 3-4 the Emergency Switchgear permit 1E) buses exist between 6900-V buses 1A1 and Dug. E1-0031 inmediate isolation from non-Class 1E 1EA1,1A2 and 1EA2 for unit 1, and 2A1 and She 03 buses den req'd (1A1 and 1EA1, 1A2 and 2EA1, and 2A2 and 2EA2 for Unit 2 by means of IEA2, 2A1 and 2EA1, and 2A2 and 2EA2).
| |
| Isolating switches and circuit breakers.
| |
| These ties fmetion to transmit power to the Class 1E buses if the preferred offsite power systes is mavailable. Circuit breakers located in the emergency switchgear permit Ismediate isolation of these buses from the remaining auxiliary bus system den regaired.
| |
| 3.0 Att switchgear is adeqtately sized ard Catc. IV-3 Verify that the 6900-V Class 1E coordinated to permit safe and reliable Pages 5 & 6 switchgear interrtpting current is operation mder nora.at and short-circuit V-3, Page 4 40,000 A at 7.2kV and that this rating 1 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/S6
| |
| | |
| DESIGil REVIEW EwtuaTIou CIECKLIST ImmOER .AEV. _ ,DATE REFEREIIE DESCRIPTICII SAT /LSISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (nnriormT, PAGE) 0F MERIFICATIGI IIC/ IIA CtseENTS conditions. Spec. ES 5 is aufficient to permit safe oral Interrtatire retings of Ctess 1E euttchener, Appendia 1 rettable operation taider short circuit entor control centers (IICCs) and distribution Pese 2 conditions. In addition, verify that boards are as foltous: the interriptire cepecity is based on the short circuit calculation in effect E @ipemnt Ctess Interrteting at the time of purchase or wonder date Current approvet.
| |
| 6.9 kV 7.2 kV 40,000 A et 7.2 kV Verify that the continuous current suitchgear retire is sufficient to permit safe and reliable operation tsider norest 480-V 600 V 50,000 A et 480 V conditions.
| |
| suitchgeer 480-V entor 600 V 25,000 A et 480 V control centers 120-WC 600 V 10,000 A et 120 V distribution penets 4.0 control pouer for Ctess 1E e pigunent is Spec. ES-5 Verify that the control pouer for provided as fottous: Pages 3-8, 3 14 6900-V Ctess 1E circuit breakers and Dus. E1-0020 associated protective relaying is fed Ctess 1E E@ipment Ctess 1E control from a 125MDC Ctess 1E control power Power Source source.
| |
| 6900-V breaker and 125- WC system 2 DAP FOIIII E-011, REV.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| N
| |
| ] . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EvaLUATIou CIECKLIST ImmKR ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SATANSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATICBI NC/NA CGsENTS sesociated protective ,
| |
| releytre 480-V toed center 125-E system breakers and retsying 480-V entor control 120-VAC derived through center starters control transformers controt reteys and 125- E and 118-V penets and trutrument minterrw tible AC rocks 8.0 8ector feeders cornacted to the 6900-V Dus. El 0004 verify that (1) the motor feeders switchgear buses are protected tpy phase and Spec. ES-5 comected to 6900 V switchgeer buses gra m d overcurrent relays; 480v feeders are App. 5 are protected by phase and ground protected tpw phase overcurrent reters enty. Dus. El-0031 ewercurrent reteys and (2) these reters See Figures 8.3-5 through 8. If the feeder sheets 25, 27, are coordinated with the bus incaming breaker faits to eteer, back ,retering trips 29, 31, 33, 35, releys, d ich provide back ,
| |
| the incomite circuit breaker. Smetter motors 37, 39, 41, 43, protection.
| |
| are comected to leCCs contelnire cambination 45, 47, 49, 51, starters, dere short-circuit protection is 53, 55, 57, 59, provided tpy circuit breakers ord overtoed 63, 65 protection by therent releys. Calc. VIII-6 CC-4 CC-5 (Att. to VIII-6) 3 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| l . .
| |
| 1 i
| |
| ?
| |
| 1
| |
| ; desitin REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST mt .KV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /utSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/WA CosENTS i
| |
| i 4
| |
| a CC-3 (ett. to VIII-5) i
| |
| . 13.0 The minima throngh maalaam system wottages Spec. ES 5 Verify that woltages et switchgoer are f will provide adagante wottage to att Page 3-8 within tolerance range of the breakers i eefety-related ogsipment as discuneed in FSAlt Calc. IV-1 for the espected range of system I
| |
| ; R060.49, Paragraph 2a thrench 2e. Figs. 1, 2, 3, voltages and bus toads.
| |
| 4, and Sh. 55 I
| |
| 18.0 Controt and Instrumentation - Except for Spec. ES 5 ,
| |
| Verify that breaker control agalpment
| |
| ] motor starter circuits and Lacet contactors, Ps 3-8 is suitalde for operation within the
| |
| ! ett control arut instrssentation are engptied Spec. ES 84 range of DC voltages likely to occur in i via the 125v DC or 118v AC reguteted power Pg 3-11 speration.
| |
| I sigplies. The bettery chargers provide e App. 4 Sh 3 naminst 130v DC "ptus or mirms" 1/2K outpst i to the DC owitchbeerds. Irwerters provide a nomdnet 118WAC 21 output to their respecttwe j distritastion penets. Output reputation is maintained isufer the futt rarge of system j voltages indicated.
| |
| 1 42.0 CDC-18 Inspection and Testing of Electric Spec. ES 5 Verify that the breakers and maltlary Pouer Systems. Pages 3-15, egalpment are testatde.
| |
| j 3-16, 3-17, 4 Electric pause systems important to safety 3-20, 3-21, Verify that Ctess 1E switchgeer shall be designed to permit appropriate 3-22, 3-23 provides access for periodic inspection i
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i a
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST ImmOER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /latSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (DO(1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CtBOENTS periodic inspection and testing of important of wiring, insutetton, cornections, and erees and features, such as wiring, components.
| |
| Insulation, comections, and switchboerds, to assess the contirssity of the systems and the verify that the class 1E switchgear is condition of their components. The systems deelysed with the capability to j shatI be designed with a capability to test periodically test its operability and l periodicatty (1) the operability and functionet performance.
| |
| fw etionet performance of the components of the systems, such as onsite power sowces, relays, suitches, and tiuses, and (2) the l cperability of the systems as a d ote and, seder conditions as etcee to destyi as practical, the full operation segaence that j brings the systems into operation, including operation of applicable portions of the protection system, and the transfer of power among the nucteer power imit, the offsite power system, and the onsite power system.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Eksellfication of Class 1E Spec. ES-5 Verify that the Reg. Guide 1.89 Egalpment for Nucteer Pouer Plants. Pages 3-5 thru respairements are included in the 3-7 specIfIcatlon.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E ocpalpment design complies with the cpastification program guidelines as See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory paide dated November, 1974. For detalts see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| 5 DAP FORN E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| . s DESIGN REVIEW EVRUATION CNEMLIST NL8SER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENM DESCRIPTICBI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CmdERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CENGENTS I
| |
| 50.0 Power Quality. Sw criteria See criterie Nos. 79.0 and M .0.
| |
| ; a n. 79.0 and j The verlations of voltage and frepency in 84.0 I the Class IE power systems during any desi p l bests event shalt not degrade the performance of any toed to the extent of causirig
| |
| ! si pificant damage to the fuel cr to the reactor coolant system.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. Sie criterion See criterion No. 73.0.
| |
| mi. 73.0 rag =wnts of Ctess IE power systems, and their associated design, operating, and maintenance documents, shalt be marked or tabeled in a distincti n manner.
| |
| 52.0 Epipment Quellfication. See criterie See criteria Nos. 79.0 and M.0.
| |
| j Nos. 79.0 and Each type of Ctess IE power epipment ahatt 8L.0 be quellfied by analysis, successfut use inder simiter cc M itions, or by actunt test to demonstrate its ability to perform its fimetion u1 der norset and desim basis events.
| |
| e 6 DAP FORM E-011, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEmilST NLMgER ,REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /tMSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCIAENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA COGENTS I
| |
| 53.0 Class IE Power Systems. See Criteria See Criteria Nos. M.0 and 84.0.
| |
| Nos. M.0 and Description. 84.0 The Class IE power systems shall consist of an alternating current power system, a direct-current power system, and a vital instrumentation and control power systaa.
| |
| Ftsstion.
| |
| The Class IE power systems shall provide acceptable power to the station dJring and following any design basis event.
| |
| 66.0 The capability of att Class IE egJipment, See Criterion See Criterion No. M.0.
| |
| Including interfaces, of a nuclear power No. M.0 generating station for performing its rewired ftnction shall be demonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt ocpJipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to styptement type tests. See IEEC Std 323 1974 for detailed recpairements.
| |
| j 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical egJipment except Spec. ES 5 Verify that the 6900 V, Class 1E l motors are identified ty 11 alphanumeric Page 3 2 switchgear is identified as described.
| |
| i 7 DAP FORM E 011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(Bl NC/N4 CGeENTS character tag ru6ers. The eighth character Dwg. El 0006 is either E, P, or (any other character i except E or P), with E designating ogJipment sich is Class 1E, P designating ogJipment sich is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) desipwting ecpalpment dich is
| |
| ; non safety-related.
| |
| Notors stqptled with pumps are identifled by the same tag number as the pg.
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag rusers, Class 1E 5pec. ES 5 Verify that the appropriate color ecpalpeant, raceways, and cables in receueys Fase 3-2, 3 33 coding is specified.
| |
| are identified by the following color coding system:
| |
| : a. ESF Systan Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Channel Level Channet 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 White (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yetlow (Y) 8 DAP FORM E 011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| o-i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CENLIST NLpWER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFEREME Desm IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (000 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits i
| |
| l Associated Train A Orange with d ite stripes (0) l Associated Train 3 Green with d ite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class IE Circuits Train C stack (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and EgJipment Naturst receways color or natural equipment color I
| |
| i 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Ctess 1E Spec. ES 5 Verify that nameplate color codire is l equipment on an aree dich is readily visible Page 3-33 readily visible as described.
| |
| I (e.g., close to nameptete or identification tes runber).
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E ogJipment and circuits are cleerty Spec. ES 5 Verify that design documents and identified on h - nts and drawings in Pages 3 5 thru drawings etearly identify Class 1E accordance with IEEE 494-1974. 37 equipment / circuits per IEEE 494 1974.
| |
| Verify that compliance to IEEE 496-1974 9 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DEsat!PTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS .
| |
| Is specified.
| |
| i 79.0 Att Class 1E e@lpment will be cyaalified per Spec. ES-5 Verify that compliance to IEEE 323 is l IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, Pages 3 6, inctisied within the specification.
| |
| i 3.118, and Amendix 3A for additional details 3-27, 3 28 on enviroruental @stification. Verify that vendor @stification reports are included in a TUGCO j equipment cpatification review and approvat program.
| |
| i 84.0 The seismic cpatification of Class 1E Spec. ES 5 Verify that the appropriate seismic equipment should demonstrate an equipment's Pages 3-6 recpJirements, per IEEE 344 and Reg.
| |
| ability to perform its required function 3 9, 3-24 Guide 1.100 are referenced within the daring and after the time it is sabjected to 3 25, 3-27 apacification.
| |
| the forces resulting from one SSE. In 3-28, 3-30 addition, the equipment must withstand the 3 31 effects of a niaber of OBEs (see Sections 5.4 App. 3 (Spec.
| |
| and 6.1.4 of IEEE 244 (1975)) prior to the SS-2, Appendix application of an SSE. A) 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See criterion See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical egafpment are seismically No. 84.0 ,
| |
| cyaalified in accordance with the procedures and documentation recpairements specified in IEEE 344 1975, Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment a 10 DAP FORN E 011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| N O
| |
| 1 J
| |
| j DESIGN REVIEW EVAtunTION
| |
| ! CNECKLIST lamgER ,REV. _ ,DATE
| |
| ! REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA ColeENTS for Nucteer Power Generating Stations.
| |
| i 86.0 Seismic category I instrumentation and See Criterion See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical espipment includire stanctiy power No. 84.0
| |
| , systems are desi p ed to maintain structuret i integrity and functloneL operability during and ef ter an eartlwpeke of magnitude to to and including the SSE.
| |
| ; 87.0 Att seismic Category I instrumentation and See criterion See Criterion 110 , 84 .0 .
| |
| electrical egalpment are quotified by No. 84.0
| |
| ; analysis or testing, or both. Seismic
| |
| ; anstysis without testing is used if it is I demonstrated that the performance of the equipment aihjected to earttupake motion can be conservatively predicted and if the ftmettonet operability of the instrumentation or equipment is assured by its structural integrity alone.
| |
| 125.0 The sensors that detect loss of preferred and Spec. ES-5 Verify that the toss of reeferred and alternate offsite sources are located in 6.9 Pages 3-20, alternete offsite sources is detected kV safety related switchgear buses 1EA1 and 3 21 by instantanects U.V. relays (located IEA2 for Unit 1 and 2EA1 and 2EA2 for thit 2. App. 5 in the 6.9 KV Switchgeer) d ich The scheme consists of instantaneous Dwes. Initiate the tripping of the circuit undervoltage relays d ich initiate tripping El 0003 and breekers via time delay pick Lp relays.
| |
| 11 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| O ._ .
| |
| b DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /lNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS of the source breakers via time delay pick tp -0004 relays. Catc. VIII-8 Verify that the tadervoltage relay sh. 9, 10 dropout setting is 70K of 6900V and The approximate setting for the loss of Dug. El-0030 that the time delay setting is 0.5 sec.
| |
| voltage detection sensors are sham on figure Sh. 43, 45, 47, 8.3-6 and are as fottaus: & 49 undervoltage relay drepout - 70% of 6900 V Time delay pick tp relay 0.5 sec.
| |
| 127.0 Interrtpting capacities of switchgear, load See Criterion See criterion No. 3.0.
| |
| centers, motor control canters, and No. 3.0 distribution penets are selected on the basis i
| |
| of short circuit calculations.
| |
| 129.0 ReguIatory Guide 1.100 See Criterion See Criterion No. 86.0.
| |
| Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment. No. 86.0 The CPSES design for Class 1E electrical equipment complies with the regJirements and reccamendations of Rev. 1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is met by performing an analysis to verify the approach and/or by following the egaivetent static load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| s e 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRaeER ,REV. _ ,DATE i
| |
| H j .
| |
| REFERENE DESCRIPTI(N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ! NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(N NC/NA CacENTS I
| |
| l
| |
| ) 136.0 m en a Class 1E contact performs a non-Class Dwgs. El-0030, Review switchgeer drawings to deteristne 1E control fmetion (e.g. anergizirg a Shts 26, 30, Class 1E contacts dich perfons i solenoid for a non-Class 1E valve), isolation 62, 63, 68 non-Class 1E control fmctions.
| |
| is provided by an auxiliary relay.
| |
| Verify that isolation is provided by an een a Class 1E contact perfonus a non-Class auxillery relay.
| |
| l 1E monitoring function (e.g. activating an alarm or 1rput to a computer), an isolation is norantly provided by a phototransmitter
| |
| ; cotpled pair (Light emitting diode and I
| |
| transistor).
| |
| i k
| |
| g
| |
| (
| |
| f 1
| |
| I I
| |
| i 1
| |
| l 13 DAP FORM E-011, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| N N . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| CD. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS 10.0 Att safety related Class 1E antors are ES-8A 1. Review 125Vdc battery specification designed to accelerate their driven toads Rev. 2 to ensure finst voltage specified is with 80 percent of the motor rated voltage Sec. 3.7.1.5 greater than or ecpast to 80K.
| |
| available at the terminals. and 3.7.1.E 3
| |
| DCA 11371 2. Review 125Vdc battery discharge test GEN #14 results to ensure actual final voltage greater than 801 for the specified capacity.
| |
| 15.0 control and Instrumentation - Except for 2323-ES-8A Verify that the 125vde battery is motor starter circuits and local contactors, Rev. 2 specified to float at 130Vdc +/- 0.5%.
| |
| all control and instrumentation are styptied Sec. 3.7.1.D via the 125Vdc or 118vac regulated power supplies. The battery chargers provide a nominal 130Vdc "plus or minus" 1/2K output to
| |
| ]
| |
| the de switchboards. Inverters provide a nominal 118vac 2% output to their respective distribution panels. Output regulation is maintained under the full rarge of system voltages indicated.
| |
| l 21.0 Battery Supply. Each battery st4pty shall ES-8A 1. Verify that each 125Vdc Class 1E consist of the storage cetts, connectors, and Rev. 2 battery is provided with a connection its comections to the distribution system Sec. 3.7.1.3 to the associated distribution panel.
| |
| supply circuit breaker. E-0001 Rev. 8 2. Verify the 125Vdc Class 1E battery Each battery stpply shall be capable of configuration to ensure that each 1 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O O- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLAIBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| WO. CRITERIA (DOCIAIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS starting and operating all required loads. battery is continuously on line.
| |
| Each battery stpply shall be Isumediately 3. Verify the 125Vdc Class 1E bettery available daring normat operations and configuration to ensure that each I
| |
| following the loss of power from the bettery can be " floated' by a battery alternating-current system. charger een the system is operational.
| |
| Each battery stpply shall be independent of other bettery supplies.
| |
| Indicators shall be provided to monitor the 4
| |
| status of the bettery sigply.
| |
| Batteries shall be maintained in a fully charged condition. Stored energy shall be sufficient to operate all necessary circuit breakers and to provide an adegaste source of power for all regJired connected loads for as j long as each may be regaired during a loss of alternating-current power to the battery chargers.
| |
| 33.0 Each redmdant Class 1E 125 V system consists E 0001 Review single line drawings to verify of two independent batteries each having, one Rev. 8 bettery designations are as follows:
| |
| main distribution bus with molded case Unit 1, Train A: STIED 1 and BT1ED3 circuit breakers, fusible switches, two Train 8: BT1ED2 and BT1ED4 static battery chargers (one spare), and local distribution panels. RedJndancy of 2 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| G i . .
| |
| J DESIGN REVIEli EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| L*3.CRI TERI A (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS components precludes loss of both systems as a result of a single failure. For Unit 1, betteries BT1EDI and BTIED3 feed all train A toad requirements, white betteries STIED 2 and BTIED4 stpply train B toed requirements.
| |
| For Unit 2, betteries BT2EDI and BT2ED3 feed I att train A load requirements, while betteries BT2ED2 and BT2ED4 stpply train B toad requirements.
| |
| There are no bus ties or sharing of power stpplies between redmdent trains. Class 1E equipment associated with systems shared ty both mits receives power from penet boards having an incoming automatic transfer switch d ich can select power from either unit.
| |
| Transfer switch design is such that power cannot be supplied from both units simultaneously. Train separation is maintained by supplying these shared panelboards from the same train of both mits. Independence and separation are maintained throughout the AC stpply circuitry as well as in the DC distribution network.
| |
| Non-Class 1E loads are not connected to these systems.
| |
| 34.0 Each Class 1E 125-Vdc system has the capacity ES-8A 1) Review bettery specification to 3 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| s A DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 1:3.CR1TERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/hA COGENTS to continuously sigply all the connected Rev. 2 ensure that the description of normal normal rtening load while maintaining its GEN #14 operation identifies contirmous respective bettery in a fully charged charging.
| |
| condition. Each bettery is capable of carrying the essential load continuously for 2) Verify that the BTIED1 and STIED 2 a period of four hr. In the event of a total betteries are rated greater than or toss of onsite and offsite AC power. The ecpet to 1950 Asp-hrs with a minisam bettery capacity for ST1E01 and STIED 2 at an final voltage of 1.75 Volts per celt.
| |
| l eight hr discharge rate with a final voltage of 1.75 v/ cell, is 1950 Ah. The bettery 3) Verify that the BTIED3 and BTIED4
| |
| ; capacity for BTIED3 and BTIED4, at an betteries are rated greater than or i eight hr discharge rate with a final voltage ecpat to 1200 Ag-hrs with a minlaun of 1.75-V/ cell, is 1200 Ah. Battery final voltage of 1.75 Volts per cell, capacities for the Unit 2 Class 1E 125-V betteries are similar. 4) Verify that the lmit 2 Class 1E betteries are rated similarly.
| |
| : 5) Review vendor discharge test results for demonstrated 8 hour capacity.
| |
| 37.0 Ventilation ES 84 Verify that the bettery specification Rev. 2 either specifies a meninam allowable All bettery rooms are ventilated to prevent hydrogen generation rate, or specifies the acctmaatation of gases produced daring that the mexinue hydrogen generation be charging operations. Each Class 1E 125 V determined and doctmented by the battery room is provided with redindant vendor.
| |
| ventilation fans and a separate exhaust duct 4 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NimBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| WO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS
| |
| ; is provided for each room.
| |
| In addition, the battery cells are provided with explosion resistant vent caps that prevent the ignition of gases within the cell from an ignition source outside the cell.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verify that the Reg. Guide 1.89 Equipment for Nucteer Power Plants. regJirements are included in the specification.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E egJipment design complies with the qualification progran guidelines as Also, see Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory guide dated November, 1974. For details se (FSAR)
| |
| ; Section 8.3.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. ES 8A 1) Verify that the bettery Rev. 2 specification specifies distinctive Components of Class 1E power systems, and E-0001 markings for design, operatirgi, and their associated design, operating, and Rev. 8 maintenance docusants; and that maintenance h - nts, shall be marked or maruJfacturer's documentation inplements labeled in a distinctive manner. this requirements.
| |
| : 2) Review single line drawings to ensure batteries are identified as to voltage class and mit/ train designation.
| |
| 5 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRMBER , REV._,D AT E REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0leENTS 52.0 Equipment Quellfication. ES 8A Review battery procurement Rev. 2 specification to ensure safepJard Each type of Class 1E power ecpJipment shall Table 3.5 1 batteries are specified Class 1E.
| |
| , be qualified by analysis, successful use DCA 11371
| |
| , mder similar conditions, or by actual test Also, see criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| to demonstrate its ability to perform its a function under normal and design basis events.
| |
| 4 l
| |
| i f 66.0 The capability of all Class 1E ecpJipment, see criteria 34.0 and 79.0.
| |
| )
| |
| including interfaces, of a nuclear power generating station for perfonning its regJired function shall be dmoonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actual equipment. Operating j experience and analysis may be used to supplement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed recpairements.
| |
| 1 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical ecpJipment except Verify that the Class 1E batteries are motors are identified by 11 al@anumeric identified as described in the l character tag Tssbers. The eighth character criteria.
| |
| ! is either E P, or (any other character except E or P), with E designating egJipment sich is Class 1E, P designating egJipment ,
| |
| l 6 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| ~ m
| |
| }
| |
| J DESIGN REVIEW EVALtJATION CHECKLIST NL348ER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPi10N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18EENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS eich is part of reactor protection channel systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating ecpaipment sich is non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors s@ plied with pumps are identified ty the same tag number as the pumps.
| |
| 69.0 The deslyi bases, criteria, NRC regulatory 3.7.1.1.8 verify that battery cell vents are per guides, standards, and other documents that 3.7.1.4.C8D NEC 480-9.
| |
| are implemented in the design of the
| |
| ) safety-related systems (as discussed in (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 1 8.1.4.9).
| |
| The onsite AC, DC, and 118 V minterruptible
| |
| ; AC electric systeses are in confonaance with General Design Criteria (GDC), NRC Regulatory Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable criteria as listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 and as described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| i Note: Specific criteria fras documents
| |
| ; referenced herein are contained elsed ere in j this list. Reviewers should refer to the above mentioned FSAR seetions for eriteria not specifically mentioned in this list, as j 7 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86 t
| |
| | |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS appropriate to each review.
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag nLabers, Class 1E ES-8A Verify that Train A is identified as equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways Rev. 2 Orange (0) and Train B as Green (G).
| |
| are identified by the following color coding system:
| |
| l l a. ESF System Train 4 Orange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Channel Level j Channel 1 Red (R) l Channel 2 m ite (W) i Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orange with white i stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with tAlte stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class 1E Circuits i
| |
| l 8 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA ColeENTS Train C Black (K) i
| |
| : e. Non-Class 1E Cable Raceueys and Equipment Natural raceways color or natural
| |
| ; equipment color I
| |
| l 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E Verify that nameplate color coding is equipment on an area which is readily visible readily visible as described.
| |
| l' (e.g., close to nameplate or identification tag nLaber).
| |
| 72.0 In general, all Class 1E cables and ES 8A Verify that bettery specification associated cables are jacket color coded Rev. 2 specifies that battery tm* jumper throughout their entire teneth. Cable Jackets cables shall be color coded.
| |
| that recpJire field color coding prior to instattation will be so worked at intervals not to exceed five feet. Cable jackets that regaire field color coding af ter installation l (due to reclassification of cables from associated Class 1E to Class 1E, or vice versa, after their initial pult) will be field color coded as follows: 1 i) Where entering and exiting equipment, raceway and inside jmetion/ putt boxes.
| |
| 9 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| l l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0pgENTS I li) Att exposed portions of the cables will be worked at intervals not to exceed five j feet.
| |
| ! lii) Portions of installed cables in conchJit or trays will not be field color coded.
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E ecpipment and circuits are clearly El-0001 Verify that the Class 1E 125 volt identified on documents and drawings in Rev. 8 betteries are desi pated safety related accordance with IEEE 496-1974. ES 8A on both the single line diagrams and in Rev. 2 the procurament specification.
| |
| 400038C I Rev. A 0578418 Rev. F 77.0 Environmental Type Tests are performed on ES-8A Verify that the bettery specification cables that are regJired to function during Rev. 2 includes all cables (eg. celt links and following a LOCA. and/or bank hspers) within the scope of emironmental cpalification.
| |
| The cable type and cable insulation are i selected to minimize the rate of deterioration dJring the design life of the i plant as a result of temperature, hunidity, and radiation. Environmental Type Tests are performed on cables that are required to function daring and following a LOCA.
| |
| 10 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST Nise8ER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 78.0 Generally, electrical cables are ES-8A Verify that the bettery specification flame-retardant, noW=tible, and Rev. 2 specifies that all cables confona to
| |
| ; non-propagating in nature and conform to the IEEE 383-1974.
| |
| ] criterion of IEEE 383-1974. They will not support c e ntion in the absence of a sustained ignition source.
| |
| 79.0 Att Class 1E egJipment will be qualified per Verify that the bettery specification IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, specifies that Class 1E betteries be 3.11B, and Appendix 3A for additional details gastified in accordance with IEEE j
| |
| m envirorwental gaellfication. 323-1974.
| |
| i, Verify that vendor quotif kation reports are incitded in a TUGC0 egJipment gaellfication review and approvat program, i
| |
| ! 84.0 The seismic gJalification of Class 1E ES-8A Review bettery specification to ensure
| |
| ] equipment should demonstrate an equipment's Rev. 2 that:
| |
| ability to perfone its required function 4
| |
| daring and af ter the time it is stbjected to 1) Functionality is specified for both the forces resultirg from one SSE. In daring and after a SSE.
| |
| addition, the equipment must withsttnd the ef fects of a ntaber of Dees (see Sections 5.4 2) The appropriate seismic and 6.1.4 of IEEE-344 (1975)) prior to the regJiraments per IEEE 3 n and Reg.
| |
| 11 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCNENTS i
| |
| application of an SSE. Guide 1.100 are referenced.
| |
| 85.0 Seismic category I instrumentation and ES 8A See Criterion 84.0.
| |
| electrical equipment are seismically Rev. 2 cpalified in accordance with the procedares and documentation re@irements specified in IEEE 344 1975, Reccamended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Ecpipment fer Nuclear Power Generatire Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic category I instrumentation and See criterion 84.0.
| |
| ) electrical epipment including standzy power
| |
| , systens are designed to maintain structural t integrity and functional operability during and after an earth @ ake of magnitude tp to and including the SSE.
| |
| I 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion 84.0.
| |
| electrical ep ipment are qualified by analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the performance of the ecpipment stbjected to earthwake motion can be conservatively predicted and if the functional operability of the instrumentation or equipment is assured by its structural 12 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(N NC/MA C(BSENTS integrity alone.
| |
| 88.0 Stpports of instrumentation and electrical ES-8A Review the bettery specification to equipment such as bettery racks, instrument Rev. 2 ensure that the actual bettery rack racks, control consoles, cabinets, and panels 0629980 design to be styptied is included in are anatyred or tested, or both, by their Rev. E the bettery gaellfication scope.
| |
| suppliers in accordance with the methods and procedures described in Section 3.73.2.1.3
| |
| )
| |
| (of the FSAR).
| |
| 101.0 In lieu of Section 2.1 of IEEE Std 383 1974, ES 8A Review bettery specification to "Introd4ction," the following should be used: Rev. 2 determine if bettery bank jtapers are
| |
| ! within the bettery scope. If so, then l
| |
| " Type tests described in this h e t are verify:
| |
| methods that shall be used to gaellfy electrical cables, field splices, and 1) IEEE 383 1984 is specified
| |
| ! connections for use in nuclear power l generating stations. Tests of the cable or 2) The leposed exception / clarification connection assembly, as applicable, shall of the IEEE "Introdactiore is defined.
| |
| j then styplement the cable tests in order to gastify the connectione and other aspects u11que to planned usage.
| |
| The values of pressure, teoperature, radiation, chemical concentrations, humidity, and time indicated in IEEE Std 323 1974 do not represent acceptable limits for att 13 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION CGOENTS NC/NA t
| |
| nuclear power generating stations.
| |
| j The user of this guide shall ensure that the values used in the re @lred type tests represent acceptable limits for the service conditions in dich the cable, or comections, or both, will be installed.
| |
| "Results of prior tests that are being used as the bases 102.0 In lieu of Section 2.3.2 of IEEE Std ES-8A Review the bettery specification to
| |
| ; 383-1974, "Long-Term Physical Aging Rev. 2 determine if the bettery bank jumpers l Properties," the followire should be used: are within the bettery scope. If so, then verify:
| |
| i " Aging data shall be semitted to establish
| |
| ! Lorg term performance of the insulation. 1) IEEE 383 1964 is specified
| |
| ; Data may be evaluated using the Arrhenius
| |
| ) technl@e. A minim a of 3 data points, 2) The'i=pasad exception / clarification including 136 degrees C and two or more of the IEEE "Long Term Physical Aging i others at least 10 degrees C apart in Properties" is defined.
| |
| temperature, snell be used.
| |
| 4 "If there is not sufficient evidence that accelerated aging technicpes can reliably prochxe end-of life conditions, the following ongoing cpolification proceckare should be used.
| |
| 14 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86 1
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| J -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF VLRIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS
| |
| " Ongoing Qualification Procedare - Some types of cables, field splices, and connections 3
| |
| (hereafter referred to only as cables) may not respond in a representative anmer to accelerated aging technigJes to establish end-of-design-tife con 11tians. Consegaently, the gaalified life would be less than the regJired design life. There are two i suggested methods of achieving tong-tene (design life) gJallfication:
| |
| i (a) After a planned period less than the gaatified life of the cable has been reached, representative cables should be replaced with new cables and the removed cables stbjected to a qualificetion test similar to that performed prior to installation. This test should include adfitional accelerated aging.
| |
| Successful completion of this test extends the gaalified life of the installed cables.
| |
| This procedJre should be repeated tntil the gaalified life egaals or exceeds the required d-si r life.
| |
| , (b) Additional identical cables should be installed in a nuclear power generating station location where power toeding and service conditions egaat or exceed those of 1
| |
| 15 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| I I
| |
| i i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmgER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO.CRITEP!A (DOClmENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/WA ColeENTS the cable to be cpalified. A cable should be removed af ter a plamed period less than the previously qualified life and s 4]ected to a cpatification test similar to that perfonned prior to installation. This test should include accelerated aging. Successful completion of this test extends the cpalified life of the installed cable. Sufficient additional identical cables should be initially instatted in order that the abwe procedure can be repeated mtil the cpatified life ecpals or exceeds the required desip life.
| |
| l "If the above methods demonstrate that the
| |
| ) cpalified Life is less than the design life, j e periodic replacement plan should be instituted."
| |
| l 104.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.1 of IEEE Std ES 8A Review battery specification to 383-1974, " General," the following should be Rev. 2 determine if battery bank hapers are i used: within the battery scope. If so, then verify:
| |
| ; "This section describes the method for type j testing of gro w ed cables via the vertical 1) IEEE 383 1964 is specified 1 tray flame test to determine their relative j self-extinguishing tendencies. Testing shall 2) The imposed exception / clarification include both aged and maged cable of the IEEE " General" (Section 2.5.1) 16 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| 'i
| |
| | |
| O U.
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERtFICATION NC/NA COGENTS specimens." is defined.
| |
| 105.0 In lieu of Sectin 2.5.2.2 of IEEE Std ES 8A Review bettery specification to 383-1974, the following should be used: Rev. 2 determine if bettery bank Jumpers are within the bettery scope. If so, then "The fire test provisions of the standard are verify:
| |
| useful in screening out cable insulation materials that are inadecpately 1) IEEE 383-1984 is specified self extinguishing, but they shalt not be construed as cpatification of any instatted 2) the imposed exception /ctarification cable system confitpration. If field splices of the IEEE Section 2.5.2.2 is defined.
| |
| are to be used in cable trays, special provisions shall be made to demonstrate that the fire retardent properties of the cable
| |
| , are not altered unacceptably in an adverse way by the field splice."
| |
| 106.0 Section 2.5.4.2 of IEEE STD Review bettery specification to 383 1974---Vertical tray configuration should determine if bettery bank jtapers are be used and teiderstood to mean perpendicular within the bettery scope. If so, then to the plane of the horizon. verify:
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383-1964 is specified
| |
| : 2) The imposed exceptlon/cterification of the IEEE Section 2.5.2.2 is defined.
| |
| 17 DAP FORM E-012, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N -
| |
| * DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COgENTS 107.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4 of IEEE Std ES 8A Review bettery specification to 383-1974, the following should be used: Rev. 2 determine if battery benk jumpers are j within the bettery scope. If so, then "The gas burner flame source shall consume verify:
| |
| l propane gas so as to release approximately l 70,000 BTU per hour at an air-gas ratio of 5 1) IEEE 383 1974 is specified to 1. Natural grade propene shall be used.
| |
| ; 2) The imposed exception /
| |
| j clarification of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4 is defined.
| |
| 108.0 In lieu of the first sentence of Section ES 8A Review bettery specification to j 2.5.4.4.1 of IEEE Std 383-1974, the following Rev. 2 deteneine if bettery bank Jtapers are should be used: within the bettery scope. If so, then j verify:
| |
| j "The ribbon gas burner shall be momted horizontally such that the flame ispinges on 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified j the specimen midway between the tray rmes and so that the burner face is in front of 2) The imposed exception / clarification and 4 inches from the cable and approximately of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4.1, first 2 feet above the bottom of the tray." See sentence, is defined.
| |
| R.G. 1.131 for specification of ribbon gas burner.
| |
| j 109.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4.3 of IEEE Std ES-8A Review bettery specification to 383 1974, the following should be used: Rev. 2 determine if battery bank jimpers are 18 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| p O
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS within the battery scope. If so, then
| |
| " Flame size wiLL normally be achieved een verify:
| |
| the propane flow is 27.8 standard cubic feet per hour and the air flow is 139 standard 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified ctbic feet per hour."
| |
| : 2) The imposed exception / clarification of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4.3 is
| |
| ; defined.
| |
| I 110.0 Section 2.5.4.5 of IEEE Std 383-1974 is not ES-8A Review bettery specification to endorsed by this regulatory speide. Rev. 2 determine if bettery bank itspers are within the battery scope. If so, then verify:
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383 1974 is specified
| |
| : 2) The exception of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.5 is identified.
| |
| ! 111.0 The recommendations indicated by "should" and ES-8A Review battery specification to the options indicated by "any" in the Rev. 2 detennine if bettery bank Jtapers are sections of IEEE Std 383 1974 Indicated below within the bettery scope. If so, then have sufficient importance to be treated the verify:
| |
| same as re @irements of the standard:
| |
| I
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified l a. Section 1.3.1, " Cable Description"
| |
| : b. Section 1.3.2, " Field Splices or 2) The reconnendations listed in the 19 DAP FORM E-0?2, REV. 1, 08/*3/86 i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST WLMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 8:3. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0leENTS Comection Description" criteria are specified as regJirements
| |
| : c. Section 1.3.4.1, " Meeting Service rather than electives.
| |
| Conditions", the first sentence.
| |
| : d. Section 1.3.4.2.1, "Destyi sasis Event---LOCA"
| |
| : e. Section 1.4.1, " General"
| |
| : f. Section 1.4.3, " Test Results"
| |
| : g. Section 1.4.4, Test Evolustion"
| |
| : h. Section 2.2, Type Test Samples"
| |
| : i. Section 2.3.3, "Thernet and Radiation Exposure"
| |
| : j. Section 2.3.3.3 '
| |
| : k. Section 2.3.3.4
| |
| : 1. Section 2.4.3, "LOCA Siamatation"
| |
| : m. Section 2.4.3.1
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.2
| |
| : o. Section 2.4.4, " Post LOCA Sisulation lest"
| |
| : p. Section 2.5.2.1
| |
| : q. Section 2.5.4.3
| |
| : r. Section 2.5.4.4.2
| |
| : s. Section 2.5.5, " Evaluation"
| |
| : t. Section 2.5.6, " Instrument cable and Single cardsctors from Multicordstor Assembly", the recmunendation that the tested ccble pass a flame resistance test in accordance with ASTM D2220-68.
| |
| 20 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| J O~ ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERE4Cd DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COBOENTS 113.0 Battery Sagply ES-8A 5) Review bettery specification to Rev. 2 ensure that " pilot = cells are specified (1) Description. Each bettery sigiply shall for each Class 1E bettery bank.
| |
| consist of the storage cells, comectors, and I its comections to the distribution system sagiply circuit breaker.
| |
| (2) Capability. Each bettery sigiply shall be capable of starting ard operating all regaired toads.
| |
| ; (3) Availability. Each bettery sigipty shall be lainediately available during noneet operations and following the loss of power from the alternating-current s pten.
| |
| (4) Indeperulence. Each bettery supply shall be independent of other bettery supplies.
| |
| ! (5) Survelliance. Indicators shall be l provided to monitor the status of the bettery a g ly.
| |
| (6) Stored Energy. Batteries shall be maintained in a fully charged condition.
| |
| Stored energy shall be sufficient to operate all necessary circuit breakers and to provide an adequate source of power for att regJired connected loads for as long as each may be 21 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| s
| |
| .~.i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLM8ER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0leqENTS reg 2 ired charing a loss of alternating-current power to the battery chargers.
| |
| 119.0 The Type Test of Class 1E electric celes, See criterion No. 78.0.
| |
| field splices, and connections shall be per IEEE Std 383 1974.
| |
| t' 120.0 Reg. Guide 1.131 - Qualification Tests of See criterion 78.0.
| |
| Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Comections for Light Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants.
| |
| Although the laplementation of this i
| |
| regulatory guide, dated August 1977, does not include CPSES, all Class 1E cables of the CPSES meet most of the requirements of this regulatory guide with the few exceptions noted below:
| |
| : a. ALL prefabricated cables of the CPSES do not meet the following requirements:
| |
| : 1. Vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to determinetheir relative self-extinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6); ,
| |
| 22 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmgER ,REV._ ,DATE I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CGgENTS
| |
| ) 2. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regalatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| However, work is in progress by vendor on these items,
| |
| : b. All 8kV cables, 600V power tighting cables of the CPSES do not meet the following regJirements:
| |
| : 1. " Radiation Exposure Total" - per RepJlatory Guide 1,89 Position C.5.
| |
| : 2. Vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to detennine their relative self extinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6).
| |
| : 3. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| : 4. Gas and air flow requirements (Regulatory Guide position c.11).
| |
| 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 See Criterion No. 86.0.
| |
| Seismic Qualification of Electric EgJipment.
| |
| The CPSES design for Class 1E electricat l equipment complies with the reqJirements and i
| |
| i i
| |
| 23 DAP FORM E-012, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| l 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLueER , REY._ ,DATE i
| |
| f REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| C:3. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS recommendations of Rev. 1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| 1 The intent of Section C.1 is met by performing an analysis to verify the approach and/or by following the espivalent static toad method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 1 T
| |
| I 24 DAP FORM E 012, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| i o x
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER. ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CODGENTS 25.0 The design and walification tests (of the ES 12 N/C Att re@irements of IEFE 317 1976 are further contairunent electrical penetration ES-12A delineated in detail in other criteria in assemblies) are in accordance with this checklist.
| |
| 1EEE-317-1976.
| |
| l 43.0 GDC-50 contalrunent Design Basis. ES 12 Review spec and vendor certified test ES 12A data and verify that the penetration The reactor contalrunent structure, includire assembtles can withstand with access openings, penetrations, and the sufficient margin the pressure and containment heat rencval system shall be temperature conditions resulting from a deciped so that the contalrunent structure loss of coolant accident without l and its internet compartments can exceeding its design tenkage rate.
| |
| ecconenodate, without exceedire the design j Leakage rate and, with sufficient margin, the i calculated pressure and temperature conditions resulting from any loss-of-coolant accident. This margin shalt reflect consideration of (1) the effects of potentist
| |
| ; energy sources which have not been included j in the determination of the peak conditions, i such as energy in steen generators and energy from metat-water and other chemical reactions i that may result from degraded anergency core I cooting functionirg, (2) the 1imited experience and experimental data available for defining accident phenomena and contairinent responses, and (3) the I conservatism of the calculational model and
| |
| )
| |
| I 1 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| o O' ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(W NC/NA CCIGENTS input parameters.
| |
| 44.0 (DC-53 Provisions for Contairunent Testing ES 12 Review spec and vendor drawings and and Inspection. ES-12A verify that inspection and test provisions are provided.
| |
| The reactor conteirinent shatt be designed to permit (1) appropriate periodic inspection of all luportant arees, such as penetrations, (2) en appropriate surveitlance program, and (3) periodic testing at conteirament desipi pressure of the leaktightness of penetrati es iAlch have resittent seats aruf espansion beitows.
| |
| 48.0 Reg. Guide 1.63 - Electric Penetration ES-12 Verify that short circuit cate. at the Assembtles in Conteirament Structures for ES 12A penetration was perfonned and that the Light Water cooled Nuclear Power Plants. IV-9 m/r ratio used is within the guidelines IV 10 of the Reg. Guide. Verify that
| |
| : The CPSES electric penetration assemblies dielectric strength lupulse voltage comply with the intent of Rev. 2 (7/78) of meets the Reg. Guide. Verify that j this regulatory guide. For details see priumry and backtp short circuit Section 8.3. protection meets single fatture l regairements.
| |
| i 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of class 1E Verify that vendor qualification
| |
| ' Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. reports are included in a TUGC0 i
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| o r o-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (00CLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS equipment gaatification review and The CPSES Class 1E egJipment design compt'les approvat program.
| |
| with the gaatification program guidelines as i delineated in this regulatory pJide dated November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| i 1
| |
| 51.0 Identification. Verify that the penetration and its associated design, operating, and rw ts of Class IE power systems, and maintenance h w ts are sunrked or their associated design, operating, and labeled in a distinct namer.
| |
| maintenance documents, shall be marked or j tabeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| i 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Verification is perfonned in
| |
| ; conj metion with criterion 49.
| |
| l Each type of Class IE power agalpuent shall be qtatified by analysis, successful use j tmder similar conditions, or by actual test i to demonstrate its ability to perform its function teder norant and design basis events.
| |
| 55.0 Pressure Botmdary. ES-12 Review specification and vendor ES-12A drawings to verify penetration The mechanical design, materials, compliance to Section III, Stbsection 3 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| I c - -
| |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| ! NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CCDeENTS 4
| |
| ! fabrication, emaninstion, and testing of the IE.
| |
| l pressure boundary of the electric penetration asseely shalt be in accordance with the regJirements of the AS8E Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Division 1, Section III, Sdmeetion NE for Class MC Components.
| |
| 56.0 Gas Leakage Rate. IPS-888 Verify that: (1) predaction tests per Pre-operational IEEE 317 1976 Section 7.1 have been (1) Electric penetration assembly, emetusive testing. performed prior to shipannt and, (2) of aperture seet(s). The electric field tests per IEEE 317-1976 Section penetration assembly shall be desipud to 8.3 have been perfonned after have a total gas teek rete, enctusive of the installation.
| |
| aperture seet(s), not greeter than 1X10 (E-6)
| |
| Std. cm 3/s of dry helium at 20 degrees C
| |
| , plus or minus 15 degrees C (66 degrees F plus
| |
| ) or minus 27 degrees F) at the snaisuo
| |
| ! specified contairment pressure.
| |
| (2) Electric penetration assembly, includity j aperture seet(s). The electric penetration i essenbty shall be designed to have a total gesteak rate, including the aperture seal (s),
| |
| not greater then 1X10 (E-2) Std. cm 3/s of
| |
| , dry nitrogen at the seximum specified contairment pressure and temperature.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| N DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NueER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 57.0 Gas Leak Rate Testing Provisions. Review specification and vendor drawings to verify the testability of Electric penetration esseatdies having dcable the dotble seats without discomecting electric conciactor seats or dnble aperttre the circuit conductor from the seats, or both, shall be designed for and essembly.
| |
| shalt incitale provisions for gas-teek rate testing of the dotete seats after instattation. Testire provisions shall be accessible without discomectire external circuit conthsetors from the assembly.
| |
| 58.0 Mechanical Integrity. Review vendor certified test report to ensure that the mechanical sagsport The mechanical stgiport systems, conikactors, system, conductors, and conductor and conductor sigport systems, pressure sagsport systems, pressure barrier and barrier (s), and conductor and aperture seets aperture seats are designed to shall be designed to withstand without withstand, without loss of ftmetion or failure or loss of ftmetion the following failure, the stated service conditions.
| |
| conditions:
| |
| (1) rated cor*tinuous current (2) specified thernet cycling dse to
| |
| ~
| |
| normal operation
| |
| , (3) rated short-time overtoed current and l duration (4) rated short-circuit current and daration (5) specified design basis event 5 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, '06/26/86 e
| |
| | |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER , REY. _ ,DATE
| |
| ! REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION WC/NA CDeENTS l
| |
| (6) specified seismic events.
| |
| )
| |
| 59.0 Contairment Integrity. Review vendor certified test report to j ensure that the penetration assembtles l The electric penetration assamtdy and and apertures are designed to have a i aperture seal (s) shall be designed to have a total gas-Leak rate per IEEE 317-1976 i total gas Leak rate not greater than 1X10 Section 5.1.5 tsider the stated service
| |
| ; (E-2) Std. cm 3/s of dry nitrogen for the condition incttsling short circuit conditions listed in Section 5.1.4, plus the current.
| |
| rated maximun & ration of rated short circuit current.
| |
| 60.0 Packaging, Shipping, Receiving, Storage, and Verify that the penetration assembtles Mandling. are desipied to meet the packagire, shipping, receiving, storage and The electric penetration assembly shall be handling respairement of IEEE 317-1976, desipied to meet the fottowing requirements: Section 5.1.6.
| |
| (1) ANSI N45.2.2-1972.
| |
| l (2) Withstand, without damage, exposure j & ring shipping or storage of temperature
| |
| ! extremes of -1.1 degrees C to 65.5 degrees C
| |
| (+30 degrees F to 150 degrees F).
| |
| l Note: The low-tenperature exposure & ring l
| |
| shipping or storage of pressurized electrical penetration assenbtles shall not be less than l
| |
| 6 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l _ _ _
| |
| | |
| c O* ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| l l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CG4ENTS
| |
| , the rated minisun service temperature.
| |
| 1 61.0 Installation. Verify that the penetration assembtles meet the installation recpJirements or The electric penetration assembly shalt be IEEE 317-1976 Section 5.1.7. If I desliped to seet the following respairements: attachment is by welding, wrify
| |
| ; procockre specifled.
| |
| (1) ANSI M45.2.4-1972.
| |
| (2) laere the method of attachment to the contairement vessel is by weldirge, the I
| |
| assembly shall be desigrwi so that the welding will not danese the assembly.
| |
| 62.0 General. Verify that the penetration assemblies are desliped to meet the followirge: (1)
| |
| The electric penetration assembly shall be conchetor insulation is flame ,
| |
| desliped to meet the followirge recpJirements: retardant; (2) medium voltage power l conductors are fs.e of partial
| |
| ) (1) Conchetor insulation systems and discharge (corona) then energized at
| |
| ] non-metattic materials shall be flame rated voltage; (3) instrumentation
| |
| ] retardant. cabling is consistent with the
| |
| ; rgirements of the instrument (4) the
| |
| ] (2) Nedium voltage power conchetors shall be insulation of aech corector can free of partial discharge (corma) then withstand dielectric test specified j energized at rated voltage, without electrical breakdown or leakage current; (5) thennocoLpte conductors (3) Instrumentation circuits shall be and comection are consistent with the j
| |
| 4 7 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 j
| |
| | |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIOel CNECKLIST MLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| 1 1
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| 1 NO. CRITERIA (DO(INENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 1
| |
| i 1
| |
| deslywd to meet the requirements of the regJirements of ANSI-C96,1; (6) instrumentation systen in dich they are comections and splices are capable of taed. carryire rated continuous current; (7) j dere penetration assembtles have j (4) The ineutation system of each condJctor cardstors of more than one wttage l shatt be capable of withstanding, without retirie, a ground barrier separating i electrical breakdoom or excessive teakage each voltage rating is provided.
| |
| I current, the dielectric tests specified in Section 6 of IEEE Std. 317-1976.
| |
| 1 l (5) Thermocotple condstors and comections I shalL be designed i.ithin the error timits for
| |
| ! thersocotple circuits in accordance with ANSI C96.1 (6) Comections and splices of medium- and i tow-voltage power and control conductors j shatt be capable of carrying rated contirmous current prior to and followirig rated short circuit current without the temperature
| |
| ; of the connections or splices exceeding the temperature of the condJctor.
| |
| i (7) Electric penetration assembtles having
| |
| ) conductors of more than one voltage rating in I
| |
| the assembly shall be desipwd with a groted i
| |
| I barrier separating the condstor of each voltage rating.
| |
| 8 DAP FOR91 E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I i
| |
| h 1
| |
| | |
| I 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IM WER ,REV._ ,DATE i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENtS C3.0 Electrical Integrity. Review spec and vendor certified test l report for condxtors, comections, and j The conductors, comections, and electrical insulation for conforumnce to the
| |
| ! Insulation systems shall be desired to rewirements, withstand without failure or loss of fisiction the foLtowing conditions:
| |
| i (1) rated continuous current and rated 1
| |
| voltage I
| |
| I (2) specified therunt cycling chas to normel operation I
| |
| f (3) rated short-time overload current and
| |
| ! duration l
| |
| (4) rated short-circuit current and
| |
| & ration j (5) specified design basis events 1
| |
| l (6) specified seismic event l
| |
| l (7) aging t
| |
| 4 (8) radiatlon.
| |
| i i
| |
| 9 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| N , .
| |
| k I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NL8WER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| I' REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| I NO. CRITERIA (DOCLDIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA ColelENTS 64.0 Verification. ES-12 Review spec and vendor design ES 12A gatification report. Verify that Desi p qualification shall be verified by penetration assembtles were type tested I
| |
| material tests and by type tests performed on with margins specified in IEEE-317-1976 l representative electric penetration Section 6.
| |
| assemblies (EPA). In determining representative assemblies, consideration j shall be given to service classification and ratings. The tests shalt demonstrate that l
| |
| the electric penetration assembly will
| |
| : perform its intended ftnction edun stbjected
| |
| ) to conditions that sinutate instatted life
| |
| ! inder the specified service conditions. For l acMitional requirements see Section 6. of i IEEE Std 317-1976.
| |
| 1 1
| |
| 1 3
| |
| 65.0 The contents of the deste specification for ES 12 Review spec and verify that it is j electric penetration assemblies shalt ES-12A consistent with the respirement of IEEE I include, as a minisaan, those items listed in 317-1976 Section 10.2.
| |
| paragraph 10.2 of IEEE-317 (1976).
| |
| ,f -
| |
| i i
| |
| j 66.0 The capability of att Class IE egipment, ES-12 Review spec and test report ard verify including interfaces, of a nutteer power ES 12A that the respired function of the j generating station for performing its penetrations are demonstrated.
| |
| I regaired ftnction shall be demonstrated. It I
| |
| is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt egipment. Operating i 10 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS experience and analysis any be used to sagptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed recpirements.
| |
| 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical ecpipment except Review spec and drawings and verify motors are identified by 11 alphanumeric that tagefte or identification of character tag rsabers. The eighth character ecpipment complies with the stated is either E, P, or (any other character recpirements.
| |
| except E or P), with E designatirg ocpipment dich is Class 1E, P designating ocpipment s ich is part of reactor protection channet systems, ard (other characters except E or P) designating ecpipment sich is non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors sLpplied with pimps are identified by the same tag number as the pamps.
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag rumbers, Class 1E Verify that the penetrations are ocpipment, raceways, and cables in raceways identified by color coding in addition are identified by the following color coding to the tag raabers.
| |
| systan:
| |
| : a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| , Train e Green (G) i l
| |
| i 11 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRAISER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESG IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSqENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CG9ENTS
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamel Level Chamet 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 White (W)
| |
| D annel 3 stue (3)
| |
| Gamet 4 Yettou (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Oran0e with e ite stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with d ite stripes (G)
| |
| , d. Non-Class IE Circuits Train C Black (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Racemeys and EgJipment Natural raceways color or natural l ecpalpment color i
| |
| l 71.0 The color codire is applied to the Class 1E Review spec and drawings and verify
| |
| ! egalpment on an aree which is readily visible color coding is appropriately specified
| |
| ! (e.g., close to nameplate or identification and provided.
| |
| l tag ru ter).
| |
| l l
| |
| i 12 DAP FORM E 013, REV.1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| 4 l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| O O O~ ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER . REY._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 73.0 Class 1E egaipment ard circuits are clearly verify that the penetrattore are identified on h-nts and drawings in identified as Class 1E on h - nts and accordance with IEEE 496-1974. drawings.
| |
| 75.0 Catde ampacities are established based on the ES 12 Review spec and penetration cable following: ES-12A ampacities provided by vendor and verify that they are consistent with
| |
| : 1. IEEE S 135 1 (IPEA P-46 426), Power the stated standards.
| |
| Cable Aspecities, Vol. t (Copper)
| |
| : 2. IPCEA P-54-440 (MEnA WC-51-1972),
| |
| open-Top Cable Trays Aspecities
| |
| : 3. National Electricat Code (NEC),1975
| |
| : 4. MaruJfacttrers Standards.
| |
| 79.0 Alt class 1E egalpment will be gaalified per Verification is performed in IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, conJtmetion with criterion 49.0.
| |
| 3.118, end Amendix 3A for ackfitional details on environmentat qtatification.
| |
| ; 82.0 The electric penetration assembly design IV-9 Review calculation and certified test i complies with the intent of MRC Regulatory IV-10 report and verify compliance to Reg.
| |
| 13 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/d6
| |
| | |
| l
| |
| (% 9\
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l CIECKLIST immBER ,REV. _ ,DATE
| |
| ! REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ! No. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA C0lelENTS i
| |
| l l Guide 1.63. See FSAR Section 8.3.1.2.1 Item Guide 1.63 for the x/r ratio used and
| |
| : 6. for additional criteria (especially duration of maxima short circuit
| |
| ! relative to protective devices). current. (h test report verify the I lapulse voltage withstand test and the 5000 hour aging.
| |
| 83.0 Westinghouse - Contairuoant Electrical Review spec and vendor certified test Penetration Re @ irements report and verify that Westinghouse
| |
| ) re@lromants stated on h==nt W-SIP l E-EPS 67 Rev. 6 on penetration i assembtles are considered.
| |
| j l
| |
| 1 84.0 The seismic cyaalification of Class IE Review spec and verify that the equipment should daeanstrate an ecpilpment's appropriate selenic cpaalification
| |
| , ability to perform its recpaired function regairements are specified.
| |
| deing and af ter the time it is subjected to the forces resulting from one SSE. Ir addition, the ecpalpeant aust withstand the j ef fects of a nLater of 00Es (see Sections 5.4 and 6.1.4 of IEEE-344 (1975)) prior to the apptication of an SSE.
| |
| 4 j 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in electrical eqJipment are seismicetty conjmetion with criterion M.0, 3 cpantified in accordance with the procedares I
| |
| and documentation recpairements specified in i 14 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 0
| |
| 1 1
| |
| 1
| |
| : C . .
| |
| l k
| |
| . m i
| |
| I I DESIGN REVIEW EVAltlATION CNECKLIST IamgER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) DF WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS l 4 IEEE 344-1975, Reccsamended Practices for, Seismic Qualification of Class 1E EgJipment for Nuclear Power Generatirg Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic Category I instrtmentation and verification is performed in electrical egalpment includire stancRsy power conjmetion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| systems are designed to maintain strtetural integrity and ftsictional operability daring and af ter an earthganke of magnitude tp to and inctufine the SSE.
| |
| 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrumentation and verification is perfonned in electrical egaipment are gastified by conJm etion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| anetysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the performance of the egaipment stbjected to earthganke motion can be conservatively predicted and if the fmetional operability of the instrumentation or egalpasnt is assured by its structuret integrity stone.
| |
| 90.0 Section 4.2.4 of IEEE Std 317-1976 should be ES-12 Review spec, calculations, and sigptemented by the following: ES-124 certified test report, and verify that IV 9 penetration assembly is designed to The electric penetration assenbty should be IV 10 withstand the man short circuit current 15 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER__, REY._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION WC/NA CGeENTS desipwd to withstand, without loss of vs. time without loss of mechanical mechanical integrity, the maalaun integrity.
| |
| short-circuit current vs. time conditions that could occur given singte random faltures of circuit overtoed protection devices. The circuit overload protection system should conform to the criteria of IEEE Std 279-1971,
| |
| " Criteria for Protection Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations," (also desipiated ANSI N42.7 1972).
| |
| 91.0 The ammisun short-circuit current assessed at IV-9 Review short-circuit calculation at the the penetration assembly should be consistent IV-10 penetration asemely and verify that with the criteria used in estatdishing the the X/R ratio used in calculation is interrtating capability of the protective consistent with the regairement of Reg.
| |
| device esacciated with the penetration hide 1.63-1978.
| |
| assembly concisctors. Accordingly the provisions of Section 4.2.4 of IEEE Std 217-1976, pertaining to the rated short-circuit current for attemating-current circuits should be modified as follows:
| |
| Rated Voltage (V) x/r Ratio 300 greater than 8 600 greater than 8 1000 greater than 8 5000 greater than 15 f 16 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 I
| |
| | |
| __ . .- _~ . .
| |
| \
| |
| i l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i
| |
| CNECKLIST MlmBER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| ! REFEREN DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS
| |
| ; 8000 greater than 15 f 15000 greater than 15 i Note: Values based on data of ANSI (37.010-1972, " Application Guide for AC Nigh-Voltage Circuit Breaker Rated on a l Syuumetrical Current Sasis".
| |
| i l 92.0 The provisions of Section 4.2.4 of IEEE Std Review performed u1 der criterion 82.0.
| |
| ! 317-1976 pertaining to the dtration of the sexious short-circuit current are i representative of circuits protected ty j molded-case circuit breakers but are not 4 representative of circuits using other air
| |
| ] circuit breakers. The provisions pertainirts to the duration of the maxima short-circuit current should be modified as foltous:
| |
| I i service Duration (s)
| |
| Classification Low-voltage power 0.033 (for I and control molded-case circuit control breakers) 0.066 (for other air circuit breakers) 1 l
| |
| 17 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| l I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| O O
| |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CMECKLIST lamgER ,REV._ ,DATE j
| |
| l l REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| j 93.0 Section 6.4.4 of IEEE Std 317-1976, Review perfonned imder criterion 82.0.
| |
| j '9fetectric-Strength Test," should be
| |
| ) sigptomented, for cyaalification testing only, ty the foltouirg:
| |
| Note: This additionet staff position, not contained in Rev. 1, was included in a letter to the Division 1 Distribution, dated 2-78.
| |
| ]
| |
| , Each medlim-voltage power conductor shaLL be j given an impulse withstand test ty applying a 1.2 x 50 microsecond ispulse voltage test j series consisting of three positive and three
| |
| ) negative lopulse voltages. If flashower j occurs on only one test daring any grotp of I three consecutive tests, three more shall be
| |
| ! made. If no flashower occurs in the second grote of tests, the flashower in the first j grotp shaLL be considered as a ranche flashower and the ecpalpment shaLL be considered as having passed the test.
| |
| i l The test voltages for the above shaLL be i based on the voltage rating of the concksctor j in accordance with the followirg table:
| |
| i Conductor Rated Inpulse 1
| |
| 18 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| =
| |
| | |
| N .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLSWER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| l No. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(El NC/NA CGeENTS i
| |
| j voltage (V) Voltage (V) i
| |
| ! 300 and 600 ..........
| |
| 1000 ..........
| |
| 3 5000 60,000 8000 95,000 4 15,000 95,000 i
| |
| i j 96.0 The 500-hotr aging time at minima agirg Review perfonned teider Criterion 82.0.
| |
| j temperature of Section 6.3.3 of IEEE Std 317-1976 is a printirg error and should be changed to 5000 hours.
| |
| j This printing error was corrected in i printings of the Standard after 08-25 76.
| |
| 1 95.0 The definition of Nothte Aperture Seat" in ES-12 Review spec and wendor draulnes and l Section 2 of IEEE Std 317-1976 is a printing ES-12A werify whether the penetration j error and should be changed as fottous: assembtles have two single aperature in j series and includes provisions for i "Two single aperture seats in series." gas-teek rate testing of the double i
| |
| seats. i 112.0 Instatted Life. ES-12 Review spec and wendor certified test ES 12A data and verify that gJalified Life of j The electric penetration assent >ty should be penetration assembly is not less than 19 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| =,
| |
| g
| |
| | |
| l
| |
| ~> J' i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NUEEER ,REV._,,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOCUENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA C(DOENTS I
| |
| l
| |
| ! designed to have an installed Life not less the specified instatted Life.
| |
| j than the specified instatted life. If the
| |
| ! specified installed Life is greater than the I w alified life, provisions shall be m for i an oreoing gatification program as specified l in Section 6.5.8(4) of IEEE Std 317-1976.
| |
| I l
| |
| l 115.0 The service classification and ratings of the Verification perfonmed under criterion I
| |
| eLoctric penetration assembties shatI he per 91.0.
| |
| Section 4. of IEEE Std 317-1976. Note: See j modifications in criteria No. 91.
| |
| I t
| |
| I
| |
| ; 115.0 ProdJction tests for electric penetration ES-12 Review spec and wendor certified test assemblies shaLL be per Section 7. of IEEE ES-12A report and verify that predaction tests Std 317-1976. per IEEE 317 1976 Section 7 were performed.
| |
| l l 116.0 Quality control and gaelity assurance ES-12 Review spec and verify that gastity I re girements for electric penetration ES-12A control and gaelity assurance program
| |
| ; assembtles shaLL be per section 9. of IEEE are included.
| |
| i Std 317-1976.
| |
| I l
| |
| 123.0 Contalrument Desim. ES 12 Review spec, drawings, and test report l ES 12A and verify that the penetration Reactor contairument and associated systems assemblies can withstand the design f
| |
| l
| |
| ! 20 DAP FORM E 013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| 1 i
| |
| i i
| |
| | |
| l l
| |
| 4 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION 1 CHECKLIST InseER .REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| J REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CG9ENTS i shall be provided to establish an essentially condition inside contairment.
| |
| teak tight barrier against the e controtted 1 release of radioactivity to the environment and to assure that the containment design j conditions important to safety are not j exceeded for as torg as postulated accident j conditions re @ ire.
| |
| t i 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 verification is perfonned in l Seismic Qualification of Electric Epipment. conj metion with Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| l The CPSES desipi for Class 1E electricat e@ipment complies with the re@irements and l recomumendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is aet by j
| |
| performing an analysis to verify the approach
| |
| ; and/or ty following the e@ivalent static toad method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section
| |
| , 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 1 I
| |
| I I
| |
| l i
| |
| i 21 DAP FORM E-013, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| i i
| |
| | |
| 4 i
| |
| f- T I
| |
| i l
| |
| ! DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ! CNECKLIST NLeleER .REV._ ,0 ATE i
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /talSAT/
| |
| l NO. OtITERIA (D00AENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CDgENTS l
| |
| 1-
| |
| ! 1.0 Two independent and redsdent de00-V Class IE El 0001 Verify that AFW Pup motor breakers are
| |
| ! buses are provided for each unit, each E1-0004,ES-5, provided on re&ndent 6.9kV Ctess 1E capetde of sgptying the reptred Ps 3 2 tsames.
| |
| j safety-related Loads to safety shut dart the Pg 3-9 l mit following a 08A. Each Class 1E bus can DCA d5679 I be fed from tuo independent offsite pouer Pg 2
| |
| ) sources or the diesel generator asslytod to j the bus. Arrangement of tases is shown on i
| |
| Figure 8.3-1, assipiment of emergency loads is indicated in Tables 8.3-8 and 8.3-9.
| |
| l 3.0 ALL switchgear is adecpately sized and ES-5, Section 3 Verify that the interrteting current coordinated to permit safe and reliable Appendix 1 specified for AFW Pup motor breakers j operation mder nonest and short-circuit IV-3 pp 5 & 6 is 40000 A et 7.2-kV and that this l conditions. V-3 Ps 2 reting is sufficient to permit safe and Pg 4 reliable operation m der short circuit Interrsptine ratings of Class 1E switchseer, conditions. In addition, verify that I motor controt centers (NCCs) and distribution the interrtetire capacity is based on
| |
| ; boards are as foltaus: the short circuit calcutetton in effect l st the time of purchase or vendor data l Equipment Ctess Interrupting approwel.
| |
| l Current f Verify that the continuous current 6.9-kV 7.2 kV 40,000 A et 7.2 kV rating is sufficient to permit safe and
| |
| ]'
| |
| switchgear reliable operation under nonest conditions.
| |
| ! 480-V 600 V 50,000 A at 480 V
| |
| ; switchgear 1 DAP FORM E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 4
| |
| | |
| l i
| |
| I DESIGN REVIEW E WLUATION CEELIST InseER .REV._ ,DATE REFEREIIE DESCRIPTI(3 SAT /tseSAT/
| |
| No. OtITERIA (DOQAIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(BI NC/uA ColeENTS 480-V actor 600 V 25,000 A at 480 V .
| |
| control centers 120-mc 600 V 10,000 A at 120 V distribution penets 4.0 Control pouer for Class 1E egalpment is El-0020 Verify that a Class 1E 125 E source is provided as foltous: ES-5 Ps 3 8 provided for breaker control and Ps 3-14 protective relaying.
| |
| Class 1E Egalpment Class 1E Control Power Soirce 6900-V breaker and 125- E system associated protective relayire 480-V toad center 125- E systen brookers and relaying 480-V actor control 120-VAC derived throteh conter starters control transformers control relays and 125- E and 118-v penets ard instrtment sminterriptible AC racks 2 DAP FORM E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 6
| |
| | |
| i s .. ..
| |
| I i
| |
| ! DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST laseER .REV._ ,DATE a
| |
| ! REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| s No. GITERIA (annasuT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(Bl NC/MA CGeENTS i
| |
| l i
| |
| I i
| |
| 8.0 Isotor feeders cormocted to the 6900-V El-0004 verify that (1) the AFW Pump flotor
| |
| ] switchgoer buses are protected Ipr pflame and ES-5 App 5 Feeder is provided with phase and j ground overcurrent relays; 480V feeders are El-0031 Sh 37 ground overcurrent retsying, arid (2) j protected tur phase overcurrent retsys only. E1-0051 Sh 39 these releys are coondinated with bus
| |
| ! See Figures 8.3-5 threigh 8. If the feeder VIII-6 Pg 6 incomirig relays, idiicit provide beclap l breaker felts to eteer, backte retering trips pg 8 Pg 94 protection, j the incomirg circuit breaker. Smelter motors CC-4 (Att to are cornected to IICCs containiris celnation VIII-6) j starters,idiere short-circuit protection is CC3 (Att to provided hr circuit breakers and overtoed VIII-5) protection by therst relays.
| |
| ) 15.0 The minimum through maala m system voltages ES-5 Pg 3-8 Verify that voltages at switchgoer are '
| |
| 1 will provide adegate voltage to att IV-1 within the tolerance range of the j safety-related agalpment as diactmeed in FSAR Fiss 1, 2, 3, breakers for the espected rarse of 1 A040.49, Paragraph 2a throigh 2e. 4, & Sh 55 system voltages and bus toads.
| |
| l.
| |
| }
| |
| l 18.0 Control and Instrumentation - Except for ES 5 Pg 3 8 Verify that breaker controt ogsipment motor starter circuits and local contactors, ES 84 Pg 3-11 is suitable for operation within the att controt and instrtmentation are supplied App 4 Sh 3 range of DC voltages likely to occur in via the 125V DC or 118v AC regulated power operation. 1 supplies. The bettery chargers provide a nominst 130V DC ytus or minus" 1/21 output to the DC switchboerds. Inverters provide a f nominet 118VAC 21 output to their respective 3 DAP FORft E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1 .
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| i O
| |
| ' ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l
| |
| CsECKLIST IRaeER , REY. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(N SATASISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/h4 CGoENTS distribution penets. Output regulation is ,
| |
| maintained m der the futt range of system voltages Irdicated.
| |
| I 42.0 (DC-18 Inspection and Testing of Electric Es 5 pp 3-16, Verify that the breekers and autitlery Power systems. 317,320, acpalpuent are testable.
| |
| 3-21, 3 22, Electric power systems leportant to safety 3 23 Verify that the Class 1E switchgear shall be designed to permit appropriate provides access for periodic inspection
| |
| ; periodic inspection and testing of laportant of wiring, insulation, comections, and areas and features, such as wiring, components.
| |
| ]
| |
| I insulation, comections, and switchboards, to assess the contirsalty of the systems and the verify that the Class 1E switchgear is condition of their components. The systems deslytod with the capability to shall be designed with a capability to test periodicatty test its operability and periodically (1) the operability and fsaictional perfonaance.
| |
| fmetional perfonaance of the cespenants of the systems, such as onsite power sources, relays, switches, and buses, and (2) the operability of the systems as a s ole and, mder conditions as close to design as practical, the futt operation segaence that brings the systems into operation, including operation of agpticable portions of the protection system, and the transfer of power among the tsaclear power unit, the offsite power system, and the onsite power system.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ( . .
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NtmeER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESG IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/N4 ColeENTS i
| |
| i 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Spec. ES-5 verify that the Reg. Guide 1.89 Equipment for Nuclear Pouer Plants. Pages 3-5 thru re wirements are included in the 3-7 spectficatlon.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E o wipment design complies See criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| with the qualification program guldetines as delineated in this regulatory guide dated November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| , Section 8.3.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. See criterion See criterion No. 73.0.
| |
| No. 73.0 components of Class IE power systems, and j their associated design, operating, and
| |
| ! maintenance h M s, shall be marked or l Labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| I t
| |
| i
| |
| ,l 52.0 Equipment Qualification. See Criteria See criteria Nos. 79.0 and 84.0.
| |
| l Nos. 79.0 and
| |
| ! Each type of Class IE power equipment shall 84.0
| |
| { be quellfied by analysis, successfut use
| |
| ! mder sieller conditions, or by actual test l to demonstrate its ablLity to perform its
| |
| { f metion tmder norant and design basis
| |
| ! events.
| |
| I j 5 DAP FORM E 014, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW [ VALUATION CIECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| : 10. CRITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIon IsC/Is4 CGeEIITS 66.0 The capability of all Clas IE eqJipment, see Criterion See Criterion llo. 79.0.
| |
| Including interfaces, of a nuclear power mo. 79.0 generating station for performing its re w ired ftmetion shall be demonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt equipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to styptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 l for detailed requirements.
| |
| 1 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical equipment except ES 5 Pg 3-2 Verify that re w ired e p ipment motors are identified by 11 at$anumeric El-0006 (dentification is specified for the character tag raabers. The eighth character breekers, is either E P, or (any other character except E or P), with E designating e@lpment dich is Class 1E, P designatirig egipment d ich is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating ecpalpeent sich is non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors studled with pumps are identifled by the same tag rumber as the pg.
| |
| i 70.0 In addition to the tag rumbers, Class 1E ES 5 Pg 3-33 Verify that appropriate color coding is equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways specified.
| |
| are identified by the following color coding 6 DAP FORM E-014, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTI(M SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COBENTS system:
| |
| : a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamet Level Channet 1 Red (R)
| |
| Diannel 2 mite (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orange with e lte stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with d ite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non Class IE Circuits Train C Black (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceweys and Equipment Natural receways color or naturat equipment color 7 DAP FORN E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O O O'
| |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIOK CNECKLIST NLSWER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS
| |
| ; 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E ES-5 Pg 3-33 verify that the color codirg is equipamt on en area edifch is readily visible specified to be in a reedily visible (e.g., close to nameplate or identification aree.
| |
| tag rus6er).
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E ogJipment and circuits are clearly ES 5 Verify that desipi and vencbr drawings identified on documents and drawings in Pages 3-5 thru clearly identify Class 1E accordance with IEEE 494-1974. 3-7 ocpJipent/ circuit per IEEE 494 1974.
| |
| , verify that captlence to IEEE 494-1974 is speelffed.
| |
| 79.0 All Class 1E egalpment will be quellfled per Spec. ES 5 Verify that compliance to IEEE 323 is IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, Pages 3-6, included within the specification.
| |
| 3.11g, and Appendix 34 for additional detalts 327,328 on erwironmental quotification. Verify that vendor cpaalification j reports are included in a TUGC0 egalment gJatifIcation review and ap rovst program.
| |
| 84.0 The seismic qualification of Class 1E Spec. ES 5 Verify that the appropriate equipment should demonstrate an egJipment's Pages 3 6, 3 9, regJirements, per IEEE 344 end Reg.
| |
| ability to perfonn its required function 3-24, 3 25, Guide 1.100, are referenced within the daring and after the time it is subjected to 3 27, 3 28, specification.
| |
| 8 DAP FORM E 014, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i CHECKLIST IRAGER . REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C(30ENTS 4
| |
| the forces resulting from one SSE. In 3-30, 3-31 addition, the equipment must withstand the App. 3(Spec. Review vendor h ==ntation to verify ef fects of a raaber of Dees (see Sections 5.4 SS 2, Appendix that specified seismic requirements are and 6.1.4 of IEEE-244 (1975)) prior to the A) addressed, application of an SSE.
| |
| 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical e @ipment are sefanicatty No. 84.0
| |
| @atifled in accordance vith the procedres and h==ntation re@irements specified in IEEE 344 1975, Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class IE Equipment j for !!uclear Power Generating Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| j electrical e@ipment including stancRy power No. 84.0.
| |
| systems are designed to maintain structural j integrity and fmetional operability during j and af ter en earth @rAe of magnitude @ to l and includire the SSE.
| |
| 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrumentation and See criterion See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electricot e@lpment are quotified by No. 84.0 i analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the perfonnance of the 9 DAP FORM E-014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| O.
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CG8ENTS equipment s 4jected to earth weke notion can be conservatively predicted and if the fmetionet operability of the instrumentation or ewipment is assured by its structural integrity alone.
| |
| 125.0 Control switches for the 6900-V Class 1E El 0004 Verify that control switches for incomirg stypty breekers and feeder breakers breeker control are on main control I ara located on the main control board. board.
| |
| 127.0 Interrmting capacities of switchgear, toad IV-3 Ps 5, Pg 6 Verify that breeker interrm ting centers, motor control centers, and Computer Ams capacities are specified on the basis distribution penets are selected on the basis 201-1 & 301-1 of short-circuit calculations.
| |
| of short circuit calculations.
| |
| 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 See Criterion See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| Seismic Quellfication of Electric Equipment. No. 84.0 The CPSES destyi for Class 1E electrical equipment complies with the re wirements and
| |
| ; reconsnendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is met by performing en analysis to verify the approach I and/or by following the equivalent static l
| |
| 10 DAP FORM E 014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| & k l
| |
| . e i
| |
| j DESIGN PIV1EW EVALUATION 1 CIECKLIST NtmBER ,AEV._ ,DATE i
| |
| l REFERENE DESCRIPTI M SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| NO. MITERIA (DottmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIM NC/NA COWENTS t l toed method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 5 l i 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| J l
| |
| 4 4
| |
| 6 i
| |
| l ,
| |
| i .
| |
| ) ,
| |
| i 4
| |
| l l
| |
| I i ,
| |
| i 11 DAP FORM E 014, REV. 1, 06/26/86 0
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| 1 NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATim NC/NA CCueENTS i
| |
| 8.0 Motor feeders comected to the 6900-V Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification, verify that switchgear buses are protected by phase and Ps. 3 11 cables must be euttable for relay ground overcurrent relsys; 480V feeders are protection.
| |
| protected by phase overcurrent retsys only.
| |
| See Figures 8.3-5 through 8. If the feeder In the vendor doctamentation, verify breeker falls to clear, backtp retsying trips that cables are suitable for the the incoming circuit breaker. Smelter motors application.
| |
| are comected to MCCs containing combinetton starters, where short circuit protection is provided by circuit breakers and overload protection by thermal relays.
| |
| 45.0 Associated circuits installed in accordance spec. ES-134 In the cable specification, verify j with Section 4.5(1) of IEEE 384 (1974) should Pg. 3 2, 6, 7 regairements for these features.
| |
| be stbject to att regairenants placed on Class 1E circuits such as cable deratire, In the vendor h =ritation, verify environmental gaellfication, flame that these features are addressed.
| |
| retardance, splicing restrictions, and raceway fill taitess it can be demonstrated that the absence of such requirements could not significantly recisce the availability of the Class IE circuits.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Quellfication of Ctess 1E Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. this Reg. Guide is quoted or otherwise addressed.
| |
| The CPSES Ctess 1E egalpment design complies 1 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| 5 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST INmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENM DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(A NC/NA COWENTS i
| |
| 2
| |
| ; with the wotification program guidelines as verify vendor p etification reports are delineated in this regulatory guide dated included in a TUGCO equipment November, 1974. For details see (FSmt) quotification review and approval l Section 8.3. program.
| |
| 1 l 51.0 Identification. Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that hwts are reqJired to be labeled in j rampanents of Class !E power systeam, and a distinctive ammer.
| |
| their associated design, operating, and amintenance documents, shall be marked or In the vendor's h ntation verify labeled in a distinctive manner. that documents are tabeled in a distinctive momer.
| |
| l 4
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Spec. ES-13A verify that the specification includes Pg. 3-7 gastification by test, use, or anstysis
| |
| : Each type of Class IE power epipment shalt FSmt App. 34 as described in the criteria.
| |
| { be quellfied by analysis, successful use Table 4-1 j e der sleiter conditions, or by actual test verify vendor gaellfication reports are i to demonstrate its ability to perform its included in a TUGC0 equipment fmetion mder normal and design basis p alification review and approvat events. program.
| |
| }
| |
| 54.0 Distribution System - Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that i
| |
| Pg. 3-2 the cable is identified as part of a (1) Description. Class 1E system.
| |
| t 2 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /lMSAT/
| |
| ; No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| i The distribution system shall consist of att In the vendor h==ritetton verify that ecpipment in the distribution circuit from the cable is listed as suitable for its supply circuit breaker (s) to the toads. Class 1E system.
| |
| i (2) CapabitIty.
| |
| Each distribution circuit shall be capable of transmittirg sufficient energy to start and operate att regJired toads in that circuit.
| |
| (3) Independence, i
| |
| Distribution circuits to rededent ecpipment shall be physicatty and electrically independent of each other.
| |
| (4) Survelllance.
| |
| 4 The distribution system shall be monitored to
| |
| ; the extent that it is shown to be ready to l perform its intended f metton.
| |
| , (5) Auxillery Devices.
| |
| Auxiliary devices that are required to i operate dependent ecpipment shall be agptied from a related bus section to prevent the loss of electric power in one load grotp from causing the loss of equipment in another toad 1
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 4
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| O O-1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NUWER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS grotp.
| |
| (6) Feeders.
| |
| Feeders between Class IE power systems located in safety Class structures and systems located in non-Safety Class structures shalt be provided with circuit breakers located in the Safety Class structure.
| |
| l 66.0 The capability of att Class IE eq4lpment, Spec. ES-134 In the cable specification verify that i including interfaces, of a nuclear power Pg. 3 17 type tests are preferred for generating station for perfonsing its gastification.
| |
| ] reg 4 ired ftnction shall be demonstrated. It j is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt equipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to stgytesent type tests. See IEEE Std 323 1974 for detailed requirements.
| |
| 67.0 Identification. Spec. ES 134 In the cable specification, verify that Pg. 3 13, 21 Identification requirements are included.
| |
| Exposed Class IE raceways shall be marked in a distinct permanent manner at intervals not In the vendor hmtation, verify to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to that identification is addressed.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATIO4 CIECKLIST IRDIRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICII SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F YERIFICATIGl NC/NA CGOENTS and exiting from enclosed areas. Class IE receways shall be marked prior to the j installation of their cables.
| |
| Cables installed in these receways shall be marked in a ammer of sufficient durability and at a sufficient rur:ber of points to l facilitate initial verification that the j installation is in confonnance with the separation criteria. These cable markings shall be applied prior to or & ring installation.
| |
| { Class IE cables shall be identified ty a pennenent marker at each end in accordance with the design drawings or cable sche & le.
| |
| The method of identification used to meet the abwe regairements shall readily distirguish between redadant Class IE systems ad between Class IE and non-Class IE systems.
| |
| 4 70.0 In adfition to the tag raabers, Class 1E Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways Pg. 3-20 the specified color codire of cable is are identified by the following color coding Add 1 to Rev.1 consistent with the criteria system: regairements.
| |
| : a. ESF System In the vendor h=mtation verify that 5 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| p . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._,DATE i
| |
| REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGGENTS Train A Orange (0) ,
| |
| color coding of cable asets the spec Train B Green (G) recpirements,
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamel Level Channet 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channet 2 m ite (W)
| |
| Chamet 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y) l c. Associated Circuits j Associated Train A Orange with dite
| |
| , stripes (0)
| |
| I Associated Train B Green with d ite i stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class IE Circuits Train C Black (K) i 4
| |
| i
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and Equipment Natural receways color or natural equipaant color 72.0 In general, all Class 1E cables and Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that 6 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST MlmOER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LRISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOO MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CDsENTS associated cables are Jacket color-coded Pg. 3-13, 21 the asterial aust be compatible with throughout their entire tength. Cable field color coding.
| |
| Jackets that recpJf re field color coding prior to installation will be so worked at In the vendor h==ritation, verify intervals not to exceed five feet. Cable that the asteriet is compatible with Jackets that recpJire fletd color coding af ter field color codirg.
| |
| Instattation (due to rectassification of cables from associated Class IE to Class IE,
| |
| , or vice versa, after their initial putt) will be field color coded as follows:
| |
| l l i) m ere entering and exiting egJipment, raceway and inside junctiorvpull boxes.
| |
| II) ALL exposed portions of the cables j will be worked at intervets not to exceed five feet, lii) Portions of Instetted c 4tes in conchait or trays will not be fletd color coded.
| |
| i 73.0 Class 1E egJipment and circuits are clearly Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that identified on h==nts and drawings in Class it egJipment is regJired to be accordance with ILEE 494-1974. clearly identified on r M -=ntation and drawings per IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| In the vendor < M -=ntation verify that 7 DAP FORN E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| l . .
| |
| 4 I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (0011 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAT101 NC/MA CGsENTS such identification is clearly j laptemented.
| |
| 74.0 The cable spreading area is the space below Spec. ES 134-3 In the cable specification verify that j the control Rom dere instrumentation and 12.4.A cyaalification per IEEE 383 is reeJired.
| |
| ; controt cables corwerge prior to entering the Pg. 3 17 control, termination, or instrument penets. FSAR App. 3A Verify that vendor quellfication This aree does not contain high-energy Table 5.1 reports are included in a TUGC0 equipment such as suitchgear, transformers, Sh. 24 ocpalpment patification revleu and rotating e g ipment, or potential sources of approvat program.
| |
| missites or pipe d ip. Flammable materiet is not stored or installed in this area. Cable i corstructions are cyaalified in accordance l with IEEE 383. The circuits in this area are l Limited to control and instrument functione and those power sigply circuits serving the control Room. Power circuits are not routed i in this aree, except power cables serving i instrument and Control Room distribution penets. These power cables are encased in j concrete or run in rigid steel conduits from i the point d ere they enter this area.
| |
| In this area, a minipun separation of one
| |
| ]
| |
| ; foot horizontet and three feet vertical is maintained between red edent trays d ere raceway arrangements preclude amintaining the f minisua separation distance, the red adant t
| |
| 8 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IAmgER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l l
| |
| circuits are rm in enclosed racewers or barriers are provided between redundant circuits.
| |
| l l
| |
| 1 77.0 Environmental Type Tests are perfonned on Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that cables that are re@lred to function & ring Pg. 3-5, 6, 17 environmental type tests are reyired. I and following a LOCA. FSAR App. 3A l Tabte 5-1 verify that wndor wellfication The cable type and cable insulation are Sh. 24 reports are included in a TINICO l selected to minimize the rate of equipment patification review and deterioration & ring the design life of the approvat program. I plant as a result of temperature, humidity, and radiation. Environmental Type Tests are performed on cables that are re@lred to fm: tion & ring and following a LOCA.
| |
| 78.0 Generally, electrical cables are Spec. In the cable specification, verify that flame-retardent, noncombustible, and ES 134 3.8.e cables are to be flame retardent, non-propagating in nature and confona to the non-M=tible, and non-propagating criterion of IEEE 383-1974. They will not per IEEE 383.
| |
| support combustion in the absence of a sustained lenition source. In the vendor documentation verify that the fire characteristics per IEEE 383 are addressed.
| |
| 79.0 Atl Class 1E e g ipment will be qualified per Spec. ES-134 In the cable specification verify that 9 DAP FORft E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGIf REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IEmgER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| , REFERENCE DESCRIPTICII SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/MA COGENTS l
| |
| l l IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.1111, Ps. 3-5 to appropriate envirarsmental gaalification 3.118, and Amendix 34 for additional details 6, 17 is specified. Verify that vendor on envirornental cyantification. FSAR App. 3A cpaalification reports are included in a Table 5-1 TUGCO equipment gaellfication review sh. 24 and apprwat program.
| |
| 99.0 In lieu of section 1.3.4.2.3 of IEEE Std spec. ES 134 In the cable specification, verify that 383-1984, "Other Design Basis Events," the Pg. 3 5, 6 cable gaatification envelopes the following should be used: FSAR App. 34 complete spectrum of design basis Tabte 5 1 events.
| |
| "The remainder of the complete spectrum of Sh. 24 desi s basis events (e.g., events such as a j steam line break) shall be considered in case
| |
| ; they represent different types or more severe j hazards to cable operation."
| |
| 100.0 In Lieu of Section 1.3.5.3 of IEEE Std FSAR Pg. 8.3-45 In the cable specification verify that 383 1984, " Test Design Basis Event," the Spec. ES-134 the alternate description is quoted or l following should be used: Pg. 3 6 otherwise included, t
| |
| i
| |
| " Type tests for desi s basis event conditions verify that the regaired test desim
| |
| {
| |
| shall consist of stbjecting non-aged and aged basis event conditions are documented i cables, field splices, and connections to a in the specification.
| |
| segaence of environmental extremes that
| |
| ! sinalate the most severe postulated conditions of a desi s basis event and specified conditions of instattation. Type 10 DAP FORM E 015, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST lamgER , REY._ ,DAtE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CG9ENTS tests shall demonstrate margin try application of multiple transients, increesed levet, or other justifiable means. Satisfactory performance of the cable will be evolunted try electrical and physical measurements appropriate to the type of cable during or fottowing the environmental cycle, or both.
| |
| The factors for margin given in Section 6.3.1.5 of IEEE Std 323 1974 shall be used idiere applicable.
| |
| "The values of pressure, temperature, radiation, chemical concentrations, humidity, and time in IEEE Std 323 1974 do not represent acceptable limits for att nucteer power stations. The user of this standard shall ensure that the values used in the regaired type tests represent acceptable limits for the service conditions in editch the cable or comections will be installed."
| |
| 101.0 In lieu of Section 2.1 of IEEE Std 383-1974, Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that
| |
| " Introduction," the fotteuing should be tsed: Pg. 3 5 the atternate description is gaoted or FSAR Pg. 8.3 - otherwise included.
| |
| " Type tests described in this ha=mt are 44 methods that shall be used to gJatify Verify that the regaired type test electrical cables, field splices, and service corditions are documented in connections for use in nuetear power the specification.
| |
| generating stations. Tests of the cable or 11 DAP FORM E-015, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST MimgER , REY._ ,DATE REFEREME DESG IPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/WA CGGENTS comection assembly, as applicable, shaLL then sgplement the cable tests in order 'to gaelify the comections and other aspects imi p to planned usage.
| |
| The values of pressure, temperature, radiation, chemical concentrations, humidity, and time indicated in IEEE Std 323-1974 do not represent acceptable tielts for att ructeer power generating stations.
| |
| The user of this guide shall ensure that the i values used in the required type tests .
| |
| j represent acceptable Lleits for the service j conditions in iditch the cable, or cumections, or both, will be instatted.
| |
| "Results of prior tests that are being used i as the bases for the present tests shall be referenced in the h w ation."
| |
| i l
| |
| l 102.0 In lieu of Section 2.3.2 of IEEE Std Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that j 383 1974, "Long Term Physical Aging Pg. 3 9 the alternate description is gJoted or
| |
| ! Properties," the following should be used: FSAR App. 3A otherwise inclassed.
| |
| I Table 5 1 l " Aging data shall be stheitted to establish tong term performance of the insulation.
| |
| l Data may be evaluated using the Arrhenius i
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| g . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAil0N CNECKLIST WimgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESG IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATIGl NC/NA CDgENTS
| |
| , technicpe. A minlaus of 3 data points, incLtsfing 136 'wrees C and two or more others at least 10 degrees C apart in temperature, shall be used.
| |
| "If there is not sufficient evidence that accelerated aging technicpes can reliably l produce end-of life conditform, the following l cngoing cpatification procedure should be used.
| |
| i
| |
| 'Ongoity Qualification ProcedJre - Same types of cables, field sptIces, and comections
| |
| ] (hereafter referred to only as cables) may not respond in a representative manner to accelerated aging technicpes to establish j end-of-design-Life conditians. Consequentty, j the cpalifled Life would be less than the l regaired design Life. There are two l suggested methods of achievire tong-tern l (design Life) cpatification:
| |
| l (a) After a planned period less than the cpalifled Iife of the cabte has been reached,
| |
| ! representative cables should be replaced with new cables and the removed cables s 4Jected to a qualification test similar to that
| |
| ! performed prior to instattation. This test
| |
| ] should include additional accelerated aging.
| |
| t 13 DAP FORN E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| ^
| |
| ] . .
| |
| DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRmgER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS 1
| |
| 1 Successful completion of this test extends the cpJellf fed life of the installed cables.
| |
| This procedare should be repeated antil the cpaaIifled tife ogsels or exceeds the recpaired design Life.
| |
| (b) Additionet identical cables should be t
| |
| installed in a nucteer power generating station location uhere power toeding and l service conditions ecpast or exceed those of the cable to be cpaalified. A cable should be removed after a planned period less than the previously qualified life and subjected to a cpiatification test slaiter to that performed prior to instattation. This test should incita$e accelerated aging. Successful l coupletion of this test extends the cyantified l tife of the instatted cable. Sufficient j additional identical cables should be initially installed in order that the above i procedure can be repeated smtil the gJatified
| |
| ! Life egaels or exceeds the required design
| |
| ! Life.
| |
| "If the above methods doennstrate that the gastified Life is less than the design life, a periodic replacement plan should be instituted."
| |
| 14 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEELIST NtmgER ,REV. _ ,0 ATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctaENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGl NC/NA CGsENTS )
| |
| i l
| |
| l I
| |
| 104.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.1 of IEEE Std FSAR App. 1A(s) In the cable specification verify this 383-1974, " General," the following should be Pg. 1A(s) 55 regairement for testing.
| |
| used:
| |
| In the vendor h w tation verify that "This section describes the method for type testing complies to this recpairement.
| |
| testing of gro g ed cables via the vertical tray flame test to determine their relative self extinguishing tendencies. Testing shall include both aged and maged cable specimens."
| |
| l l 105.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.2.2 of IEEE Std R.G. 1.131 - In the cable specification verify that l 383-1974, the following should be used: C.7 fletd splices must be demonstrated to l Spec. ES 13A not achersely affect cable fire "The fire test provisions of the standard are Pg. 3 10 retardant properties.
| |
| useful in screening out cable insulation materiets that are inadegJetely In the vendor h e tation verify that self-extinguishing, but they shall not be field splices do not adversely affect construed as gJetification of any instatted cable fire retardant properties.
| |
| cable system configuration. If field splices are to be used in cable trays, special provisions shalt be made to demonstrate that the fire retardant properties of the cable are not altered macceptably in an adverse usy by the field splice."
| |
| 15 DAP Foet E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRMBER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE - DESM !PTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D0CimENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CocENTS l 106.0 Section 2.5.4.2 of IEEE STD Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that 383-1974---Vertical tray configuration should the alternate description is spated or be used and m derstood to mean perpendicular otherwise included.
| |
| , to the plane of the horizon.
| |
| In the vendor h-ntation verify that i the attemate description is used.
| |
| 107.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4 of IEEE Std Spec. ES 13A In the cable specification verify that 383 1974, the following should be used: the attemate description is quoted or l otherwise incitafed.
| |
| ) "The gas burner flame source shall constae propane gas so as to release approximately In the vendor documentation, verify 70,000 STU per hour at an air gas ratio of 5 that the alternate description is used.
| |
| to 1. Natural grade propane shall be used.
| |
| j 108.0 In Lieu of the first sentence of Section FSAR App. 1A(B) In the cable specification verify that l 2.5.4.4.1 of IEEE Std 383 1974, the following Pg. 1A(0) 55 the alternate description is quoted or j should be used: otherwise addressed.
| |
| "The ribbon gas burner shall be momted In the vendor h - ntation verify that horizontally such that the flame ispinges on the alternate description is used.
| |
| the specimen miduny between the tray rungs i
| |
| and so that the burner face is in front of and 4 inches from the cable and approximately 2 feet above the bottom of the troy." See R.G. 1.131 for specification of ribbon gas burner.
| |
| 16 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| . ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLmeER , REY._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (D0Q MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAfl0N NC/WA CCleENTS I 109.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4.3 of IEEE Std FSAR A m. 1A(5) In the cable specification verify that 383-1974, the following should be used: - 55 the alternate description is gaoted or otherwise addressed.
| |
| " Flame size will norsetty be achieved eben i the propane flow is 27.8 standard ctbic feet In the vendor documentation, verify per hour and the air flow is 139 standard that the alternate description is used.
| |
| cubic feet per hour."
| |
| 110.0 Section 2.5.4.5 of IEEE Std 383 1974 is not Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that endorsed by this Regulatory Guide 1.131 Pg. 3 17 the regJirement is deleted or otherwise l
| |
| (1977) Paragregt c.12. addressed.
| |
| I
| |
| ! In the vendor h-ntation, verify that the requirement is omitted.
| |
| I 111.0 The recommendations indicated by "shoutcP and spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that the options indicated by "usy" in the the reg 4irements are clarified, sections of IEEE Std 383-1974 Indicated below have sufficient luportance to be treated the In the vendor h - ntation verify that same as regsframents of the standard: the flame test requirements are treeted
| |
| ] accordingly.
| |
| ; s. Section 1.3.1, " Cable Description"
| |
| : n. Section 1.3.2, " Field Splices or verify that vendor gatification
| |
| ; Comection Description" reports are incitsied in a TUGCO
| |
| : c. Section 1.3.4.1, " Meeting Service equipment qualification review and j 17 DAP FORM E 015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| ! ~
| |
| f
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IEMBER , REY._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(Ni NC/NA COWENTS i
| |
| Corditions", the first sentence. ,
| |
| approvat program, j d. Section 1.3.4.2.1, "Destyi Basis Event- -LOCA"
| |
| ' e. Section 1.4.1, " General"
| |
| : f. Section 1.4.3, " Test Results"
| |
| : g. Section 1.4.4, Test Evaluation"
| |
| : h. Section 2.2, " Type Test samples"
| |
| : i. Section 2.3.3, "Thernet and Radiation Exposure" J. Section 2.3.3.3
| |
| ] k. Section 2.3.3.4
| |
| : t. Section 2.4.3, "LOCA Slamatation" l m. Section 2.4.3.1
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.2
| |
| ; o. Section 2.4.4, " Post LOCA Simulation Test" i p. Section 2.5.2.1
| |
| : q. Section 2.5.4.3
| |
| : r. Section 2.5.4.4.2
| |
| : s. Section 2.5.5, " Evaluation" l t. Section 2.5.6, " Instrument Cable and Single Conchetors from Multiconductor
| |
| ! Assembly", the recosamendation that the tested l cable pass a flame resistance test in accordance with ASTM D2220-68.
| |
| 119.0 The Type Test of Class IE electric cables, Spec. ES-13A In the cable specification verify that field splices, and connections shall be per type tests per IEEE 383 are regJired.
| |
| I.
| |
| I 18 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 O
| |
| | |
| R . .
| |
| U O+
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION C E ELIST IRm0ER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGEENTS i
| |
| i IEEE Std 383 1974.
| |
| Review verube documentation for fIsee tests and verify that the IEEE 383 regairements are addressed.
| |
| i verify that vendor gJellfication reports are included in a TUGC0 gaallfication review and approwel program.
| |
| 120.0 Reg. Guide 1.131 - Gustification Tests of Spec. ES 13A In the vendor h=mtation verify that i Electric Cables, Field Splices, and the Reg. Guide requirements on flame Comections for Light Water cooled Nuclear test are met except as stated in the Power Plants. criteria.
| |
| Although the implementation of this Verify that vendor quellfication regulatory guide, dated August 1977, does not reports are included in a TUGC0 1 incitzie CPSES, att Class IE cables of the gJalification review and approvet l CPSES meet most of the recpairements of this program.
| |
| i regalatory guide with the few exceptions noted below:
| |
| : a. Att prefabricated cables of the CPSES do not meet the followirg recpairemerds:
| |
| : 1. Vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to determine their relative l
| |
| i self extinguishire tendencies. (Regulatory 19 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctsENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS l
| |
| 4 Guide position c.6);
| |
| j
| |
| : 2. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| However, work is in progress by vendor on these items.
| |
| j b. Alt 8ky cables, 600V power Lighting cables of the CPSES do not meet the following
| |
| . regJirements:
| |
| : 1. " Radiation Exposure Total" - per Regulatory Guide 1,89 Position C.5.
| |
| : 2. Vertical tray flame test on the aged .
| |
| cables to determine their relative self extinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6).
| |
| I
| |
| : 3. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| : 4. Gas and air flow regairements (Regulatory Guide position c.11).
| |
| I l
| |
| I 20 DAP FORM E-015, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| $h-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CMECKLIST NuteER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRilTERIA (D001 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 3.0 Att switchgear is adequately sized and Verify that 480V MCC interrupting coordinated to permit safe and reliable rating is specified and provided as operation mder normal and short circuit 25,000A at 480V and that this rating is conditions, sufficient to permit safe and reliable Interrteting ratings of Class 1E switchgeer, operation mder short circuit actor control centers (MCCs) and distritaation conditions, boards are as follows:
| |
| Verify that the MCC Class is 600V.
| |
| Eg;ipment Class Interr C laa Verify that the continuous current l
| |
| Current retirg is sufficient to permit safe and -
| |
| rettable operation under norant 6.9 kV 7.2 kV 40,000 A i 2W conditions.
| |
| switchgear Verify that vendor docunants are in 480-v 600 y 50,000 A at 480 V agreement with specified ratings.
| |
| switchgear
| |
| ; 480-V notor 600 V 25,000 A at 480 V control centers 120-VAC 600 V 10,000 A at 120 y distribution paneIs 4.0 control power for Class 1E eg;ipment is Verify that the control power specified provided as follows: is 120 VAC from control transformers for starters. Verify that the vendor Class 1E Equipment Class 1E Control documents incorporate this requirement.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 016, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ; CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICW SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS Power Source 6900-V breaker and 125-vDC systen associated protective relaying ~
| |
| , 480 V toad center 125 vDC systen I breakers and relaying j 480-V motor control 120-VAC derived through center starters control transformers control relays and 125 vDC and 118-V panels and instrument minterrwtible AC rocks i
| |
| 8.0 Motor feeders comected to the 6900 V Verify that circuit breakers are switchgear buses are protected by phase and specified for short circuit protection grom d overcurrent relays; 480V feeders are and thermal relays for overload protected by phase overcurrent relays only. protection. Verify that vendor See Figures 8.3-5 through 8. If the feeder documents are in agreement.
| |
| ! breaker fails to clear, back @ relaying trips the incoming circuit breaker. Seatter motors
| |
| { are comected to MCCs containing combitytion j starters, d ere short circuit protection is provided by circuit breakers wd overload j protection by thermal retsys.
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| O t O' -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VEEIFICATION NC/NA C0 GENTS 9.0 Class 1E motor operated valve motor starters verify that thermal magietic breakers are provided with thernet overloads, are specified for motor-operated valve comected to starm only, and thermal magnetic starters and that thernet overloads are i
| |
| breekers to trip the starter for sustained comected to provide for eterm only.
| |
| Locked rotor conditions. The motor feeders verify that the vendor documents 1
| |
| in such cases are sized such that they are incorporate the regJirements.
| |
| protected try the starter thennet magnetic breakers.
| |
| , 16.0 The minisua through maximum systen voltages verify that the minimum through maxim m j will provide adegJete voltage to att systen voltages as discussed in FSAR
| |
| ] safety-related egJipment as discussed in FSAR R040.49 Pers. 2a through 2e, are R040.49, Paragraph 2a through 2e. specified and incorporated in vendor l documents.
| |
| l 18.0 control and Instrumentation Except for Verify that MCC control and
| |
| ] motor starter circuits and local contsetors, instrumentation (if any) that regJires all control and instrumentation are supplied power, other than motor starter via the 125V DC or 118V AC regulated power circuits, is specified to be powered supplies. The battery chargers provide a from 125 Vdc or 118 vec supplies.
| |
| nominst 130V DC "ptus or minus" 1/2% output verify that vendor documentation j to the DC switchboards. Irwerters provide a demonstrates this suitability, for any i nominal 118VAC 2% output to their respective such circuits / devices identified.
| |
| distribution panels. Output regulation is maintained under the futt range of system
| |
| ~3 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| 4
| |
| | |
| T . .
| |
| b DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS voltages indicated.
| |
| 19.0 Motor starter colts are desipied to pick te verify that starters are specified to at 75% of rated colt voltage (120 volts) and pickte as indicated and vendor drop out at 60% of rated coil voltage. h - nts incorporate these Interposing relays are employed there the re @lromants. Verify that interposing effects of tone control circuits combined relays are specified where appropriate.
| |
| with redJced voltage re@lre them. Local If local contactors are used, verify contactors pick to and hold at 851 rated compliance to criteria requirements.
| |
| voltage (120 volts).
| |
| Obtain the maximun voltage dip from the The maximum voltage dip dJe to large motor voltage drop calculations to assure starting at the minimun bus voltages that starting of the largest setor at indicated will not result in any contactors einfaun bus voltage wilt not degrade dropping out. Thus, contirued operation of MCC voltage to a level that will drop all equipment is assured. out starters as si g lied per vendor documentation.
| |
| 42.0 CDC-18 Inspection and Testing of Electric Verify that the provisions of (DC-18 Power Systems. are specified and vendor documents incorporate these regJirements.
| |
| Electric power systems important to safety shall be designed to permit appropriate periodic inspection and testing of important areas and features, such as wiring, insulation, comections, and switchboards, to assess the continuity of the systems and the 4 DAP FORM E 016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 o
| |
| | |
| p
| |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/N4 CGGENTS condition of their components. The systees shall be designed with a capability to test periodically (1) the operability and
| |
| ! functional performance of the components of the systems, such as onsite power sources, relays, switches, and buses, and (2) the operability of the systems as a sole and, tnder conditions as close to design as practical, the futt operation aespance that brings the systems into operation, includire operation of applicable portions of the
| |
| , protection system, and the transfer of power among the ruclear power Lnit, the of fsite power system, and the onsite power systen.
| |
| l 46.0 Provided that the comple* con of the safety Verify that the abitity to bypass ftnction is not jeopardized or that other thernet overloads is specified and j safety systems are not degraded, (a) the incorporated in vendor documents and thermal overload protection devices (for meets the identified criteria.
| |
| ; electric motors on motor-operated valves) should be continuotsty bypassed and temporarily placed in force only Wwn the valve motors are undergoing periodic or maintenance testing or (b) those thenmal overload protection devices that are normally in force daring plant operation should be bypassed under accident conditions.
| |
| 4 5 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| m , ,
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DESC*IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DoCtmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0fGENTS The bypass initiation system circuitry should conform to the criteria of Section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.10, and 4.13 of IEEE Std.
| |
| 279-1971, " Criteria for Protection Systems for Nucteer Power Generating Stations," and should be periodically test M.
| |
| i 1
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verify that gJalification re g irements EgJipment for Nuclear Power Plants, per Reg. Guide 1.89 are included in the MCC specification.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E egJipment design complies with the quellfication program guidelines as Verify that vendor gJalification delineated in this regulatory spJide dated reports are included in a TUGC0 November, 1974. For details see (fSAR) equipment gJalification review and section 8.3. approval program.
| |
| 50.0 Power Quality. Verify that the spec. specifies the voltage and fracpJoney limits adegJetely The variations of voltage and frequency in and these are incorporated in the the Class IE power systems dJring any desi p vendor documents.
| |
| basis event ahatt not degrade the performance l of any Load to the extent of causing si pificant damage to the fuel or to the reactor coolant system.
| |
| i 51.0 Identification. Verify that the spec. regJires adequate 6 DAP FORM E-016, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| f%
| |
| I t
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST lamber ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS i
| |
| l
| |
| ! . Indentification of the MCC's and the l Components of Class IE power systems, and design documents. Verify that venodr their associated design, operating, and h-nts incorporate the 1 maintenance documents, shall be marked or identification requirements.
| |
| l tabeled in a distinctive manner, j 52.0 E@ipment Qualification. See Criterion No. 49.0.
| |
| f Each type of Class IE power equipment shall l be quotified by analysis, successfut use i taider similar conditions, or by actual test l to demonstrate its ability to perform its
| |
| ]
| |
| ftsiction taider norant and design basis j events.
| |
| l i
| |
| 54.0 Distribution System . (2) Verify for selected toads that the
| |
| ; speelflod circuit breaker and motor
| |
| ! (1) Description. starter sizes / ratings are consistent j uith toad re g irements.
| |
| l The distribution system shall consist of att i e@lpment in the distribution circuit fran (4) Verify that sufficient Indication j its stply circuit breaker (s) to the loads. of operating status is specified and that vendor h - nts incorporate this
| |
| ! (2) Capability, indication.
| |
| Each distribution circuit shall be capable of (5) Verify that power to remired transmitting sufficient energy to start and auxiliary devices is styptied from a l
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E 016, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| D \ \ *
| |
| * s I
| |
| Q (/
| |
| 1 i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS i
| |
| I I
| |
| operate all rewired loads in that circuit. related bus source and that the vendor
| |
| ! documents incorporate provision for (3) Independence. these sources, as regJired.
| |
| , Distribution circuits to redundant egalpment shall be physically and electrically indeperdent of each other.
| |
| i (4) Surveillance.
| |
| The distribution system shall be monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to perform its intended finction.
| |
| . (5) Auxitinry Devices.
| |
| Auxiliary devices that are required to operate dependent egalpment shall be steplied from a related bus section to prevent the toss of electric power in one load grotp from causing the loss of agaipeent in another load grotp.
| |
| (6) Feeders.
| |
| Feeders between Class IE power systems located in Safety Class structures and systems located in non-Safety Class structures shall be provided with circuit i
| |
| , 8 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 1
| |
| 1 I
| |
| I 1
| |
| | |
| o o - -
| |
| i
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IAMgER ,REV._,,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATIGI NC/NA CDsENTS I
| |
| breakers tocated in the Safety Class structure.
| |
| l 1
| |
| 66.0 The capability of att Class IE e pipment, Review spec and acceptance test report including interfaces, of a nuclear power and verify that the re @ lred f a ction j generating station for performing its of the MCC is demonstrated. Also, see regsired f metion shall be demonstrated. It criterion No. 49.0.
| |
| Is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt epipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to j supplement type tests. See IEEE Std 3 3 1974 for detailed requirements.
| |
| 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical equipment except Verify that the identification motors are identified by 11 alphanumeric re@lraments are appropriately f character tag raabers. The eighth character specified and the vendor documents j is either E, P, or (any other character incorporate the criteria re @irements.
| |
| ; except E or P), with E designating e@ipment l d ich is Class 1E, P designating e @ ipment
| |
| ! elch is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) desipating equipment dich is non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors sipplied with pumps are identified by the same tag nusber as the plaps.
| |
| 9 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| f \
| |
| w .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NlmeER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICNI SAT /lmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS I
| |
| )
| |
| i.
| |
| l 69.0 The destyi bases, criteria, NRC regulatory verify the recpairements of FSAR j spaides, standards, and other documents that Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9 that are ieplemented in the design of the are applicable to MCC's are specified safety-related systems (as discussed in and are incorporated in the vendor
| |
| ! (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are Listed as dncuments.
| |
| } follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9).
| |
| The onsite AC, DC, and 118-V uninterrtptible l AC electric systems are in conforunnee with General Destyi Criteria (GDC), NRC Regulatory Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable
| |
| +
| |
| criteria as listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 and as described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| Note: Specific criteria from documents referenced herein are contained elsediere in
| |
| { this list. Reviewers should refer to the
| |
| ; above mentioned FSAR sections for criteria i
| |
| not specificatty mentioned in this list, as appropriate to each review.
| |
| 1 j 70.0 In addition to the tag numbers, Class 1E verify that the appropriate color equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways coding recpairements are specified and are identified by the following color coding incorporated in vendor documents.
| |
| ; system:
| |
| : a. ESF System 10 DAP FORM E-016, REY. 1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| I j .
| |
| i I
| |
| a DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NL8eER .REV._ ,DATE j REFERENE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA C(BSENTS l
| |
| Train A Grange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systaan at Channel Level I
| |
| Channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channet 2 m ite (W) j Channel 3 Stue (B)
| |
| Chamet 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated circuits
| |
| ] Associated Train A Orange with white stripes (0) l Associated Train 5 Green with s ite i stripes (G) 1 1
| |
| ; d. Non-Class IE Circuits I
| |
| Train C Black (K) i
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and Equipment l untural raceways color or natural i equipment color I
| |
| 11 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| N \j 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE I
| |
| j REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(M SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M WC/NA C(DGENTS 1
| |
| 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E Verify that the color coding is equipment on en area dich is readily visible specified to be readily visible in the (e.g., ctose to nameptate or idontifIcation spec. and that vendor h m ta j tag rusber). incorporate this requirement.
| |
| l '
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E egalpment and circuits are clearly Verify that design oocuments and idmtified on documents and drawings in drawings clearly identify Class 1E accordance with IEEE 494-1974. equipmenticircuits per IEEE 494 1974.
| |
| I 79.0 All Class 1E egalpment will be gantified per See criterion No. 49.0.
| |
| ; IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, 3.118, and Appendix 3A for additional details on erwirorumental gastificatim.
| |
| t l
| |
| 84.0 The seismic gaelification of Class 1E Verify that the appropriate seismic egalpment should demonstrate an egalpment's regairements per IEEE 344 and Reg.
| |
| ability to perfonn its regaired function Guide 1.100 are referenced within the I
| |
| during and after the time it is stbjected to specification.
| |
| the forces resulting from one SSE. In j addition, the ecpalpment must withstand the ef fects of a number of OBEs (see Sections 5.4 i and 6.1.4 of IEEE 344 (1975)) prior to the I apptication of an SSE.
| |
| ; 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| - --- ~~ ------m - -
| |
| __ _ -e__ n_ u _
| |
| . r (%
| |
| {
| |
| i l DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION
| |
| ; CIECKLIST IRaeER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| { REFERENCE DESGIPTIM SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| 100. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA C(BOENTS i
| |
| i l electrical e pipment are seismically l watifled in accordance uith the procedures j and documentation regJirements specified in IEEE 344 1975 Recommended Practices for seismic Qualification of Class 1E Epipment for Nuclear Power Generatire Stations.
| |
| i 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| I electrical epipment including stancRyy pouer systems are desired to maintain structurst i integrity and fisictional operability during j and af ter an earthganke of magnitude @ to i and incitsiing the SSE.
| |
| 87.0 At L Seismic Category I trutrumentation and See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical e @ipment are qualifled by analysis or testing, or both. Seismic l analysis without testing is used if it is j demonstrated that the performance of the emipment othjected to earthgaske motion can be conservatively predicted and if the 1 functioneL operabitity of the instrumentation or e m ipment is assured by its structural integrity stone.
| |
| 88.0 Steports of instrumentation and electrical See criterion No. 84.0 l
| |
| 13 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86 j
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| - e
| |
| ( '
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS equipment such as bettery rocks, instrtment racks, control connotes, cabinets, and penets are analyzed or tested, or both, by their sigptiers in accordance with the methods and procachree described in Section 3.75.2.1.3 (of the FSAR).
| |
| 122.0 Reg. Guide 1.106 - Thenmat Overtoed Verify that thernet overtoed protection Protection for Electric Motors on for electric motor operators is Motor-operated valves. specified to meet R.G. 1.106 (77) and vendor documents incorporate these The CPSES deslyt complies with the provisions requirements.
| |
| of Revision 1 (3/TT) of this regulatory tpaide as described in Section 8.3.1.1.11 Item 2.
| |
| 127.0 Interrteting capacities of switchgoer, toad Verify that the MCC interrtstirgs centers, motor control centers, and capacity was selected on the beels of distribution penets are selected on the basis the short circuit calculation in effect of short-circuit calculations. at the time of purchase or vendor data approval.
| |
| 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 See criterion No. 84.0 Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment.
| |
| The CPSES design for Class 1E electrical equipment complies with the requirements and 14 DAP FORM E-016, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 1 j DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMgER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| ; REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) DF vtRIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l
| |
| recommendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| s The intent of Section C.1 is met by performing an analysis to verify the approach
| |
| 'l and/or by following the acpJivalent static toad method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| I 136.0 m an a Ctoss 1E contact performs a non-Ctoss Reviau setactad NCC drawings to 1 1E control fmetion (e.g. energiaire a determine Class IE contacts s ich solenoid for a non-Class 1E valve), isolation perform non Class 1E control fmetions.
| |
| ]
| |
| is provided ty an auxiliary relay. Verify for any casas fomd that i isolation is provided by an auxiliary
| |
| } m en a Class 1E contact performs a non Class relay.
| |
| , 1E monitoring fmetion (e.g. activating an i
| |
| alarm or irpst to a couputer), en isolation is normatty provided by a phototransmitter compted pair (Light-amitting diode and I transistor).
| |
| I I
| |
| l l
| |
| l i
| |
| 1 l
| |
| 15 DAP FORM E 016, REV.1, 08/13/86 I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| s
| |
| % ,, -.g
| |
| \
| |
| i I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLDSER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCtDIENT, PAGE) OF WERIFICATION NC/NA CGelENTS 17.0 2a. Motors - Voltage at the terminals of See Criterion No. 50.0.
| |
| ruming motors is generally maintained within NEMA standard limits (ie "plus or mirmas 101 of rated voltage). The lowest ruining voltage calculated for any motor is 88% of rated. However, since all motors have a 1.15 service factor or are equivalently oversized in excess of the load brake horsepower regairements (see FSAR Section 8.3.1.1.10),
| |
| the ef fect of this red.ced voltage on continuous operation is negligible. The minisun starting voltage calculated for any motor is at least 80% of rated except for the spent fuel pool cooling pusp motor ediich is capable of starting with 70% of rated voltage. All motors therefore have acceptable starting and ru1ning voltage.
| |
| 2b. Resistance Heaters - Heaters will function continuously at the range of voltages indicated above, however, the kilowatt output will be redaced at the minisun voltage. The effect of this reduction in output is being investigated for all safety-related heaters to verify they are adequately sized for the reduced voltage condition.
| |
| 2c. Battery Chargers & Inverters - Battery 1 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| e e-( v'
| |
| .{
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LaiSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS chargers and inverters will provide continuous operation under the range of voltages indicated. Further the irwerters will contfrue to ftmetion span reduction of or total loss of AC power via the DC system.
| |
| 2d. Lighting - Plant lighting illumination levels will vary with the minimum through maximum bus voltages indicated. Lighting transformers have adjustable taps d ich will be set to provide adecpante litumination at the normal operating kna vottages. DC Lighting is also available in the event of loss of the AC system.
| |
| 18.0 Control and Instrumentation - Except for ES-8g 3.7.C Verify that the 125Vdc battery charger motor starter circuits and local contactors, Rev. 1 float range can envelope 130Vdc +/-
| |
| all control and instrumentation are sg ptied CAN Ltr. 0.5%.
| |
| via the 125V de or 118V ac regulated power GTN30330 st4 plies. The battery chargers provide a 9/27/78 nominal 13Gvdc "plus or mirus" 1/21 output to the de switchboards. Inverters provide a nominal 118Vac 2% output to their respective distribution penets. Output regulation is maintained under the futt range of system voltages inci; sated.
| |
| l l
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-017. REV.1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| O O- -
| |
| j DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLAeBER ,REV._,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| I NO. CRITERIA (DOCLAIENT, PAGE) 1 0F VERIFICATI(Bl NC/NA COGENTS l
| |
| I j 21.0 Battery S q ly. Each bettery supply shall ES-88 3.7.1.C Review the bettery charger j consist of the storage cells, comectors, and 3.7.1.I REV 1 specification and verify the its comections to the distribution system identification of continuous float j supply circuit breaker. capability.
| |
| Each battery s p ly shall be capable of i starting and operating att required loads.
| |
| 1 Each battery sply shall be immediately available daring normal operations and following the loss of power from the alterneting-current system.
| |
| Each battery stpply shall be independent of other bettery st4 plies.
| |
| Indicators shall be provided to monitor the
| |
| , status of the bettery s e ly, i
| |
| l Batteries shall be maintained in a fully j charged condition. Stored energy shall be
| |
| ; sufficient to operate all necessary circuit l breakers and to provide an adegante source of j power for all regaired connected loads for as I
| |
| long as each may be regaired during a loss of alternating-current power to the battery l chargers.
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E 017, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| s
| |
| [
| |
| 1 y h . e I
| |
| 4 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION CGeqENTS NC/NA i
| |
| f
| |
| , 22.0 Battery Charger Stqply. Each battery charger ES-88 3.7.1 1) Review charger specification and
| |
| ! supply shalt include all egaipannt from its Rev. 1 verify that the scope includes from AC comection to the alternating-current system Calc. IK-1 power in to DC sigiply circuit breaker to its distribution system's steply circuit Rev. 2 inclusive.
| |
| breaker. Cate. XIII 2 Rev. 0 2) Verify that a battery recharge time I
| |
| Each battery charger stpply shall furnish DS-55-1539-S is identified in the charger j electric energy for the steady-state Rev. 11 specification.
| |
| operation cf connected loads required daring DS 55-1539-A noneel and post-accident operation idtile its Sh. 6, Rev. 1 3) Verify that each safeguards charger battery is returned to or amintained in a includes as a minism the following futty charged state. Indicators.
| |
| Each battery charger stppty shatI have output vottage indicator j sufficient capacity to restore the battery output current indicator j fran the design minisue charge to its fully Circuit breaker position l charged state notile ugptying nonpal and j post-accident steady-state toads. 4) Verify that charger design includes a blocking diode (ar ee41 valent).
| |
| The battery charger styply shall be I independent of other battery charger stqpties.
| |
| f Indicators shall be provided to amnitor the j status of the battery charger sigply. This j
| |
| i instrtmentation shat 1 include indication of:
| |
| a) output voltage j b) output current l c) circuit breaker position 4
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| ~ O O- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAi!Oti
| |
| ? CHECKLIST MLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE 1
| |
| 1 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFI;ATION NC/NA C018EEMIS Each battery charger power stypty shall have a disconnecting device in its atternating-current power incoming feeder and its direct-current power output circuit for isolating the charger.
| |
| i Each battery charger power stpply shatI be designed to prevent the alternating current i power styply from becoming a load on the battery dae to a power fee &ack as the result of the loss of alternating-current power to tne chargers.
| |
| f I
| |
| 33.0 Each red m dent Class 1E 125-V system consists El-0001 Review single Line drawings to verify
| |
| ] of two independent batteries each having, one Rev. 8 two chargers per Class 1E bus.
| |
| j main distribution bus with molded case t
| |
| circuit breakers, fusible switches, two l static battery chargers (one spare), and local distritaation panels. Re& ndancy of j components precludes loss of both systems as a result of a single failure. For Unit 1, batteries BTIED1 and BTIED3 feed all train A toad requirements, while batteries BTIED2 and l BTIED4 sipply train B toad regJirements.
| |
| j For Unit 2, batteries BT2ED1 and BT2ED3 feed all train A toad requirements, while batteries BT2ED2 and Bi2ED4 stpply train B l
| |
| 5 DAP FORet E 017, REV.1, 08/13/86 I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| {~ 0 *
| |
| * l Y Y I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NueBER ,REV. _ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCuqENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS
| |
| ]
| |
| l l
| |
| l I
| |
| +
| |
| toad requirements.
| |
| There are no bus ties or sharirig of power j supplies between rechadant trains. Class 1E
| |
| ) equipment associated with systems shared by j both units receives power from penet boards havire an incomitig automatic transfer switch d ich can select power from either unit.
| |
| Transfer switch desiri is such that power camot be sagptied from both tmits simultaneousty. Train separation is maintained by supplying these shared 4
| |
| penetboards from the same train of both toits. Independence and separation are j maintained throughout the AC stpply circuitry j as wett as in the DC distribution network.
| |
| Non-Class 1E toads are not connected to these
| |
| ! systems.
| |
| 34.0 Each Class 1E 125-Vdc system has the capacity See Criterion No. 21.0.
| |
| I to continuously sety att the connected i normat running toad s ite maintaining its l respective bettery in a fully charged condition. Each bettery is capable of carrying the essential load continuously for j a period of four hr. in the event of a total I Loss of onsite and offsite AC power. The battery capacity for ST1ED1 and BTIED2 at an i
| |
| j 6 DAP FORN E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| t I
| |
| | |
| 4 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCUIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS f
| |
| l 1
| |
| eight-hr discharge rate with a final voltage of 1.75-V/ cell, is 1950 Ah. The battery capacity for ST1ED3 and BTIED4, at an eight hr discharge rate with a final voltage of 1.75-v/ cell, is 1200 Ah. sattery capacities for the Unit 2 Class 1E 125-v batteries are similar.
| |
| 35.0 Sattery chargers DS-55-1539-A 1) verify that Class 1E battery Sh. 3 chargers have both float and agaelize Two 100 percent-capacity static battery Rev. 2 ande capability selected try a front charger mits are provided for each Class 1E PS-74-32 101 penet switch.
| |
| ; 125-v battery system. Normally, one charger 7/12/78 l is operatirgi, and the other is kept as a PS-74-32-103 2) verify float capability of spare. Two circuit breakers connecting these 7/26/78 124-135vdc and agalize egebility of battery chargers to the DC distribution bus PS 74-32-102 134-150Vdc.
| |
| ; are electricatty interlocked such that only 7/12/78 one charger remains comected to the bus at PS-74-32-104 3) Verify that the output voltage is 4
| |
| any time. Each battery charger has a " Float" 7/25/78 regalated to within +/-0.51.
| |
| ]
| |
| and "Ecpatize" mode. A front penet mounted ES-88 switch is provided to select either mode of APP 4 l cperation. The float and egalize voltages Sh. 4 may be independently set at between Rev. 1
| |
| ; appronimately 124 to 135 volts and 134 to 150 volts respectively. The egalize voltage will be set below 140 v. Output voltage is regulated within +/ 0.5 percent of setpoint from no load to full load. Back @ protection 4
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86 4
| |
| | |
| c o-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IAMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI0li SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITER!A (DOCimENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAT10N NC/NA CGeENTS is incorporated by a overvoltage relay momted on the de switchboard d ich annmciates an overvoltage condition in the control room. Att connected loads are specified and desi ped for operation with a menisua input voltage of 140 v. dc. Loads l
| |
| are protected from overvoltage by presetting the menisua ecpatize voltage below 140 v. dc.
| |
| 36.0 Each battery charger is capable of floating Calc. IX-1 1) Verify charger capacity equal or the battery on the bus or recharging the Rev. 2 exceeds that regaired to futty recharge completely discharged battery within 24 hr Cate. XIII 2 batteries BTIED1&2 within 24 hours, d ite supplying the largest combined demands Rev. O of the warfois steady-state loads eder att 2) Verify charger capacity equats or plant operating conditions. exceeds that respired to fully recharge batteries STIED 3&& within 12 hours.
| |
| The recharging time for batteries BT1ED1 and 3) Verify that charger irgiut is BT1ED2 (similar for unit 2), is currently 480Wac, 3 phase.
| |
| approximately 12 hours. Batteries BTIED3 and BT1ED4 (similar for tmit 2), dich 4) Verify that the charger is agaipped provide additional capacity for TMI related with reverse power flow protection.
| |
| changes, are presently tightly toeded and the recharge time will not exceed 12 hours. Input power to these chargers is obtained through independent 480-V, three-stiase, AC supply from Class 1E MCCs.
| |
| Protection is incorporated in the battery chargers to preclude the AC supply source 8 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O O-1 i
| |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ; CNECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICM NC/NA COWENTS fran becoming a toad on the bettery as a l result of power feectasck p loss of AC i input power.
| |
| l 45.0 Associated circuits installed in accordance ES-88 3.3.B Review the charger specification to j with Section 4.5(1) of IEEE-384 (1974) should Rev. 1 determine if any non-Class IE i be s4 ject to att regairements placed on D-55-1539-S interfaces will exist. If so, verify Class 1E circuits such as cable derating Rev. 11 separation or Class IE recpairements
| |
| ; environmental g.salification, flame imposed for associated charger retardance, splicirgs restrictions, and internals.
| |
| )
| |
| raceway fitt smiess it can be desanstrated that the absence of such requirements could not si pificantly re &ce the availabitity of the Class 1E circuits.
| |
| 1 l 47.0 Reg. Guide 1.32 - Criteria for Class 1E See Criterion No. 36.0.
| |
| Electric systems for nuclear power generating statiors.
| |
| The CPSES design complies with the reg 4irements of Rev. 2 (2/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verify that the Reg. Guide 1.89 i Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. regJirements are included in the specification.
| |
| I l 9 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| v o--
| |
| l 4
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION 1
| |
| CHECKLIST NiseBER ,REV._ ,DATE 1
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 3s0. CRITERIA (DOC 1 STENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/MA CGIMENTS I
| |
| l The CPSES Class 1E ecpipment design complies with the cpatification program guidelines as Also, see Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory giaide dated
| |
| ! November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| ; 50.0 Power Quality. ES-8B 3.7.1.A Verify that the charger output is Rev. 1 within Criterion 35.0 timits for bus The variations of voltage and frespency in voltages of 430-510Vac (Ref Topic E3,
| |
| ! the Class 1E power systems during any design Criterion 17.0).
| |
| ! basis event shall not degrade the perfonamnce of any load to the extent of causing i significar.t damage to the fuel or to the reactor coolant system.
| |
| l 51.0 Identification. ES-as 3.12 1) verify that the bettery charger Rev. 1 specification specifies distinctive ra5v=mts of Class 1E power systems, and El-0001 merkings for design, operating, and
| |
| ! their associated design, operating, and Rev. 8 maintenance h m ts; and that maintenance documents, shalt be marked or DS-55-1539-S maruafecturer's documentation laptements tabeLed in a distinctive manner. Iiev. 11 this respirament.
| |
| l
| |
| : 2) Review single line drawings to ensure bettery chargers are identified ,
| |
| as to voltage class and mit/ train designation.
| |
| 10 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| l i
| |
| | |
| m i
| |
| l.
| |
| l j DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION CNECKLIST NLMRER , REY._,,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| l No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS I
| |
| 1 I
| |
| i l
| |
| j 3) Werify that the battery charger schematic is designated SAFETY-RELATED.
| |
| j 52.0 Ecpaipment Qualification. ES-8B 3.1 Review battery charger procurement 1
| |
| Rev. I specification to ensure safesaard j Each tww of Ctess 1E power ecpaipment shalt DCA 11424 chargers are specified class 1E.
| |
| ]
| |
| be quotified by analysis, successful use j taider similar conditions, or by actual test Also see criterion No. M.0.
| |
| ; to demonstrate its ability to perform its fisiction taider normat and desist basis j events.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| ! 66.0 The capability of all Class 1E espaipment, ES-as 3.3 See criterion No. M.0.
| |
| including interfaces, of a nuclear power and 3.10 l
| |
| : generating station for perfonning its Rev. 1 l regaired ftsiction shall be demonstrated. It I
| |
| is preferred that the demonstration be done l by type tests on actual ecpaipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to st4plement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed requirements.
| |
| i i
| |
| 68.0 All Class 1E electrical ecpaipment except DCA 11424 Review the single line and charger j motors are identified by 11 alpanumeric specification to ensure 11 character i
| |
| charr.cter tag nueers. The eighth character tags nta6ers are assigned; and that the j is either E, P, or (any other character 8th character is an "E" for the l
| |
| 11 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/36 i
| |
| | |
| s o-1 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IAmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctAENT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATION NC/NA CG8ENTS I
| |
| t except E or P), with E designating e @ipment safeguards chargers.
| |
| e ich is Class 1E, P designating e @ipment d ich is part of reactor protection channet
| |
| ; systems, and (other characters eacept E or P)
| |
| ] desipating ecpaipment dich is non-safety related.
| |
| Motors sagiplied with ptaps are identified by the same tag rmatier as the puips.
| |
| ; 69.0 The design bases, criteria, NRC regulatory Verify the following racpJirements 94 ides, standards, arut other doctments that h w ts were addressed in the bettery j are implemented in the design of the charger design:
| |
| j safety-related systems (as discussed in l
| |
| (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as 1) NEMA Ag 1-1975, Notdsd case Circuit l follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 throtch Breakers i 8.1.4.9).
| |
| : 2) NEMA Fu 1-1972, Low Voltage The onsite AC, CC, and 118-V teinterrtetible Cartridge Fuses i
| |
| AC electric systems are in confonmence with General Design Criteria (GDC), NRC Regulatory i Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable i criteria as Listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 and l as described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| l Note: Specific criteria frein documents referenced herein are contained elsedere in j this list. Reviewers should refer to the 12 DAP FORM E 017, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| %)
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NtmsER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPT!au SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS above mentioned FSAR sectians for criteria not specifically mentioned in this list, as ,
| |
| appropriate to each review.
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag tsabers, Class 1E ES-88 3.12 Verify that Train A is identified as ecpaipment, racemeys, ard cables in racemeys Rev. 1 Orange (0) and Train B as Green (G) on are identified by the following color codite N 55-4991 the charger nemoptates.
| |
| system: Rev. 1 I
| |
| : a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamel Levet Channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 m ite (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (a)
| |
| Channet 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Ora w with white stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with thite stripes (G) 13 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLmgER ,REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCISIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGSENTS
| |
| : d. hon Class 1E Circuits Train C Black (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class 1E Cable Raceways and EgJipment Natural raceways color or natural egaipment color 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E See Criterion No. 70.0.
| |
| equipment on an area dich is readily visible 4
| |
| (e.g., close to nameplate or i<tentification i tag rumber).
| |
| i 73.0 Class 1E egaipment and circuits are clearly Verify that the Class 1E 125 volt identified on documents and drawings in bettery chargers are designated accordance with IEEE 494 1974. safety-related on both the single line j diagrams and in the procurament i specification.
| |
| 78.0 Generalty, electrical cables are Review the charger specification for flame-retardant, noncombustible, and incorporation of cable flaae retardance non propagating in nature and conform to the and/or IEEE 383 criteria.
| |
| criterion of IEEE 383 1974. They will not support c=*= tion in the absence of a sustained ignition source.
| |
| 14 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| x ) O-v DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRifERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeENIS 79.0 All Class 1E eqJipment wiLL be qualified per ES 8B 3.11.1.C Verify that the battery charger IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, Rev. 1 specification specifies that Class IE 3.11B, and Appendix 3A for acMitional details chargers be gJalified in accordance on envirorumental qualification. with IEEE 323-1974.
| |
| Verify that vendor qualification reports are included in a TUGC0 ocpalpment gJalification review and approval program.
| |
| 84.0 The seismic gJalification of Class 1E ES 88 3.10.2 Review battery charger specification to equipment should demonstrate an equipment's Rev. 1 ensure that:
| |
| ability to perfonn its recpaired function dJring and af ter the time it is stbjected to 1) Ftmetionality is specified for both the forces resulting from one SSE. in darirqi anti af ter a SSE.
| |
| addition, the equipment must withstaid the ef fects of a rumber of OBEs (see Sections 5.4 2) The appropriate seismic and 6.1.4 of IEEE 344 (1975)) prior to the regJirements per IEEE 344 and Reg.
| |
| application of an SSE. Guide 1.100 are referenced.
| |
| 85.0 Seisaic Category I instrumentation mid ES 88 3.10.1 See Criterion 84.0.
| |
| el *.trical equipment are seismically Rev. 1 qJalified in accordance with the pro:edares and documentation regJirmnents specliied in IEEE 344-1975, Recteunended Practices for 15 DAP FORM E-017. REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| ) D - -
| |
| M '
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuAi!ON CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE
| |
| ! y REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITENIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CupWENTS Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic Category I instrtmentation and See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical ewipment including stan@y power systems are designed to maintain structural integrity and fmetional operability during and after an earth @ ake of magnitude tp to and including the SSE.
| |
| i I
| |
| 87.0 AL L Seisaic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical e w ipment are qualified by analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the performance of the equipment stbjected to earth @ake motion can be conservatively predicted and if the t fmetional operability of the instrumentation or ewipment ts assured by its structurat integrity alone.
| |
| 88.0 Suports of instrumentation and electrical See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| equipment such as battery racks, instrumeTt racks, controt consoles, cabinets, and powls are analyzed or tested, or both, by their suppliers in accordance with the methods and 16 DAP FORM E-017 REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| ) DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAi!ON CHECKLIST NLMBER , RE V._,D A T E REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITFRIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGWENTS procedures described in Section 3.7B.2.1.3 (of the FSAR).
| |
| r 89.0 Battery Charger St4 ply See criterion No. 36.0.
| |
| The provisions of Section 5.3.4 of IEEE Std l
| |
| 308 1974 should be construed to mean that the I capacity of the battery charger supply should I i
| |
| be based on the largest combined demands of the various steady state loads and the l
| |
| chargire capacity to restore the better/ from !
| |
| the design minimum charge state to the fully charged state, irrespective of the status of the plant during which these demands occur. t l
| |
| 1 104.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.1 of If 4 Std ES-8B 3.7.1.1 Review the bettery charger 383-1974, " General," the fot towing should be Rev. 1 specification to determine if:
| |
| used:
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383 1984 is specified "This section describes the method for type testing of grouned cables via the vertical 2) The imposed exception / clarification tray flame test to determine their relative of the IEEE "Generat" (Section 2.5.1) self extinguishire tendencies. Testing shall is defined.
| |
| incitzse both aged and imaged cable specimens."
| |
| 17 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| N . .
| |
| t -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COBOENTS 105.0 In lieu of Sectin 2.5.2.2 of IEEE Std ES-88 3.7.1.1 Review the battery charger 383-1974, the following should be used: Rev. I specification to determine if:
| |
| "The fire test provisions of the standard are 1) IEEE 383 1984 is specified useful in screening out cable insiJtation materiets that are inadew ately 2) The imposed exception / clarification self extinguishing, but they shalt not be of the IEEE Section 2.5.2.2 is defined.
| |
| construed as qualification of any installed cable system configuration. If field splices are to be used in cable trays, special provisions shall be made to demonstrate that the fire retardant properties of the cable are not altered macceptably in an adverse way by the field splice."
| |
| 106.0 Section 2.5.4.2 of IEEE STD Review the battery charger 3831974-- Vertical tray configuration should specification to determine if:
| |
| be used and mderstood to mean perpendicular to the plane of the horizon. 1) IEEE 383 1984 is specified
| |
| : 2) The imposed exceptforVctarification of the IEEE Section 2.5.2.2 is defined.
| |
| l 107.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4 of IEEE Std ES-88 3.7.1.1 Review the battery charger l 383 1974, the followias should be used: Rev. 1 specification to determine if:
| |
| "The gas burner flame source shall consume 1) IEEE 383 1974 is specified 18 DAP FORet E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| l O 3- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NueOER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCBGENTS propane gas so as to release approximately 70,000 STU per hour at an air-gas ratio of 5 2) The imposed exception / clarification to 1. Natural grade propane shall be used. of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4 is defined.
| |
| 108.0 In lieu of the first sentence of Section ES 88 3.7.1.1 Review the battery charger 2.5.4.4.1 of IEEE Std 383-1974, the following Rev. 1 apecification to determine if:
| |
| should be used:
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified "The ribbon gas burner shall be mo mted horizontatty such that the flame ispims on 2) The leposed exception / clarification the specimen midway between the tray rmes of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4.1, first and so that the burner face is in front of sentence, is defined.
| |
| and 4 inches from the cable and approximately 2 feet above the bottom of the tray." See R.G. 1.131 for specification of ribbon gas burner.
| |
| i 109.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4.3 of IEEE Std ES Se 3.7.1.1 Review the battery charger 383 1974, the following should be used: Rev. 1 specification to determine if:
| |
| " Flame size will normally be achieved den 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified the propane flow is 27.8 standard cubic feet per hour and the air flow is 139 standard 2) The imposed exception / clarification ctbic feet per hour.a of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.4.3 is defined.
| |
| 19 DAP FORM E-017, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| CD w/
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS 110.0 Section 2.5.4.5 of IEEE Std 383-1974 is not ES-8G 3.7.1.1 Review the battery charger endorsed by this regulatory guide. Rev. 1 specification to determine if:
| |
| : 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified
| |
| : 2) The exception of the IEEE Section 2.5.4.5 is identified.
| |
| 111.0 The recommendations indicated by "should" ara 1 ES 88 3.7.1.1 Review the bettery charger the options indicated by "may" in the Rev. 1 specification to determine if:
| |
| sections of IEEE Std 383 1974 indicated below have sufficient importance to be treated *.he 1) IEEE 383-1974 is specified same as re@lrements of the standard:
| |
| : 2) The recommendations listed in the
| |
| : a. Section 1.3.1, " Cable Description" criteria are specified as re girements
| |
| : b. Section 1.3.2, " Field Splices or rather than electives.
| |
| Comection Description"
| |
| : c. Section 1.3.4.1, " Meeting Service conditions", the first sentonce.
| |
| : d. Cection 1.3.4.2.1, " Design Basis Event---LOCA"
| |
| : e. Section 1.4.1, " General"
| |
| : f. Section 1.4.3, " Test Results"
| |
| : g. Section 1.4.4, Test Evaluation"
| |
| : h. Section 2.2, Type Test Samples"
| |
| : i. Section 2.3.3, " Thermal and Radiatinn Exposure"
| |
| : j. Section 2.3.3.3 20 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86 1
| |
| i i
| |
| | |
| s . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLmeER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| : k. Section 2.3.3.4 L. Section 2.4.3, "LOCA SimJiation"
| |
| : m. Section 2.4.3.1
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.2
| |
| : o. Section 2.4.4, " Post LOCA SinJlation Test" j p. Section 2.5.2.1
| |
| , q. Section 2.5.4.3
| |
| : r. Section 2.5.4.4.2
| |
| : s. Section 2.5.5, " Evaluation"
| |
| : t. Section 2.5.6, " Instrument Cable and Single Condactors fran Multiconductor Assembly", the recommendation that the tested cable pass a flame resistance test in accordance with ASTM D?220 68.
| |
| I 120.0 Reg. Guide 1.131 - Qualification Tests of See criterion No. 78.0.
| |
| )
| |
| Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Light Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants.
| |
| i Although the implementation of this regulatory guide, dated August 1977, does not include CPSES, all Class 1E cables of the CPSES meet most of the recpJirements of this regulatory guide with the few exceptions
| |
| ; noted below:
| |
| ! 21 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86 f
| |
| i
| |
| -'m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
| |
| | |
| s ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmBER ,REV._ ,DATE
| |
| ; REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| I NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS
| |
| : a. All prefabricated cables of the CPSES do not aset the following requirements:
| |
| Vertical tray flame test on the aged
| |
| , 1.
| |
| cables to determine their relatlve self-extinpaishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6);
| |
| : 2. Flame testing with the gas burner
| |
| ; face in the front (RegJlatory Guide position c.10). However, work is in progress by i vendor on these items.
| |
| : b. All Sky cables, nGOV power lighting cables of the CPSES do not meet the following rewirements:
| |
| 1 1. " Radiation Egosure Totata . per Regulatory Guide 1,89 Position C.S.
| |
| : 2. Vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to determine their relative self extinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position C.6).
| |
| : 3. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| l 22 DAP FORM E-017, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| w % , .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| : 4. Gas and air flow requirements (Regulatory Guide position C.11).
| |
| ] 129.0 Regalatory Guide 1.100 - Seismic See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| Qualification of Electric E.pJipment.
| |
| The CPSES design for Class 1E electrical equipt complies with the regJirements and.
| |
| recommendations of Rev. 1 (8/77) of this regalatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is met by performitig an analysis to verify the approach and/or by following the equivalent stat c load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.108 and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 4 132.0 Physical separation of redtsdant Class 1E See Criterion No. 45.0.
| |
| circuits and devices or other c.mponents should be provided within each Class 1E control switchboard, so that no single credible event as identified below, can
| |
| * prevent the proper ftmetioning of any Class 1E system. See Eccti.n 4.2.1 of IEEE Std.
| |
| 420-1973 for additional details.
| |
| I 23 DAP FORM E 017, REV.1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| _ ~ __ _ . _ _
| |
| {
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ] No. CRITERIA (DOCutENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l
| |
| j 136.0 men a C1 ass 1E contact performs a non-Ctass See Criterion No. 45.0.
| |
| 4 1E control fmetion (e.g. energizing a solenoid for a non-Class 1E valve), isolation is provided try an auxiliary relay.
| |
| I When a Class 1E contact performs a non-Class 1E neonitoring function (e.g. activating an l alarm or f rput to a computer), an isolation j is normally provided try a $ototransmitter i co@ted pair (light emitting diode and transistor).
| |
| i f
| |
| i, 24 DAP FORM E 017, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| y 1 O O O-l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,0 ATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| { NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CUMPENT S 16.0 The minim a through maxioun system voltages verify by review of the spec. that the will provide adegaate voltage to all minim a through anxinun voltages safety related egJipment as discussed in FSAR specified are consistent with the R040.49, Paragraph 2a through 2e, criteria requirements and that vendor documents demonstrate their values are met.
| |
| 17.0 2a. Motors - Voltage at the terminals of ES-9R1 2c. Verify that the inverters are ruming setors is generatty maintained within CP 00445 001 specified to provide continuous NEMA standard limits (i.e., "plus or minus (6/81) operation mder the full range of 10% of rated voltage"). The Lowest ruviing CP-0445 004 specified voltage conditions and that voltage calculated for any motor is 88% of (10/80) the inverters will continue to fmetion rated. However, since all motors have a 1.15 mder re&ced or total loss of AC service factor or are eqaivalently overstred power. Verify that the vendor in excess of the load broke horsepower documents incorporate these regJirenents (see FSAR Section 8.3.1.1.10), regairements.
| |
| the effect of this reduced vottage on continuous operation is negligible. The mininun starting voltage calculated for any motor is at least 80% of rated except for the spent fuel pool cooling ptmp motor which is capable of starting with 70% cf rated voltage. All motors therefore have acceptable starting and ruming voltage.
| |
| 2b. Resistance Heaters - Heaters will function continuously at the range of voltages indicated above; however, the 1 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECELIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS kit m tt output will be reduced at the u m.a m voltage. The effect of this redaction in output is being investigated for all safety related heaters to verify they are adequately sized for the reduced voltage condition.
| |
| 2c. Battery Chargers & Inverters - Battery chargers and inverters will provide continuous operation under the range of voltages indicated. Further, the inverters will continue to fmetion span redaction of or total loss of AC power via the !< system.
| |
| 2d. Lighting - Plant lighting illumination
| |
| ! levels will very with the minisam through maximas bus voltages indicated. Lighting transformers have adjustable taps editch will be set to provide adcquate illumination at the normal operating bus voltages. DC lighting is also available in the event of
| |
| , loss of the AC system.
| |
| i 18.0 Control and Instrumentation - Except for Spect ES-9R1 Verify that 118 VAC plus or miran 2%
| |
| motor starter circuits and local contactors, vendor Manual output is specified for the inverters
| |
| ; all control and instrumentation are supplied CP 0445-001 and is fully regulated over the full via the 125V DC or 118V AC regulated power' (6/81) range of system voltages. Verify that surplies. The battery chargers provide a the vendor documents incorporate these 2 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER .REV._ ,DATE i REFERENCE DESCRIPT!0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION COMENTS WC/NA nominal 130V DC "plus or minus= 1/21 output regairements.
| |
| to the DC switchboards. Inverters provide a nominal 118VAC 2% output to their respective distribution panels. Output regulation is maintained mder the full range of system voltages indicated.
| |
| 25.0 The 118 VAC single phase, 60 Nz, gromded Spec. ES 9R1 Verify that the BOP SUPS is specified i minterrtptible power is stgptied to critical Dugs:E1 0018 CP according to the criteria regairements instrtmentation and contro! circuits. Per 3 regarding ratings, gJantity, each unit there are four Class 1E and two E1 0018 02 CP 2 configuration, and power sources.
| |
| non-Class 1E static minterrtptible power st4pties (SUPS) for BOP instrumentation and Verify that the vendor's egJipment control systems, four minterrtetible power meets the specified regJirements by sigpties (UPS) for the reactor protection reviewing vendor documentation.
| |
| system, one (UPS) for the plant computer and two SUPS for the emergency response facilities (ERF) computers.
| |
| Each SUPS cmsists of an inverter, AC irput rectifer, bypass transfonner, and static (autonetic) and bypass (marual) switches.
| |
| For details see (FSAR) Figures 8.3 15, 8.3-15B and 8.3 15C. Each Class 1E inverter receives incoming norinal power stopty from a Class 1E 480 V motor control center and backtp DC power sigply from the Class 1E 125-V batteries by means of an auctioneering 3 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| Nr DESIGN AEVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MimgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREhCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS type circuit. The above motor control center has access to two offsite power sources and one onsite power source. For details of of fsite power sources, see (FSAR) Section 8.2. If the nominal AC power input source faits, the inverter output will be amintained without interrtption due to the avaltability of DC input power from the battery.
| |
| I 1
| |
| 27.0 In the absence of inverter output, the static Verify that on an absence of irwerter
| |
| - switch discomscts the frwerter free the toad output, the static switch will and comects the load to the alternate st@ ply disconnect the irwerter from the load Line from the bypass (nonregulating) and comect it to the alternate sigply transformer within 1/4 cycle. The switch line within 1/4 cycle with break before operation is break before make. make switch operation. Verify that t!'is is incorporated in the equipment by reviewing the vendors doctmentation.
| |
| 28.0 Each bypass transformer receives incoming Spec: ES 9R1 Verify that the re@lrasents of the power sispty from a class 1E 480-V motor Vendor Manust: criteria are incorporated into the controt center. The irwerter will CP 0445 001 specification relative to automatically resynchronize with respect to (6/81) resynchronizing and switching features, fregJency and phase with the bypass source and provision for annunciation of following a toss and restoration of this bypass switch operation.
| |
| reference source. Under normat operating conditions, the static transfer switch Verify that the criteria requirements comects the inverter to the toad. However, are incorporated in the equipnent by 4 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86 f
| |
| | |
| N .. .
| |
| (
| |
| \
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICAfirm NC/NA COMENTS a maruet bypass transfer switch, provided for review of vendor doctmentation.
| |
| ewipment maintenance, can be used to bypass the static switch and sigply power to t;ee l Load directly from the irwerter or bypass j transforner. Operation of the bypess suitch
| |
| ) to any position will not cause power interrtption to the load. Bypassing of the static switch or irwerter is amtsiciated locally and in the Control Room.
| |
| 30.0 operational features of the SUPS trwerters Spec: ES 9R1 Verify that the Irwerters are specified inclisle output voltage adjustable +/ 5 Vendor manual: to be adjustable 118VAC plus or mirus percent from nominal 118-Y, synchronization CP 0445 001 5% from nominal and 12 have i to an external alternate ~AC irput source (6/81) synchronization and frequency
| |
| (+/-10 percent nominal 120 V), and output adjustability features per the frequency adjustable over the range of 60 Hz criteria. Also, verify that the vendor i +/ 0.5 Mr. doctments incorporate these desipi features, l
| |
| 31.0 Tests and Inapection Spec: ES 9R1 Verify that the inverters are specified Vendor Manual with these requirements for testing and the inverters are checked for output voltage CP-0445 001 the vendor documents incorporate these and fregency, and transfer between normat, 16/81) testing regJirements.
| |
| alternate and bypass sources, dite operating on either the normal, atternate or % ss sup>t ies. Panel-mounted instruments monitoring the inverter are calibrated and 5 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| r g)
| |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS anrunciator and static switch operation checked. Durirg plant power operations, the RPS and UPS systems are periodically tested and inspected to ensure their cor.tinued capabilities to perform their operations.
| |
| The inverters are testad for their capabilities to transfer without power interrtption between the 480-VAC normal power source and the 125-VDC alternate pcwer source. The irwerter and auctioneering equipaent can be removed from service for inspection and test by manuelty transferring to the bypass power source.
| |
| 42.0 (DC-18 Inspection and Testing of Electric Verify that the provisions of (DC 18 Power Systems, are specified and vendor documents incorporate these regJirements.
| |
| Electric power systems important to safety shalI be designed to permit appropriate periodic inspection and testing of important
| |
| ; areas and features, auch as wiring, insulation, comections, and switchboards, to assess the contiruJity of the systens and the condition of their components. The systems l shall be designed with a capability to test periodicatty (1) the operability and j functional performance of the components of l the systems, such as onsite power sources, 6 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NtMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS relays, switches, and buses, and (2) the operability of the systems as a ediole and, teider conditions as close to design as practical, the fut t operation segaence that l brings the systems into operation, including operation of applicable portions of the
| |
| ; protection system, and the transfer of power among the nuclear power unit, the of fsite power systaa, and the onsite power system.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Cualification of Class 1E ES 9R1 Verify that gJalification regJirements Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. per Reg. Guide 1.89 are included in the Inverter Specification.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E egJipment design complies with the qualification program guidelines as Verify that vendor qualification delineated in this regulatory guide dated
| |
| * reports a e included in a TUGC0 November, 1974. For details see (FSAR) equipment gaatification review and Section 8.3. approval program.
| |
| 50.0 Power Quality. Spec: ES 9R1 Verify that the spec. specifies the calc's: V-7R5 voltage & frequency limits adeqJately The veristiers of voltage and frequency in and XIII-1R0 and these are incorporated in the the Class 1E power systems during any design vendor documents.
| |
| l basis event shall not degrade the performance of any load to the extent of causing significant damage to the fuel or to the reactor coolant system.
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86 J
| |
| | |
| r O
| |
| O"
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE i REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 4 NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS 1
| |
| 51.0 Identification. Spec: ES 9R1 Verify that the spec. re p ires adew ate Vendor Manual: identification of the Inverters and the Components of Class 1E power systems, and CP 0445 001 design documents. Verify that vendor their associated design, operating, and (6/81) documents incorporate the maintenance documents, shall be marked or identification re@irements.
| |
| Labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Verification is performed in conjmetion with Criterion 49.0.
| |
| Each type of Class 1E power e@ipment shatL be qualified by analysis, success'..i use u, der similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its fmction mder norma 1 and design basis events.
| |
| ; 66.0 The capability of at t Class 1E ewipment, Review spec. and acceptance test report including interfaces, of a nuclear power and verify that the repired fmetion generating station for performing its of the Inverter is demonstrated.
| |
| re@ ired fmetion shall be demonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done Also, see Criterion N. 49.0.
| |
| by type tests on actunt equipment. Operating experience and anstysis may be used to l
| |
| sagptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed requirements.
| |
| 8 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| / #
| |
| * DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAil0N CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCL8ENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CDGENTS 68.0 All Class 1E electrical equipment except Spec: ES-9R1 Verify that the identification untors are identified by 11 alphanumeric Vendors Manual: regJirements are appropriately character tag rambers. The eighth character CP 0445 001 specified and the vendor doctments is either E, P, or (any other character (6/81) incorporate the criteria requirements.
| |
| except E or P), with E designating agalpment idiich is Class 1E, P designating egJipment idiich is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating equipment iAlch is non-safety related.
| |
| Motors stoptied with pumps are identified by the same tag nLaber as the pumps.
| |
| 69.0 The design bases, criteria, NRC regulatory Verify the requirements of FSAR Sec.
| |
| guides, standards, and other documents that 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9 that are are implemented in the design of the applicable to inverters are specified i safety related systems (as discussed in and are incorporated in the vendor (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as documentation.
| |
| follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9).
| |
| The onsite AC, DC, and 118 V uninterrtptible AC electric systans are in conformance with General Design Criteria (GDC), NRC Regulatory Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable 9 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| ~J \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST Imm0ER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| : 10. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS
| |
| , criteria as listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 ard i as described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| Note: Specific criteria from documents referenced herein are contained elsedere in this list. Reviewers should refer to the above mentioned FSAR seetione for eriteria not specifically mentioned in this list, as appropriate to each review.
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag numbers, Class 1E ES-9 Verify that the appropriate color ecpipment, raceways, and cables in raceways DCA 3959R1 coding respirements are specified in are identified by the following color coding vendor Dug: the specification and incorporated in system: 528 034 47 Rev. the vendor docimentation.
| |
| F l a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train B Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamel Level Channel 1 Red (R) l Channel 2 mite (W)
| |
| ! Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y) 10 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N * , .
| |
| .r
| |
| )
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLmeER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| CD. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orange with white stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with ediite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class 1E Circuits Train C Black (K)
| |
| : e. Non Class 1E Cable Raceways and Equipment i
| |
| Natural raceways color or natural equipment color 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E Spec: ES 9R1 verify that the color coding is equipment on an area which is readily visible Dwg: 528 034 47 specified to be readily visible in the
| |
| , (e.g., close to nameplate or identification Rev. F specification and the vendor documents I
| |
| tag raaber). incorporate this requirement.
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E egJipment and circuits are clearly Verify that design documents and identified on documents and drawings in drawings clearly identify Class 1E l accordance with IEEE 490 1974. equipment / circuits per IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| I a
| |
| J 11 DAP FORM E 018, REV. 1, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l r _-
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS 79.0 All Class 1E equipment will be qualified per verification is performed in l IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, conjmetion with criterion 49.0.
| |
| 3.11B, and Appendix 3A for adfitional details on erwirormentat @atification.
| |
| 84.0 The seismic qaalification of Class 1E Verify that the appropriate seismic equipment should demonstrate an equipment's reqJirements per IEEE 344 and Reg.
| |
| l
| |
| ; ability to perfone its regJired function Guide 1.100 are referenced within the daring and after the time it is s 4 jected to specification.
| |
| ! the forces resulting from one SSE. In addition, the equipment must withstand the
| |
| ; ef fects of a raster of OBEs (see Sections 5.4
| |
| : and 6.1.4 of IEEE-344 (1975)) prior to the application of an SSE.
| |
| 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in electrical egJipment are seismically conjmetion with Criterion 84.0.
| |
| qJalified in accordance with the procedJres and documentation regJirements specified in IEEE 344-1975, Reconuended Practices for j Seismic Qua!!fication of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
| |
| {
| |
| l 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in j electrical equipment including standy power conjmetion with Criterion 84.0.
| |
| 4 systents are designed to maintain structural 1
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86 1
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| m, N , .
| |
| s DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CR!iERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAi!ON NC/NA CCBIMENTS integrity and functional operability during l and after an earth @ ake of magnitude Le to
| |
| ] and incitding the SSE.
| |
| 1 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrtmentation and Verification is perfor1med in electrical epipment are qualified by conimetion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the performance of the equipment sahjected to earthpake motion can be conservatively predicted and if the functional operability of the instrumentation or e @ ipment is assured by its structural integrity alone, 88.0 Sets of instruemtation and electrical Verification is performed in equipment such as battery racks, instrument conjmetion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| racks, controt consoles, cabinets, and panels are analyzed or tested, or both, by their suppliers in accordance with the methods and procedures described in Section 3.78.2.1.3 (of the FSAR).
| |
| 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 Verification is performed in Seismic Qualification of Electric Equiptent. conjmetion with Criterion 84.0.
| |
| 13 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O -'
| |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST ImmBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICII SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIAGENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C(plMENTS The CPSES desi m for Class 1E electrical equipment complies with the re@lrements and recommendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is met by performing an anetysis to verify the approach and/or by following the s@ivelent static load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.108 and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 14 DAP FORM E-018, REV. 1, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| e . .
| |
| i ,
| |
| i
| |
| ; DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l CECKLIST NLaWER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| l i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGgEENTS l
| |
| i i
| |
| ] 5.0 Continuous duty safety related (Ctess 1E) Spec: MS 13 Verify service factor re @lrement j motors have a nameptate service factor of Section 3 incitated in specifications.
| |
| 1.15, except for some totally enclosed Ctess Appendix 6
| |
| , 1E motors. These motors felt into two Page 5 Review vendor documentation to ensure
| |
| ! categories: first, untors rated 15 percent EL 8-90319 1 compliance to service factor j in excess of the load design brake horsepower (GTN 55453) s w irement.
| |
| l (bhp), with a snity nameplate service factor, 3
| |
| and NEMA Class N insulation system, with tesperature rise in accordance with NEMA Class-5 re@irements; and second, totally enclosed air-over fan motors which have an
| |
| ] air-over service factor of not less than 115 i percent at design conditions and have a j nameplate service factor of 1.0.
| |
| i j
| |
| 6.0 As indicated in FSAR Appendix 3A Table 5-1, Spec: MS 13 Verify type testing re @ irement per j the only motors in the containment required Section 3 intent of IEEE 334 1974 is contained in to operate in the event of a dea are those Appendix 6 specification.
| |
| motor-operated isolation valves s ich operate Pages 2 and 18 at the onset of a dea. The Class 1E motors See criterion 79.0.
| |
| tocated outside the containment are i type tested in accordance with the intent of l IEEE 334 1974.
| |
| I i
| |
| ; 10.0 ALL safety related Class 1E motors are Spec: MS-13 Review design data and vendor l desi red to accelerate their driven toads Section 3 documentation to determine compliance 3 with 80 percent of the motor rated voltage Appendix 6 to motor acceleration at tmder voltage 1 OAP FORM E 019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| -- -- A
| |
| | |
| I O-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST WlmgER , REV._,D ATE I
| |
| ) REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| : 90. CRITERIA (DO(1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l
| |
| 1 available at the terminals. Page 7 criteria.
| |
| EL-8-90319-1 (GTN 55453) Also, refer to Criterion No.17.0.
| |
| 11.0 notor starting torcpe is selected based cn spec: MS 13 Review design data and vendor toad speed torcpe curves and cambined 42 of Section 3 h=mtation to determine compliance motor and driven toad for the above terminal Appendix 6 to starting torcpe/ acceleration time voltage and acceleration time (tess than five Pages 6 & 7 criteria.
| |
| ; seconds) requirements. In accordance with EL 8-90319-1 a
| |
| the toeding secpence established in (FSAR) (GTN 55453)
| |
| Table 8.3.9, motor acceleration time is A-11993 specified to achieve motor rated speed in (GTN 47787) tess than fIve seconds. Motor driven Loads j not requiring secpencing such as fans have l acceteration time in excess of five seconds.
| |
| ! In addition some fan motors that are part of
| |
| ; the secpencing cycle also have acceleration times in excess of five seconds, dich will not adversely affect the safety related systen performance.
| |
| 12.0 The minisua motor torcpe margin over ptmp Spec: MS-13 Feview design det to determine torque through acceleration period is 20 Section 3 specification of correct minimum torcpe percent for the g0P motors. Appendix 6 dJring accete. ation.
| |
| Page 6 EL-8-90319 1 Review vendor documentation to (GTN 55453) determine compliance with recpirements.
| |
| 2 DAP FORN E 019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| g.
| |
| V DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MimgER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (D0 AMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS A-11993 (GTN 47187)
| |
| ! 14.0 Motor insulation is selected on the basis of Spec: MS 13 Review design riaammts to verify ambient temperature and expected temperature Section 3 correct actor inautaticn selection &
| |
| rise based on worst case loading conditions. Appendix 6 specification. Review Vendor data to In generat, the motors have Class e Page 7 verify correct motor insulation stqply.
| |
| Insulation. EL-8 90319-1 (GTN 55453) See Criterion No. 5.0.
| |
| 16.0 The minisun through anniman system voltages See Criterion See Criterion No. 17.02a.
| |
| will provide adegante voltage to all No. 17.02a safety-related egalpment as discussed in FSAR R040.49, Paragraph 2a through 2e.
| |
| 17.0 2a. Motors - Voltage at the terminals of Spec: MS 13 17.0-2a:
| |
| ruming motors is generetty maintained within Section 3 NEMA standard limits (i.e., "plus or minus Appendix 6 Verify minimum voltage available to 10% of rated voltage). The Lowest rasviing Pages 7 and 10 start SFP Clg Pp Mtr. Review vendor voltage calculated for any motor is 88% of EL-8-90319-1 data to detennine compliance to " start rated. However, since all motors have a 1.15 (GTN 55453) at 70% rated voltage" regairement.
| |
| service factor or are e wivalently oversized in excess of the toad brake horsepower 17.0-2b:
| |
| requirements (see FSAR Section 8.3.1.1.10),
| |
| the effect of this redJced voltage on This s e-criteria not applicable.
| |
| continuous operation is negligible. The 3 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| - m_______
| |
| | |
| o O- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST MlmBER ,REV._ ,DAtE REFERENG DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/uA CCDeENTS minisua starting voltage calculated for any 17.0-2c:
| |
| setor is at least 80% of rated except for the spent fuel pool cooling pump motor which is This es-criteria not applicable.
| |
| capable of starting with 70% of rated voltage. All setors therefore have 17.0-2d:
| |
| acceptable starting and rsming voltage.
| |
| This sib-criteria not applicable.
| |
| 2b. Resistance Heaters - Heaters will f metion continuously at the range of voltages indicated above; however, the kilowatt output will be redJced at the minisua voltage. The effect of this redetion in output is being investigated for att safety related heaters to verify they are adeg ately sized for the reduced voltage condition.
| |
| 2c. Battery Chargers & Inverters - Battery chargers and inverters will provide continuous operation tmder the range of voltages indicated. Further, the inverters will continue to fmetion ipon redetion of or total loss of AC power via the DC system.
| |
| 2d. Lighting - Plant lighting ILLtmination tevels will very with the minisua through sexima bus voltages indicated. Lighting transformers have adjustable taps s ich will be set to provide adequate illtaination at 4 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| : c O .
| |
| O' ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CtMENTS the nonnel operating bus voltages. DC ,
| |
| lighting is also avaltable in the event of loss of the AC system.
| |
| 24.0 The dieset generators are designed to recover See Criterion Verify that motor safe statt time is ,
| |
| ip to 80 percent of nominal voltage within 10 No. 11.0 greater than 10 cycles. Verify that
| |
| : cycles for this transient. Therefore, the with a 10 cycle starting delay, the dip may delay setor startirg a maximum of 10 actor can still have an acceleration cycles. Nowever, since att Class 1E setors time within 5 seconds. Also see have acceleration times within 5 seconds and criterion No. 11.0.
| |
| safe stall times are considerably longer than 10 cwles, this potential startire delay has no significant effect on the motors' avaltabitity or performance.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Spec: MS 13 verify qualification recpairements per Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. Pages 3 4, 3-5 Reg. Guide 1.89 are included in Class Section 3 1E electrical equipment specifications.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E e@ipment design complies Appendix 6 with the p atification program guidelines as Pages 1, 2, and delineated in this regulatory guide dated 18 See criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. See criterion See criterion No. 73.0.
| |
| No. 73.0 5 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST BRm0ER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COBSENTS i
| |
| components of Class IE power systems, and their associated design, operating, and
| |
| ; maintenance documents, shall be omrked or l tabeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. See criteria See Criterion Mos. 79 and M .
| |
| Nos. 79 and M Each type of Class IE power equipannt shall be qualified by analysis, successfut use tsider similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its fmetion under norant and design basis events.
| |
| i 66.0 The capability of all Class IE equipment, See Criteria See Criterion Mos. 79 and M .
| |
| Incitsiing interfaces, of a nuclear power Mos. 79 and M generating station for performing its i regJired fmetion shall be demonstrated. It I is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actual equipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to j styptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323 1974 for detailed regJirements.
| |
| 68.0 All Class 1E electrical equipment except Spec: MS-13 Verify specification requirement for I motors are identified by 11 alphanumeric Pages 3-40 and motor and pmp to be tabled with same J
| |
| , 6 DAP FORM E 019, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| O O O' -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNE(KLIST NLSIBER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 181ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CaleENTS character tag rum 6ers. The eighth character 3-41 tag rumber.
| |
| ! is either E, P, or (any other character Section 3 except E or P), with E designatire epipment Appendix 6 elch is Class 1E, P designetire egJipment Pege 14
| |
| ] d ich is port of reactor protection channel l systems, and (other characters except E or P)
| |
| , desipating equipment sich is non-safety-related.
| |
| Notors emptled with pumps are identifled by i
| |
| the same tag number as the pumps.
| |
| 4 70.0 In addition to the tag numbers, Ctess 1E Spec: MS-13 Verify that the specification and equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways Pe r 3-40 and vendor documents include requirements are identified by the following color codire 3-41 that the SFP Cig Pp Ntr is identified system: Section 3 as described in Criterte No. 70.0.
| |
| ! a. ESF System Appendix 6 i Page 14 Verify that the specification re pires Train A Orange (0) A-51568 X color coding to be applied so that it Train e Green (G) A 23881 X is reedity visible.
| |
| l
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and l ESF Systems at Channet Levet l
| |
| l Channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 White (W)
| |
| Chamet 3 Blue (8)
| |
| Channel 4 Yetlow (Y) 7 DAP FORM E 019, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGal REWlEW EVALUATION CNE KLIST InsesER , REY._ ,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTICII SAT /talSAT/
| |
| ; NO. CRITERIA (DOCLAENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits q Associated Train A Orarge with white stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with d ite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class IE Circuits Train C Stack (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and E@ipment Natural raceways color or necret egalpnet color 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E See Criterion See Criterion No. 70.0.
| |
| equipment on an area dich is readily visible No. 70.0 (e.g., close to nameplate or identification tag rumber).
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E ogJipment and circuits are clearly Spec: MS-13 Review specifications, vendor sigplied identified on documents ard drawings in Pages 3 4, 3 5 data sheets, associated drawings, and accordance with IEEE 494-1974. Section 3 equipment manuals to verify that
| |
| ! Appendix 6 documents are clearly identified as Pages 1, 2, 16, safety related and Class 1E egalpnent l 8 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| T O a O O- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAE ) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDOENTS and 17 is identified per IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| 51-812-962 402 53-806-955-407 51-009-192 79.0 Att Class 1E egalpaent will be quellfied per Spec: MS-13 Verify that the appropriate IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, Pages 3 4, 3-5 environmental gaalification 3.118, and Appendix 3A for additional details Section 3 regairements are included in Class 1E on emironmental qualification. Appendix 6 electrical egalpment specifications.
| |
| j Pages 1, 2 Verify that vendor gantification
| |
| ,I and 18 reports are included in a TUGC0 j equipment gastification review and j .,p, ai -..
| |
| I i 84.0 The seismic gaalification of class 1E Spec. MS 13 verify that the specification for the equipment should demonstrate an equipment's Section 3 SFP Ctg Wtr Pp Motor includes the j ability to perfonn its required function Appendix 4 appropriate seismic regJiraments per i daring and af ter the time it is subjected to (Spec. SS 20, IEEE 344 (1975) and Reg. Guide 1.100.
| |
| J the forces resulting from one SSE. In Appendix A)
| |
| { addition, the equipment must withstand the Appendix 4
| |
| ! effects of a number of cees (see Sections 5.4 (Spec. ES-18, i and 6.1.4 of IEEE-344 (1975)) prior to the Page 18) application of an SSE.
| |
| l 85.0 Seisaic category I instrumentation and see Criterion See Criterfon No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical eqJipment are seismically No. 84.0 i
| |
| 9 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| ~ - _ - -
| |
| J O O' DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IMIBER , REY._ ,DATE e
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| IR1. CRITERIA (DGf18ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l @atified in accordance with the procedares a
| |
| and documentation re@irements specified in
| |
| : IEEE 344-1975, Recommended Practices for l Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Ecpalpment for aluclear Power Generatire Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| j electrical e@ipment including stanchy power No. 84.0 j systems are desi r ed to maintain structuret
| |
| ! integrity and fmetional operability during and after an earth wake of magnitude w to f and including the SSE.
| |
| I a
| |
| ) 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion See Criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical ewipment are quellfied by No. 84.0 l analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the perfonmance of the equipment sabjected to earth @ake untion can be conservatively predicted and if the i functional operabstity of the instrumentation
| |
| ] or e@ lpment is assured by its structural integrity alone.
| |
| 117.0 Type Tests for continuous daty Class IE See Criterion See Criterion No. 6.0.
| |
| motors shall be per IEEE Std 334 1974. No. 6.0 10 DAP F088 E 019, REY. 1, 06/26/86 4
| |
| | |
| / . %
| |
| (1 \
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS I
| |
| l i
| |
| i 129.0 Regutatory Guide 1.100 See criterton See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment. No. 86.0 l
| |
| The CPSES design for Class 1E electrical equipment complies with the regJirements and recommendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this respalatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section c.1 is met ty j performing an analysis to verify the approach and/or by following the equivalent static
| |
| , load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| I I
| |
| l l
| |
| i l
| |
| ) 11 DAP FORM E-019, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| ~ bm C U, (m w . .-e DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST lamgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 45.0 Associated circuits instatted in accordance In the cable specification verify with Section 4.5(1) of IEEE 384 (1974) should regJirements for these features. In be stbject to att re w irements placed on the vendor documentation verify that Class 1E circuits such as cable deratirig, these features are adiressed.
| |
| environmental patification, flame retardance, splicing restrictions, and recewey fitt unless it can be demonstrated that the absence of such regJirements could not sipificantly redJce the evellability of the Class IE circuits.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class IE In the cable specification verify that Equipment for Nucteer Power Plants, this Reg. Guide is quoted or otherwise addressed.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E e p ipment design complies with the qualification program guidelines as Verify that vendor quotification delineated in this regulatory spaide dated reports are included in a TUCCO November, 1974. For details see (FSAR) ogalpment qJellfication review and Section 8.3. approvat program.
| |
| 51.0 Identification.
| |
| In the cable specification verify that
| |
| <8an = nts are re @ fred to be tabeled in Components of Class IE power systems, and a distinctive momer.
| |
| their associated design, operating, and maintenance rema-nts, shall be aerked or In the vendor's daa-ntation verify labeled in a distinctive manner, that documents are tabeled in a distinctive samer.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| t
| |
| ( c O- -
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST MimgER . REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS .
| |
| i 1 52.0 E @ipment Qualification.
| |
| Vertfy that the specification incLtsies w alification by test, use, or analysis Each type of Class IE power equipment shalt as described in the criteria, j be @ stified by analysis, successful use
| |
| ! mder similar conditions, or by actual test Verify that vendor quellfication j to demonstrate its ability to perforia its reports are included in a TUGC0 t
| |
| fmetion under nonmal and design basis ecpalpeant entification review and events. approvat program.
| |
| l 66.0 The capability of all Class IE e@ipment, In the cable specification verify that
| |
| } including interfaces, of a rectear power type tests are preferred for generating station for performing its p atification.
| |
| f regired fmetion shalt be demonstrated. It 1
| |
| 1 is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt equipment. Operating .
| |
| I experience and analysis any be used to sigptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 l for detailed recpairements.
| |
| i 67.0 Identification. In the cable specification verify that
| |
| )
| |
| identificaticn requirements are incitaied.
| |
| I Exposed Class IE raceways shalL be marked in j
| |
| a distinct permanent manner at intervals not In the vendor h - ntation verify that to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to identification is addressed.
| |
| I I,
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E 020, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| l i
| |
| | |
| rh g o =
| |
| 1 i V I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NL8WER .REV. _.DATE REFERENM DESCRIPTION
| |
| ) NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE)
| |
| SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 5
| |
| s l
| |
| j and exiting fram enclosed areas. Class IE.
| |
| raceways shall be marked prior to the instattation of their catdee.
| |
| 1 Cables installed in these receways shall be marked in a namer of sufficient darabitity j and at a sufficient raaber of points to j
| |
| facilitate initial verification that the i
| |
| instattation is in conformance with the 4
| |
| separation criteria. These cable merkings shall be applied prior to or dJring
| |
| )! Instat taticri.
| |
| Class IE cal:les shall be identified by a j periannent marker at and end in accordance with the design drawings or cable schedJte.
| |
| The method of identification used to meet the above regJirements maalt readily distinguish between redsuient Class IE systems and between Class IE and non-Class IE systems.
| |
| I i
| |
| I l
| |
| 70.0 In adiition to the tag raabers, Class 1E In the cable specification verify that equipment, racewers, and cablee in raceways the specified color coding of cable is are identified by the following color coding system: consistent with the criteria regJirements.
| |
| : a. ESF Systen In the vendor documentation verify that i
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| i i :
| |
| | |
| i i
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/M4 C00ENTS j Train A Orange (0) the color coding of cable meets the Train a Green (G) apec re wireaants.
| |
| l b. Reactor Protection System and l ESF Systems at Chamel Levet l
| |
| 1 j Channet 1 Red (R) m annet 2 leite (W) m annel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits i
| |
| j Associated Train A Orange with white j stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with s ite stripes (G)
| |
| (
| |
| l d. Non-Class IE Circuits i
| |
| ! Train C stack (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and Equipment Natural raceways color or natural e@fpaant color I
| |
| l 72.0 In general, att Class 1E cables and In the cable tracification verify that 1
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| c t
| |
| p.
| |
| a
| |
| :l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i CNECKLIST tamOER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTICal SAT /talSAT/
| |
| (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS NO. CRITERIA i
| |
| i l
| |
| sessociated cables are jacket color-coded the material mst be compatible with field color coding.
| |
| throughout their entire tength. Cable Jackets that recpaire field color coding prior In the vensbr h-mtation verify that to instattation will be ao worked et the material is compatible with field intervals not to exceed five feet. Cable
| |
| ] color coding.
| |
| : Jackets that require field color coding after Instattation (che to reclassification of cables from associated Class IE to Class IE,
| |
| ) or vice versa, after their initial putt) will l
| |
| be field color coded as follows:
| |
| : 1) were enterire and emiting emipment, l raceway and inside junction / pull bones.
| |
| 1
| |
| : 11) Alt exposed portions of the cables will be worked at intervals not to exceed five feet.
| |
| Ill) Portions of instatted cables in conchit or trays will not be field color coded.
| |
| t 73.0 Class 1E e gipment and circuits are clearly In the cable specification verify that I identified on h-mts and drawings in Class 1E e@lpamt is regired to be clearly identified on hws and accordance with IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| drawings per IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| In the vendor documentation verify that i
| |
| 5 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| 1 %
| |
| : s * , ,
| |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVAtuATION CHECKLIST NLsigER .REV. _ ,0 ATE REFEREIICE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA
| |
| { (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI NC/ IIA CaeENTS l
| |
| 1 i
| |
| I such identification is cteerly laptemented.
| |
| , 74.0 The cable spreading area is the space below In the cable specification verify that the Control Room ediere instrumentation and spastification per IEEE 383 is required.
| |
| control cables comerge prior to entering the
| |
| ; control, terminetton, or instrument penets. Verify that vendor gaellfication i This area does not contain high-energy reports are included in a TUGCO
| |
| ! eaalpment such as switchgear, transformers, espalpment gastification review and
| |
| ! rotatire egalpment, or potential sources of apprwet program.
| |
| missiles or pipe whip. Flammable materiet ic
| |
| ; not stored or instatted in this ares. Cable j constructions are gastified in accordance
| |
| ] with IEEE 383. The circuits in this aree are
| |
| { Limited to control and instrument fimetions j and those pouer sigply circuits serving the j control Room. Power circuits are not routed in this aree, except power cables serving i
| |
| instrument and control Room distribution penets. These power cables are encased in concrete or run in rigid steel condaits from i the point idiere they enter this aree.
| |
| a i
| |
| i In this area, a minimum esperation of one
| |
| [ foot horizontal and three feet vertical is j enintained between redadant trays. Idiere
| |
| ; racemy arrangements preclude amintaining the minimum separation distance, the redimdant 6 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| l 9 ( . :
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ' DEKLIST IA8eER ,REV. _ ,DATE i
| |
| f REFEREIIM DESCRIPTION NO. CRITERIA SAT /Lat$AT/
| |
| (DOC 18ENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICH NC/ IIA CGgENTS i
| |
| i j circuits are rwi in enctooed racemeye or
| |
| ! barriers are provided between rodadent
| |
| ; circuits.
| |
| i l
| |
| j 77.0 Environmental Type Tests are perfonned on
| |
| ] In the cable specification verify that cables that are recpaired to faction & ring and following a LOCA. Envirormental Type Tests are required.
| |
| Verify that vendor gatification repnets are included in a RIGC0 The cabte type and cabte insulatfan are I acpalpaent gaatification review and selected to minimize tht rate of I approvet program.
| |
| deterioration darire the design life of the
| |
| ' plant as a result of temperature, humidity, and radiation. Envirorumental Type Tests are performed on cables that are respaired to fmetion charing and following a LOCA.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| j 78.0 Generally,' electrical cables are .
| |
| j flame-retardent, noncombustible, and in the cable specification verify that 3
| |
| cables are to be flame retardant, non-propagating in nature and conform to the non-combustible, and non-propagating criterion of IEEE 383-1974 They will not per IEEE 385. In the vendor swt combustion in the absence of a sustained lenition source.
| |
| h aitation verify that the fire characteristics per IEEE 383 are addressed.
| |
| I i
| |
| 79.0 Att Class 1E egalpment will be qualified per In the cable specification verify that IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, i
| |
| appropriate envirorumental gJellfication 7 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i 1
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| k N 1
| |
| I 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NueER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTION NO. M ITERIA SAT /tRISAT/
| |
| (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 3.11B, and Amendix 34 for additionet details is specified.
| |
| on emiromental quotification.
| |
| 3 Verify that vendor gatification reports are included in a TUGC0 squipment gastification review and approvst program.
| |
| 99.0 In tieu of Section 1.3.4.2.3 of IEEE Std In the cable specification verify that 383-1984,' ether Design Basis Events," the j following should be used: cable gastification emetopes the i
| |
| complete spectrum of design basis events.
| |
| l "The remainder of the complete spectrum of desi p basis events (e.g., events such as a f
| |
| steem Line break) shall be considered in case
| |
| ] they represent different twws or more severe hazards to cable operation."
| |
| l l
| |
| l 100.0 In Lieu of Section 1.3.5.3 of IEEE Std in the cable specification verify that
| |
| { 3831964, " Test Desip Basis Event," the 3
| |
| following should be tsad: the alternate description is quoted, or i
| |
| s otherwise included.
| |
| j m ye tests for desi s basis event conditions verify that the regaired test design shall consist of stbjecting non-aged and aged beels event conditions are documented cables, fletd splices, and comections to a in the specification.
| |
| segaence of environmental extremes that simulate the most severe postulated conditions of a desi p basis event and 8 DAP FORM E 020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| 1 NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION 1
| |
| NC/NA COOENTS J
| |
| 1 specified conditions of instattation. Tww tests shalt demonstrate margin by application 2
| |
| of auttiple transients, increesed tevet, or other justifiable means. Satisfactory performance of the cable will be evolunted by electrical and physical measurements appropriate to the type of cable daring or following the environmental cycte, or both.
| |
| 1 The factors for margin given in Section 6.3.1.5 of IEEE Std 323-1974 shalt be used
| |
| ) e ere applicable.
| |
| i j "The values of pressure, tauperature,
| |
| )I radiation, chemical concentrations, fumidity, and time in IEEE Std 323-1974 do not represent acceptable timits for att nuclear I
| |
| power stations. The user of this standard shalt ensure that the values used in the rewired type tests represent acceptable limits for the service conditions in dich the cabte or comections mitt be instoLted."
| |
| 101.0 In lieu of Section 2.1 of IEEE Std 383-1974, In the cable specification verify that "Introdaction," the following should be used: the alternate description is cyaoted, or otherwise included.
| |
| " Type tests described in this h m t are methods that shalt be used to @stify Verify that the regsfred type test electrical cables, field splices, and service conditions are documented in comections for use in nuclear power the specification.
| |
| 9 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| 8 1
| |
| | |
| s F
| |
| * i I
| |
| l l
| |
| l i
| |
| DESIGIl REVIEW Ev4LU4 TION l DEmLIST ItsWER REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| I REFEREIIE DESGIPTI(31 SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| (DOCL8IDei, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICII IIC/NA tXBgENTS IID. CRITERIA l
| |
| l
| |
| ] generating stations. Tests of the cable or I comection asseetdy, es applicable, shall l then ogptament the cable tests in order to gastify the cormections and other espects migse to planned usage.
| |
| I The veLues of pressure, temperature,
| |
| ! radiation, chemical correntrations, holdity, l and time indicated in IEEE Std 323 1974 do i not represent acceptable Lleits for att rnacLear pouer generatire stations.
| |
| ]
| |
| I The user of this guide shall ereure that the
| |
| ]
| |
| i values used in the recystred type tests l represent acceptable Lielts for the service conditions in d ich the catde, or comections, or both, will be installed.
| |
| 2 j M esults of prior tests that are bel.g used i
| |
| as tne bases for the present tests shalt be referenced in the doc e entation."
| |
| ] 102.0 In lieu of Section 2.3.2 of IEEE Std In the cable specification verify that i 383-1974, "Long-Term Physical Agin6 the alternate description is quoted, or Properties," the followirg should be used: otherwise included, j
| |
| j "Agirg data shall be admitted to establish tong-term performance of the insulation.
| |
| I 10 DAP F01st E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| I I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| i .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION CIECKLIST lamber .REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DocteENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(M NC/NA COSENTS Data ser be ovatusted using the Arrhenius technicpas. A minlaus of 3 data points, including 136 degrees C and two or more others at toest 10 degrees C apart in temperature, shaLL be used.
| |
| "If there is not sufficient evidence that accelerated aging technicpes can retlably prochace end-of-Life conditions, the following ongoing cpatificatfan precockre should be taed.
| |
| 94poirig Gustification Proce&re - Some types of cables, fletd splices, and comections (hereaf ter referred to only as cables) may not respond in a representative ammer to accelerated aging technicpes to establish end-of-design-Life conditions. Consecpently, the cpalifled Life woutd be 1ess than the regaired design life. There are tuo suggested methods of achievire long-tene (design life) cpatification:
| |
| (a) Af ter a plamed period less than the eseLified Life of the cable has been reached, representative cables should be replaced with new cables and the removed cables albjected to a cpatification test sieller to that performed prior to instattation. This test 11 OAP FonM E-020, REV. 0, 06/26/86 1
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| O - -
| |
| V DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRaleER ,REV._ ,DATE PEFERENCE - DESGIPTI(BI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. OtlTERIA (DOCL81ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/WA COBOENTS should include adfitionet accelerated aging.
| |
| Successfut completion of this test extends the cpantified life of the instatted caldes.
| |
| This procedare should be repeated Latil the gastifled 1ife egants or eaceeds the recpaired desi m life.
| |
| (b) Additionet identical cables should be installed in a rmeteer power generating station location there power toeding and service conditions a p t or exceed those of the cable to be gaatified. A cable should be removed efter a planned period less than the previousty cyantified life and stelected to a gaetification test sieltar to that performed prior to installation. This test should fr:clude accelerated aging. Successful completion of this test extends the gaalified life of the installed calde. Sufficient additional identical cables should be initially installed in order that the above procedare can be repeated amtfl the gastified life agaels or exceeds the recpaired desim life.
| |
| "If the above methods desenstrate that the qJetified life is less than the desi p Life, a periodic replacement plan should be instituted."
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E 020, REY. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| i I
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLBGER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESI2tPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS No. CRITERIA i
| |
| i 104.0 In lieu of section 2.5.1 of IEEE Std In the cable specification verify that 383-1974, "Generet," the following should be this re@lrement for testire is used: inctWed.
| |
| i "This section describes the method for type In the vendor h-ntation verify that testing of greged cables wie the vertical testing complies to this re @lrement, tray flame test to determine their rotative self-eatinpalshire tendencies. Testing shalt J
| |
| incide both aged and imaged cable specimens."
| |
| l 105.0 In Lieu of Section 2.5.2.2 of IEEE Std In the cable specification verify that j 383-1974, the foltosing should be used: field splices must be demormtreted to not adversely effect fire retardant "The fire test provisions of the standard are properties.
| |
| I useful in screening out cable insulation materiets that are IWtely In the vendor h-ntation verify that l
| |
| j self entinguishirg, but they shall not be field splices do not adversely affect j construed as gantification of any installed the cabte's fire retardant properties, j cable system configuration. If field splices I are to be used in cable trays, special l prowlsions shett be made to demonstrate that
| |
| } the fire retardent properties of the cable l are not altered tmacceptably in an ehse way by the field splice."
| |
| \
| |
| l 13 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ! w . .
| |
| 1 i
| |
| l l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEMLIST IRMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tsISAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION IIC/NA CGeENTS I
| |
| i j 106.0 Section 2.5.4.2 of IEEE STD In the cable specification verify that
| |
| ) 383-1974- -Vertical tray configuration should atternate description is gated or be used and smderstood to mean perpendicular otherwise included.
| |
| to the plane of the horizon.
| |
| 1 1 In the vendor h=mtation *mrify that 1
| |
| 1 the alternate description is used.
| |
| 107.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4 of IEEE Std In the cable specification verify that i
| |
| 383 1974, the following should be used: the atternete description is gated or otherwise included.
| |
| "The gas burner fIsee source shetL consume
| |
| ; propane ses so as to reteese appromientely In the vender documentation verify that
| |
| ]'
| |
| 70,000 BTU per hour at an air-gas ratio of 5 the alternete description is used.
| |
| to 1. Natural grade propone shett be used.
| |
| l J
| |
| I
| |
| ] 108.0 In lieu of the first sentence of Section In the cable specification verify that i
| |
| 2.5.4.4.1 of IEEE Std 383-1974, the following the alternete description is gated or i should tg used:
| |
| otherwise addressed.
| |
| "The ribbon gas burner shall be mo mted In the vendor documentation verify that
| |
| ) horizontatty such that the flame lapinges m the alternate description is used.
| |
| the speciesn sidsey between the tray rmes and so that the burner face is in front of and 4 inches from the cable and approximately
| |
| ] 2 feet above the bottom of the tray." See l 2.G. 1.131 for specification of ribbon ses 14 DAP FORM E-020. REY. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| s *
| |
| * DESitsu REVIEW EVALUATION DEELisi ItaWER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DEsmIPTim NO. CRITERIA SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| (D00AENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATim NC/uA CGsENTS bumer.
| |
| 109.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4.3 of IEEE Std 383-1974, the following should be used: in the cable specification verify that the alternate drecription is gJoted or otherwise addressed.
| |
| " Flame size vitt rmrmetty be achieved den the propane flow is 27.8 standard cible feet per hour and the air flow is 139 standard in the vendor docamentation verify that ctbic feet per hour." the alternate description is used.
| |
| 110.0 Section 2.5.4.5 of IEEE Std 383-1974 is not endorsed by Reipalatory Guide 1.131 (1977)
| |
| In the cable specification verify that Paragraph c.12. the regairement is deleted or otherwise adtessed.
| |
| in the vendor documentation verify that the regairement is omitted.
| |
| 111.0 The recommendations indicated by "shoute' and the options indicated by "mey" in the In the cable specification verify that the regalraments are clarified.
| |
| sections of IEEE Std 383-1974 Indicated below have sufficient leportance to be treeted the smee as regairements of the standard: In the vendor h="ntation verify that the flame test requirements are treated
| |
| : s. Section 1.3.1, " Cable Description" accordingly.
| |
| : b. Section 1.3.2, *Fleid Splices or Comection Description" Verify that vendor gJalification reports are inctisied in a TUGC0 15 DAP FGet E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| i 1
| |
| ) DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| .REV._ ,DATE._
| |
| CIECKLIST IAJWER SAT /UlfsAT/
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION NC/NA CWSENTS (DoctSENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATIst NO. CRITERIA l
| |
| e pipment e stiffeetion review and l c. section 1.3.4.1, '9eeetins service approvat program.
| |
| Conditions", the first sentence.
| |
| l j d. Section 1.3.4.2.1, Nesigri Sasis 1 Event---LOCA" l e. Section 1.4.1, "Generet" I f. Section 1.4.3, " Test Results*
| |
| : g. Section 1.4.4, Test Evaluation"
| |
| : h. Section 2.2, " Type Test Samples
| |
| * l.
| |
| Sectin 2.3.3, "Thernet and Radiation Exposure" J. section 2.3.3.3 l k. Section 2.3.3.4
| |
| - 1. Section 2.4.3, *LOCA simulation"
| |
| : m. Sectin 2.4.3.1
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.2 l
| |
| ! o. Section 2.4.4, " Post LOCA Sisutetion i Test *
| |
| ! p. section 2.5.2.1
| |
| : q. Section 2.5.4.3
| |
| : r. section 2.5.4.4.2 f s. Section 2.5.5, "Evoluation"
| |
| : t. section 2.5.6, "Instnament Cable and
| |
| $lrete Consetors from Itutticon&ctor Assembly", the recommendation that the tested cable pass a flame resistence test in accordance with ASTIt 02220 68.
| |
| In the cable specification verify that 119.0 The Type Test of Ctess IE electric cables, DAP Falut E-020 REV. O, 06/26/86 16 1
| |
| l 1
| |
| l l
| |
| t
| |
| | |
| o . ..
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVAttMTION CIEmLIST IR8eER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENM DESCRIPilat NO. MITERIA SAT /talSAT/
| |
| (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(m NC/NA CGgENTS field splices, and comections shall be per IEEE Std 383 1974 type tests per IEEE 383 are regelred.
| |
| Review vendor dan ==ntation for flame tests and verify that the IEEE 385 regairements are addressed, verify that vendor gastification reports are included in a TUGC0 gaellfication review and approvet program.
| |
| 120.0 Reg. Guide 1.131 - Quellfication Tests of In the vendor daa=mtation verify that Electric Cables, Fletd Splices, and the Reg. Guide requirements on flame Comections for Light-Weter-cooled Nuclear test are met except as stated in the Power Plants.
| |
| criterie.
| |
| Although the implementation of this Verify that vendor quotification respatatory guide, dated August 1977, does not reports are incitated in a TUGC0 inctufe CPSES, all Class IE cables of the gastification review and approwel CPSES meet most of the requirements of this progree.
| |
| regulatory guide with the few exceptions noted below:
| |
| : a. Att prefabricated cables of the CPSES do not meet the fotIcuing requirements:
| |
| : 1. Vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to determine their relative 17 DAP Foel E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| i i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| f NO. CRITERIA (0003ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS i
| |
| i i
| |
| self-eatinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6);
| |
| : 2. Flame testing with the gas turner face in j the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| t Nowever, work is in progress try wunder on i these items.
| |
| I
| |
| : b. Att 8kw caldes, 600W power tighting cables of the CPSES do not aset the following j regairements:
| |
| )
| |
| ; 1. " Radiation Exposure Total" per i
| |
| Restatory Guide 1,89 Position C.5.
| |
| 1 j 2. vertical troy flame test on the aged
| |
| ) cables to determine their relattwe
| |
| ,l self-eatinguishing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6).
| |
| : 3. Flame testing with the gas burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| t
| |
| : 4. Cas and air flow requirements (Regulatory
| |
| } Guide position c.11).
| |
| i i
| |
| i 18 DAP FORM E-020, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| i 1
| |
| l, l
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMRER . REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(Mt SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLBENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Quetification of Claes 1E Spec. ES-19 Verify gatification retpairements per Equipment for Nucteer Power Plants. Pages 3-3, 3-4, Reg. Guide 1.89 are incluisd in the 3-10, 3-21, calde tray specification.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E egalpment design compties 3-22, 3 23 with the quotification program guidelines as See criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory guide dated November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. See Criterion See criterion No. 73.0.
| |
| No. 73.0 Components of Class IE power systems, and their associated design, operating, and maintenance documents, shall be sorted or labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Quotification. See criteria See criteria Nos. 79.0 and 84.0.
| |
| Nos. 79.0 and Each type of Class IE power equipment shalt 84.0 be quotified by anetysis, successful use under simitar conditions, or by actunt test to demonstrate its ability to perform its fmetion teder norant and design basis events.
| |
| 53.0 Class IE Power Systens. See Criteria See Criteria Nos. 79.0 and 84.0.
| |
| 1 DAP FORN E 021, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| A 1
| |
| l l
| |
| 4 DESIGIl REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRAWER , REY._ ,DATE REFEREIICE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATIGI NC/ IIA CGeENTS l
| |
| l loos. 79.0 and Description. 86.0 1
| |
| i The Class IE power systems shatt consist of an alternatirg-current power system, e direct-ctrrent power system, and a vitet j instrtmentation and control power system.
| |
| l Function.
| |
| ]
| |
| The Class IE power systems shalt provide l acceptable power to the station darire and fottowing any desty) basis event.
| |
| {
| |
| 66.0 The capability of att Class IE ogafpment, See Criteria See criteria Isos. 79.0 arv$ 84.0.
| |
| j including interfaces, of a nuclear power Nos. 79.0 and
| |
| ; generating station for performing its 84.0 regaired fwiction shall be demonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done
| |
| , by type tests on actist equipment. Operating
| |
| ) emperience and analysis may be used to
| |
| ; sagptement type tests. See IEEE Std 325-1974 j for detailed regairements.
| |
| i 69.0 The desim bases, criteria, late respalatory See Criteria See criteria Ilos. 4.0 and 9.0 of the guides, standards, and other documents that Isos. 4.0 and Generic Specification Checklist.
| |
| . are implemented in the design of the 9.0 of the l
| |
| 2 DAP FORft E 021, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O % ~
| |
| l l
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CEMLIST NLMOER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS safety-related systems (as discus wd in . Generic (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are tisted as specification follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 throtch Checklist
| |
| , 8.1.4.9).
| |
| l The ensite AC, DC, and 118-V tminterrtytible AC electric systems are in conformance with
| |
| , General Desiys criteria (GDC), NRC Regulatory Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable criteria es listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 and as described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| Note: Specific criteria from h - nts referenced herein are contained etseidwre in this list. Reviewers should refer to the above mentioned FSAR seetiens for eriteria not specifically mentioned in this list, as appropriate to each revien.
| |
| 73.0 Ctess 1E e @ipment and circuits are cteerty Spec. ES-19 In the cable tray specification, verify identified on h-nts and drawings in Peges 3 11 and rew irement to identify att Class 1E accordance with IEEE 496 1974. 3-12 ewipment on documents accordingly.
| |
| In the vendor documentation, verify that Ctess 1E epipment on documents is identified.
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-021, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| n .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGt NC/WA CtseENTS 79.0 Att Class 1E e@ ipment will be quellffed per Spec. ES 19 verify that vendor p etification IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11W, Pages 3 3, 3-4, reports are incitaisd in a TUGCO 3.118, and Appendix 3A for additionet details 3-5, 3-6, 3 10, o wipment p atification review and on envirormental wellfication. 3-21, 3 22, approvet program.
| |
| 3 23 verify that service conditions are apocifled and that w etifIcation per IEEE 3251974 is required to those service conditione for the designated desi p life.
| |
| 84.0 The seisic gaatification of Class 1E Spec. ES 19 in the cable tray specification, verify equipment should demonstrate an equipment's Pages 3-3, 3-4, that the appropriate seismic abitity to perfone its rewired ftmetion 3 10, 3-15, @atification re w irements are during and after the time it is othjected to 3 17, 3-25 specified including those of IEEE 344 the forces resulting from one SSE. In and Reg. Guide 1.100.
| |
| additien, the equipment sust withstand the effects of a nuser of cees (see Sections 5.4 Verify that vendor p etification and 6.1.4 of IEEE 344 (1975)) prior to the reports are included in a TUGC0 application of an SSE. Epipsent thastification and Review Progree.
| |
| 85.0 Seismic Category I i strumentation and See criterion See criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| electrical e p ipment are seismically No. 84.0
| |
| @stified in accordere with the procedares and documentation rewirements specified in IEEE 344-1975, Recommended Practices for 4 DAP FORM E-021, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| a -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEOCLIST NLMBER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGS NO. CRITERIA SAT /talSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CQgENTS d
| |
| Seismic euellfication of Class 1E Equipennt for Nucteer Power Generating Stations.
| |
| i 86.0 Seismic Cater >ry I instrumentation and See Criterion See Criterion No. M .0.
| |
| electrical o w ipment including stan @ y power No. M.0 systems are desiped to melr.tain structurat integrity aruf funetione1 operability during and af ter en earthquake of magnitude g to and including the SSE.
| |
| 87.0 Att Seismic Category I instrumentation and See Criterion See criterion No. M .0, electrical e p ipment are quellffed by No. M.0 i
| |
| analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is demonstrated that the perfonnance of the i
| |
| equipment stbjected to certhquake motion can be conservatively predicted and if the functionet operability of the instrumentation or egJipment is assured by its structural integrity alcne.
| |
| 129.0 Regulatory Guide 1.100 See Criterion See Criterion No. M .0.
| |
| Seismic Quellfication of Electric Equipment. No. M.0 The CPSES design for Class 1E electrical equipment couplies with the regJirements and 5 DAP FORM E-021, REv. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| .a~. ~
| |
| i i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i CE ELIST IR8eER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIM SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLSENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICBI NC/NA CCBOENTS I
| |
| recommendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this regalatory guide.
| |
| The intent of Section C.1 is met ty
| |
| ' perfornire an anstysis to wrify the approach and/or ty fottouing the essivetent static toed method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| 1 1
| |
| l i
| |
| j i
| |
| 6 DAP FOR96 E 021, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| Y O % *D h
| |
| J J l
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Spec. ES-23A Verify @stification re@irements per Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. Page 3-2 Reg. Guide 1.89 are included in the Spec conduit specifIcatlon.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E e@lpment design complies ES-100,Pages
| |
| ! with the qualification program guidelines as 22 See criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory spJide dated November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| 52.0 E@ipment Qualification. See Criterion See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| No. 79.0 Each type of Cisss IE power equipment shall be qualified by analysis, successful use mder similar conditions, or by actuel test to demonstrate its ability to perform its funetion under norumt and design basis events.
| |
| 53.0 Class IE Power Systems. See Criterion See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| No. 79.0 Description.
| |
| The Class IE power systems shalt consist of an alterneting current power system, a direct-current power system, and a vital instrunentation and control power system.
| |
| I 1 DAP FORM E 022, REV. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| ^'
| |
| O[b DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST WLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tttSAT/
| |
| h0. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS Fmetion.
| |
| The Class IE power systens shalt provide acceptable power to the station chJring and foliouing any desIyi basis event.
| |
| l 66.0 The capability of at t Class IE ecpipment, See criterion See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| Including interfaces, of a nuclear power No. 79.0 generating station for performing its recpired function shall be demonstrated. It I
| |
| is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actual ecpipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to supplement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed recpirements.
| |
| 4 69.0 The design bases, criteria, NRC regulatory Spec ES 23A, verify that the following guides, standards, and other documents that Pages 3 1,3-2, standards / codes, referenced in FSAR are implemented in the design of the 3 3,3-4 Section 8.1.4 are included in the safety-related systems (as discussed in Spec Es 100 specification: NEC NFPA Part 70-1971.
| |
| (FSAR) Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as Pages 2-2
| |
| , follows: (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 2 3,4 19, 8.1.4.9). 4-23 Review specification to verify that the types of concksit specified are The onsite AC, DC, and 118-V minterruptible consistent with the application AC electric systems are in confonnance with considerations of IEEE 422,Section General Design Criterie. (GDC), NRC Regulatory 13.0.
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E 022, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| \ # *~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER , REV._,D AT E REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS l Guides, IEEE standards, and other applicable criterie es Listed in FSAR Section 8.1.4 and i es described briefly in FSAR Section 8.1.5.
| |
| 1 Note: Specific criterie from &cuments referenced herein are contained elsedere in this list. Reviewers should refer to the i above sentioned FSAR sections for criteria j not specifically sentioned in this list, as appropriate to each review.
| |
| 79.0 ALL Ctess 1E e@lpeent will be quellfied per Spec ES-234, Verify that vendor p etification IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Secticris, 3.11N, Pages 3 2, reports are incitsjed in a TUGC0 3.115 and Amendix 3A for ocklitional details spec ES-100 ocpalpment @ellfication review and l
| |
| on erwirarementet qualification. Page 2 2 approvat progree.
| |
| Verify that service conditions are i
| |
| specified and that quotification per i IEEE 323-1974 is required to those
| |
| ! service conditions for the designated destyi life.
| |
| i t
| |
| I i
| |
| l il i
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E 022, REV. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| . O_ 8 1
| |
| . ( '
| |
| d DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,0 ate REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Spec. ES-100 In the cabie termination ard splice Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants. Pages 2 2 and specification, verify that 2-3 environmentet P alification per Reg.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E e@ipment design complies Appendix B Guide 1.89 la rew ired or otherwise with the qualification program guidelines as Pages B 5, B 6, addressed.
| |
| delineated in this regulatory guide dated and B T November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3.
| |
| 51.0 Identification. See criterion See criterion No. T3.0.
| |
| No. 73.0 Components of Class IE power systems, and their associated design, operating, and maintenance documents, shall be marked or labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| l l
| |
| l 52.0 E wipment Qualification. See Criterion See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| No. 79.0 Each type of Class IE power equipment shall be qualified by analysis, successful use mder similar conditions, or by actunt test to demonstrate its ability to perform its function under normat and destyi basis events. ,
| |
| 66.0 The capability of all Class IE epipment, See Criterion See Criterion No. 79.0. ,
| |
| l 1 DAP FORM E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| 3 %
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLsigER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFI3 TION NC/NA CGsENTS l
| |
| including interfaces, of a nuclear power No. 79.0 generating station for performing its regJired fmetion s5all be demonstrated. It is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actual equipment. Operating i experience and analysis may be used to sigptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323 1974 for detelled regJirements.
| |
| 73.0 Class 1E egalpment and circuits are clearly Spec. ES-100 In the termination and splice identified on documents and drasings in Pages 2 2 and specification, verify that accordance with IEEE 496-1974. 2-3 Identification of att Class 1E Appendix B ogalpment on ex:unents is required, auf Pages B-5, 3 6, that associatoJ h-nts are regaired and B 7 to be labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| In the vendor h - ntation verify that Class 1E ogaignent is identified on j
| |
| h-nts and that doctments are tabeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 77.0 Environmental Type Tests are perfonned on See Criterion See Criterion No. 79.0.
| |
| cables that are required to f metion during No. 79.0 and fotLowing a LOCA.
| |
| The cable type and cable insulation are selected to minimize the rate of 2 DAP FORM E-023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| "I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IEMBER ,REV.,_,DATE j REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS i
| |
| deterioration daring the design Life of the plant as a result of temperature, humidity, and radiation. Envirorumntal Type Tests are performed on cal,Les that are ratpJfred to fmetion daring and following a LOCA.
| |
| I 78.0 Generally, electrical cables are Spec. ES 100 In the cable termination and splice-flame-retardant, noncombustible, and Appendix 8 specification, verify that the fire non-propagating in nature and conform to the Pages 5 13 and characteristics are inclu$ed.
| |
| j criterion of IEEE 383 1974. They will not B-14 support combustion in the absence of a In the vendor documentation verify that sustained lenition source. the fire characteristics are adiressed.
| |
| 2
| |
| ; 79.0 ALL Class 1E egJipment wiLL be qualified per Spac. ES 100 In the cable termination and splice IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, Appendix B specification, verify that appropriate 3.118, and Appendix 34 for additional details Pages 3-13 and enviromental cpaalification is on environmental quotification. 3-14 regired.
| |
| Verify that vendor qualification reports are included in a TUGC0 epipment gastification review and approvat program.
| |
| 99.0 In Lieu of Section 1.3.4.2.3 of IEEE Std Spec. ES 100 In the cable termination and splice 3831964, "Other Design Basis Events," the Page 4-11 specification, verify that cable following should be used: Appendia a temination and splice quellfication 3 DAP FORM E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| Nr e e i
| |
| d I DESIGN REVIEW EVAltJAfl0N CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION WC/NA CODENTS
| |
| , Pages 5 8 and cor1ditions specified erweIope the j "The remainder of the cosplete spectrum of B9
| |
| ' co gtete spectrum of design bests desi p basis events (e.g., events such as a events.
| |
| steen line break) shall be considered in case they represent different types or more severe hazards to cable operation."
| |
| 100.0 In lieu of Section 1.3.5.3 of IEEE Std Spec. ES 100 In the cable termination and splice 383 1984, " Test Desi p Basis Event," the Appendix 5 specification, verify that the following should be used: Pages 3 13 and attemete description is specified or B 14 otherwise incitaied.
| |
| " Type tests for desip bests event conditims shall consist of stbjecting non-aged and eged Verify that the reg fred test desi p cables, field splices, and connections to a basis event conditions are documented se pence of envirornental extremes that in the specification.
| |
| 3 simulate the most severe postulated corditions of a desip bests event and specified conditions of instaltation. Type tests shall demonstrate margin by application of multiple transients, increased level, or j other Justifiable means. Satisfactory performance of the c ele will be evolunted by ,
| |
| electrical and physical measurements appropriate to the type of cable during or following the envirormental cycle, or both.
| |
| The factors for mergin given in Section 6.3.1.5 of IEEE Std 323 1974 shalt be used there appticable.
| |
| t 4 DAP FORN E 023, REY. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s * *
| |
| )
| |
| I DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION CNEGLIST IMesER , REY._ ,DATE REFEPENCE DESCRIPTION NO. CRITERIA SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| (DOCLBqENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION I NC/N4 CODENTS "The values of pressure, temperature, radiation, chemical concentratform, humidity, and time in IEEE Std 323-1974 do not represent acceptable limits for att nuclear
| |
| ; power stations. The user of this standard shall ensure that the values used in the regJired type tests represent acceptable Limits for the service conditions in which i
| |
| the cable or connections will be installed."
| |
| 101.0 In lieu of Section 2.1 of IEEE Std 383 1974, Spec. ES-100 In the cable termination and splice "Introciaction," the following should be used: Appendix 3 specification, verify that the I Pages 5-13 and alternate description is specified or
| |
| " Type tests described in this h nt are B-14 j otherwise included.
| |
| methods that shall be used to cpsstify electrical cables, field splices, and Verify that the regJired type test comections for use in nuclear power service conditions are documented in generating stations. Tests of the cable or the specification, j comection assesbty, as applicable, shalt i
| |
| then styptament the cable tests in order to cpastify the comections and other aspects teilque to plamad usage.
| |
| l The values of pressure, temperature, radiation, chemical concentrations, humidity, and time indicated in IEEE Std 323-1974 do not represent acceptable limits for all nuclear power generating stations.
| |
| 5 DAP FORM E-023 REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| e o ~i l
| |
| DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLfteER ,REV._ ,DAtE I
| |
| I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (0011 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| The user of this guide shall ensure that the values used in the recpired type tests represait acceptable limits for the service conditions in iAlch the cable, or comections, or both, will be installed.
| |
| "Results of prior tests that are being used as the bases for the present tests shall be referenced in the h-ntation."
| |
| 102.0 In Lieu of Section 2.3.2 of IEEE Std Spec. ES-100 In the cable termination and splice 3831974, "Long-Term Physical Aging Appendix B specification, verify that the Properties," the followirgi should be used: Pages B 13 and alternate description is specified or B-14 otherwise incitated.
| |
| " Aging data shall be sibnitted to establish long-term perforamnce of the insulation.
| |
| Data may be evaluated using the Arrtienius technicpe. A minleum of 3 data points, incitating 136 degrees C and two or more others at least 10 degrees C apart in temperature, shalt be used.
| |
| I "If there is not sufficient evidence that accelerated aging technicpes can reliably
| |
| , produce end-of-Life conditions, the follouing ongoing cpatification procedure should be used.
| |
| 6 DAP FOR86 E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| p l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ! CIECKilST NLmgER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| l No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C(BSENTS i
| |
| j " ongoing GunLification ProcedJre - Some types of cables, field splices, and comections (hereafter referred to only as cables) may not respond in a representative namer to accelerated aging technicpaes to establish end-of-design-life conditions. Consequently, the cyaatified life would be tess than the j recpJired design life. There are two suggestcd methods of achievirig tong-term i (design life) cyantification:
| |
| (a) After a planned period less than the cyaalifled tife of the cabte has been reached, representative cables should be replaced with new cables and the removed cables stM ected
| |
| ! to a cpantification test similar to that performed prior to instattation. This test should include additional accelerated aging.
| |
| l Successful completion of this test extends the cpaalified life of the installed cables.
| |
| This procedJre should be repeated mtil the cyantifled 1ife ecpasts or exceeds the respJired desi m life.
| |
| ] (b) Additional identical cables should be instalted in a nueIear power generating station location where power loading and service conditions ecpJat or exceed those of 7 DAP FORM E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, FAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS the cable to be cpatified. A cable should be rea m ed after a planned period less than the previously cpatified life and othjected to a spatification test sieller to that perfonsad i prior to instattation. This test should Include accelerated aging. Successful
| |
| ; completion of this test extends the cpatified life of the instatted cable. Sufficient
| |
| ^
| |
| additional identical cables should be initially instatted in order that the above procedure can be repeated mtil the cpolified life ecpats or exceeds the required design life.
| |
| "If the above methods demonstrate that the cpatified life is less than the design life, a periodic replacement plan should be instituted."
| |
| 104.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.1 of IEEE Std Spec. ES 100 In the cable termination and splice 383-1974, " General," the followirg should be Appendix B specification, verify that the used: Pages 3 13 and alternate description la specified or B 14 otherwise included.
| |
| "This section describes the method for type testing of groaped cables via the vertical In the vendor documentation, verify troy flame test to determine their relative that testire complies to this self-extinguishing tendencies. Testing shall recpirement.
| |
| include both aged and maged cable 8 DAP FORM E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| D J O' 'l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESM IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS specimens."
| |
| 105.0 In Lieu of Section 2.5.2.2 of IEEE Std Spec. ES-100 In the cable termination and splice 383-1974, the following should be used: Appendix B specification, verify that field Pages B-13 and splices aust be demonstrated to not "The fire test provisions of the standard are B 14 adversely affect cable fire retartlant useful in screening out cable insulation properties.
| |
| materials that are inadew ately self-extingulshing, but they shell not be In the vendor documentation, verify construed as p sLification of any installed that field splices do not adversely cable system configuration. If field splices effect cable fire retardent properties.
| |
| are to be used in cable trays, special provisions shall be made to demonstrate that the fire retardent properties of the cable are not altered macceptably in an adverse way by the field splice."
| |
| 106.0 Section 2.5.4.2 of IEEE STD Spec. ES 100 In the cablo termination and splice 383-1974 - Vertical tray confliparation should Appendix B opecification, verify that the be used and ederstood to mean perpendicular Pages B 13 and alternate description is specified or to the plane of the horizon. B 14 otherwise included.
| |
| In the vendor documentation, verify that the alternate description is used.
| |
| 107.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4 of IEEE Std Spec. ES-100 In the cable terminetton and splice 9 DAP FOR4 E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| . 7
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CEmLIST ORAIBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESSIPTI(NI SAT /LDISAT/
| |
| NO. MITERIA (DocuqENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS l
| |
| 383 1974, the following should be used: Appendix s specification, verify that the Pages B 13 and alternate description is specified or "The gas burner flame source shall coneuse B-14 otherwise included.
| |
| propene ses so as to release approxiantely
| |
| ) 70,000 sTu per hour at an air-ges ratio of 5 In the vendor h - ntation, verify
| |
| ) to 1. Netural grade propone shalt be used.
| |
| that the alternate description is used.
| |
| 106.0 In tieu of the first sentence of Section Spec. ES-100 In the cable terminatim and splice 2.5.4.4.1 of IEEE Std 383 1974, the following Appendix s specification, verify that the l should be used:
| |
| a Peges 5-13 neul attemete description is specified or j B-14 otherwise included.
| |
| "The ribbon gas humer shall be emmted horizontatty such that the flame impinges on In the vendor rem-ntation, verify the specimen midsey between the tray rmes that the alternate description is used. ,
| |
| and so that the burner face is in front of and 4 inches from the cable and approximately 2 feet above the bottom of the tray." See l R.G. 1.131 for specification of ribbon gas
| |
| : burner.
| |
| l 109.0 In lieu of Section 2.5.4.4.3 of IEEE Std Spec. ES-100 In the cable termination and splice 383-1974, the following should be used: Appendix B specification, verify that the Pages 5 13 and alternete description is specified or i
| |
| " Flame size will normatty be achieved when 3-14 otherwise included, the propane flow is 27.8 standard ctbic feet I
| |
| per hour and the air flow is 139 standard In the vendor documentation, verify ctbic feet per hour." that the atternate description is used.
| |
| 10 DAP FOIBl E-023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| *i fs Os ,
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CapeENTS 110.0 Section 2.5.4.5 of IEEE Std 383-1974 is not Spec. ES 100 In the cable termination and sptice endorsed by this regulatory guide. Apperdia 5 specification, verify that any Pages 8 13 and alternate flame source is excluded.
| |
| 5 14 In the vendor documentation verify that no alternate flame source is used.
| |
| 111.0 The recommendations indicated by "shoutcP' and Spec. ES 100 In the cable torininetion and splice the options indicated by "any" in the Appendia 8 specification, verify that each sections of IEEE Std 383-1974 Indicated below Pages e 13 and criteria item is written and included have sufficient importance to be treated the B-14 as a requirement.
| |
| same as recpJirements of the standard:
| |
| In the vendor h - ntation verify that
| |
| : a. Section 1.3.1, " Cable Description" each item applicable to the flame test
| |
| : b. Section 1.3.2, " Field splices or is acHressed as a rewirement.
| |
| Comection Description"
| |
| : c. Section 1.3.4.1, " Meeting Service (onditions", the first sentence,
| |
| : d. Section 1.3.4.2.1, "Desi p Basis Event-- LOCA"
| |
| : e. Section 1.4.1, "Generat"
| |
| : f. Section 1.4.3, " Test Results"
| |
| : g. Section 1.4.4, Test Evaluation"
| |
| : h. Section 2.2, " Type Test Samples" ,
| |
| I. Section 2.3.3, "Thernet and Radiation Exposure" 11 DAP FORM E-023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| _ .. - -=.
| |
| T J
| |
| , DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST ImmBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION h0. CRITERIA SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| (DOOMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 1
| |
| l 4
| |
| J. Section 2.3.3.3
| |
| : k. Section 2.3.3.4 l L. Section 2.4.3, "LOCA simuistiere
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.1
| |
| : n. Section 2.4.3.2
| |
| : c. Section 2.4.4, " Post LCCA Slaulation Test"
| |
| : p. Section 2.5.2.1
| |
| : q. Sectim 2.5.4.3
| |
| : r. Section 2.5.4.4.2
| |
| : s. Section 2.5.5, "Evaluatiore
| |
| : t. Section 2.5.6, " Instrument cable and Single condactors frcun nutticon&ctor Assembly", the reccomendation that the tested cable pass a flame resistance test in accordance with ASTM D2220 63.
| |
| j 119.0 The Type Test of Class IE electric cables, Spec. ES 100
| |
| ; In the cable tenminetton and splice fletd splices, and connections shalt be per Appendix 5 I
| |
| IEEE Std 383-1974.
| |
| specification, verify that type tests Pages 8 13 and per IEEE 383 are re wired.
| |
| P 14
| |
| ; In the vendor documentation verify that l the flame tests within IEEE 383 are I addressed.
| |
| l 1
| |
| 120.0 Reg. Guide 1.131 - Gustification Tests of Spec. ES-100 In the vendor < tan ==ntation verify that Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Appendin B the Reg. Guide requirements on flame 12 DAP FORM E-023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| A i
| |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NueER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESSIPTIGI
| |
| ! NO. CRITERIA SAT /WSAT/
| |
| (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeENTS comections for Light Water-cooled Nuclear.
| |
| d Pages s 13 and testing are met with these exceptions.
| |
| l Power Plants. B 14 i.
| |
| Although the leptementation of this
| |
| ; regulatory guide, dated August 1977, does not l include CPSES, att Class IE cables of the 1 CPSES meet most of the regirements of this regulatory guide with the few exceptions l noted below:
| |
| i
| |
| : a. Att prefabricated cables of the CPSES do not meet the following requirements:
| |
| l 1. vertical tray flame test on the aged cables to detensine their relative setf-eatingpalshing tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6);
| |
| I
| |
| ~
| |
| : 2. Flame testing with the ses burner face in the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| l However, work is in progress by vendor on
| |
| ! these items.
| |
| I i b. At L Sky cables, 600V power Lighting l cables of the CPSES do not meet the following
| |
| ! re wirements:
| |
| : 1. " Radiation Exposure Total" per Regulatory Guide 1,89 Position C.S.
| |
| I 13 DAP F054 E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| e i
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRmgER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENM DESCRIPTIGI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. (2ITERIA (00t18ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| 1
| |
| : 2. Verticet tray flame test on the aged cables to determine their rotative self eatinguishirie tendencies. (Regulatory Guide position c.6).
| |
| . 3. Flame testing with the ses burner face in j the front (Regulatory Guide position c.10).
| |
| i I 4. Gas and air flow recpJirements (Regulatory Guide position c.11).
| |
| .I I
| |
| 1 4
| |
| 1 i
| |
| l l
| |
| l i
| |
| 14 DAP FORM E 023, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) i 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verify that transfer switch Ewipment for Nuclear Power Plants. specifications include emirorumental w alification testing re y framents and The CPSES Class 1E e@lpment design complies that appropriate EG parameters are with the p atification program guidelines as specified.
| |
| I delineated in this regulatory guide dated November, 1974. For details see (FSAR) Verify that vendor patification
| |
| , Section 8.3. reports are included in a TUGCO equipment gaatification review and approvat program.
| |
| 51.0 identification. Verify that the transfer switches and
| |
| ' its associated design, operating, and Components of Class IE power systems, and maintenance documents are marked or l
| |
| j their associated design, operating, and labeled in a distinct momer.
| |
| maintenance documents, shall be marked or labeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Verification is performed in conjuction with Criterion 49.0.
| |
| Each type of Class IE power equipment shalt be quellfied by analysis, successful use uider similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its funetion under norme1 and design basis events.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 024, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| 1
| |
| )
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmgER ,REV._,DATE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| REFERENCE NC/WA CapeENTS (D0Q MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION No. CRITERIA 1
| |
| 66.0 The empahitity of all Class IE ogalpment, See criterton 49.0.
| |
| j including interfaces, of a nuclear power
| |
| )
| |
| l generatire station for performing its j
| |
| regaired ftmetion shall be demonstrated. It l la preferred that the dummstration be done
| |
| ) ty type tests on actant agalpment. Operating j experience and analysis may be used to j eigptement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 i for detailed regJirements.
| |
| ES 9 Review spec and drawings and verify 68.0 Att Class 1E electrical agalpment except l
| |
| motors are identified ty 11 at;*anumeric that taggits or identification of j
| |
| character tag raabers. The eighth character egalpment complies with the stated j
| |
| is either E, P, or (any other character regJirements.
| |
| except E or P), with E designatire egalpment j
| |
| sich is Class 1E, P designating agalpment sich is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating egalpaent tAlch is non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors stoptled with pumps are identified ty l the same tag number as the pugs.
| |
| 4 70.0 In ackfition to the tag rum 6ers, Class 1E Verify that the transfer switches are f identified by color coding in addition equipment, raceways, and cables in raceways 2 DAP FORM E 024 REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| t e i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CGWENTS are identified by the following color coding to the tag nudiers. .
| |
| ! system:
| |
| : a. ESF System Train A Orange (0) j Train B Green (G) i I
| |
| ( b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamel Levet l Channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 White (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (s)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y) l
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits i
| |
| , Associated Train A Orange with s ite i
| |
| stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with d ite stripes (G) l d. Non-Class IE Circuits i
| |
| d Train C Black (K) i
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and Equipment Natural raceways color or natural 4
| |
| 3 DAP FORN E-024, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST WlmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS equipment color 71.0 The color coding is applied to the class IE Reviaw spec and drawings and verify ogJipment on an area d ich is readily visible that color coding is a p ropriately (e.g., close to nameplate or identification specified and provided, tag ramber).
| |
| l l 73.0 Class 1E equipment and circuits are clearly Verify that the Class 1E transfer identified on documents and drawings in switches are identified as Class 1E on accordance with IEEE 494 1974. h m ts and drawings.
| |
| 79.0 Att Class 1E e@lpment will be quellfied per Verification is perfor1med in conjuction IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, with criterion 49.0.
| |
| I 3.11g, and Appendix 3A for additional details
| |
| , on environmental @ stification.
| |
| I 84.0 The seismic w ellfication of Clasa IE Review spec and verify that the egalpment should demonstrate en equipment's appropriate selenic cpJalification ability to perfone its re@lred faction re @ lraments are specified.
| |
| daring and after the time it is s 4jected to the forces resulting from one SSE. In addition, the equipment eust withstand the effects of a number of OgEs (see Sections 5.4 and 6.1.4 of IEEE-244 (1975)) prior to the application of an SSE.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 024, REV. O, 06/26/86 e
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MimOER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and verification is performed in conjuction electrical ogJipment are seismicatty with criterion 84.0.
| |
| cpastified in accordance with the procedJres and documentation regJirements specified in IEEE 344 1975, Recommended Practices for ,
| |
| seismic Qualification of Class 1E EgJipment
| |
| ] for Nuclear Power Generatfre Stations.
| |
| 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in conjuction electrical egalpment including stanchy power with criterion 84.0.
| |
| systems are desipied to maintain structural integrity and fisictional operability during and af ter an earthcpJake of magnitude tp to
| |
| ; and including the SSE.
| |
| I
| |
| ! 87.0 Alt Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is perforimod in conjuction ~
| |
| electrical egalpment are spatified by with criterion 84.0.
| |
| analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testire is used if it is demonstrated that the performance of the equipment stbjected to earthganke motion can be conservatively predicted and if the functional operability of the instrumentation j or egalpment is assured by its structural integrity alone.
| |
| 5 DAP FORM E 024, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i
| |
| CHECKLIST IRmBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NC/NA COMMENTS No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION d
| |
| 129.0 Re platory Guide 1.100 vertfIcatIan ie perfoneed in selenic eustification of Electric Equipment, conJtmetion with criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| The CPSES desi m for Ctess 1E electrical egalpment complies with the regJirements and recommendaties of Rev.1 (8/7/) of this repletory guide.
| |
| The intent of section C.1 is met by performifie an analysis to verify the a p roach and/or by following the agaivelent static load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| I l
| |
| 6 DAP FORM E-024, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| r d n - -
| |
| U DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l
| |
| CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESutIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ; NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| i 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verify that the specification for Equipment for Nucteer Power Plants. distribution transfonners includes
| |
| ; environmentet patification testing
| |
| ; The CPSES Class 1E opipment design complies regirements and that the appropriate l with the quotification program guidelines as E0 parameters are specified (seismic &
| |
| j detineated in this regulatory guide dated environmentet).
| |
| ; November, 1974. For details see (FSAR)
| |
| Section 8.3. Verify that vendor quotification reports are incttaded in a TUGC0 epipment watifIcation review and approvat program.
| |
| I a
| |
| 51.0 Identification. Verify that the distribution transfonmers and its associated destyi, Components of Class IE power systems, and operating, and maintenance amts
| |
| ; their associated design, operatirg, and are marked or tabeled in a distinct maintenance h-nts, shotl'be marked or mmmer.
| |
| , tabeled in a distinctive manner.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Verification is perfonned in conjmetion with Criterion 49.0.
| |
| Each type of Class IE power equipment shall be qualified by analysis, successfut use under similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its fmetion under normat and design basis events.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 025, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| (
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLeeER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS 53.0 Claes IE Power Systess. ES-2D Verify that these components ES-B (Distribution Transf.) are classified Description. Class 1E and are re wired to f metion l
| |
| i drirg and followirw ary design basis l The Class IE power systems shalt consist of event, an alternating-current power system, a direct current power system, and a vitet instnnentation and control power system.
| |
| Function.
| |
| The Class IE power systems shall provide acceptable power to the station chrire and following any design tesis event.
| |
| 54.0 Distribution System - ES 2D Verify that the load summary and sizing ES-8B calculations are consistent with the (1) Description. V5 transformer size.
| |
| V16 The distribution system shett consist of att V19 equipment in the distribution circuit from E1-001 its supply circuit breaker (s) to the toeds. El 005 (2) Capabitity.
| |
| Each distribution circuit shall be capable of 2 DAP FORM E 025, REV. O, 06/26/86 e
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IEMBER ,REV._ ,DAtE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (000 M NT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS trenmaltting sufficient energy to start and operate att regaired loads in that circuit.
| |
| (3) Independence.
| |
| Distribution circuits to rededent ogsipsont shall be physically and electricatty independent of each other.
| |
| (4) SurvelLLence.
| |
| The distribution system A att be monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to perform its intended faction.
| |
| (5) Auxiliary Devices.
| |
| Auntilary devices that are required to operate dependent equipment shotL be s# led from a related knas section to prevent the loss of electric power in one load gro g from causing the loss of equipment in another load 9rog.
| |
| (6) Feeders.
| |
| Feeders between Class IE power systems located in Safety Class structures and systees located in non Safety Class 3 DAP FORM E-025, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| N a .
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMgER , REY. _ ,DATE l
| |
| ; REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATION NC/MA C0psENTS j structures shall be provided with circuit breakers located in the Safety Class structure.
| |
| 1 66.0 The capability of all Class IE ep ipment, see criterion 49.0.
| |
| Including interfaces, of a nuclear power generatire station for performing its re@lred fmetion shall be demonstrated. It I
| |
| is preferred that the demonstration be done by type tests on actunt equipment. Operating experience and annlysis may be used to atsplement type tests. See IEEE Std 323-1974 for detailed re yfrements.
| |
| 68.0 ALL Class 1E electrical equipment except ES-2D Verify the method of identification of motors are identified by 11 alphanumeric ES 80 Class 1C distribution transformers.
| |
| character tag raabers. The eighth character is either E, P, or (any other character except E or P), with E designating equipment i d ich is Class 1E, P designating e gipment d ich is part of reactor protection channet systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating equipment dich is non-safety related.
| |
| % tors stoptied with pumps are identified by the same tag ram 6er as the pimps.
| |
| ) 4 DAP FORM E 025, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O'
| |
| ~
| |
| l l
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHE mLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| ( REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tWSAT/
| |
| l No. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS l .
| |
| l 70.0 In e&fition to the tag maders, Class 1E verify that the distribution
| |
| ; ecpalpment, raceways, and cables in recewers transformers are identified by color are identified by the following color coding codire in addition to the tog rsabers.
| |
| systan:
| |
| l a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train 3 Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems et Channet Level Channel 1 Red (R) channel 2 mite (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| I Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orange with editte stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train 5 Green with ediite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class IE Circuits Train C Black (K) j 5 DAP FORM E 025, REV. 0,' 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| : e. Non-Class IE Cable Racewurs and Equipment Natural raceways color or natural equipment color 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E ES 2D Review spec and drawings and verify equipment on an area elch is readily visible ES as that color coding is appropriately i (e.g., close to nameptate or identification specified and provided.
| |
| tog rumber).
| |
| l 73.0 Class 1E e@lpment and circuits are clearly Verify that the Class 1E distribution identified on h=mts md drasings in transformers and circuits are accordance with IEEE 496-1974. Identified as Class 1E on h=mts and drawings.
| |
| 79.0 Att Class 1E e p ipment will be qualified per See criterion 49.0.
| |
| IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAli Sections, 3.11N, 3.118, and Appendix 3A for additional dstalls on erwironmental quotification.
| |
| 84.0 The seismic P atification of Class 1E Review spec and verify that appropriate equipment should demonstrate an e@lpment's seismic patification re@ lrements are ability to perfone its re@lred function specified.
| |
| : cbring and af ter the time it is stbjected to 6 DAP FOR91 E 025, REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| s .
| |
| 4 O' %
| |
| 1
| |
| ! DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRMBER , REV._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCBGENTS I
| |
| the forces resulting from one SSE. In j addition, the equipment must withstand the i effects of a nueer of 00Es (see Sections 5.4 l and 6.1.4 of IEEE-244 (1975)) prior to the
| |
| ) application of an SSE.
| |
| * i 1
| |
| 85.0 Seismic category I instrumentation and verification is performed in electricat egJipment are seismicatty conjection with criterion 84.0.
| |
| Saatifled in accordance with the procedsres and neaa m tation regairements specified in IEEE 344-1975, Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of class IE Equipment
| |
| ! for Nucteer Feuer Generatire Stations.
| |
| I 86.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and verification is perfonned in electrical ogJipment includire stantby power conj metion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| I systans are designed to maintain structuret i integrity and ftmettonal operability during l and af ter en earthganke of magnitude ip to I and including the $$E.
| |
| l 1,
| |
| 87.0 Att Seismic Category I instrumentation and verification is perfonned in electrical equipment are qualified by conj metion with criterion 84.0.
| |
| l analysis or testing, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if l' is
| |
| ! demonstrated that the perforannce of the 7 DAP FORM E-025, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IAmeER - ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA C00ENTS equipment adjected to earthgJake notion can
| |
| , be conservatively predicted and if the fmettonet operability of the instrumentation
| |
| ; or egalpment is assured by its structuret integrity alone.
| |
| 129.0 Res tatory Guide 1.100 Verification is perfonned in Selseic Quellfication of Electric Egsipment. conjmetion with criterion No. 84.0.
| |
| Tha CPSES design for Class 1E electricat equipment complies with the regsirements and recomumendations of Rev.1 (8/77) of this repletory guide.
| |
| I I The intent of Section C.1 is met by
| |
| ; performing an anstysis to verify the approach and/or by following the ogstvetent static load method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section 3.108 and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| l l
| |
| l l
| |
| l 8 DAP FORM E-025, REV. 0, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CMECKLIST NLMBER , REY. _ ,DATE REFEREME nESGIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00AENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIG1 NC/NA CGOENTS 4.0 As indicated in FSAR Am endix 34 Table 5-1, Verify that the Class 1E actors located the only motors in the containment regaired outside contairment are specified to be to operate in the event of a DOA are those type tested in accordance with the motor-operated isolation valves which operate intent of IEEE 334-1974. l l
| |
| at the onset of a DBA. The Class 1E entors tocated outside the contairment are Verify that vendor gallff-ation l type-tested in accordance with the intent of reports are incitated in a TUGC0 l l
| |
| l IEEE-334-1974. ecpalpment gaallfication review and l approvat program. l l
| |
| ' l l
| |
| l l 7.0 Qualification tests for att safety-related Verify that the Criterion regairements I electric valve operators outside as well as are included in the appropriate MOV inside containment are designed in accordance specifications. In particular, verify I with IEEE-2791971, IEEE-323-1974, R.G.1.73 regairements for MOW's inside IEEE-336-1971 and IEEE 382-1972 to contairment.
| |
| demonstrate their capability to ftmetion charing and af ter accident envircreantal conditions. In addition, safety related electric valve operators instatted inside contairment are also gastified in accordance with Reg. Guide 1.73.
| |
| 10.0 Att safety-related Class 1E setors are Review specification to ensure this designed to accelerate their driven toads respairement was specified.
| |
| with 80 percent of the motor rated voltage available at the terminals. Review vendor h - ntion to verify the motor capability to operate with the l
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 026, REV. O, 06/26/86 l l
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| -_-- __ = __
| |
| > a DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IMWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTim SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI sec/NA CDeEllTS l
| |
| I stated condition.
| |
| 14.0 Motor insulation is selected on the basis of Verify that the motor ineutetton is emblent temperature and expected temperature appropriate for the ambient temperature rise based on worst case toedire conditions, and expected temperature rise.
| |
| In general, the actors have Class B insutetton.
| |
| 49.0 Reg. Guide 1.89 - Qualification of Class 1E Verification is perfonned in conjuction Egalpuent for Nuclear Power Plants. with Criterion 7.0.
| |
| The CPSES Class 1E egJipment design complies with the qualification program guidelines as delineated in this regulatory guide dated
| |
| , November, 1974. For details see (FSAR) l Section 8.3.
| |
| t i
| |
| i
| |
| ; 51.0 Identification. Verify that the motor operators and its associated design, operating, and Components of Class IE power systese, and unintenance documents are marked or their associated design, operating, and labeled in a distinct namer.
| |
| maintenance h m ts, shall be marked or labeled in a distinctive namer.
| |
| 52.0 Equipment Qualification. Verification is performed in conjuction 2 DAP FORM E 026, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ) O'~'
| |
| l
| |
| . DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST IRMBER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. GITERIA (DOCLDIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA ColgENTS
| |
| ?
| |
| I 1
| |
| i with criterion 7.0.
| |
| Each type of Class IE power e@fpment shall be w ellfied by anetysis, successful use
| |
| ] mder simitar conditions, or by actunt test j to demonstrate its ability to perform its j function under norant and desipi bests
| |
| ] events.
| |
| I 66.0 The capability of att Class IE opipment, Verification is performed in
| |
| ; incitzling interfaces, of a nuclear pouer conjmetion with criterion 7.0.
| |
| I generating station for perfonning its I
| |
| regired fmetion shall be demonstrated. It l Is preferred that the denunstration be done
| |
| ] by type tests on actual equipment. Operating experience and analysis may be used to
| |
| ) sigplement type tests. See IEEE Std 323 1974
| |
| ! for detailed requirements.
| |
| i
| |
| { 68.0 Att class 1E electrical e pipment except verify method of identification of t
| |
| motors are identified by 11 alphanumeric Nov's.
| |
| ] character tag rambert The eighth character is either E, P, or (b y other character except E or P), with E designating e p ipment s ich is Class 1E, P designating e g ipment sich is part of reactor protection chamel systens, and (other characters except E or P) designating equipment sich is 3 DAP FORM E-026, REV. 0, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| (
| |
| O
| |
| (
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRaeER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /LASAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DoctsENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATICBI NC/NA CGOENTS 4
| |
| 1 non-safety-related.
| |
| Motors sipplied with pumps are identified by the same tag number as the ptmps.
| |
| i i
| |
| 70.0 In addition to the tag raabers, Class 1E Verify that the motor operators are ecpaigrant, raceways, and cables in raceways identified by color coding in addition j are identiflad by the following color coding to the tag rumbers.
| |
| system:
| |
| : a. ESF Systen z
| |
| Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train 3 Green (G)
| |
| , b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamet Levet 4
| |
| i Channet 1 Red (R) j Channel 2 m ite (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (5)
| |
| ) Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| I
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits 1 Associated Train A Orange with d ite i stripes (0) l Associated Train B Green with site stripes (G) 3 4 OAP FORM E-026, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| i 4
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| c o-DESIG1 REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IR84ER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTI(31 SAT /L50 SAT /
| |
| NO. CitITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS i
| |
| l t d. Non-Class !E Circuits
| |
| )
| |
| ! Train C stack (K)
| |
| I i e. Non-Class IE Cable Raceways and Equipment i
| |
| 1 Natural receways color or natural espipment color 1
| |
| i 1
| |
| ) 71.0 The color coding is applied to the Class 1E ES-1B Revleu spec and drawings and verify
| |
| ) equipment on an aree which is readily visible that color coding is provided.
| |
| j (e.g., close to nameplate or identification 1
| |
| tag number),
| |
| .l 73.0 Class 1E egalpumt and circuits are clearly ES-15 Review spec and drawings and verify identified on h==nts and drawings in that Class 1E equipment is identified j accordance with IEEE 496-1974. on documents per IEEE 494 1974.
| |
| i 79.0 Att Class 1E ogalpment will be qualified per Verification is perfonned in conjuction i IEEE 323 (1974). See FSAR Sections, 3.11N, with criterion 7.0.
| |
| 3.115, and A mendix 3A for additional details
| |
| )
| |
| on emironmental quotification.
| |
| 84.0 The seismic gJalification of Class 1E Review spec and verify that the t 5 DAP FORM E-026, REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| 1 i
| |
| | |
| ] % . -
| |
| \ ,
| |
| j 4
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRAGER ,BEV._,DATE
| |
| , REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| 2 l
| |
| l equipmentshoulddemonstrateanepipmentls appropriate seismic p atification ability to perfone its rewired function re yframents are specified. Verify
| |
| { daring and af ter the time it is eL6jected to tha' veaufor gaallfication reports are
| |
| ; the forces resultire from one SSE. In included in a TUGCO EQ review wuf I addition, the agalpment must withstaruf the approval program, effects of a nuuher of Dees (see Sections 5.4 and 6.1.4 of IEEE-344 (1975)) prior to the application of an SSE.
| |
| l 85.0 Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in conjuction electrical e pipsont are aclamicatty with Criterion 84.0.
| |
| j @atifled in accordance with the procedares and documentation regairements specified in IEEE 344-1975, Recommanded Practices for l Seismic Qualification of Ctess 1E Equipment i for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
| |
| I l
| |
| j 86.0 Setemic Category I instrumentation and Verification is perforund in conjuction
| |
| ]
| |
| electrical egalpment including standy power with criterion 84.0.
| |
| systems are desi red to maintain structural integrity and ftmetional operability during i and efter an earth @ ake of meenitude tp to
| |
| { and incitafine the SSE.
| |
| 87.0 All Seismic Category I instrumentation and Verification is performed in conjuction electrical egalpment are wellfled by with criterion 84.0.
| |
| 6 DAP FORM E 026, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| r -
| |
| 9 -
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST ESWER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIm SAT /INSAT/
| |
| ; NO. CRITERIA (DottBENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(BI NC/N4 CGGENTS
| |
| .l
| |
| ~
| |
| analysis or 2esting, or both. Seismic analysis without testing is used if it is damnstrated that the performance of the ocpalpment s4Jacted to earthcpaake action can d
| |
| he conservatively predicted and if the l factional operability of the instrumentation or egalpment is assured by its structuret
| |
| ! integrity alone.
| |
| l j 96.0 To the extent practicable, emitfory Review spec and verify that the volve j equipment (e.g., limit switches) that is not operator am illary ogJipment is l Integret with the vetw operator mechanism regaired to be tested in accordance
| |
| ! but will be part of the installed volve with IEEE 3P1-1972.
| |
| I operator assembly should be tested in accordance kith the e@ ject standerd. (IEEE
| |
| ; Std. 382-1972) i i
| |
| i
| |
| ! 97.0 The test secpannee described in Section 4.5.2 Review spec and verify that the volve 1 of IEEE Std 382-1972 should be used mless operator assembly is recpaired to be j the anticipated actunt service operating tested in the actual service secpannce.
| |
| secpaence for the valve operator is expected to create a more severe operating condition than described in Section 4.5.2 In such case, the actual service sequence should be used in the test.
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E-026, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| l j DES!!lin REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IEselER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctsIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| }
| |
| 4 96.0 To assure that the valve operator is tested verification is performed in conJuction l inder an enviroment of sufficient severity, with criterion 7.0.
| |
| i the sayiltude of the environmental conditions (e.g., temperature, pressure, radiation, j humidity) that slautate the conditform to j iditch the valve operator is espected to be i *=r=.re dJring and followirqi a design basis
| |
| ; accident (Section 4.4, 2nd Para. of IEEE Std 382-1972) should be based on conservative l calculation.
| |
| 118.0 The Type Test of Class I electric vetve verification is performed in conjuction operstors shalt be per IEEE Std 382-1972. with Criterion 96.0.
| |
| i f
| |
| i 121.0 Reg. Guide 1.73 - cualification Tests of Verify that motor operators inside Electric Valve Operators Instatted Inside the contairment are re@lred to be Contalrunent of Nuclear Pouer Plants. @ atified per Reg. Guide 1.73.
| |
| )
| |
| ) Safety related motor operated vetves inside Verify that the stan moteted limit l containment comply with the widence of switches are tested separately to the Re s tatory Guide 1.73, dated January 1974, re @lreaants of IEEE 382 19E2.
| |
| with the exception that stem mounted limit switches are tested separately to the regJirements of IEEE Std 382-1972. For details see (FSAR) Section 3.118. Also refer to A@endix 1A(N)42. (Westirehouse complies with same exception.)
| |
| 8 DAP FORM E-026, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| (
| |
| \
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i
| |
| CNECKLIST IESWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DEsatIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 1
| |
| l l
| |
| l 129.0 Regutatory Guide 1.100 WerifIcetIon ie perforund in Seismic euellfication of Electric Equipment. conjtmetion with criterion No. 86.0.
| |
| l
| |
| { The CPSES deslyt for Class 1E electrical agalpment complies with the regairements and recommandations of Rev. 1 (8/7/) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| l The intent of Section c.1 is met by
| |
| ; performing an anstysis to verify the approach I and/or by following the agalvelent static j toad method. Also refer to (FSAR) Section l 3.10s and Appendix 1A(N).
| |
| I l
| |
| 1
| |
| )
| |
| i l
| |
| l l
| |
| l 1
| |
| l 9 DAP FORM E-026, REV. O, 06/26/86 4
| |
| l 5
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| y D ,-
| |
| W DESIGN REVIEW EVALu4 TION CNECKLIST IR8eER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(Ni SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CGeENTS 5.0 Two independent and rededent 6900-V Class,1E EI-0001 verify that each of two 6.9-kV buses huses are provided for each mit, each E1-0004 has the capability to espply the capable of styptyire the reyfred re @ fred safety related toads, safety-related loads to safely shut dom the mit following a D8A. Eacn Class 1E bus can be fed from two independent offsite pouer sources or the dieset generator assigned to the bus. Arrangement of buses is sham en FSAR Figure 8.3-1, assignment of emergency toads is indicated in FSAR Tables 8.3-8 and 8.3-9.
| |
| 11.0 starting of the dieset orgines is DeLavat verify that rededent startirg Air accomplished by a Compressed Air System D-4933 P4 Systes components are available.
| |
| consisting of independent and re&ndant air 09-835 76001 compressors, receiwrs, and solenoid watws. MS 34 App. 7 Each of the redadent receivers has P. 26, 27 sufficient cayessed air storage for five i
| |
| starts.
| |
| 1 l
| |
| l
| |
| . 12.0 controt power is obtained fras rededent Cowred eder Covered tader criterion 31.0.
| |
| l 125-WDC systems. Train a toads of tmit 1 and criterion 31.0 I
| |
| thit 2 receive power from batteries ST1ED1 (unit 1) ard aT2ED1 (unit 2), respectIwIy.
| |
| l Train B Loads of Unit 1 and thit 2 are fed l from betteries BTIED2 (Unit 1) ard BT2ED2
| |
| ) (Unit 2), respectively. For details see I
| |
| ! 1 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| v s e 1
| |
| f DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION 4 CIECKLIST IR8SER , REY._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTI(Bl SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(31 NC/nA CINoENTS L
| |
| i
| |
| ! se section 8.3.2.
| |
| The source of control power to each 1 switchseer is indicated below:
| |
| i Ctess.
| |
| i tmit settery (sofety switchseer i No. Source Train) mo.
| |
| 1 j 6.9ky 480 1
| |
| 1
| |
| ; STIE01 A 1 1EA1 1EB1 1EB3 BT1ED2 B 1EA2 1EB2 1EB4 3
| |
| BT102 man safety 1A1 1A3 151 153
| |
| ; BT104 Non safety 1A2 1A4 152 184 i
| |
| 2 ST2ED1 A 2EA1 2EB1 2Et3 ST2E02 8 2EA2 2ES2 2E54 eT2D2 man safety 2A1 2A3 251 2s3 BT2D4 IIon safety 2A2 2A4 252 2s4 l
| |
| 142 *sT102 and man safety met -
| |
| l BT2D2 I
| |
| ) *via transfer switch The DC power is regJired by each dieset j generator for controts, eterms, protective
| |
| )
| |
| l 2 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 9
| |
| | |
| e
| |
| * 1
| |
| , s j
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ! CIECKLIST IRmBER ,REV._ ,DATE
| |
| , REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| m0. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICBI NC/NA CGeENTS 1
| |
| I relays, air-starting solenoid watwes, and
| |
| ) generator field flashire from the station j batteries.
| |
| 1 31.0 Direct-Current Systems. El-0001 Verify that the power stpplies for
| |
| } EI 0001 Sh. 1 Class 1E DC toads and for control and The direct-current power system shalt inctLate El-0018 Sh. 3 switching of the Class IE pouer system j power stsplies, a distribution system, and E1-0020 are rodadant.
| |
| i toad grows arrarged to provide ES-8A direct-current electric pwer to the Class 1E Pages 3-8 i
| |
| direct-current loads and for control and 3-17, 3-18 switching of the class 1E power systems. 3-21 App. 3
| |
| , Sufficient g*ysical separation, electrical i
| |
| isolation, and redadency shall be provided
| |
| } to prevent the occurrence of common failure i
| |
| modes in the station's Class IE pouer systems. Desi m requirements shalt include i the foltcuing:
| |
| I (1) Redadent Loads. The electric loads shalt be separated into two or more rodadant toad grotps.
| |
| (2) Safety Actions. The safc*y actions by each grow of toads shalt be redandant and
| |
| , independent of the safety actions provided by Its redandant coteterparts.
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| . e
| |
| * 1 b
| |
| i 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EvnLUATION CIECntST InsER .REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (00CtmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION MC/N4 COWENTS j (3) Power Stepties. Each of the j red adant load grotes shott have access to a j power sagpty that consists of a bettery and
| |
| } one or more bettery chargers.
| |
| (4) Common Power $4pply. Two or more l toad grotes may have a common pouer stopty if
| |
| . the consecpaences of the toes of the common j power sigpty to the toed grotes seder desipi
| |
| ; bests conditions are acceptable.
| |
| I j (5) Caumon Fellure Mode. The rodadent
| |
| !' betteries shett not have a common fatture i mode for any design bests event.
| |
| f (6) Protective Devices. Protective devices shalt be provided to limit the degradation of the Class 1E pouer systems.
| |
| Sufficient indicatfan shalL be provided to j identify the actuation of a protective I device.
| |
| l l 35.0 Dependable power sapplies are regJired for El 0018 verify that pouer supplies for vitet
| |
| ! the vital instrumentation and control systems E1 0018 Sh. 1 instrtmenteilen and control systems are I
| |
| of the unit (s) includire: E1-0018 Sh. 3 rodadent.
| |
| E1-0020 l (1) Instrumentation and control for the reactor protection system 1
| |
| i 4 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| 9
| |
| | |
| p e e N
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIch CMCKLIST IE8WER ,REV._ ,DATE 4
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LRISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCUEEFT, PAGE) l 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS l
| |
| l 1
| |
| (2) The engineered safety features instrsmentation and control systems.
| |
| l l The diverse a rangements, specist regairements, and cour'emity of these systens practu;ie a detailed o tineation of their I
| |
| power stypty recpairements. Nowever, power must be sagptied to these systems in a momer as to preserve their reliability,
| |
| )
| |
| independence, and redadency. Typicatty, one or more of the following may be recpaired:
| |
| (1) Two or more independent direct-current l power stgplies for control and i instrumentation.
| |
| I (2) Two or more independent direct-current power r gpties for trutrumentation that have special regairements regarding stability and l freedom frcum noise.
| |
| { (3) Two or more independent alternating-current power sigplies having a l degree of reliability and evaltability, compatible with the systaus they serve.
| |
| To accomplish the above regairements, special power sagpties may be regsfred that are f
| |
| 5 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I .
| |
| | |
| , s I DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION 3 CNECKLIST IR35ER .REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tBISAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (00(181ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIGI IIC/NA CGsENTS 1
| |
| I i
| |
| isolated from the etterneting-current and
| |
| ] direct-current power sagiplies taed for the nornet instrumentatlan and control of the tssit(s).
| |
| l 1
| |
| ! 53.0 Two separate and M icetty independent II-7 Sh. 14, 15 verify redsident cepecity of start, I
| |
| start @ transformers provide startw and App. O treneformers.
| |
| t preferred shutdom power to the Latits on en E1-0004 immediate basis.
| |
| i 55.0 The DC safety-related toads of each unit are 1x 1 verify redtsuhnt capability of 125V l
| |
| ; sgptied by two (2) Independent and redandant x111-2 settery Systems.
| |
| 125-V bettery systems, f
| |
| i 1
| |
| 56.0 The AC and DC safety-releted loads of sech Covered asider Covered trider Criterie Nos. 55.0 and
| |
| ] teilt are divided into redandant toad grotes, Criteria Ilos. 75.0.
| |
| : each energized from independent emergency 55.0 and 75.0
| |
| . power esgyty.
| |
| 57.0 Two pitysicetty independent and redsident Ei0004 Verify redwident capability of offsite sources of offsite power are eveltable on en power ecurces by reviewire connections immediate basis for the safe shutdoun of of startty transfonmers.
| |
| j either tagit.
| |
| i 6 DAP FORM E-050, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| l o o-l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLSWER . REY._ ,DATE
| |
| , REFEREME DESGIPTIGI
| |
| ' SAT.'WSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) i 0F 9ERIFIC4 TION NC/NA CapSENTS i
| |
| i j
| |
| f 71.0 The safety'retated systems are designed with Covered m der Covered i.ner C*lteria Nos. 5.0, 31.0, i sufficient capacity, independence, and Criteria Nos. 35.0, 55.0, and 75.0.
| |
| ! re &ndency to ensure performance of their 5.0, 31.0, 35.0
| |
| ! safety f metions assuming a sinate fatture. 55.0 and 75.0 75.0 Redadency of Class 1E onsite AC Power V-5 Verify rodadant capability of onsite Systems ensures safe reactor shutdom daring El-0004 AC Power Systems, a Safe Shutdown earthcpJake (SSE) or DBA E1-0005 coincident with any single failure within the El-0007 stan @ y AC power system or the 118-V El-0009 minterrtptible AC Power System. El-0010
| |
| ! El-0014 El-0018 El-0018 Sh. 1 El 0020 l
| |
| i i 83.0 Each redundant Class 1E 125-V system consists covered m der Covered m der criterion 31.0.
| |
| i of two frusependent betteries each having one criterion 31.0
| |
| -) main distribution bus with molded case
| |
| { circuit breekers, fusible switches, two j static bettery chargers (one spare), and t
| |
| local distribution penets. Redadency of components precludes Loss of both systems as I
| |
| a result of a strete failure. For unit 1, betteries BTIED1 and ST1ED3 feed ett Train A I
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| s e -
| |
| i 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION j CIEELIST IR8WER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENG DESGIPilot SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| No. GITERIA (D00 M NT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NC/NA CGsENTS l
| |
| l j toed regairements, d ite betteries BTIED2 and j BT1ED4 s4pply Train B toed recpairements.
| |
| ; For thit 2, betteries BT2ED1 and BT2ED3 feed l att Train A load requireemnts, dite j
| |
| I betteries BT2ED2 and BT2ED4 sapply Train B J toad rewirements.
| |
| I l
| |
| r There are no bus ties or sharing of power
| |
| , s#ies between reemdent trains. Class 1E j
| |
| o pipennt associated with systems shared by
| |
| ) both m its receives power from penet boards i
| |
| hevire an inconting automatic transfer switch d ich can select power from either mit.
| |
| j Transfer switch deslyi is such that power j camot be sigptied from both mits sinuttaneounty. Train seperatfon is maintained by sigplying these shared i
| |
| 4 penetboerds from the same train of both t
| |
| mits. Independence and separation are l maintained throughout the AC sigply circuitry I
| |
| as well as in the DC distribution network.
| |
| l Non-Class 1E toads are not comocted to these I
| |
| systems.
| |
| i
| |
| { 94.0 GDC 17 Electric Power Systeem. Covered under Covered imder Criteria Nos. 31.0 and Criteria Nos. 75.0.
| |
| An onsite electric power system and an 31.0 and 75.0 8 DAP FORM E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| i'
| |
| | |
| Oe e
| |
| i 1
| |
| i I.
| |
| ! DESIGII REVIEW EvnttmTIcel CIEELIST IR8EER .REV._ ,DATE REFEREIIE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /tsISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (D00SENT, PACE) 1 0F VERIFICATIGl IIC/HA COWEllTS 4
| |
| 1 offsite electric power system shall he provided to permit factioning of structwes, systems, and components leportant to safety.
| |
| The safety f mction for each system (assumins
| |
| ; the other system is not factioning) shatt be i to provide sufficient capacity and capability to assure (1)that the specified acceptaide fuel design limits and desi p conditions of the reactor coot et pressure bo m dery are not
| |
| , exceeded as a reeutt of eticipated j operational occurrmcas; auf, (2) the core is j cooled and contairemnt integrity and other ,
| |
| ! vitet factions are maintained in the event
| |
| ; of postulated accidents. The ensite electric
| |
| ) power sources, includire the betteries, and I the ensite electric distribution system, shall have sufficient independence,
| |
| , redadency, ed testability to perfona their l safety fmettons assuming a siegte fatture.
| |
| I j Electric power from the transmission network j to the ensite electric distribution systen j shall be sWied by two physicetty l Independent circuits (not necessarily on i separate rights of usy) desiped and located so as to minimize to the extent practical the liketthood of their sleuttaneous failure
| |
| ; under operating and postuteted acciderat and l environmental conditions. A switchyard t
| |
| j 9 DAP FoltM E 030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| l I
| |
| (J i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRMBER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION No. OtlTERIA SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(at NC/NA CDeENTS comunon to both circuits is acceptatde. Each of these circuits shall be designed to be avaitatde in sufficient time fottowing a toss of att onsite attemeting current power e g lies and the other offsite electric power circuit, to assure that specified -carwable
| |
| } fuel design timits arut design conditions of f the reactor coolant pressure bomdery are not exceeded. One of these circuits shett be -
| |
| j desired to be eweiteide within a few seconds
| |
| :l following a loss of-coolant accident to
| |
| ) assure that core cootirg, containment
| |
| ! integrity, and other vitet safety factions
| |
| ) are amintained.
| |
| I Provisions shett be included to miniedze the I
| |
| probability of losing electric power from any of the remainire sipplies as a reeutt of, or l coincident with, the loss of power generated by the nucteer pouer smit, the toss of power from the transmieslan network, or the loss of
| |
| { power from the onsite electric power sources.
| |
| i l
| |
| 1 i
| |
| 99.0 The electricatty powered safety loads (ac and Cowred mder covered neder 5.0, 31.0, 35.0, 55.0,
| |
| ! dc) should be separated into red edent toed criteria Nos. and 75.0.
| |
| groies such that loss of any one groie will 5.0, 31.0 not prevent the minisue safety fimetions from 35.0, 55.0 being performed.
| |
| r and 75.0 f
| |
| 10 DAP Font E-030, REY.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DEstGN REVIEW EVALu4 TION CEELIST NLsIEER . REY._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DocuelT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGsENTS 123.0 Attemeting-Current Pouer Systes. E1 0001 Verify that the Class 1E AC toads are El-0004 seperated into re & ndant load grotes Generet. E1 0007 and optied by rededent power E1-0009 septies.
| |
| The alterneting-current power systems shell E1-0010 inctuJe power sigplies, a distribution El-0018 systas, and toad greies arranged to provide El-0018 sh. 1 attemating-current electric pouer to the Class 1E toads. Sufficient physical seperation, electrical footation, and redadency shett be provided to prevent the ,
| |
| occurrence of a e m felture made in the class 1E power systems for any design basis event. Destys requirements shotL include, but are not necesserity (faited to, the following:
| |
| (1) Re& ndant Load Grotes: The electric loads shall be separated into tuo or more rodadant load groses.
| |
| (2) Safety Actions: The safety actions by each grote of toads shall be rodadant and independent of the safety actions provided by its rededent commterparts.
| |
| (3) Power Sigply: Each of the redadant toed 11 DAP FORM E-030, REV 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGII REVIEW EVALimTION
| |
| { CIEELIST IRAER .AEV._ ,DATE REFEREN DESCRIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. GITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICII IIC/ IIA COWENTS 1
| |
| i l grows shall have access to both a preferred and a stan6y power stypty. Each pouer sigply shall consist of one or more power sources.
| |
| (4) Common Power Steply: Two or more load grows may have a common power 34pply if the consecpannces of the toss of the common power stpply to the load grones inder desty bests j conditions are acceptaide.
| |
| (5) Common Falture Isode: The preferred and f the stan&y pouer sigpties shalt not have a i common failure made between them. In 1
| |
| addition, the re & ndant generating sources of
| |
| ; the stan6y power sigply shalt not have a common fatture mode for any destyi basis 1 event.
| |
| (6) Protective devices: Protective devices shall be provided to tielt the degradetion of
| |
| ; the Class 1E power systems. Sufficient indication shalt be provided to identify the l actustion of a protective device.
| |
| . 146.0 RedLadant safety-related toads are divided Covered teder Covered inder criteria Nos. 5.0, 31.0, between Trains A and B so that loss of either criteria Isos. 35.0, 55.0 and 75.0.
| |
| train does not tapair fulfittmant of the 5.0, 31.0 12 DAP FORpt E-030, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| h 1
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| o
| |
| * DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIou CIECKLIST IR8eER .AEV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFEREllCE DES G iPTICBI SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| 110. MITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION IIC/ lea COWENTS l
| |
| 1 minleue shutdoom safety recpirements. 35.0, 55.0 and 75.0 1
| |
| 151.0 The desi m bases, criterie, NRC regulatory Cowred mder Cowred mder criterie Nos. 5.0, 31.0, wides, standards, and other documents that Criteria slos. 35.0, 55.0 and 75.0.
| |
| ; ere implemnted in the design of the 5.0, 31.0
| |
| ) safety related systees (as discussed in 35.0, 55.0 t
| |
| Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as fottous: e d 75.0 (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9).
| |
| l l
| |
| I 13 DAP FOINI E-030, REY.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s -
| |
| a . . -
| |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVAttmTION CIECKLIST IRaeER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(Ni SAT /tseSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (00GMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(BI NC/NA C(BGENTS 1.0 The stancby AC Power Systen is an Verify by & awing review that no power independent, onsite, autaastically starting sapplies or other ancittery e pipment system designed to furnish reliable eut for the stansby Olesel Generators are adownte power for Ctets 1E toads to ereure dependent on offsite power.
| |
| safe ptant shutdom and atansby edien preferred and alternate power sources are not evaltabte.
| |
| 2.0 Four independent dieset generator sets, two Covered m der Criterion No. 3.0.
| |
| per mit, are provided. Each generator is driven by a single prime aower and is capable of sequentietty starting and st@ plying the minisua power reyfrements for a dea in one mit.
| |
| 3.0 The four diesel generators are electrically Verify that desipi documents show and $ ysically independect. They are located electrical independence of diesel above the water levet of the probable snaisua generators.
| |
| flood (PMF) level (789.7 ft).
| |
| 4.0 Each diesel generator and its associated Covered m der criterion No. 3.0.
| |
| equipment is located in a separate room with watts designed to protect the dieset generators and associated equipment against an SSE, tornadoes, missiles, and fire.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGI REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE j
| |
| REFERENCE DESGIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA C3sENTS i
| |
| j 5.0 Two independent and re&ndant 6900-V Class 1E verify that the tuo 6900-V Class 1E buses are provided for each mit, each buses are independant.
| |
| ' capable of sagiptying the respaired safety related loads to safety shut down the i mit foltoufrg a DBA. Each Class 1E bus can be fed from two independent offsite power i
| |
| sources or the dieset generator asslyued to i
| |
| the bus. Arrangement of buses is shown on FSAR Figure 8.3-1, assigrument of energency toads is indicated in FSAft Tables 8.3 8 and 8.3-9.
| |
| 6.0 Intercomections between safety-related Verify that breaker controls are (Class 1E) and non-safety related (non-Class provided to attou footation of Class 1E 1E) buses exist between 6900-V buses 1A1 and buses as recpsired.
| |
| 1EA1, 1A2 and 1EA2 for Unit 1, and 2A1 and
| |
| ; 2EA1, and 2A2 and 2EA2 for unit 2 by means of isolating switches and circuit breakers.
| |
| These ties fmetion to transmit power to the Class 1E buses if the preferred offsite power systes is mavailable. Circuit breakers located in the energency switchgear permit inumediate isolation of these buses from the remaining auxiliary bus s/ sten edien recpstred.
| |
| 9.0 For each unit, two independent and red edent verify that the destyi preserves the 2 DAP FORft E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O.
| |
| 3 DESIGI: REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRAGER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DES (RIPTI(31 SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCIAEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDOENTS safeguards secreencer cabinets are provided intended independence between Train A for segaentist loading of diesel generators, and Train S.
| |
| one for Train A and one for Train B. Each cabinet houses two secpaencers, one for the safety injection made negaancire and one for blerkout only mode sequercing. Each segaencer is basicetty a grote of output electromechanical relays operated by solid state logic circuits and timers. The a separate and independent timer circuits are inittsted for each loading step by solid state logic circuit. Reliability of each segancer is assured by continuous testire from the irput diode metrix throtgh the logics and timers to the colts of the output relsys. If a fault is detected it is etermed in the control room.
| |
| l
| |
| '. 10.0 Nucteer-safety-related toads associated with verify from the one-lines that no J
| |
| each unit are powered exclusively from Ctess safety-related toads identified with I IE systems of that particuter mit. However, one mit are connected to the nucteer-safety-related toeds conson to both distribution system or Ctess 1E power units are powered from Ctess 1E MCCs and sources of the other unit.
| |
| ! distribution penets d ich have steplies from each tsilt. These daat mit esgpties are Verify that d ere common safety-related interlocked to practude steplying power to toeds are stgptied from MCC's or one MCC or distribution penet from both units distribution penets comectobte to stenalteneously. Incoming feeders to train A either Unit's Citss 1E System, 3 DAP FORM E 031, REV.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| (
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EWLUATION CECKLIST msWER .NEV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS 1
| |
| MCts or distribution penets casamen to both intertecks prevent parallellrg of smits are otgirtled only from train A power sigiplies.
| |
| systems of both mits (a similar arrangement exists for train B ogalpment and incoming verify that trein separation is feeders). This ensures the proper train meintained, try reviewire the one-lines, separation between the agalpment common to both mits.
| |
| 11.0 5tartire of the dieset orgines is Verify Independence provisions in ,
| |
| accomplished try a Compressed Air System Diesel Starting Air System.
| |
| consistire of independent and redandant air compressors, receivers, and motonoid vetwes.
| |
| Each of the redandant recelwers has sufficient caspressed air storage for five starts, i
| |
| 12.0 Controt power is obtained fras rodadent verify that deelyi of 125vDC System 125 VDC systems. Train A loads of thit 1 and confonus to FSAR description.
| |
| Unit 2 receive power from betteries BT1EDI j (Unit 1) and BT2ED1 (Unit 2), respectively.
| |
| Train a toads of Unit 1 and thit 2 are fed from betteries BT1ED2 (Unit 1) and BT2ED2 (Unit 2), respectively. For details see 5thsection 8.3.2.
| |
| The source of control power to each switchgear is indicated below:
| |
| 4 DAP FCAN E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGet REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLSWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DEsmIPTICBI SATASISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 M NT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA Ct3 M NTS Class.
| |
| thilt Battery (Safety Switchgear No. Source Train) No.
| |
| 6.9kw 480 1 STIED 1 A 1EA1 1EB1 1Es3 BTIED2 5 1EA2 1ES2 1EB4 ST102 Non safety 1A1 1A3 181 153 BT1D4 Non s-fety 1A2 1A4 182 184 2 BT2ED1 A 2EA1 2EB1 2ESS BT2ED2 B 2EA2 2ES2 2E54 ST2D2 Non safety 2A1 2A3 2B1 283 BT2D4 Non safety 2A2 2A4 252 254 1&2 *sT102 and Won safety Xal -
| |
| BT2D2
| |
| *via transfer multch The DC power is rewired by each diesel generator for controls, eterms, protective relays, air-starting solenoid valves, and generator field flashire from the station batteries.
| |
| 5 DAP FORN E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| g . .
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EV4tuATION CIEMLIST IRMBER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /talSAT/
| |
| No. CRITER:A (D0QMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 17.0 Each dieset generator and its associated Verify that each diesel generator and I starting agalpment and smiliaries are its auxilleries are independent of the tocated in the same room. This arrargement rodadant diesel generator and its reeutts in a complete system independent and systems.
| |
| isolated from the rodmdent dieset generator and its systems.
| |
| J j 18.0 Each diesel generator is provided with verify that intake and exhaust for independent roas ventitation air intake and ventitation air and engine air are independent air discharge and engine intet independent from those of the rechndant and exhaust dacts. Any credible single Diesel Generator.
| |
| j falture does not femmbilize both diesel
| |
| ; generator systems (see FSAR Section 9.4C.1 l and 9.5.8).
| |
| I 1
| |
| l 19.0 Stantby Power Sr4 ply verify that the stated capability and l energy storage respirements for the
| |
| ; (1) Description. The stanity power stancby generatire imits are met j s e ly shalt consist of att components from relative to independence respirements.
| |
| j the stored energy to the comection to the i distribution system's sigply circuit breaker
| |
| ) (for example, prime movers; generators and l excitation egalpment; control systems;
| |
| ? starting systems; instrumentation and 1 protective systems; energy storage;
| |
| ! corweyance and conversion equipmeat; att J
| |
| 4 6 DAP FORN E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 t
| |
| +
| |
| 1 1
| |
| | |
| DISIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /LSISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (DOC 181ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGsENTS auxiliary systems and appurtenances).
| |
| (2) Fmetion. The stanchy power styply shatt provide electric energy for the operation of emergency systems and ergineered safety features ciarire and fottaving the shutdom of the reactor den the preferred power sagty is not evettelde. This does not preclude its use for other f mettons.
| |
| l (3) CapabitIty. A falture of any mit of j stancby power source shall not jeopardize the capability of the reemining stancby power sources to start and rm the recpaired
| |
| ,I shutdom systems, emergency systems, and engineered safety feature toads.
| |
| j (4) Availability. The staruby power
| |
| { supply shall be avaltalde following the loss of the preferred power stpply within a time
| |
| ; consistent with the regaireamts of the engineered safety features and the shutdown i systems mder notust and accident conditions.
| |
| I (5) Surveillancc. Status indicators
| |
| ; shall be provided to monitor the stanchy power stpply contirssounty. The indicators may be located at the stanchy power sagly or
| |
| . In the station Control Room. Annmcletors
| |
| , 7 DAP FORM E.031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEMLIST NtaWER . REY. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tAISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGGENTS shall be provided in the Control Room to monitor and storm the status of the stansby power sigply. The indicators may include:
| |
| ) (a) bus voltage l (b) fre w (c) circuit breaker position
| |
| , (d) energy sigply I (e) starting power status (f) battery voltage (g) ttbricating oil temperature (h) coolant temperature (1) Itbricatire of t level (6) Energy Storage. Stored energy at the site shalt have the capacity to operate the stancby power sagpty abile stpplying post e cident power re @ lraments to a unit for the longer of the following:
| |
| (a) seven days (b) time re w ired to replenish the erergy from sources muey from the generating telt's site followirg the timitire design bests event.
| |
| 23.0 Mechanical and electric system interactions verify that selected mechanical and 8 DAP FORN E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 6
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| DESIGH REVIEW EVALUATION CNE MLIST IR8eER ,REV. _ ,0 ATE DESCRIPTI(M SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| REFEREME 0F VERIFICATIGI NC/NA CDeENTS (DOCLMENT, PAGE)
| |
| NO. MITERIA electrical system interactions do not between a particular dieset-generator mit defoot the diesel mits' design
| |
| ' and other units of the stantby power supply, function or redace their capability, the nucteer plant, the conventionet plant, and the Class 1E electric system shall be coordinated in such a way that the dieset-generator m its design function, and capability respairements of 5.1 of IEEE 387-19TT, may be restired for any desly) basis event, except fatture of that dieset-generator mit.
| |
| Verify that independence of redandant 24.0 men operatire from the stancby sources, toed groups and power sources is redindent load groups and the redandant maintained by not penmitting automatic stanchy sources should be independent of each other at toast to the following extent: paretteting and provision of an interlock to prevent manuet j
| |
| paretteting.
| |
| : a. The stancbr source of one toad group should not be automoticatty paratteled with the stancby source of another toad groep m der accident conditions;
| |
| : b. No prowlsicre should exist for autcanticatty comecting one toed group to another toed grong; i
| |
| l c. No provisions should exist for automaticatty transferring toads between redandant power sources; 9 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEmLIST NLmgER ,REV._ ,DATE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| REFEREME NC/NA CGeFNTS (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NO. CRDIRIA
| |
| : d. If means exist for eenuelty connecting rodadent load grotes together, et least one interlock should be provided to prevent an operator error that would perstlet their stancRay pouer sources.
| |
| l 26.0 In the case of multi-unit nucteer power Verify, by reviewing drawings for plants for ndtich the construction permit possible intercomection paths, that AC and DC emergency and shutdoun electric application was made on or after June 1, 1973, each unit should have separate and systees are independent asstselrg e independent ensite emergency and shutdeun s'ngle felture and Loss of offsite electric systems, both e.c. and d.c., capable power.
| |
| of steplying minisua ESF Loads and the loads re@lred for attelning a safe and orderly cold shutdown of the tnit, assuming a single failure and toss of offsite power.
| |
| 28.0 As stated in Section 8.3.1.1.11 of FSAR, only Verify that if one diesel generator is one onsite source would be paratteled to the perstleted to en offsite source, e off site source et any one time. This occurs single felture in the se@encer will daring the testing mode enty. not render both preferred and both offsite power sources snavaltable.
| |
| Consequently, a single fatture in the segaencer wlLL not render both preferred power sources and both reckndent on-site power sources snavailable.
| |
| 10 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EV4LUATION CIECKLIST IRMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFEREleCE DESCRIPTICNI SAT /talSAT/
| |
| (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/MA ColeENTS EJ. CRITERIA 31.0 Direct-Current Systems. Verify that the Independence of load grotes and power sources is maintained, The direct current power system shall incitale to prevent the occurance of conson
| |
| ! power supplies, a distribution systas, and felture modes in the Ctess 1E DC load grotps arranged to provide system. Reviou drawings to tdantify direct current electric power to the Ctess 1E possible interconnection paths.
| |
| direct-current toeds and for contrat and l switching of the Ctess 1E power systems.
| |
| Sufficient physical separation, electrical i isolation, and red edency shall be provided to prevent the occurrence of common failure e des in the station's Ctess IE power systems. Design re wirements shalt include the following:
| |
| (1) Redmdant Loads. The electric loads j shall be seperated into two or more redadant load grotps.
| |
| (2) Safety Actions. The safety actions by each grote of toads shall be redadent and independent of the safety actions provided by its rodmdent cosmterparts.
| |
| j
| |
| ; (3) Power Supplies. Each of the J
| |
| redundant toad grotps shalt have access to a power stpply that consists of a bettery and 11 DAP FORN E 031, REV.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| r c- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NimeER ,R'V._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFIC4 TION WC/NA CDOENTS No. CRITERIA one or more bettery chargers. .
| |
| (4) Common Power $tgipty. Tuo or more toad groies may have a common power engiply if the consemences of the toss of the common power st@ ply to the toad grotps teder destyt basis conditions are acceptable.
| |
| i
| |
| ; (5) Common Falture Mode. The rededent betteries shall not have a common falture mode for any design basis event.
| |
| (6) Protective Devices. Protective devices shall be provided to limit the degradation of the Class 1E power systems.
| |
| l Sufficient indication shalt be provided to
| |
| , identify the actuation of a protective
| |
| ! device.
| |
| {
| |
| 32.0 Direct Current Distribution System. Verify that the DC distribution systems have adeg ete electrical independence, The distribution system shall consist of all by reviewing the one line drawings for equipment in the distribution circuits from electrical interconnections.
| |
| their stypty devices to the toads.
| |
| Each distribution circuit shall be capable of l
| |
| transmittirg sufficient energy to start and operate all rewired loads in that circuit.
| |
| , 12 DAP FORN E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST ulAWER , REY._ ,DATE REFEREIBE DESCRIPTION SAT /UN!AT/
| |
| (00Q MENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA C0pOENTS NO. CRITERIA i Distribution circuits to rockedant ecpipent shalt be physically and electricatty independent of each other.
| |
| The distribution system shall be monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to
| |
| : perform its intended fametton.
| |
| Auxillery devices that are recpired to operate dependent equipment shall be sigiplied from a related bus section to prevent the
| |
| , toss of electric power in one load groep from causing the toss of equipment in another load i groip.
| |
| Feeders between the Class 1E pouer systems I
| |
| tocated in Safety Class structures and systems tocated in non-Safety Class structures shall be provided with automatic circuit interrtptire devices tocated in the Safety class structures.
| |
| 33.0 Battery Swiply. Verify that rededent battery agpties arc independent of other battery Each battery sg ply shall consist of the ogplies, by reviewirg dravirgs for storage cetts, connectors, and its interconnections.
| |
| connections to the distribution system sg ply 13 DAP FORM E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| 3 . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| REFERENCE MC/MA CGOENTS
| |
| ' (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAT131 NO. CRITERIA circuit breaker.
| |
| Each bettery stopty shall be capable of Eterting and operatire ett reyfred toads.
| |
| Each bettery sipply shalt be Insediately evellable daring normet operations and following the loss of power from the citernating-current system.
| |
| i Each bettery stoply shall be independent of other bettery stpplies.
| |
| Indicators shalt be provided to monitor the status of the bettery sipply.
| |
| Betteries shalt be maintained in a futty charged condition. Stored energy shall be sufficient to operate ett necessary circuit breakers and to provide en adegante source of power for att re g ired connected toads for es Long as each may be reyfred during a toes of-etternating current power to the bettery Chargers.
| |
| l l Verify that the bettery charger 34.0 settery Charger Sigpty.
| |
| sigplies are independent of cther l bettery charger stgplies, by reviewing l Each bettery charger stpply shalt include ett 14 DAP FCAN E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION 1 CIE(XLIST InseER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESa lPTitu SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS i
| |
| epipment from its comection to the drawings for electrical l alternating-current system to its interconnections.
| |
| distribution system's e g ly circuit breaker.
| |
| Each bettery charger stypty shall furnish electric energy for the stee#-state operation of comected loads rewired daire normat and post-accident operation white its bettery is returned to or amintained in a fully charged state.
| |
| Each bettery charger styply shall have sufficient capacity to restore the bettery a
| |
| from the design minlaun charge to its fully charged state dite oplying nonent and post accl& mt stee %-state toads.
| |
| The bettery charger stypty shall be independent of other bettery charger s e lles.
| |
| Indicators sheLL be provided to monitor the status of the bettery charger supply. This instrumentation shalt include Indication of:
| |
| a) output voltage j b) output current c) circuit breaker position 15 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s . .
| |
| 1 DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION I CIEELIST IMeER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(m SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NC/NA CCIgENTS NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION i
| |
| l Each bettery charger power stgiply shalt how-o discomecting device in its
| |
| ; titernating-current pouer incomirg feeder and j lts direct-current power output circuit for isolating the charger.
| |
| .l Each battery charger power stypty shall be designed to prevent the alternating-current power stgply from becoming a load on the
| |
| ; battery dJe to a power fee &ack as the result of the loss of alternatirg-current power to the chargers.
| |
| 35.0 Dependable power stypties are regired for Verify that power sigpties for vital the vitet instrumentation and control systems instrumentation and control systees are
| |
| ] of the amit(s) including: Independent and have a high degree of I reliablLity. Revleu drawlegs and (1) Iratrumentation and control for the identify ELL such power sigpties and
| |
| ; reactor protection system verify electrical independence by
| |
| ' reviewing Interconnections.
| |
| (2) The engineered safety features Gustitively assess reliability of the instrumentation and control systeam. power sipply configuration.
| |
| l The diverse arrangements, special regaireamts, and complexity of these systees preclude aidete!!=d delineation of their t power si4 ply requirements. However, power sust be styptied to these systems in a manner l 16 DAP FCINI E-031, REV.1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| i l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l
| |
| CIEELIST NL8WER ,REV. _ ,0 ATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| I (00CLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| , No. CRITERIA t
| |
| as to preserve their reliability, f
| |
| independence, and rodedency. Typicetty, one
| |
| ! or more of the followire any be rewired:
| |
| l l
| |
| (1) Two or more independent direct-current
| |
| { power s e lles for control and l Instruser.tation.
| |
| (2) Two or more independent direct current power supplies for instrumentation that have i special re wirements regardirg stability and freedom from noise.
| |
| j (3) Two or more independent
| |
| ! alternating-current power engpties having a l degree of reliabit,ity and evaltability,
| |
| ,1 compatible with the systems they serve.
| |
| h To accomplish the above rewirements, specist power st@ plies may be rewired that are
| |
| ' isolated from the alternating-current and i
| |
| direct current power sigpties used for the l noneet instrumentation and control of the telt(s).
| |
| l 1
| |
| 36.0 Shared Class 1E power systems shall be covered tmder Criteria Nos. 10.0, 26.0, designed such that the shartre does not and 38.0.
| |
| I Increase the procablLity of a deslyt basis 17 DAP Font E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| 1 I'
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST lasteER ,REV. _ ,DATE i
| |
| REFEREIICE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| NC/NA CGgENTS
| |
| { (DOCLsENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION l No. UtlTERIA l
| |
| accident occurrire in more than one mit at l
| |
| the same time.
| |
| 37.0 It is permissible to provide inter-tmit ties Verify that if there are inter-unit l ties between Class 1E buses, among the Class IE buses of the mits in a sulti-tmit station, provided any single independence of red mdant systems is amintained. Also, for such ties verify e w t failure does not degrade the Class tpy review of the F9EA that any single 1E power systems of any smit below an component failure does not degrade the acceptable tevet and provided that the Class 1E power systems of any mit independence of the red mdant systems is below an acceptable tevet.
| |
| maintained.
| |
| Verify that there are no inter-tmit 38.0 D.C. systems in uutti-mit nuclear power ties in the Class 1E DC systems, by plants should not be shared.
| |
| ; reviewing DC one line drawings.
| |
| j!
| |
| l 39.0 Each d-c Load grc@ should be energized by a Verify that no automatic connection of the battery-charger combination battery and battery charger. The angplying one Class 1E DC toad gro w to battery charger combination should have no automatic comoction to any other rodadant a rodadant toad grog is possible, try reviewing DC one line drawings.
| |
| d-c load gro w ,
| |
| l Verify that two physically independent 53.0 Two separate and physically independent transformers are provided, by reviewing start y transformers provide start y and one-Line and physical layout drawings.
| |
| preferred shutdom power to the thits on an I
| |
| I 18 DAP FORM E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION CIEELIST laseER .REV._ ,DATE REFEREIIE DESCRIPilas SAT /t20 SAT /
| |
| NC/isA CapeENTS 100. CRITERIA (D003EENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION l
| |
| tamediate basis.
| |
| 4 i
| |
| 55.0 The DC safety-related Loads of each mit are verify that two indeperdent 125 WK:
| |
| sqlled by two (2) Independent and rodadent bettery systaes are provided for 125 V bettery systees. safety related Loads of each mit, by reviewing DC one Line draulnes.
| |
| I 56.0 The AC and DC safety-related Loads of each Verify that rodadent load gregs are mit are divided into rodadent load greaps, energized frae independent emergency each energized from independent emergency power esgpties, by reviewing one-Line pouer sigply. draulnes.
| |
| 57.0 There are no intercomections between verify by reviewing one-Line drawings, rededent Loauf grotes. that there are no interconnections between rechndent AC or DC Load grotps.
| |
| i 58.0 The 138-kV section of the suitchyard is verify that the 138KV and 345KV
| |
| $ysically and electriceLLy independent of suitchyards are electriceLLy the 345 kV Switchyard. Independent, by reviewing one-Line drawings.
| |
| 59.0 Two physically independent and reemdent covered m der criterie Nos. 53.0 and sources of offsite preser are evellable on en 58.0.
| |
| 19 DAP F01st E 031, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| s DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IASWER , REY._ ,DATE DESCRIPil0N SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| ' REFERENM NC/NA ComENTS (D0w MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION No. OtITERIA l lamediate bests for the safe shutdom of either mit.
| |
| Covered m der criteria Nos. 53.0, 58.0, 61.0 The Class 1E buses of each mit can be DAP-CLC E-031 GC1 and DAP-CLC-031-GC2.
| |
| steplied by two (2) Independent and retlebte
| |
| ! lamediate-access offsite power sources.
| |
| Sharing of these offsite power sources between the two (2) mits has no effect on l
| |
| the station electrical system reliability because each transfonner is capable of i
| |
| sigplying tne re @ ired safety-related loads I of both mits if it becomes necessary to safety shutdom both units simultaneously.
| |
| Verify, by review of the one-lines, 65.0 Redmdant parts within the AC and DC systems l that no single event or sirgte
| |
| [ are physically and electrically independent to the extent that a single event or single electrical fault can cause toss of electrical fault camot cause a loss of power power to rodadant toad grotps.
| |
| to both Class 1E toad groips.
| |
| I i
| |
| Covered m der Criteria Nos. 56.0, 57.0, 66.0 The electrically powered safety Loads, both AC and DC, are separated into two (2) and 65.0.
| |
| rodadant and completely independent load grotes for each mit. There are no automatic or manual ties between red edent load grotes.
| |
| 20 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION I CNECKLIST IRmBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DE3CRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS ND. CRITERIA No single failure can prevent operation of the minimum ramber of regaired safety loads, and Loss of any one grote will not prevent the minisua safety ftmetions from being perfonned. Each Class 1E AC bus has access to three (3) offsite power sources and an ensite stancRpy power source. There are no automatic or manuel ties between rodadant buses.
| |
| I -
| |
| 71.0 The safety-related systems are designed with Covered tmder Criterion No. 65.0.
| |
| I sufficient capacity, independence, and redandancy to ensure performance of their safety ftmettons sssuming a siegte failure.
| |
| 72.0 Each Class 1E DC bus can be energized either Covered tmder criteria Nos. 31.0 and by a bettery or by one or two bettery 57.0.
| |
| chargers (one spore) or combination of l
| |
| bettery and bettery charger. There are no i autcastic or manuet ties between Class 1E redmdant DC toed groups.
| |
| covered tnder Criterie Nos. 10.0, 26.0, 74.0 Onsite Class IF AC and DC power sources are and 38.0.
| |
| not shared between the two units nor ere their respective electric distribution systans shared.
| |
| 21 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| i O.
| |
| 1 1
| |
| ' DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNEmLIST laster .REV. _ ,0 ATE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| REFERENE NC/NA CGeENTS (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NO. OtITERIA 4
| |
| 4 J
| |
| Safety-related Loads shared between both mits are powered fram commen NCCs,120 VAC j penets, and 125-w e penets. Indication of source of power associated with the common electrical egalpaent mentioned above is provided on a commen panet located in the i control Room and accessible to both mit j operators.
| |
| b 76.0 Instrumentation power for thit 1 NS$$ is verify that any non-safety circuits provided from distribution penets 1PC1,1PC2, powered from NS$$ instrumentation power
| |
| ' 1PC3 and 1PC4. See FSAR Figure 8.3 15. distribution panels are properly isolated from safety circuits.
| |
| These penets power safety Loads as weLL as l
| |
| non-safety loads, l
| |
| I Each non safety circuit pouered from these 1 penets will have a non-safety circuit breaker, leolation card, interposing relay, or fuse comected in series with the panel circuit breaker.
| |
| Protection chamet utring, safety-train wiring and non-safety train virfre within penets 1PC1,1PC2,1PC3 and 1PC4 ulLL be in different wire b e dtes. These b mdles will be seperated to the maximum extent practicable.
| |
| 22 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRMRER , REY. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICRI SAT /LalSAT/ ;
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COISENTS l
| |
| i l
| |
| { 78.0 Distribution panels and espalpment they feed Covered teder criteria Nos. 32.0 and
| |
| ! as a minissa meet the regatrements of EDC 17 124.0.
| |
| l and 18, NRC Regulatory Guide 1.6, and IEEE i 308-1974, 344-1975 and 384-1974.
| |
| I
| |
| ! 80.0 Independence of Redadent Class 1E 125 vDC verify that Class 1E DC equipannt and l Systems circuits are identified on the drawines l In accordance with the recpairements of i Redadency of power sources and distribution IEEE 494 1974.
| |
| equipment is provided in the DC system. This rededency extends from the station betteries Also see criteria Nos. 12.0, 31.0, l and bettery chargers through distribution 32.0, 33.0, 34.0, 38.0, 39.0, 55.0, and panels, cabling, and switchgeer. Each 65.0.
| |
| rodadant DC system and its associated l distribution ocpilpment can independently l provide the recpaired DC power for safe i ehutdom of the plant.
| |
| Each red edent Class 1E 125 v bettery system 1 is located in a separate seismic Category 1 l bettery room. The Ctess 1E bettery chargers
| |
| ! and main distribution buses associated with each Class 1E 125 v bettery system are f
| |
| ! tocated in a seperate seismic category I room. Seperation of train A and train S bettery systems is maintained Lp through the Class 1E 6900-VAC buses and is consistent 23 DAP FORN E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CMEMLIST IRAWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION MTAstSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCI. MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CapOENTS l
| |
| with the train designations of such j ecpJlpeont.
| |
| i' The cpastity assurance program discussed in j section 17 ensures camptience with established criteria in IEEE 336-1971 and istC Regulatory Guide 1.30. The Class 1E 125 VDC ocpJipment and circuits are identified on h=mts and drawings in accordance with the recpairements of IEEE 494-1974.
| |
| 83.0 Each red.ndent Class 1E 125-V system consists Verify that no Non Class 1E loads are of tw independent betteries each havire one comected to the Class IE DC system, by mein distribution bus with molded case review of one line drawirgs. Verify circuit breekers, fusible switches, two independenco of AC stypty circuits for static bettery chargers (one spore), and battery chargers.
| |
| Locat distribution penets. Redandancy of components precludes toss of both systems as Also see criteria Nos. 12.0, 31.0, a result of a sirgte failure. For Unit 1, 32.0, 33.0, 34.0, 38.0, 39.0, 55.0, and betteries BT1E01 and BTIED3 feed att Train A 65.0.
| |
| Load requirements, tAlle betteries BTIED2 and BTIED4 supply Train 3 toed regJirements.
| |
| For Unit 2, betteries BT2EDI and BT2tD3 feed att Train A toed recpJirements, while betteries BT2ED2 and BT2ED4 steply Train B toed requirements.
| |
| 24 DAP Fanft E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeEENTS
| |
| ! No. CRITERIA There are no bus ties or sharity of power settes between recksident trains. Class 1E ecpaigment associated with systems shared by both mits recelwes power fra penet boards
| |
| { having an incoming automatic transfer switch l idilch can select power from either mit.
| |
| Transfer switch deslyi is such that power j
| |
| camot be sipptled from both units i,
| |
| sleuttaneounty. Train separation is maintained by o p tying these shared l
| |
| j penetbcards from the same train of both I mits. Independence and separation are saintained throughout the AC s # y circuitry as wett as in the DC distribution network, f Non-Class 1E toads are not camseted to these systems.
| |
| I I 85.0 Dependency Covered under Criteria Nos. 55.0 and 65.0.
| |
| i Two independent and redsident Class 1E, 125-WC systems are provihi for each mit.
| |
| Electrical and physical separation precttsies the loss of both systeam as a result of a single fatture.
| |
| i covered m der criteria Nos. 24.0, 31.0, l 86.0 Analysis 32.0, 33.0, 34.0, 38.0, 39.0, 55.0, 25 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| a DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER . REY._ ,DATE DESCRIPil0N SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| REFERENE NC/NA COGENTS (000AENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NO. CRITERIA a
| |
| The destys of the Class 1E 125-vDC systems is 57.0, 65.0, 66.0, 74.0, 80.0, and 83.0.
| |
| l j
| |
| in accordance with the respainannts of CDC 17, i GDC 18, INtc Regalatory Guides 1.6, 1.32, 1.75 and IEEE 308-1974. Compliance with tinse criteria is described in FSAR Subsection i 8.3.1.2.1. The seismic regairments are I specified in FSAR Section 3.105.
| |
| Redsident power supplies and agafpment l
| |
| l satisfy GDC 17 for a single failure. A l falture node analysis is presented in FSAR
| |
| > Table 8.3-7. Quality assurance, cable routing, separation, and egafpment identification are covered in FSAR Sections 8.3.1.2 and 8.3.1.4.
| |
| l Covered under Criteria Nos. 10.0, 26.0, 93.0 CDC 5 Shartre of Structures, Systems and
| |
| ] and 38.0.
| |
| Components.
| |
| Structures, systems, and components luportant I
| |
| to safety shalL not be shared between nucteer power mits etess it can be shom that such sharing will not significantly lapair their j ability to perfons their sa'!ety fmctions, including, in the event of an accident in one mit, an ordert, shutdown and cooldoun of the reamining mits.
| |
| 26 DAP FORN E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| g . .
| |
| 4 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i CNE ELIST ImagER .REV. _ ,DATE d
| |
| REFERENCE DESG IPTIG1 SAT /tmsAT/
| |
| 0F VERIFICATIG1 NC/uA CGGENTS (DOCLMENT, PAGE)
| |
| No. CRITERIA 1
| |
| l Covered a ler Criteria Nos. 1.0, 4.0, 94.0 (DC 17 Electric Pouer Systems.
| |
| 19.0, 53.0, and 58.0.
| |
| An cruite electric power system and an offsite electric power system shalt be provided to permit fimettoning of structures, systems, and components leportant to safety.
| |
| The safety fmetion for each system (assuming i the other systes :s not functioning) shall be i to provide sufficient capacity and capability to assure (1)that the specified acceptable i fuel design Limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not l
| |
| j exceeded as a result of anticipated j operational occurrences; and, (2) the core is i cooled and contalruent integrity and other I vitet fimettons are maintained in the event of postulated accidents. The onsite electric power sources, includfre the batteries, and the ensite electric distribution system, shalt have sufficient independence, red mdancy, and testability to perform their safety fimetions assuming a single failure.
| |
| Electric power from the transmission network to the onsite electric distribution system sheLL l'e sgptied tar two physicatty independent circuits (not necessarily on separate rights of way) desi ped and located 27 DAP FORM E-031, REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALLAATION CIECKLIST IR3eER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tsISAT/
| |
| (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS NO. CRITERIA so as to minimize to the extent practical the likelihood of their sleuttaneos falture mder operating arsi postulated accident and environmental conditions. A switchyard I coesion to both circuits is acceptable. Each of these circuits shalt be designed to be avalIabte in sufficient time fottowing a ioss of att onsite alternating current power s e lles and the other offsite electric power circuit, to assure that specified acceptable fuet design timits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded. One of these circuits shall be destynd to be available within a few seconds following a loss-of-coolant accident to assure that core cooling, containment integrity, and other vitet safety functions are maintained.
| |
| Provisions shall be included to minimize the probability of losing electric power from any of the remaining s g plies as a result of, or coincident with, the loss of power generated l by the rvxteer power mit, the toss of power from the transmission network, or the loss of power from the onsite electric power sources.
| |
| 99.0 The electricatty powered safety toads (ac and Covered m der Criteria Nos. 56.0, 57.0, 28 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| DESIGal REVIEW EVALWiTION CIECKLIST NLSWER ,REV. _ ,DATE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /latSAT/
| |
| REFERDICE NC/NA CGeENTS (D0031ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI No. CRITERIA and 65.0.
| |
| de) should be separated into rodadant toad grotes such that loss of any one groty will not prevent the einfam safety fmettons from being performed.
| |
| l i
| |
| ' Verify that MEA does not rely on 100.0 In accordance with R.G. 1.53 (1973), Section inconclusive test procedures for 5.2 of IEEE Std 379-1972 should be detectability.
| |
| styptemented as follows:
| |
| "The detectability of a single fatture is predicated on the aestaption that the test results in the presence of a feiture are different from the results that would be obtained if no falture is present. Thus,
| |
| ! inconclusive testire procedsres such as j "contirusity checks" of relay circuit colts in lieu of relay operations should not be considered as adequate bases to classify as detectable att potentist fattures d ich could negate the fmetional capability of the tested device."
| |
| Covered e der Criteria Nos. 24.0, 39.0, 113.0 Reg. Guide 1.6 - Independence between 56.0, 57.0, and 65.0.
| |
| re&ndant stanchy (onsite) power sources and between their distribution systems. CPSES complies with the wirements of safety guide 6 (3/71) 29 DAP FOINI E-031, itEV.1, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DEstitleTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS MO. CRITERIA i
| |
| Covered m der Criteria Nos. 19.0, 31.0, 114.0 Reg. Guide 1.32 - Criteria for Class 1E ELactrIc systems for nuctear pcwer generating 32.0, 33.0, 34.0, 35.0, 37.0, 80.0, and atations. 122.0.
| |
| The CPSES desip complies with the rewirements of Rev. 2 (2/77) of this regulatory guide.
| |
| 116.0 Reg. Guide 1.81 - Shared Emergency and Covered mder Criteria Nos. 10.0, 26.0, Shutdom Electric Systems for Multi-thit 36.0, and 74.0.
| |
| i Nuclear Power Plants.
| |
| The CPSES design complies with the provisions
| |
| ! of Rev.1 (1/75) of this regulatory spJide.
| |
| ) 117.0 General. The Class IE power systems shall be Covered m der Criteria Nos. 5.0 and desliped to assure that no design basis event 65.0.
| |
| wiLL cause:
| |
| (1) A loss of electric power to e Nuber of engineered safety features, surveittance devices, or protection systen devices sufficient to jeopardize the safety of the station.
| |
| 30 CAP FORM E 031 REY. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNEMLIST NLMBER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESG IPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCBGENTS NO. CRITERIA i
| |
| (2) A Loss of electric power to equipent that could result in a reactor power transient capable of causfrup significant deange to the fust or to the reactor coolant system.
| |
| l 118.0 Desip gasis Event Effects. Cowred mder Criteria Nos. 5.0 and 65.0.
| |
| Desi s basis events shati be estab!!ahed for each Individunt mit and the severity and magnitude of each event defined. The Class 1E power systeam shall be capable of performing their fmetion then s4}ected to the effects of any design basis event.
| |
| 121.0 Falture Moda and Effects Analysis. Covered mder Topic E9 /
| |
| - DAP-CLC-E-031 GC1 and An analysis of the falture modes of Class 1E DAP-CLC-E-031 GC2.
| |
| power systees and the effect of these faltures on the electric power available to class 1E toads shall be performed to demonstrate that a single component falture does not prevent satisfactory perfonaance of the minlaus Class 1E loadL recpired for safe shutdown and maintenance of post shutdown or post-accident station security.
| |
| 31 DAP FORM E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| . O o-DESIGIl REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE DESCRIPTION SATAmSAT/
| |
| REFERENCE NC/NA ColeENTS (DOCIMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NO. CRITERIA 122.0 Non-Class 1E equipment idhich is regJired to Verify that comection of Non-Class 1E maintain a safe and orderly condition, may be toads to class 1E buses has not degraded the independence of the Class e g lied from Class 1E power systeam, provided that the class 1E systems are 1E system.
| |
| maintained at en acceptable level with respect to the recpJirements of this h=mt.
| |
| ! Covered tmder Criteria Nos. 5.0,17.0, 123.0 Attornating-current Power Systems.
| |
| 24.0, 56.0, 57.0, and 65.0.
| |
| General.
| |
| The alternating current power systems shalt include power sLgplies, a distribution l systen, and load grotes arranged to provide
| |
| ! alterneting-current electric power to the Class 1E toads. Sufficient physical separation, electrical footation, and redandancy shall be provided to prevent the occurrence of a common falture mode in tne Class 1E pwer systems for any design basis event. Design requirements shalt include, but are not necessarity limited to, the following:
| |
| (1) Redindent Load Grotes: The electric i
| |
| loads shat 1 be separated into two or more '
| |
| redadant soad grotps.
| |
| 32 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 I
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIEMLIST NLSIBER . REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(N1 SAT /188$AT/
| |
| ' (DOCtBIENT, PACE) 0F VERIFICATICRI NC/NA CG8ENTS NO. CRITERIA (2) Safety Actions: The safety actions by each group of loads shall be redwutant and independent of the safety actions provided by its rededent cointerparts.
| |
| (3) Power Steply: Each of the rodadent toed grotps shall have access to both a preferred and a stan6y power stgply. Each power
| |
| > sagply shalt consist of one or more power f sources.
| |
| (4) ra==nn Power Stpply: Tuo or more toad grotes may have a ca==an power steply if the consegaences of the toss of the cosmon power e gply to the load grotps smder design basis j
| |
| conditions are acceptable, (5) Cosmon Failure Mode: The preferred and the stan6y power sagpties shall not have a common failure mode between them. In addition, the reemdent generating sources of the stan 6r power steply shall not have a ec:en... failure made for any design basis event.
| |
| (6) Protective devices: Protective devices shall be provided to limit the degradatito of l the Ctess 1E power systems. Sufficient 33 DAP FGut E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ' DESIGIl REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRSIDER ,REV. _ ,DATE t DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| REFERENCE NC/NA COSENTS (000AIENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATION NO. OtITERIA 1
| |
| Indication shall be provided to identify the'
| |
| ; actuation of a protective device.
| |
| Covered m der Criteria Nos. 5.0, 56.0, 124.0 Distributica Systas.
| |
| i 57.0, and 65.0.
| |
| f (1) Description. The distr!bution system shall consist of att egalpment in the distribution circuit from its opty circuit breaker (s) to the toads.
| |
| (2) Capability. Each distribution circuit shaLL be capable of transmittfre sufficient energy to start and operate att regsfred I losuis in that circuit.
| |
| I
| |
| ! (3) Independence. Distribution circuits to redadent equipment shall be physicatty and electricetty independent of each other.
| |
| (4) Surveittance. The distribution systee shall be monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to perform its intended function.
| |
| (5) Auxiliary Devices. Auxiliary devices that are required to operate dependent equipment shall be setted frae a related bus section to prevent the toss of electric 34 DAP FOIBE E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| f
| |
| \
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IEMBER .REV._ ,DATE REFEREleCE DESCRIPTIGt SAT /18tSAT/
| |
| (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION IIC/NA CGeENTS NO. CRITERIA I' power in one load group fras causfrg the loss l of egafpment in another toed grap.
| |
| )
| |
| l (6) Feeders. Feeders between Class 1E power systems located in Safety class structures and systems tocated in non-Safety Class I structures shall be provided with circuit breakers located in the Safety Class structure.
| |
| 125.0 In the single-failure analysis att potential verify tiet potentist tsidetectable m detectable failures should be identified. falltres have not been mistabled as This recpires that the menos for detectire 9etectablea in the REA.
| |
| fattures be anatyred with the protection system.
| |
| For additional details on the classification of single failures, see IEEE Std 379-1972 Section 5.
| |
| I a
| |
| 1
| |
| ; 126.0 The single failure analysis should consist of Verify that att potential faults and a systematic trwestigation of potential fattures have been considered in the FgIEA.
| |
| faults and failures to determine whether they could lead to auttiple chamel fattures and Losa of a protective f metion. For j additional details on single falture
| |
| ) analysis, see Section 6. of IEEE Std I 379 1972.
| |
| I 35 DAP Folgt E 031, REV.1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| 4 3
| |
| 1 _ . . _ _ . _ __
| |
| | |
| i, DESlet REVIEW EVALUATION CNE ELIST NLSSER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 0F VERIFICATION NC/uA CGWENTS I No. CRITERIA (DOCLSENT, PAGE)
| |
| -l 1
| |
| i 146.0 Redadent safety-related Leeds are divided Covered e der Criteria Nos. 5.0, 12.0, between Trains A and g so that loss of either and 65.0.
| |
| train does not lepelr fulfittaant of the minlaue shutdown safety regairements.
| |
| 147.0 There are no manuel or automatic comections Verify, by revleutre one line diagrams, between Class 1E buses and toads of rededent that electrical separation of re&ndent trains. Electrical separation of redurdent trains is maintained throudi att AC and DC voltage levels.
| |
| trains is amintained through aLL voltage tevels, including DC and instrumentation.
| |
| Also see Criteria Nos. 24.0, 39.0, and s
| |
| I 57.0.
| |
| i 152.0 A failure of any onsite Class 1E power source Covered e der friterion No. 65.0.
| |
| does not jeopardize the capability of the redadent ensite Class 1E power source to j start and rim the regJired shutdown systems.
| |
| \
| |
| ! 160.0 The criteria editch have been used to Covered under criteria Nos. 19.0, 24.0, establish the minieue regairements for 01.0, 32.0, 33.0, 34.0, 35.0, 37.0,
| |
| ! preserving the independence of redsdent 39.0, 56.0, 57.0, 65.0, 80.0, 83.0, and Class 1E systems are stated in IEEE 306 mul 122.0.
| |
| l 384 and NRC Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.75.
| |
| i I 36 DAP FONE E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 l
| |
| 1 i
| |
| | |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CEMLIST NLMRER .REV. _ DATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /INSAT/
| |
| i 0F WRIFICATI(N WC/NA CDOENTS (DottsENT, PAGE)
| |
| NO. CRITERIA i
| |
| Note: Specific recpairements are included elsewhere herein.
| |
| 1 Covered eder Criterie Nos. 10.0, 26.0, 179.0 Shared Electric Systems for Nutti-unit and 38.0.
| |
| Nucteer Power Plants.
| |
| The provisions of Section 8.2 of IEEE Std j 308 1974, editch pemit sharing of stancRyy i power supplies among units of a multi-mit l station, are mecceptable except es specified i in Regulatory Guide 1.81. The provisions of
| |
| ! Section 8.3.1 of IEEE Std 308-1974 that
| |
| ! pemit sharing of bettery sapplies amorg
| |
| ! mits at e autti mit plant are concidered mecceptable and should be styptanted by the fl roccumendations of Regulatory Guide 1.81.
| |
| 180.0 The guldence in IEEE 379-1972 is generetty Covered e der Criterie Nos. 125.0 and l
| |
| I acceptable. Neuever, because of the 126.0.
| |
| trial-use status of IEEE Std 379 1972, it may be neessary in specific instances to depart from one or more of its provisions.
| |
| 185.0 Capability should be provided to test each Verify by drawing review that any dieset generator tmit independently of destyied in test provisions are such re&ndent mits. Test ep ipment should not that each diesel can be tested l
| |
| l 37 DAP FORN E-031, REV. 1, 06/26/86 I
| |
| i I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| C l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLIGER ,REV. _ ,DATE
| |
| ' REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| 1 (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS NO. OtITERIA i
| |
| 1 cause a toss of independe ea between independently and without toes of j
| |
| rodadant diesel generator smits or between independence between diesets or between diesel generator load gro gs. load grotps.
| |
| I i
| |
| 194.0 The generet principles for reliability verify that the guidelines of IEEE anstysis of protection systems shalt be per 352-1972 were observed in the I IEEE Std 352-1972. performance of the single feiture I analysis /FEA of the Electric Pouer Systeen.
| |
| 1 e
| |
| 201.0 Desipi and application consideration shalt verify by revieutrg the diesel include the considerations listed in Tabte 1 generator specification that (c,f IEEE 387 - 1977), application consideratitns rotating to independence are included.
| |
| See criteria Nos. 1.0, 3.0, 11.0, and l 18.0.
| |
| I i
| |
| 202.0 th-site and off-site power sources are not Covered smder Criterion No. 28.0.
| |
| i paretteled except for testing of the diesel generatom. When a diesel generator is not smder test, the stantby power source is seperated from the preferred power source.
| |
| The Commnche Peek design does not provide for automatic peralleling of these sources by the sequencer. Consequently, ne single failure
| |
| ' 38 DAP FORM E 031, REV. 1, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| O DESIGN K VIEW EVALUATION CEtXLIST InseER . LEV._ ,0 ATE DESCRIPTI(31 SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| REFERENCE IIC/NA CDOENTS (000 M NT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATI(31 No. CRITERIA in the sepercer will compromise separation of rededent portions of these two power sources.
| |
| verify by &asing that two standy 203.0 tJpon loss of att external AC power, station power sources per mit are initiated on etendyr power sources, cormisting of four (4) loss of att enternet AC pouer, and are dieset generators (2 per unit) are provided ashsepently enetded to comect to to settsfy the Loading re wirements of the AC their respe.tive Ctess 1E tiuses, safety related loads. System rededency precludes loss of att onsite power as a result of any single felture.
| |
| verify for selected cases that 213.0 men a Ctess 1E contact performs a non-Ctess inu* ion is provided idten a Ctess 1E IE control fmetion (e.g., energizing e contact perfones a non-Class 1E control solenoid for a non-Class 1E volve), isolation or eenitoring faction.
| |
| is provided by en auntilary retey.
| |
| men a Ctess 1E contact performs a non-Ctess 1E monitoring faction (e.g., activating en eters or irgiut to e computer), en footetton is nornetty provided by a phototransistor compted pair (light-seitting diede and a transistor).
| |
| 39 DAP FORM E 031, REY. I, 06/26/86 I
| |
| s
| |
| ~
| |
| | |
| , N DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST AMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE f,ESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| i No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS l
| |
| l 1
| |
| 3.0 The four diesel generators are electricatty El-0001 R8 Verify that the diesel generators are and pitysically independent. They are tocated El-0004 CP3 physically irdependent, and they are above the water level of the probable maximun El 0727 R-13 located above the PNF water tevel of I
| |
| flood (PNF) level (789.7 ft). 789.7 ft.
| |
| 1 l 4.0 Each diesel generator and its associated El 0727 R13 verify that each dieset generator is equipment is located in a separate room with located in a separate room, with its watts designed to protect the diesel associated egaipment.
| |
| I generators and associated equipannt against
| |
| ; an SSE, tornadoes, missiles, and fire.
| |
| i I
| |
| 7.0 The re&ndant 6900 V and 480 V Class IE El 0004 CP3 Verify that the re& ndant 6.9KV and i
| |
| switchgear assemblies are located in separate El 0005 R11 480W Class 1E switchgear assemblies are rooms in the seismic Category I Safeipaards E1-0716-01 R-20 located in separate roams within the Buildings. Each room contains only El 0718-G1 R-15 Safeguards Buildirags. Verify that only i
| |
| electrical egaipment, therefore minimizing electrical agaipment is located in exposure to mechanical, water, or fire damage these rooms.
| |
| caused by equipment such as steen lines, I watertines, pigs, and motors.
| |
| i 8.0 Separnion between train A and train B E1-0716-01 R20 Verify that Train A & Train B I switchgear is accomplished by placing the El-0718-01 R18 switchgear are located on two different j equipment on two dif ferent floor elevations. floor elevations.
| |
| }
| |
| I
| |
| ; 9.0 For each unit, two inde,cendent and redtndent Spec: ES 22 R2 Verify that there are two separate SSS i
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| r DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST tastBER ,REV._ ,DATE
| |
| ; REFERLdCE DESCRIPfl0N SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18EENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIM NC/NA CGsENTS i
| |
| i I safegaards secpencer cabinets are provided Drawings: Sespencer Cabinets, each housing two l for secpential loadire of diesel generators, El 0139 CP2 secpancers. Sentence #1 covered only one for Train A and one for Train 5. Each El-0140 CP2 for separation.
| |
| l cabinet houses two secpencers, one for the Logic Dias:
| |
| ; safety injection mode secpencirg and one for DCA 5367 (part j blackout only sede sequencing. Each of ES 22)
| |
| ] setpencer is basicatty a grow of output 2462-1027 l
| |
| electrorusechanical relays operated by solid (Sheets 6, 7, state logic circuits and timers. The 48, 49, & 60) i separate and independent timer circuits are (dated 11/8/82)
| |
| {
| |
| initiated for each tonding step by solid Conn. Dias, state logic circuit. Reliability of each 2462-1004 CPI i secpencer is assured by continuous testing from the irput diode matrix through the logics and timers to the coils of the output
| |
| ; relays. If a fault is detected it is alarmed in the control room.
| |
| 1 10.0 Nuclear-safety-related Loads associated with Drawings: Verify that the common toads are each mit are powered exclusively from Class El 0001 28 supplied by the same load gro g from l 1E systems of that particular mit. However, El-0006 CPS each unit. Sentence # 5 covered only j ruclear safety-related loads common to both El-0005 R11 for separation.
| |
| ! mits are pouered from Class IE MCCs and Spec:
| |
| distribution penett, Jiich have stypties fress ES 7 R1 j each mit. These daal mit stypties are interlocked to preclude styplying power to one MCC or distribution penet from both mits i
| |
| simultaneously. Incoming feeders to Train A 2 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N
| |
| ] DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS l
| |
| l
| |
| } MCCs or distribution panels common to both
| |
| ; mits are sigplied only frca Train A power I systems of both mits (a similar arrangement exists for Train B ocpaignant and incoming
| |
| ; feeders). This ensures the proper train j separation between the ecpaipment common to I both units.
| |
| 15.0 Separation betweeri redadant diesel El 0727 R13 Covered m der Criterion No. 4.0.
| |
| generators within each building is accesplished by locating each diesel generator in a separate room partitioned by a concrete well desiyted to withstand an SSE, fire, or missles.
| |
| , 20.0 Re&ndant Class 1E stan@r generating mits E1-0727 R13 Covered m der Criterion No. 4.0.
| |
| j shall be placed in separate safety class l structwes.
| |
| l l 21.0 The Auxiliaries and local controls for El 0727 R13 Covered m der criterion No. 4.0.
| |
| re&ndant stan@y generatirg units shall be
| |
| ; located in the same safety class structure as the mit they serve or be piysically
| |
| ] separated in accordance with the requirements of Section 4 of IEEE 384-1974.
| |
| I 3 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| (' N h.
| |
| r DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST Nue0ER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSA'/
| |
| T NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA C0leqENTS r
| |
| i 22.0 Switchgear. Redmdant Class 1E distribution El 0601 01 Verify that:
| |
| .switchgear gro p shall be physically El 0603 01 separated in accordance with the requirements El 0700-01 1) 6.9 KV Switchgear IEA2 and 480V of Section 4 of IEEE 384-1974. El-0710-01 Switchgear IES2 & IE84 are tocated at El 0716-01 floor elevation 8528-6" of the Motor Control Centers. Re& ndant Class 1E El-0718-01 Safegaards building. 6.9 KV switchgear entor control centers shall be physically El-0727 IEA1 and 480V Switchgear IEB1 and 480V separated in accordance with the recpairements El 1103 Switchgear IERI & IEs3 are tocated at of Section 4. floor elevation 810'-6'' of the i
| |
| Safe w ds building. The different Distribution Panets. RedJndant Class 1E floc elevations provide sufficient distribution panels shall be physically separation. Switchgear is located
| |
| ) separated in accordance with the recpairements above the PnF. Piping contianing of Section 4. fluids is excluded from the switchgear rooms.
| |
| 1
| |
| : 2) nCC LOCATION is as follows:
| |
| 1EB3-3 (A) Service Water Intake 1Ee4-3 (s) service Water Intake XER3 2(A) 852' Aux XEB1-2(A) 852' Aux XEB1-1(A) 852' auk XEB2-2(B) 852' Auu XES4-2(B) 852' Aut XEB2-1(B) 852' Aug 1EB2-1(B) 852' SG 1EB3-1(A) 790' SG 4 OAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, .08/13/86
| |
| | |
| r l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NL8eER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18EENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS l
| |
| l l
| |
| 1E841(B) 790' auk i
| |
| 1ES3-2(A) 810' SG
| |
| , 1EB1 1(A) 810' SG q 1Et3-4(A) 810' SG 1
| |
| set 4-2(s) 852' Aux l 1E86-4(3) 852' CG l
| |
| The different locations provide
| |
| ; eufficisnt seperatlon.
| |
| l
| |
| ] 3) Verify that the distribution panels for both AC & DC are adecpantely separated.
| |
| I
| |
| ] 23.0 Mechanical and electric system interactions El-0727 R13 Diesel generator separation covered by l between a particular dieset-generator mit El 0001 R8 Criterion No. 4.0.
| |
| I and other mits si the stener power s#y, El-0004 CP3 l the nuclear plant, the conventional plant, j and the Class 1E electric systen shalt be
| |
| ! coordinated in such a way that the l diesel generator units design faction, and
| |
| } capability requirements of 5.1, any be realized for any design basis event, except
| |
| !l l
| |
| failure of that dieset-generator mit.
| |
| ! 26.0 In the case of multi-unit nuclear power El 001 R8 Verify that there is a preferred and an plants for which the construction pensit El-004 CP3 alternate offsite power source. Verify l
| |
| j 5 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| I i
| |
| i I
| |
| | |
| ' ./
| |
| 5 %
| |
| e DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IEmRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Of VERIFICATION NC/NA CGelENTS l
| |
| i l application was made on or af ter Jme 1, E1 005 all that there are two on site stancbr 1973, each mit should have separate and El-0007 CP5 power sources, which are completely
| |
| , independent onsite emergency and shutdoun El 0009 CP2 separate (See Criterion No. 4.0).
| |
| electric systems, both a.c. and d.c., capable E1-0010 CP4 Verify that there are (4) four Class 1E of st4 plying minissan ESF toads and the loads El-0014 CP2 SUPS, d ich supply 118WAC ROP power.
| |
| regaired for attainirg a safe and orderly El-0018 CP2 Verify that there are (4) four Class 1E cold shutdown of the unit, assuming a sirgte El-0018 2 CP2 D/C Retteries and asscciated Chargers.
| |
| failure and loss of offsite power. Verify that in each case above all the redadant sources are separated
| |
| ; adespJetely.
| |
| I
| |
| ] 31.0 Direct-Current Systems. El 0001 R8 Physical separation of station Class IE El 0018 CP3 DC power systems components is covered The direct-current power system shalt incitade El 0624 R25 m dse criterion No. 22.0 for DC power supplies, a distribution system, and E1-0627 R15 distribution panels and Criteria No.
| |
| l toad grotes arranged to provide El 0601-01 R10 26.0 for batteries and chargers.
| |
| ; direct-current electric power to the Class 1E El-0601-02 R15 Criteria Nos. 67.0 and 68.0 cover j direct current loads and for control and E1 0601-03 R17 separation of rodadant cable.
| |
| switching of the Class 1E power systems. El 0601 06 R11 Sufficient physical separation, electrical E1-0602-01 R21
| |
| < isolation, and redadency shall be provided El 0602-02 R15
| |
| , to prevent the occurrence of common failure E1 0602 03 R17
| |
| ! modes in the station's Class 1E power El 0602-06 R16 systems. Design requirements shalt include El-0603-01 R20 the following: E1-0603-02 R17 El 0605R10 (1) Redmdant Loads. The electric loads
| |
| { shall be separated into two or more redadant 6 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| , \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW Eb4LUATION CHECKLIST NLSIRER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPT!au SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOC 18EENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/WA COGIENTS f
| |
| I load grotgs.
| |
| j (2) Safety Actions. The safety actions ty each grow of loads shall be re&ndant and independent of the safety actions provided by
| |
| ., its ra & ndant coteterparts.
| |
| I (3) Power Sagplies. Each of the j redsident load grotps shalt have access to a power sigply that cosaists of a battery and one or more battery chargers.
| |
| ; (4) em Power S w ty. Two or more j toad grotps may have a common power supply if the consacpences of the loss of the em j power supply to the load grotes tnder desip basis conditions are accaptabte.
| |
| l (5) Common Failure Mode. The batteries shall not have a common failure mode for any design basis event.
| |
| i j (6) Protective Devices. Protective devicas shclt be provided to limit the
| |
| : degradation of the Class 1E power systems.
| |
| Sufficient indication shall be provided to I identify the actuation of a protective device.
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| l
| |
| }
| |
| I e
| |
| l i
| |
| DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST ItseER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREleCE DESCRIPTI(Bi SAT /tBISAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLsIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(31 NC/NA C(BRENTS 1
| |
| 31.1 E1-0604 R26 El-0700-01 R11 i E1 0700-02 R20 j E1-0701-02 R18
| |
| ! El-0702 R2 l El 0703 R20 i F1 0704 R22 j El-0705 R23 I El-0710 01 R20 i E1071101 R22 i
| |
| El 0711 R24 El-0712 01 R26 El 0712-02 R12 El 0712-03 R10 l El-0713-01 R14 l
| |
| l 31.2 E1-0713-02 R21 l E1-0714 R19 j El-0715 01 R13 El 0716 R18 l
| |
| El 0717 R8 E1-0718-01 R18 El-0720 R9 E1-0720-01 R20 El-0721 R9 El 0726 R7 El 0727 R13 l
| |
| l 8 DAP FORet E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| f i
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| \ d .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLSIBER ,REV._ ,DATE 1
| |
| : REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAtSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLsIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| 4 El-0800 R17 I El 0801 R13 f El 0002 R15
| |
| ! El 1008 all El-1103 R15 31.3 El-1106 R12 E1-1105 26 >
| |
| ll 1
| |
| 32.0 Direct Cwront Distribution System. El-0601-01 Separation of reemdent electrical El 0603-01 distribution circuits enternet to The distribution system shall consist of att El 0700-01 panels i.e. cable separation, is agaipment in the distribution circuits from El-0710-01 covered ieder Criterion Nos. 67.0 and their sagply devices to the loads. El-0716 01 68.0.
| |
| El-0718-01
| |
| , Each distribution circuit shall be capable of El-0727 The distribution panel circuits l transmittire sufficient energy to start and El-1103 physical independence is covered in j operate att regaired toads in that circuit. Criterie No. 22.0.
| |
| Distritaation circuits to rededent egaipment j shall be physically and electricattf l independent of each other.
| |
| The distribution system shall be monitored to the entent that it is shown to be ready to
| |
| ! perform its intended fimetion.
| |
| i 9 DAP FORN E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| ( O e e
| |
| DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION l
| |
| CNECKLIST MLseRER , REV._.P
| |
| * TE I REFEREeICE DESCRIPTION SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00AIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIon NC/MA CGsENTS i
| |
| Auxiliary devices that are recpaired to operate dependent ecpaipment shall be st@ptied frae a related bus section to prevent the toss of electric power in one toad grote from causing the toss of espaipment in another toad group.
| |
| Feeders between the Class 1E power systems located in Safety Class structures and systems located in non-Safety Class structures shall be provided with automatic circuit interrteting devices Located in the Safety Class structures.
| |
| 40.0 In those areas ideere the damage potentiat is See Criterie See Criterla mos. 131.0 and 132.0.
| |
| Limited to failures or faults internal to the uns. 131.0 and electrical agalpment or circuits, the minieum 132.0 separation distance can be established by analysis of the proposed cable installation.
| |
| This analysis shall be based on tests performed to determine the flame retardant characteristics of the proposed cable installation cons;dering features such as cable insulation and jacket materials, cable tray fitt, and cable tray arrangement.
| |
| 41.0 Redisident Class IE batteries shalt be placed E1-0713-02 R21 Verify by review of drawings that the 10 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| j
| |
| ; DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION i
| |
| CHECKLIST MLSWER , REY._ ,DAtE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATION NC/NA COBENTS in separate safety class structures. redsusant batteries are in separate roams of the Electric / Control buildire.
| |
| i 42.0 Battery chargers for redmdant Class IE E1-0713-02 R21 Verify that the rodadant battery betteries shall be physicatty separated in chargers are tocated in separate 4 accordance with the regirements of Section 4 independent rooms at elevetion 792' 0"
| |
| ) of IEEE 384 1974. of the Electrical / Control twildirg.
| |
| I l
| |
| 3 43.0 Redmdant Class IE containment electrical El-0537 R2 Verify that the Train A and Train 5 penetrations shalt be p ysically separated in El-0509 CP1 rodadant Class IE containment accordance with the re g irements of Section El 0511-6A R3 electrical penetrations are located on
| |
| : 4. Compliance with Section 4 witt generetty El-0511-65 separate floor elevations, and are,
| |
| , re@ ire that redmdent penetrations be widely CP1 & R2 therefore adspately separated.
| |
| i dispersed arom d the circumference of the El-0511 do l containment. The minimum physical separation CPI & R3 Verify that non-class 1E circuits j for redandant penetrations shalt aset the E1 0511 94 R1 routed in Class 1E penetrations are l re @ irements for cables and raceways givin in El-0511-95 indicated as associated.
| |
| ; Section 5.1.4. CP1 & R2 E1-0511-104 Also see Criterion No. 62.0.
| |
| i Mon-Class IE circuits routed in penetrations CP-1 & R4 containing Class IE circuits shall be treeted El-0511-11A R2 i
| |
| 1 as associated circuits in accordance with the E1-0511 12A R4 l re w irements of Section 4.5. E1-0511-13A li3
| |
| ! El-0511-14A R3 l E1-0511 148R4 l 43.1 El-0511-14C
| |
| ) CP1 & R4 11 DAP FORM E-032, REv. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . _ . _ _ . _ . _ _ . ._ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . __ _ _._ _m_ . . ._
| |
| f %
| |
| j i -
| |
| } DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION I CECKLIST NLEGER ,REV._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| 310. CRITERIA (DOCLBIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICBI WC/ IIA COGENTS l
| |
| E1 0511 140 R3 El-0511-14E R3 l El-0511-14F CP1 j El-0511-15A CP1 l E1-0511-15R 9 1 El-0511-15C CP1 & CP2 El-0511-150 R7 El 0511 16A CP1 E1-0511-168 CPI El 0511-16C CP1
| |
| ; E10511-160 R6 i
| |
| 1 l
| |
| l 43.2 El-0511 17R (P1 El-0511 17C R4 El 0511-17D A6 E1-0511-17E R3 El 0311-184 R1 1
| |
| j El 0511-56A RS
| |
| ! E1-0511-57A R3 El-0511-5aA R3 E1 0511-594 CP1 & R4 l El 0511-604 CP2 & CP1 El-0511-60s CP1 & R8 E1 0511-60C R2 12 DAP FOIDI E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 I
| |
| | |
| _ _ _ _ _ . _ . _ . _ _ _ . _ __ _ _ _ . _ _ . __ . ._ . _ . . _ . _ .. . . . _ . _ . _ . _ _ - . __ _ .~ _. . _ _ _ _ _ . .. . . _ . - . .
| |
| i 1
| |
| I l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLRGER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LRISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (masui, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATICH NC/N4 C0pgENTS l
| |
| I
| |
| }
| |
| } 43.3 El 0511 600 R7 I
| |
| El 0511-61A R6 E1-0511 618 R6 1 El-0511 61C R2 f El-0511 610 R3 E1-0511 62A CP1 l
| |
| E1-0511 62C W 1 El 0511 63A R2 El 0511 638 R3 E1-0511-63C e l E1-0511-630 R5 E1 0511 668 et El-0511 66C R5 i El-0511-660 p 1 i,
| |
| u 43.4 E1 0511 65A R3 l El-0511 658 R3 E1-0511 65C R5 l
| |
| E1-0511-650 R3 El 0511 65E CP1 & R3 El-0511 65F CPI El-0511-66A R1 50.0 Redadant Class 1E irstruments shalt be El-0601 06 Verify for selected cases, if any, that i
| |
| 13 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| O .
| |
| J l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| , CHECKLIST IRAIBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPT10ll SAT /LmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION llc /NA CGeENTS a
| |
| 1 Located in separate cabinets or compartments separation is maintained for external i of a cabinet. cables which are run to re & ndant instruments located in separate m ere re & ndant Class 1E instruments are compartments of a single cabinet.
| |
| tocated in separate compartments of a single cabinet, attention must be given to routing of external cables to the instruments to assure that cable separation is retained.
| |
| j In tocating Class 1E instrtment cabinets, attention sust be given to the effects of all pertinent design basis events.
| |
| i 52.0 Locations of Class 1E actuated agalpment, See Criterion llo. 140.0.
| |
| such as ptmp drive notors and valve operating motors are normatty dictated by the location l
| |
| of the driven equipment. The resultant l lx ations of this equipment must be reviewed to ensure that separation of redtsident Class
| |
| ]
| |
| ; 1E actuated equipment is acceptable.
| |
| 53.0 Two separate and physicatty independent El-0302 R6 Verify that the two start @
| |
| startup transformers provide start @ and E1-1020 R11 transformers XST1 & XST2 are spearate.
| |
| I preferred shutdown power to the Units on an issuediate basis.
| |
| , 14 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i,
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| r O .
| |
| ] DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ; CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DoctMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COSENTS
| |
| ]
| |
| 58.0 The 138 kV section of the switchyard is verify by review of drawings that the
| |
| , shysically and electrically independent of 345KV and 138KV switchyards are l the 345 kV Switchyard. physically independent.
| |
| l 60.0 The two (2) start y transformers (XST) and verify that the cable bus & cts frase IST2) are corrected to the 6.9kV unit the start @ transfoneers to the 6.9-kV switchgear by separate, metal enclosed, switchgear are separate.
| |
| ventilated, solid top cover, cable bus & cts.
| |
| , Cable spacing is maintained within each bus
| |
| &ct.
| |
| j 62.0 contairunent electric penetration assembly Drawing: Verify that electrical penetration are
| |
| ! arrangement design provides access for El-0511 0A CPI separated by trains (See also Criterion comecting cables, leak testing & ring El-0507 R2 No. 43.0). Verify that the location operation, and space for removal wxt FSAR: and separation of electrical replacement. Separation of penetrations Fig 8.3-16 penetrations is shown correctly on FSAR meets single failure criteria. (Amendment 57) Fig. 8.3 16. Verify that there are three separate floor elevations
| |
| , Physical separation between re&ndant containing electrical penetrations.
| |
| circuits is achieved by establishing three Verify that medium voltage and low (3) independent penetration areas on voltage power, control, and different floor elevations. Location and instrumentation circuits use separate separation of penetrations are shown on FSAR penetrations. Verify the locations of Figure 8.3 16. Separate penetrations are protective chamels I & III l provided for medium voltage and low voltage penetrations and those of channels II &
| |
| j power, control, and instrumentation IV. Verify separation between functions. The maxieue possible seaaration non re & ndant penetrations and between i
| |
| i 15 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| l O O .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NL8eBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tsdSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClaeENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COBENTS l' between Class 1E electrical penetrations of any two channel penetrations.
| |
| redsdent trains and any large piping penetration is provided to prevent damage I
| |
| from steam line or waterline ripture.
| |
| Redandant penetrations are tocated at i
| |
| different floor elevations, d ere floor slabs are a miniaua of 12 in. thick. The minisua centerline separation between any two (2) nonredadant electrical penetrations is 2 f t l 2 in. Protection Channels I and Ill I
| |
| penetrations are located at elevation 842 ft 6 inches. Protection Channels II and IV penetrations are located at elevation 870 ft 0 inches. Minima separatin (clear air spece) between any twe chame1 penetrations is 3 ft horizontat and 5 ft vertical.
| |
| 63.0 Separate rooms in the seismic Category I See criterion No. 22.0.
| |
| Safegaards Buildings provide adegante j seperation for the redtedent Ctass 1E 6900-V switchgear buses and 480-V toad ce.9ters.
| |
| l These roans are located above the PNF tevel.
| |
| Piping containing fluids is emetuded from these rooms. Rooms containing Train A equipment are separated from Train B equipment by f toor elevations with concrete l'
| |
| floor slabs having a miniaun thickness of 12 j inches. Any falture, d ether electrical or i
| |
| 16 DAP FORM E 032, REY. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| d V .
| |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ! NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/MA CDeENTS i
| |
| #1ysical, in one room will not have any f
| |
| ef fect on the re&ndant equipment in the j second room.
| |
| ]
| |
| I 67.0 Separation between Class 1E cables is See Criteria Nos. 131.0 thru 141.0.
| |
| } provided to preserve the redtsidency and j independence of redandant electrical l circuits. The criteria for cable
| |
| ! installation are derived from the basis stated previously and are in comptlance with the intent of MRC Reip2Latory Guide 1.75 and l IEEE 384-1974. Compliance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.75 is discussed in FSAR Sdmection 8.3.1.2.1.
| |
| 68.0 The separation of associated circuit cables cable and Verify that selected associated is maintained on a train basis in the same Raceway Data circuits are maintained separate from anmer and degree as Class 1E circuit cables, Base - Issue the redandant Train by risining these with dich they are associated. seyond an 573 circuits with the corresponding Train isolation device associated cables became Dated using the same requirements as that l non-Class 1E cables, provided they do not 31 Dec 1985 Train. Verify that den gastified again associate with Class 1E system cables. Drawings: isolators are used the circuit after
| |
| ; El-0004 CP3 the isolator is non-class IE and El-0007 CPS maintain separate from both Train A and l El-0005 R11 8, or if the circuit retains the El-0009 CP2 associated identification it is
| |
| ! El-0010 CP4 maintained with the corresponding i
| |
| { 17 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 1
| |
| )
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmRER , RE V._,DAT E REFERENCE DESG IPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 1 No. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS j El 0014 CP2 train, j El 0018 01 CP9 I El-1702-02 R2 Also see criterion No. 103.0.
| |
| SPEC. ES 100 R2 l
| |
| 69.0 e ere cabtes are exposed to such potontIat See Criterion See Criterion No. 140.0.
| |
| hazards as pipe d ip, flammable material, and No. 140.0
| |
| ! missiles, separation recpsirements are evaluated on a case-by-case basis to ensure i an acceptable level of rodadant circuit independence.
| |
| l 70.0 Cable trays d ich are not overfilled may have El-1700 Issue Verify for selected cases, if any, of cables extending above the top of the cable 334(11/21/84) cables extendire above the top of the tray siderails as a result of specific El-1701(R11) cable tray side raits that separation installation configurations. This situation El-1701 01(R1) is acceptable and that potentist ,
| |
| any occur as cables enter or exit trays, at El-1702(R7) hazards of physical damage are not cable tray fitting such as tees and crosses, El-1702 02(R2) near, and near tie dom points for cables. Cables E1-103(R2)
| |
| { may extend above the top of cable tray
| |
| ; siderails if the situation does not result in an electrical or mechanical separation
| |
| ! problem and the cables are not routed near l potential hazards d ich may cause @ ysical
| |
| ] damage to the cables.
| |
| 1 I
| |
| l 18 DAP FORM E 032, REY. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| g 'N k
| |
| J DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAil0N
| |
| ; CHECKLIST IRAeBER ,REV. _ ,DATE J
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| 1 NO. CRITERIA (DOClaqENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C00ENTS i
| |
| l
| |
| ; 73.0 Safety-related equipment, exposed raceways, ES-100 R2 See criterion No. 156.0.
| |
| and cables are identified by distinct color markers so that the plant personnel can l distinpaish, without resorting to any
| |
| , reference material, among the various
| |
| ! redsdent Class 1E system and between redsdent Class 1E systems ard non-Class 1E I circuits.
| |
| 76.0 Instrumentation power for Unit 1 NSSS is E1-0018 CP-3 Verify that the distribution penets provided fras distribution penets IPC1, 1PC2, 1PC1, IPC2, IPC3 and IPC4 are comected 1PC3 and 1PC4. See FSAR Figure 8.3-15. and wirire is separated as described in These panels power safety loads as weLL as the criteria.
| |
| non safety toads.
| |
| , Each ncm-safety circuit pouered fram these panels will have a non-safety circuit breaker, isolation card, interposing relay,
| |
| ; or fuse comected in series with the penet l circuit breaker.
| |
| Protection chamel wiring, safety-train wiring and non-safety train wiring within i paneIs IPC1, IPC2,1PC3 and IPC4 wiL1 be in j different wire tasdtes. These tasdtes wiLL be separated to the manieun extent practicable.
| |
| i I
| |
| i 19 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| 1 ,
| |
| | |
| D
| |
| , DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLaeRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUIENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGeENTS 1
| |
| 78.0 Distribution paneis and acpaipment they feed El-0018 See Criterion No. 22.0 for seperation j as a minima meet the recpiirements of CDC 17 El-0018-1 of distribution panels.
| |
| and 18, NRC Regulatory Guides 1.6, and IEEE El 0018-2 308-1974, 344-1975 and 386-1974.
| |
| i 4
| |
| 79.0 EcpJipnent Arrangement El 0712-01 Verify that:
| |
| El-0713-02 Battery chargers, distribution switchboards, 1) In the general plant area the and SUPS of one train are separated from distritmJton penets for rechadant trains those of other trains by locating them in are greater than 20 feet apart or are separate rooms. In general plant areas, in separate roams.
| |
| Class 1E... distribution penets of one train are separated from those of the other train 2) In the catde apreading room the by a distance of at least 20 ft, or idwre it distribution penets for redandant
| |
| , is not possible to maintain a 20 ft distance, trains are a minim a of 3 feet apart.
| |
| I barriers are provided to maintain proper I separation. In the cable spreading room a j miniaun distance of 3 ft. is maintained between distribution penets of red m dant
| |
| ! trains and channels.
| |
| 4 80.0 Independence of RedJndant Class 1E 125-VDC El 0001 Verify by review of the drawings that d
| |
| Systems E1-0018-2 there are separate Class 1E DC st4 ply El 0020 systems.
| |
| Rechindancy of power sources and distribution El-0713-02 l
| |
| equipamt is provided in the DC system. This El-1700
| |
| , recisidency extends from the station batteries ES SA
| |
| ; 20 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| ]
| |
| 4 I
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST ImmBER ,REV._,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPT10N SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClaIENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION IIC/NA COWEENTS and bettery chargers through distribution ES-88 panels, cabling, and switchecer. Each ES-100 redandant DC system and its associated distribution egaipment can independantty provide the regJired DC power for safe shutdoen of the plant.
| |
| Each rodadant Class 1E 125-V bettery system is located in a separate seismic Category I bettery room. The Class 1E bettery chargers and main distribution buses associated with each Class 1E 125-V bettery system are located in a separate seianic Category I roan. Separation of Train A and Train B bettery systems is maintained tp through the Class 1E 6900-VAC taases and is consistent with the train designations of such egaipment.
| |
| The gastity assurance program discussed in Section 17 ensures comptlance with established criteria in IEEE 336-1971 and NRC Regulatory Guide 1.30. The Class 1E 125 WDC egaipment and circuits are identified on
| |
| <*v=nts and drawings in accordance with the regairements of IEEE 496-1974.
| |
| 82.0 The Class 1E 125-V battery systems st,pty See criteria esos. 22.0, 26.0, 67.0, and 21 DAP FORM E-032, REY. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| _ _ _ _ _ - _ - -- - - -- - - - - ~ . - -_ . -. . ___
| |
| f /*
| |
| (' k i
| |
| t DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ; CNECKLIST NLSIBER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| ; REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tseSAT/
| |
| l, NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1sENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATim NC/NA CtBeENTS power to Class 1E toads without interr gtion 68.0.
| |
| daring normat operations or DBA conditions.
| |
| 1 In addition won toss of AC power, the DC I systen also provides power for emergency j lightire. The Class 1E 125-V, seismic j Category I battery systems confore to IEEE
| |
| ; 308, and NRC Regulatory Guides 1.32, and 1.6.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| 4 83.0 Each redredent Class 1E 125-V system consists See criterion Sharing covered e der Criterion No.
| |
| I of two independent betteries each havine one No. 10.0 10.0.
| |
| main distribution bus with molded case j circuit breakers, fusible switches, two
| |
| ; static bettery chargers (one spore), and tocal distribution penets. Redadency of engwwients precludes loss of both systems as
| |
| ; a result of a sirgte failure. For Unit 1, batteries BT1ED1 and BT1ED3 feed att Train A toad requirements, ediite batteries BT1ED2 and BT1ED4 sagiply Train 8 toad respairements. For Unit 2, batteries BT2ED1 and BT2ED3 feed att train A toad respairements, while betteries
| |
| ! BT2ED2 and BT2E04 sagiply train 5 toad q recpirements.
| |
| i There are no bus ties or sharing of power supplies between redrident trains. Class 1E l equipment associated with systems shared by both units receives power from penet boards 22 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i i
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| n 5
| |
| i
| |
| * DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION j CHECKLIST NLSIBER ,REV._ ,DATE t
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTI31 SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18EENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS 2
| |
| i i
| |
| ! having an incomirg automatic transfer switch i ediich can select power from either mit.
| |
| l Transfer switch design is such that power camot be splied from both mits simultanectsty. Train separation is maintained by aspplying these shared
| |
| )] penetba h from the same train of both mits. Irdspendence and separation are i
| |
| maintained throudiout the AC saspty circuitry f as welL as in the DC distribution network.
| |
| j man-Class 1E toads are not connected to these
| |
| ; systans.
| |
| I I
| |
| 84.0 Seperation See Criterion See Criterla mas. 22.0 and 26.0.
| |
| No. 132.0 The Class 1E 125 V betteries of each 4
| |
| rechadant train, are located in a separate, I
| |
| seismic Category I room of the Electrical Buildits at etavation 792 f t. In addition to i
| |
| providing protection against the SSE, the watts of these rooms act as fire barriers to maintain the integrity of the rodadent
| |
| ; systems. The bettery chargers and
| |
| : distritiution boards associated with a particular bettery are located in a roon j adjacent to the bettery room and are of J similar constructic.w Separation of batteries from associated ecpipment f
| |
| 4 23 OAP FORet E-032, REV. 2 08/13/86 l
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| i \
| |
| +
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION 1
| |
| CNECKLIST IRAGER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| k0. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/MA CGeENTS 1
| |
| ]
| |
| etisinates possible harmful of facts of any 1
| |
| corrosive ftmes emanating fram the betteries, I thereby maintaining a hiWi omgree of system reliability and availability. Electrical j separation is also maintained to ensure that a single f atture in one train das not casse a failure in the rechadent train. There is no sharire between rechaudent Class 1E trairs of agaipment such as betteries, bettery chargers, or distribution penets.
| |
| 1 I
| |
| j 85.0 Rockedancy see Criterie See Criteria nos. 22.0 and 26.0 for
| |
| '! mo. 78.0 p ysical separation.
| |
| l Two independent and re&ndant Class 1E.
| |
| ' 125-WC systems are provided for each imit.
| |
| Electrical and p ysical separation proctiates the loss of both systems as a result of a sirgte failure.
| |
| 86.0 Analysis See criteria See criteria Nos. 22.0 and 26.0 for
| |
| : 50. 151.0 physical separation. See criteria mos.
| |
| : The destys of the Class 1E 125-WC systems is 67.0 and 68.0 for cable separation.
| |
| in accordance with the regairements of EC-17, CDC-18, WC Regalatory Guides 1.6, 1.32, 1.75 and IEEE 308-1974. Camptiance with these criteria is described in FSAR 1 S h ection 8.3.1.2.1. The seismic 24 DAP F0ut E-032, REY. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| j i
| |
| | |
| \ O .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVA WATION l
| |
| ) CNECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE i.
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(m NC/mA CGeENTS ll I
| |
| re@ irements are specified in FSAR Section 3.10s.
| |
| 1 '
| |
| Restsdant power stgplies and e@ipment satisfy (BC-17 for a single failure. A failure mode analysis is presented in FSAR Table 8.3-7. h etity assurance, cable routing, separation, ard e p ipment
| |
| ] identification are covered in FSAR Sections 8.3.1.2 and 8.3.1.4.
| |
| ]
| |
| 1
| |
| ] 87.0 Physical Identification and Separation See Criteria See Criteria mos. 22.0, 26.0, 67.0, and mos. 131.0 68.0.
| |
| } The pysical identification of the Class 1E and 132.0 l DC power system is ceabined with the identification of Class 1E AC Power Systems and is described in FSAR Section 8.3.1.3.
| |
| The physical separation of the Class 1E DC I
| |
| systes is maintained in accordance with the intent of IdtC Regulatory Guide 1.75.
| |
| i i
| |
| I j 103.0 IEEE 3E (1974) Section 3, Isolation Device, El 0005 verify ty review of the drasings that
| |
| ! should be applemented as foltous: El-0007 selected isolation devices do not i
| |
| E1-0009 operate solely on feutt current.
| |
| "Interrteting devices actuated only ty fault El-0010 current are not considered to be isolation El-0014 25 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| i 1
| |
| 4
| |
| | |
| I f
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST tESWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREuCE DESCRIPT!(BI SATAalnAT/
| |
| q NO. CRITERIA (nnnasa'T, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIOu NC/uA CGSEmiS Y
| |
| l devices within the context of this h==nt."
| |
| i 104.0 IEEE-386 (1974) Section 3, Racener El-1700 verify ty reviou of the drawings and 1 El-1701 specifications that interlocked areer l Interlocked armor enctosing cable should not El-1701-01 enclosed cable is not used as a
| |
| ] be construed as a "rac W . E1-1702-02 raceway.
| |
| E1-1702-02
| |
| ! Spec ES-100
| |
| )
| |
| 1 105.0 Section 4.3 of IEEE 386-1974 should be Insert 'A' verify that:
| |
| si4ptemented as foltaus:
| |
| In general, redsident ecpaipment has
| |
| ! "In generat, locating redsident circuits and been placed in separate rooms. See
| |
| ; agaipment in separate safety class structures Criterion No. 22.0 for suitchgear, affords a greater degree of assurance that a motor controt centers and distribution sirgte event will not ef fect redtsident panets.
| |
| systems. This method of separation should be I tsad idenever practicalde and edtere its use Separation of reshndant circuits is 4
| |
| mes not conflict with other safety covered ty criteria loos. 131.0 and objectives." 132.0.
| |
| 4 106.0 Associated circuits instatted in accordance See Criterion Verify that selected associated with Section 4.5(1) of IEEE 386-1974 should No. 68.0 circuits fottou the same regairements i be s4 ject to att regairements placed on as the train for idiicit they are Class 1E circuits such as catde derating associated.
| |
| j envirorumental gastification, flame retardance, splicing restrictions, and i
| |
| 26 DAP FORN E 032, REv. 2, 08/13/86 1,
| |
| | |
| I e
| |
| DESIG18 REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IABIRER ,REV._ , GATE I
| |
| I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (D00AENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(af NC/uA CGeENTS j racewey fitt smiess it can be deemrutrated l that the absence of such recpirements could j not significantty re&ce the eveitabi1aty of
| |
| ) the Class 1E circuits.
| |
| I i
| |
| j 107.0 tEEE 386-1974 - man-Class 1E instrtmentation Cable and verify that selected non-Class IE and j arut control circuits should not be esempted Racemey Data associated trutrimentation and control J fram the provisions of Section 4.6.2. Smee--Issue 573 circuits outside of espipment (routed
| |
| )
| |
| i
| |
| - Deted 3L Dec. In racemers) are meintained completely 1985 separate.
| |
| Spec.-ES-100 R2 Drasings:
| |
| El-0006 CP3
| |
| ; El-0007 CPS j El-0005 R11 j El-0009 CP4 i El-0014 CP2 j E2-0018-01 CP9 E1-1702-RZ R2 &
| |
| l j DCA 21538 R1 i
| |
| 108.0 tEEE 386-1974 - Section 5.1.1.1 shoutd not be See criterion See CriterIan 10o.132.0.
| |
| carstrued to ispty that adeqtate separation tio. 132.0 j of re&ndant circuits can be achieved within l a confined space such as a cable turuwt that is effectively urwentilated.
| |
| l
| |
| ]
| |
| 27 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| I l
| |
| | |
| i i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION I CifCKLIST utseER .REV._,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(38 SATAalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (mriamruT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATION MC/MA CGGENTS 4
| |
| I.
| |
| 111.0 IEEE 3E -1974 Section 5.1.2 should be ES 13A Verify that cable is marked in a manner sigiptiemmnted as foltous: ES-1351 editch practudse having to refer to ES-1D 2 reference materiet to distinguish I "The method of identification tsed should be ES-13C between trains.
| |
| simple and should practude the need to ES-1D l
| |
| j consutt any reference material to distinguish ES-13E i between Class 1E and non-Class 1E circuits, ES-100 j between non-Class 1E circuits associated with dif ferent redandant Class 1E systems, and between redsudent Class 1E systems."
| |
| i i
| |
| j 112.0 Perding issuance of other acceptable El-0712-01 See Criterion no. 131.0.
| |
| ]
| |
| criteria, those portions of Section 5.1.3 (of El-0712-02 1EEE 3E-1974) (esettsive of the NOTE fattowing the second permeraph) that persit the routing of power cables throagh the cable spreading aree(s) and, by implication, the Control Room, should not be construed as acceptabte. ALso, Section 5.1.3 shoutd be sigptemented as fottous:
| |
| j ' mere feasible, reemdant cable spreadiry areas should be utilized."
| |
| )
| |
| 115.0 Reg. Guide 1.75 - Physical Independence of Covered truier Criteria Nos.103.0,
| |
| )
| |
| i Electric Systems. 104.0, 105.0, 106.0, 107.0, 108.0, l
| |
| 28 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| s
| |
| | |
| ,y OESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLeeEt ,REV._ ,DATE REFERE# DEStalPTICm SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| m0. CRITERIA (00CLsEENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATim NC/mA CGeENTS 109.0, 110.0, 111.0, 112.0, 131.0 thru CPSES desipi complies with the intent of Rev. 141.0, and 182.0.
| |
| 1 (1R5) reeutatory spide mith the fottowing comment:
| |
| Sepdatory Position C.1 - The CPSES desiyt of the perimeter security lighting system (non-Class 1E) relies an the provisions of IEEE Standard 386-1974 relative to overturrent devices to prevent entfunction in the perimeter security tighting system from casing macceptable influences en Class IE toeds.
| |
| 119.0 Identification. Covered e der Criterion No. 156.0.
| |
| Components of Class 1E power systems, and their associated desiyt, aperatire, and mair.tenance h==rits, shall be marked or tabeled in a distis tive amnner.
| |
| 120.0 E @ipment Protection. Covered e der Criteria Nos. 4.0, 7.0, 22.0, arus 26.0.
| |
| Class 1E power egaignment shall be plysicatty separated from its rechausant comterpart or mechanically protected as rapired to prevent the occurrence of comon failure ande.
| |
| 29 OAP FCAN E-032, REY. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN reb!EW EVAtuATIon CNECKLIST ItaleER .REV._ ,0 ATE REFERDeCE DES 3 tPTIGS SATAseSAT/
| |
| aO. CalTERIA (DOCLSENT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATIGI NC/NA CtBBENTS 123.0 Alternetine-Current Pow r Systems. See Criteria Physical separation of Class 1E AC mos. 131.0 powr syste caponents is covered in Generet. and 132.0 Criterie mos. 4.0, 7.0, 22.0, and 26.0.
| |
| Criteria mos. 67.0 and 68.0 cover The ettemntine-current powr systems ahett cable esperation.
| |
| include po wr agpties, e distribution system, and toad granes arranged to provide alternating-current electric peser to the Class TE toads. Sufficient Mical saporaticri, electrical isolation, and reendency s%ett be provided to prevent the occurrence of a common failure made in the Class 1E poner systems for any desi m basis event. Desie respairements abelL include, tiut are not neceeserity limited to, the fottaming:
| |
| (1) Bodhedent Load Grones: The electric toads shall be separated into two or more redsusant load promes.
| |
| (2) Safety Actions: The safety actions ty each geone of toads shall be redtsudent aruf independent of the safety actions provided ty its reemdant consiterparts.
| |
| (3) Powr Sely: Each of the redwident load 30 DAP FORN E 032, REV. 2, 06/13/86
| |
| | |
| O .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLaeER ,REW. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLmENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/nA C(EsENTS grcagis shalt have access to both a preferred and a stan 6y poner s e ly. Each poner a g ly shalt consist of one or more pouer soirces.
| |
| (4) Common Pomer S#y: Tuo or more toad grcngis any have a commen poner sagipty if the consaspances of the toss of the common peser sigpty to the load groips tsuler desiyt basis conditiam are acceptable.
| |
| (5) Common Faiture Mode: The preferreo and the stan6y poner sagiplies shalt not have a c m failure made betmeen them. In acktition, the redsmiant generatire sources of the stan6r powr sigply shalt not have a commen failure ande for any design basis event.
| |
| (6) Protective devices: Protective & vices shatI be provided to limit the degradation of the Class 1E pauer systems. Sufficient indication shall be provided to identify the actuation of a protective device.
| |
| 124.0 Distribution Systes. See Criterion See Criterton uo. 123.0.
| |
| no. 78.0 (1) Description. The distribution system 31 DAP FORN E-032, REY. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| i i
| |
| l DE**GM REVIEW EVAtuATion
| |
| ) CECKLIST uueER .REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTICM SAT /tasSAT/
| |
| mO. CRITERIA (D00aENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIou NC/NA Ct35ENTS i
| |
| shalt consist of att epipment in the distritiution circuit frain its sagipty circuit I
| |
| tireeker(s) to the loads.
| |
| ; (2) Capability. Each distritiution circuit j shall be capable of transmitting sufficient j energy to start and operate att regired loads in that circuit.
| |
| (3) Independence. Distribution circuits to redsu$mnt epigment shall be physicatty and electricatty independent of eeds other.
| |
| I (4) Surveillance. The distribution system i
| |
| shalt be annitored to the estent tr.at it is
| |
| } shoun to be reaisy to perform its intended
| |
| ! fisction.
| |
| j (5) Auxiliary Devices. Aunitiary devices that are respaired to operate dependant ocpaigmaant shalt be sigiptied from a related
| |
| ]
| |
| j bus section to pres mt the loss of electric I powr in one toed grog from cau.ing the toss
| |
| ! of epipment in another toad gro@.
| |
| I i
| |
| j (6) Feeders. Feeders between Class 1E pouer systems located in Safety Class structures j and systems located in non-Safety Class j structures shall be provided with circuit l
| |
| j 32 DAP FORN E-032, AEv. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| 1 l
| |
| i
| |
| }
| |
| | |
| f
| |
| .\ g
| |
| )
| |
| a
| |
| . DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATI0u CECKLIST utBIEER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tatSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 181ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIou NC/Is4 CGOENTS i
| |
| breakers located in the Safety Class j structure.
| |
| , 131.0 Cable Spreading Area. E1-0712-01 werify by review of ensings that the l El-0712-02 peer feeds in the catde spreading roon l The cable spreading aree is the space (s) Es-100 are enty associated with the control adjacent to the main Control Roca dere room, and that none traverse the instrsmentation and control caldes converse apreading room. Verify that the prior to entering the control, termination, minim a spearetion distances are art.
| |
| ]
| |
| j or instrsment penets. The cable aproeding l aree shett not cantain high energy espaipment Also verify that the cable spreadirg such as switchgear, transformers, rotatire roes arus control room do not contain I acpaipment, or potential sasces of missites hidi erurgy espaipment.
| |
| , or pipe idtip and shalt not be taed for I storing flammutde meterials. Circuits in the I catde spreadire eres should be timited to
| |
| ! control and instrument fisictiars and those l power sigply circuits aruf facilities servity
| |
| , the Control Roca and instrtamnt systems.
| |
| l Pouer esgyty feeders to instrument and j Controt Room distribution penets shall be j instatted in enclosed recommys that gatify as barriers.
| |
| i Other powr circuits that are respaired to
| |
| ]
| |
| ] traverse this aree shall be assiyted to a minima saaeer of routes consistent with j their separation recpairements and atlocated 1
| |
| l 33 DAP Fogel E-032, REv. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 4 C C O .
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EwatuATION d
| |
| CE CKLIST utseER .aEV._ ,DATE
| |
| { REFERENCE DESGIPTI(Ni SAT /talSAT/
| |
| ; hC. CRITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) OF W RIFICATI S MC/n4 CGeENTS sotety for these peser circuits. Sude traversity poner circuits shatt be separated free other circuits in this area hur a minism distance of 3 feet and barriers.
| |
| mote: An acceptatde alternative routirg for f
| |
| ; such traversine powr circuits unutd be to l route thee in istedded caneit or in a separate enctosure desipud as a safety class j structwe (for *=$e, a concrete chst bordt 1 or other suitable enclosure) idtich in ef fect reenwes thee from the eres defined as the catde apreadine area.
| |
| l The minim a separation distance between I
| |
| reesuheit Class 1E cable trays shalt be
| |
| ! determined by Section 5.1.1.2 or, ideere the corutitions of Section 5.1.1.3 are met, shott be 1 foot between trars separated j horizontatty arut 3 feet between trays asperated verticalty.
| |
| ] note: morizontal saperation is maeeured l
| |
| from the side rait of one tray to the side
| |
| ! rait of the adjacent tray. verticat h
| |
| separation is measured from the bottaa of the top tror to the top of the side rait of the bottom tray (see also Section 5.1.41.
| |
| 36 DAP Foul E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| j i
| |
| i .
| |
| l l
| |
| DESIGal REVIEW EvatuATIOE CNECKLIST anaqRER ,REV. _ ,DATE
| |
| ]
| |
| REFEREtsCE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| mo. CRITERIA (nnriasmT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(31 IIC/ tea CGeENTS t
| |
| l dere termination arrarguments precitale enintaining the minianas separation distarre, the roskamtent circuits shett be run in enctased racemers that omtify as herriers or j ether barriers shalt be provided betueen j reshausant circuits. The miniam disterre hetmeen these restausant enclosed racmers and between barriers aruf racemeys shant be 1 l
| |
| ; anch.
| |
| 1 132.0 General Plant Areas. El-17D2-02 werify ter review of setected dramires j ES-100 that the minim a separation distances l In plant areas from dich potential hazards are art. ,
| |
| 1 such as missites, enternet fires, and pipe j d ip are enctsalud, the minim a separation distance betusen ranksununt cal >te trays shalt be determined tur Section 5.1.1.2 or, d ere
| |
| ! the conditions of section 5.1.1.3 are met,
| |
| ) shett be 3 feet between trays separated I harirontatty and 5 feet between trays separated werticatty. If, in addition, hiWi energy electric emaipment such as emitchener, 1
| |
| ; transformers, and rotatirg egaipumnt is I esctLaind and power catstes are instatted in
| |
| ]
| |
| enciased racemeys that cpatify as horriers, or there are no pouer catnes, the minimm separation distance any be as specified in Sectian 5.1.3.
| |
| i 35 OAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| )
| |
| l i
| |
| a
| |
| | |
| i i
| |
| I
| |
| ; DESICm REWlEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST ImaWER .EEV._ ,0 ATE j REFEREm DESCRIPTlas SAT /tstSAT/
| |
| hO. CRITERIA (mr w mi, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIGI IIC/NA CEBBENTS l
| |
| i I
| |
| i l
| |
| l 133.0 ma g ired saperation. See criterion Ilo. 140.0.
| |
| l; j Seperation shall be provided to maintain the irW of aufficient raaber of circuits e d e @isionnt so that the protective j fwictions regired during and foltaming any 3
| |
| * sipi basis event can be accomplished. The degree of separation respaired varies with the
| |
| ]
| |
| a potential herards in a particular ares.
| |
| I i
| |
| i I
| |
| +
| |
| 134.0 Epismont and Circuits respairire Seperation. ES-100, E1-1700 Review selected drawines and spec and verify that espaipment and circuits '
| |
| ! E@igiment amt circuits respairirg separation i W ant to safety are separated and f shott be deterisined and etineeted early in identified on these deciments.
| |
| the ptant dosiyn arut shett be identified on l *Ms and tauings in a distinctive !
| |
| ; .e,e.r.
| |
| s 1
| |
| 135.0 seethods of separation. El-170202 Rewfou selected &amings and the spec ES-100 and verify that separate structures, The esperation of circuits arut epipment distance, barriers or combinations are j ehatt be achieved by safety class structures, used to separate reshasient circuits and l distance, or barriers, or any codination espsismient.
| |
| thereof.
| |
| i 36 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| | |
| s N
| |
| \ ^
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CEOCLIST LAAGER .REV._ ,DATE
| |
| ; REFERENCE DESCRIPTICal SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| hO. CRITERIA (D00AGT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATIou NC/h4 CGeOTS 1
| |
| l l
| |
| 136.0 Co g atibility with nochanical systems. See verify by review of selected drawires Attachment 'A' that failure of one reshadant
| |
| ; The separation of Class 1E circuits ard mechanical system's espigment camot
| |
| ) ocpipment ahatt be such that the respired canse faitise of the Class 1E circuits j independence will not be compr eised by the or espipment essential to the aparation failure of enchenical systems served by the of the other raskaudent systemi.
| |
| ) Class 1E systems. For eaample, Class 1E circuits shall be routed or protected such that f ailure of related mechanical ecpipment l cf one resksident system camot disable Class I
| |
| TE circuits or ock ipuent essentiat to the operation of the other reshadant system (s).
| |
| I i
| |
| 137.0 Associated Circuits. El-1702-02 verify that selected associated ES-100 circuits are unicpety identified and 7
| |
| Associated circuits shalt comply with one of are separated in the same manner as the j the fattowing- Class 1E train for idtich they are I associated, 1 (1) They shaIL be micpety identified as such
| |
| ] and shalt remain with, or be separated the or verify that the selected associated i same es, those Class 1E circuits with estich circuits remain separated miess a they are associated; spatified isolation device is used, md j
| |
| 1 that they remmin separated ip to the
| |
| ] (2) They shalt be in accordance with (1) isolation device, above fra the Class 1E espipment to arid l irictuding an isolation device. Seyorut the or verify that the selected associated isolation device a circuit is not s eject to circuits are anstyzed or tested to 37 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| , O '
| |
| N b .
| |
| t DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST utRWER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LaSAT/
| |
| ]
| |
| ho. CRITERIA (00CtmENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION MC/MA CGGENTS i
| |
| the re@irements of this document provided it demonstrate that they will not degrade maes not assin haen- associated with a Class the Class 1E circuits below an I 1E systaat accpetable towel.
| |
| (3) They shalt be analyzed or tested to l demonstrate that Class 1E circuits are not j degraded below an acceptable tevet.
| |
| 1
| |
| ! 138.0 Separation from Class 1E Circuits. E1-1702-02 See criteria mas. 68.0, 131.0, and ES-100 132.0.
| |
| I hon Class 1E circuits shalt be separated from j Class 1E Circuits by the miniman separation j re wirements specified in Sections 5.1.3, 5.1.4, or 5.6, or they hac- associated
| |
| {
| |
| j circuits.
| |
| l I
| |
| { 139.0 Seperation from Associated Circuits. See Criterion See Criteria No. 107.0.
| |
| No. 107.0
| |
| , non-Class 1E circuits shall be separated from associated circuits by the minima separation l re w irements specified in Sections 5.1.3,
| |
| ! 5.1.4, or 5.6.2 or (1) the effects of lesser i separation between the non-Class 1E circuits
| |
| ) and the associated circuits shalt be anatyred l to demonstrate that Class 1E circuits are not j
| |
| degraded belou an acceptable tevet or (2) they became associated circuits, non-Class i
| |
| j 38 OAP FORN E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| ) ,
| |
| s
| |
| | |
| 4 I .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NL81BER .REV._,0 ATE i REFERENCE DESCRIPTItal SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| uo. CRITERIA (nnnetMT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICf. TION NC/MA CGeENTS 1E instrtmentation and control circuits are j not regaired to te seperated from associated j circuits.
| |
| I I 140.0 Generat. Verify for selected areas that espose i Class 1E circuits and/or espaipsont to The rauting of Class 1E circuits ard location potentist hazards, that the degree of i of egaipment served ty these Class 1E separation is appropriate to the desage circuits shall be reviewed for esposure to potestial auch that the independence of l 4 potential hazards such as high pressure Class 1E systems is acceptably j pipire, missiles, flassable material, maintained.
| |
| l flooding, and wirire that is not flame i retardent. A degree of separation Also, verify for selected areas that I camsonsurate with the damage potential of the the separation provided makes affactive horard shalt be provided such that the use of plant design feettres such as I independence of rodadent class 1E systems different ro e s or opposite sides of
| |
| ! are maintained at art acceptable tewel. The rooms or areas, separation of Class 1E circuits and espaigment 3 shalt mob effective use of features irdierent i in the ptant design such as using differont
| |
| ! rooms or opposite sides of rooms or areas.
| |
| i.
| |
| i i 141.0 The minista separatian distances specified in El-1700 For selected areas ideere the minimum '
| |
| Sections 5.1.3 and 5.1.4 are based on apen E1-1702-02 separation distances per the criterion l wentitated cable trays of either the ladder ES-134 are used, verify that the cable l or trough type as defined in MDeA VE 1-1971, ES-1351 raceumys meet the criterion Cable Tray Systems. latere these distances ES-1382 regairements.
| |
| 4 39 OAP FORN E-032, REv. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| , i 1
| |
| m
| |
| ] DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| [ CNECKLIST NLmgER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAI/LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLNENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/MA CGeENTS i
| |
| t i
| |
| are used to provide aderpate physical ES-13C separation: ES-1D
| |
| ; ES-13E
| |
| } (1) Cables and racemeys irwolved shall be ES-100 l flame retardant; l
| |
| l (2) The design basis shall be that the cable l trsys miit not be fitted above the side rails; l
| |
| (3) mazards shall be timited to failures or faults internet to the electric espipment or
| |
| ; cables; I
| |
| If tesser separation distances are used they shall be established as in Section 5.1.1.2.
| |
| }
| |
| 142.0 Identification. ES-100(R-2) Verify that the criterian regairements for cable and racemey identification have been acceptably laptemented to j Exposed Class 1E raceways shall be marked in facilitate verification of confonmence a distinct permanent manner at intervels not to @ ation criteria.
| |
| 4 to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to
| |
| . and emiting from enctosed areas. Class 1E
| |
| ) racemeys shall be marked prior to the installation of their cables.
| |
| 4 Cables instatted in these racemeys shall be 40 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| ) ~
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLaeER ,REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| l REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOClaIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA ColeENTS l
| |
| l marked in a aarner of sufficient darability l and at a sufficient raaber of points to facilitate initial verification that the installation is in confonmence with the separation criteria. These catde markings shalt be applied prior to or daring installation.
| |
| i j Class 1E cables shalt be identified by a l permanent marker et each and in accordance with the design dramings or cable schedate.
| |
| The method of identification used to meet the j atxwe regairements shall readily distimish
| |
| ! between reemdant Class 1E systems and between Class 1E and non-Class 1E systaas.
| |
| j 144.0 Each circuit of a gro6p of rodadent Class 1E Covered by DAP-t-0584.
| |
| j circuits inich serve the same protective f mction shalt enter the control switchboard throteh separated apertures and terminste on i separate blocks or connectors, inich must l also be seperated as previously described mder Section 4.2.1 of IEEE Std 420-1973, l
| |
| i neere redandant Class 1E circuits ultimately terminate on the same device, barriers shall be provided between the device terminations 41 DAP FORN E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O O .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST MuqBER ,REV._ ,DATE
| |
| ! REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCWEENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS to ensure circuit separation.
| |
| Circuits for non-Class 1E functions may be run in the same wire bundles or wireways used ty one of a gro w of red edent Class 1E circuits. leen this is chne, the circuits for non Class 1E fmetions naast not be sdnequently routed with any other Class 1E circuits.
| |
| 148.0 Separation is achieved by locatirg egalpment See Criterion No. 140.0.
| |
| l and circuits in separate rooms, saintaining distance, or by use of barriers. The potential hazard of non safety related equipment failure on safety-related rechndant ecpaipment is considered in choice of equipment location or protection.
| |
| ] 149.0 Reckindant class 1E MCCs are located within See Criteria MCC Location is covered e der Criterion seismic Cate vry I structures and separated Nos.148.0 No. 22.0.
| |
| ty tocation in separate rooms, on different 163.0, and floor elevations, or physicatty spaced a 164.0 Verify for any reckndant McC's located mininun of 20 ft apart to preclude a single in the same ro m or area, that the failure from defeatire the operation of both minisun separation is 20 feet.
| |
| trains.
| |
| 42 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| w
| |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS 150.0 All Class 1E electrical equipment except El-1700 Verify by review of selected drawings motors ara identified ty 11 al$anumeric ES 100 that the eighth character in the tag character tag rambers. The eighth character El 1701 number is designated property per the is either E, P, or (any other character El 1701-01 criteria respairements.
| |
| except E or P), with E designating egalpment sich is Class IE, P designating agalpment s ich is part of reactor protection channel systems, and (other characters except E or P) designating ecpalpment sich is
| |
| ; non safety-related.
| |
| Motors steptied with pumps are identified by the same tag number as the pumps.
| |
| I 151.0 The desig) bases, criteria, NRC regulatory Verify by review of FSAR Sections guides, standards, and other documents that 8.1.4.1 thru 8.1.4.9 that all are implemented in the design of the applicable standards have been safety related systems (as discussed in addressed.
| |
| Sections 8.2 and 8.3) are listed as follows:
| |
| (see FSAR Sections 8.1.4.1 through 8.1.4.9).
| |
| 151.1 153.0 Electrical Circuit Physical Separation See Criteria See Criteria Nos. 131.0 and 141.0.
| |
| , Recomunended Design Basis Nos.
| |
| 15.0, 17.0 The electrical power stopty, instrumentation, 20.0, 21.0 and control conductors for reduidant er 22.0, 40.0 43 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE 1
| |
| REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS back @ circuits of a nuclear plant must have 41.0, 42.0 piysical separation to preserve the 43.0, 44.0
| |
| ! redsdancy and to ensure that no single 45.0, 46.0 l credible event will prevent operation of the 47.0, 48.0 associated fmetion ty means of electrical 49.0, 50.0 conductor damage. Critical circuits and $1.0, 52.0 i
| |
| functions include power, control and analog 57.0, 80.0 instrumentation associated with the operation 131.0 thru j of reactor protection, engineered safeguards, 142.0
| |
| ; reactor shutdown, resl &al heat removat 160.0, 159.0 l
| |
| systems, and auniliary fee & ster system. 171.0, 172.0 '
| |
| Credible events shall incitate, but not be 174.0, 176.0 timited to, the effects of short circuits, 186.0 thru pipe rw ture, missiles, etc. Such electrical 192.0 seperation recpaired for protection against plant desi red events should be included in j the basic plant desi m.
| |
| I j 1.0 General l
| |
| , 1.1 Cables of red edent circuits shall be run in separate cable trays, con <s, ducts, penetrations, etc.
| |
| 1.2 Circuits for non-redsdent functions should be rtm in cable trays or conduit separated from those used for redundant circuits. Where this cannot be accomplished, non-redadant circuits may be run in a cable 44 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| _Y .
| |
| s DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRiiERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS tray, conduit, etc., assigned to a rechndant l fmetion. m en so routed, it must remain with that particular rod adant circuit routing and shall not cross over to other redsident groups.
| |
| 1.3 One foot horizontal or three foot a
| |
| vertical separation shall be maintained between cable trays, conchit er armored
| |
| ; cables associated with red mdant circuits.
| |
| Greater separation must be considered if redsident circuits are exposed to a r<==nn hazard such as flood, pipe dip, oil fire, etc.
| |
| 1.4 Where it is impractical for reasons of equipment arrangement to provide separate cable trays, cables of redsident cirucits may be isolated by physical barriers, be installed in separate metallic condait, or consist of suitable arm red cables.
| |
| 1.5 Power ard control conchetors rated at 600 volts or below should not be placed in cable trays with conchetors rated above 600 volts.
| |
| 1.6 Analog or other low level type signal corductors shall not be routed in cable trays 45 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._,DATE m
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS containing power or control cabtas.
| |
| 1.7 In congested areas, such as imder or over the control boards, instrument racks, etc., cable trays and con &its containing redundant circuits shall be identified usirql
| |
| , pennenent markings. The purpose of such merkings is to facilitate cable routing identification for future modifications or j additians.
| |
| i l
| |
| 1.8 Positive, permanent identification of cables and/or con &ctors shall be made at att
| |
| . terminal points.
| |
| I i 153.1 2.0 Specific Systems 2.1 Reactor Protection System
| |
| : a. Separate routing shalt be maintained for the four basic protection /safeg:srd channet i analog sensing signals, bistable output signals and power supplias for such systems.
| |
| The separation of these four channels shall be maintained from sensors to instrument j racks to logic system cabinets.
| |
| : b. Separate routing of the reactor trip
| |
| ! 46 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O r% )
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmgER ,REV._,DATE 4 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) Cf VERIFICATION NC/MA COGENTS signals from the red.rident logic system cabinets shall be maintained and shall be separated from the four analog channels.
| |
| 2.2 Engineered Safeguards System
| |
| : a. Separate routing shall be maintained for the four basic protection /safespaard analog sensing signals, bistable output signets and power sigplies for such systems. The separation of these four chamels shall be maintained from sensors to instrument racks to logic system cabinets.
| |
| I
| |
| : b. Separate routing of the safeguards actuation signals from the redindent logic system cabinets shall be maintained and shall be separated from the four analog channels.
| |
| : c. Separate routing of control and power circuits associated with the operation of engineered safety featured agaipment is regaired to retain redindancies provided in the system design and power supplies.
| |
| 2.3 Reactor Shutdoin Systems
| |
| 's t 9 Separate routing of control and power circuits associated with boric acid injection 47 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 I
| |
| | |
| n O+.~ U .
| |
| "*4 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLAISER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18eENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION C00ENTS NC/NA capability is regJired to retain the redundancies provided in the system desi p
| |
| ,, ,@ power st4 plies.
| |
| I 2.4 Residual Neat Removal System j Separate routire of control and power circuits associated with residual heat removal capability is regJired to retain the redsidencies of system design and power sigplies.
| |
| 2.5 Auxiliary Feedseter System j'
| |
| Separate routing of control and power circuits associated with auniliary feeduster I capability is regaired to retain the redsidencies of system design and power sigplies.
| |
| 2.6 Reactor Protection System Analog circuits, Paragraph 2.1 (a) and Engineered Safeguards Analog Circuits, Paragraph 2.2 (a), may be routed in the same wireweys provided circuits have the same characteristics such as power supply and channel identity (I, II, Ill, or IV).
| |
| 2.7 Power and control condactors for the 48 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O .
| |
| i l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION l CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClaENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(W NC/NA CGeENTS I
| |
| Engineered Safegum % System, Paragraph 2.2 (b & c)
| |
| * shutdown Systems, Paragraph 2.3, Residaal Neat Removal Systen, Paragraph 2.4,
| |
| ) (and Auxiliary Feedseter System, Paragraph 4
| |
| 2.5), may be routed in the same wireueys provided circuits have the same characteristics such as power supply and
| |
| , togic or rededent train identity (A or B).
| |
| s 153.2 3.0 Power Sources These separation criteria also apply to the power supplies for the separate load centers and buses distributtre power to redsdent components and to the control of these power s e ties.
| |
| I 4.0 Thennel Loading Cables in power trays should be sized using aerating factors Listed in ICEA, Ptblication S-46 426. For circuits with no maintained spacing in cable trays and there no credit for diversity can be taken, such as pressurizer heater circuits, derating factors consistent with the cable mermafecturers recommendations should be applied.
| |
| 49 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMMENTS 5.0 Physical Loading To minimize insulation and jacket damage die to the weight of upper cables pressing on Lower ones in trays, the maaisus depth of cables in a tray should be limited. A suggested method of determining the anximum ramber of cables in a tray is to use 401 fill for control cables and 301 for power cables with a maniaun tray height of 8 inches.
| |
| 6.0 Fire Detectors smoke or other high sensitivity detectors should be provided for fire detection and alare in remote wireways or other mattended areas d ere large concentrations of cables are installed. M=ymte and readily accessible egJipment must be available to fight any fire that may occur.
| |
| 7.0 Process Control System Circuits Process Control System circuits regJiring separation are identified in the "From - To -
| |
| List" dich defines the termination points of the process control systems circuits.
| |
| 8.0 Neutron Detector Cables 50 DAP FORN E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ; CHECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION CapeENTS NC/NA
| |
| ; Nuclear Insturment System neutron detector cabtes sha1L be instalted in accordance with Westinghouse PWR Division Instrumentation and control Standards, Section 4.1. This standard enumerates specific separation and instattation requirements for these circuits.
| |
| 9.0 For other systems, the rampanent separation List identifies those devices and circuits requiring application of these separation criteria.
| |
| 154.0 The fourth character of a cable tray El 1701 R11 Verify for selected cable tray drawines identification rumber identifies whether or that the identification rambers of the not the given raceusy contains safety-related trays are consistent with the criteria cables. The fourth character is obtained regJirements for the cables contained.
| |
| froni the first letter of the applicable train
| |
| : or reactor protection channel color code ...
| |
| I For non-safety related racemeys, the fourth
| |
| ! chrrecter is K.
| |
| 155.0 The second character in the cable raaber E1 1701 Review selected drawings with cable identifies the cable color code. In tamber information ard verify that the addition, the first character of each cable cable identification characters are number indicates whether the cable is safety consistent with the criteria train or chamel oriented (E), associated regJirements.
| |
| i 51 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| i b
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRMBER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 M NT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS i
| |
| i I
| |
| i train (A), or non-safety related (N).
| |
| i 156.0 In ackfition to the tag nuhers, Class 1E El-1700 Verify by review of selected drawires ecpaipment, raceways, and cables in raceways El-1701 that the color coding system has been are identified by the followine color codig ES 13A implemented for the destyi system: ES 13e1 identification of equipment, raceways
| |
| : a. ESF System ES-1382 and cables.
| |
| Train A Orange (0) ES-13C Train B Green (G) ES-13D ES 13E
| |
| ; b. Reactor Protection System and ES 100 ESF Systems at Chamel Level channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Diannel 2 mite (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Channel 4 Yellow (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orarge with d ite stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with d ite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Class 1E Circuits 52 DAP FORM E-032, REv. 2, 08/13/86 I
| |
| | |
| O .
| |
| f I '.
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLSIRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCL8 TENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeqENTS I
| |
| Train C Stack (K)
| |
| : e. Non-Class 1E Cable Racemeys and Egalpment I
| |
| Natural raceways color or natural l equipment color t
| |
| 159.0 in general, all Class TE cables and See criterion See criterion No. 111.0.
| |
| associated cables are Jacket color-coded No. 111.0 throughout their entire tength. Cable jackets that recpJire field color coding prior to instattation will be so worked at intervals not to exceed five feet . Cable jackets that regJire field color coding after instattation (chJe to rectassification of <
| |
| cables from associated Class IE to Class 1E, j or vice versa, after their initial putt) will be field color coded as follows:
| |
| l i) Where entering and exiting ogJipment, raceway and inside jactiorVpull bones.
| |
| ii) All exposed portions of the cables will I be worked at intervals not to exceed five feet.
| |
| iii) Portions of instatted cables in concisit i
| |
| l 53 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| l i
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| 0 i ( (V t
| |
| .e DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,0 ATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| h0. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CDeENTS or trays will not be field color coded.
| |
| :l 160.0 The criteria iAlch have been used to See criteria Nos. 131.0 through 141.0.
| |
| establish the minimun regJirements for preserving the independence of rede dent Class 1E systems are stated in IEEE 308 and 384 and NRC Repletory Guides 1.6 and 1.75.
| |
| Note: Specific requirements are included elsed ere herein.
| |
| 141.0 Class IE ogaipment and circuits are clearly See criteria Nos. 111.0, 142.0, 154.0, 1 identified on he==nts and dramings in 155.0, and 156.0.
| |
| accordance with IEEE 496-1974.
| |
| I 162.0 Physical arrangement and separation between See Criterion No. 140.0.
| |
| redandant Class 1E systems are based on the potential hazards in the particular ares.
| |
| Possible hostite effects of non-safety related equipment failure on safety-related
| |
| ; ecpaipment are also considered in determining adeqtate separation of components.
| |
| l 166.0 Cables are routed in separate raceway systems El-1700 Verify that selected cables are routed according to voltage and ftmetion as foltows: El-1701 in separate raceway systems based on 54 DAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| x e
| |
| a DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRalBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| l 100. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS 1
| |
| i i
| |
| i q ES 100 voltage and function.
| |
| I a. 6.9-kV power i
| |
| : b. Low-voltage power (less than 600-VAC) and 125 VDC Power
| |
| : c. AC and DC control (may contain 125-VDC or 120 VAC power cables provided the current
| |
| , they norantly carry does not exceed the minimum ampacity of control conchetors in the raceway system).
| |
| : d. Instrtmentation cables.
| |
| 117.0 In a vertical stack of trays, except for ES-100 Verify by review of the drawings and short distances at vertical to horizontal spec. that trays are stacked with the
| |
| ; transitions, the highest voltage tevel is on high voltage on top and descanding in
| |
| ! top, with tower trays descending in order of order of voltage tevel.
| |
| voltage tevet, control trays and finally instrumentation trays at the lowest level, i
| |
| ll 1
| |
| i 169.0 Cables of Class 1E systems are separated from See Criteria See Criteria Nos. 131.0 thru 141.0.
| |
| ) each other as wett as from cables of Nos. 131.0 thru non-Class 1E systems. Cables of reckndant 141.0 Class 1E circuits are rtm in separate cable trays, conshits, diets, and penetrations.
| |
| l i
| |
| 55 DAP FORM E 032, REY. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| I j
| |
| | |
| s 3
| |
| )
| |
| [
| |
| v t
| |
| .9 l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| 170.0 The racemeys of one train are separated from Drawing Verify that FSAR Section 8.3.1.4(5)
| |
| , those of the other train by locatire them in El-1702-02 covers minim a separation distances and separate structures or on opposite sides of Rev.2. is in agreement with IEEE-384(1974).
| |
| targe rooms or spaces. m ere this is not possible, sepretion is maintained as described below (see FSAR section 8.3.1.4(5))
| |
| or by providing barriers. The Class 1E cables are routed such that any single failure in one system does not cause a failure in another train system.
| |
| i l 171.0 In plant areas ediich are free from potential See Criterion See Criterion No. 132.0.
| |
| i hazards such as missites, external fires, and No. 132.0 I
| |
| pipe idnip, the minim a separation between I
| |
| i redundant cable trays is three f t. between I trays separated horizontally and five ft.
| |
| between trays separated vertically.
| |
| l 1 172.0 In the cable spreading area and the control See criterion See criterion No. 131.0.
| |
| Room, the minisua separation between No. 131.0 redadant cable trays is one f t. between l
| |
| 4 trays separated horizontally and three feet between trays separated vertically, i
| |
| 173.0 were plant arrangements preclude maintaining .See criteria See Criteria Nos. 131.0, 132.0, and 56 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i l
| |
| l k
| |
| | |
| /
| |
| at a
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ho. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeqENTS I
| |
| the minim m separation distance, the Nos. 131.0, 141.0.
| |
| redsident circuits are rm in solidly 132.0, ard enclosed raceways or other barriers provided 141.0 between re & ndant circuits. The minimum
| |
| ; distances between these re&ndant, enclosed receways and between barriers and receways j are in accordance with mac Regulatory Guide 1.75.
| |
| },
| |
| ! 174.0 The cable spreading area is the space below See Criterion See Criterion no. 131.0.
| |
| the Control Room where instrumentation and No. 131.0 control cables converge prior to entering the control, termination, or instrument panels.
| |
| This area does not contain high energy swipment such as switchgear, transformers, rotating e@ ipment, or potential sources of missiles or pipe whip. Flannable material is not stored or instatted in this area. Cable constructions are p atified in accordance with IEEE 383. The circuits in this area are limited to control and instrument factions and those power sigply circuits serving the Control Room. Power circuits are not routed in this area, except power cables serving instrtment and Control Room distribution penets. These power cables are encased in l
| |
| l concrete or run in rigid steel con &its from 4 the point d ere they enter this area.
| |
| 2 57 CAP FORM E 032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| (' T J .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| ! CNECKLIST NueER ,REV._ ,DATE 1
| |
| )
| |
| ] REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS i
| |
| i i
| |
| In this area, a minisam separation of one foot horizontal and three feet vertical is maintained between redandant trays, mere raceway arrargements preclude maintaining the miniaun separation distance, the redtsdent circuits are rte in enclosed raceways or barriers are provided between redandant
| |
| ! circuits.
| |
| 1 j 175.0 Routing of cables for Class 1E systems See Criteria Verify by review of selected drawirgs j through an area d ere there is potential for Nos. 131.0 and that Class 1E cables are not routed in accumalation of meaningful gaantities of oit 132.0 areas where there is potential for the or other combustible materiet is avoided. accteutation of coutmatible materiet.
| |
| ! Were such routing is toevoidable, only one If they are routed here, verify that l system of redandant cables is allowed in any only one rede dent train is attowed in t
| |
| such area, and the cables are protected by the area.
| |
| ; instatting them in condaits or solid bottom trays with solid covers. In areas containing potentist missiles, physical arrangement, l protective barriers, or pipe restraints preclude loss of rodadant systems.
| |
| l l
| |
| 176.0 Non-Class IE cabtes ere seperated fron C1 ass See Criteria See Criteria Nos. 107.0, 131.0, 132.0, j 1E cables and from associated cables. Nos. 107.0, and 137.0.
| |
| Non-Class 1E cables, idwn they share the same 131.0, 132.0, raceway with Class 1E or by virture of power and 137.0 i
| |
| l 58 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| f O 9 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST lam 0ER , RE V._,D AT E REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS st4 ply ccrinection to Class 1E buses, are associated cables and are so destensted. As described in preceding sections, these associated cables are separated from non-Claes 1E cables and from Class 1E cables of trains and channets with which they are i not associated.
| |
| This separation is maintained throughout the
| |
| ; teneth of the cable (or circuit) tsstil it passes through an isolation device.
| |
| 182.0 The " Note" followirup Section 4.5 (of IEEE Std See Criteria Verify by review of drawings that the 384-1974) should be sagptemented as fottous: Nos. 131.0 and transmission network and unit generator I
| |
| "This exemption is Limited and does ret 132.0 are exempt from associated criteria extend to other regairements such as those of re giremants, but, this is timited to Generat Desipi criterion 17." the definition of associated circuits per IEEE 384 1974.
| |
| Analyses performed in accordance with Sections 4.5(3), 4.6.2, and 5.1.1.2 should be Verify that analysis perfonsed per otheitted as part of the Safety Analysis 4.5(3), 4.6.2 & 5.4.1.2 are part of the Report and should identify those circuits SAR.
| |
| i installed in accordance with these sections.
| |
| 195.0 Electric Penetration Area. See Criterion See criterion No. 62.0.
| |
| No. 62.0 Except for six penetrations, all individuat l
| |
| 59 DAP FORM E-032, REv. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O a
| |
| __ L DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER , REY. _ ,0 ATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| h0. CRITERIA (DOCuqENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CO W NTS l penetrations are classified according to tmetion and are restricted to exclusive use for power, control, or instrtmentation.
| |
| ; These six penetrations are exclusively used i
| |
| for six different motor operated valves for j both power and control. In addition, penetrations used for the NIS cables are not
| |
| ! used for any other purpose.
| |
| There are three electric penetration areas,
| |
| ., one on each floor elevation. Class 1E
| |
| ! penetrations are located on two different floor elevations, one train on each floor.
| |
| The third (middle) floor area contains the four channels of the NIS and two channels of the RPS system. The remaining two chamels of the Reactor Protection System (RPS) are located on the floor edwre Train B l penetrations are located. The miniaun center l Line separation between redJndent NIS
| |
| .l penetrations is sin feet. The minimus center
| |
| ! line separation between penetrations of j redtsulent channels of RPS, between RPS and
| |
| ; NIS, and between these channels and any other electrical penetrations, i; . feet. The minisua centerline separat- tween any two (2) non Class IE penetrate w . ur any two (2) same train penetrations is approximately 2 1/2 feet. The minisun centerline 60 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 1 O O n
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NuesER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| i NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS separation between ary class 1E penetration and non-Class 1E paratration is 3 feet.
| |
| 197.0 Except as otherwise noted, att auxiliary Verify that AFW pumps and valves are feedwater pumps, valves, instrumentation and located outside contairement.
| |
| controls must be located outside the contairment buildirg.
| |
| 198.0 All redJndant components (including pumps, Covered under criterion No. 140.0.
| |
| controls, Class IE power sources, and electric cable) are separated from each other ty a proper arrangement of barriers or suitabte physical separation...to preclude coincident damage to redimdant ogJipment in the event of a postulated pipe rgture, equipment failure, or missile generation.
| |
| 199.0 (AFW) System components sich are diverse Verify that the AFW turbine and from offaite and onsite amergency AC power associated valves are located in an sust be located in areas d ere AC power is area not requirire AC power for not retled Leon to maintain environmentat envirarmental condition control.
| |
| conditions within the ecpaipment desiyt basis enviroreental conditions for the recpJired charation of operation.
| |
| 61 OAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| __ _ .- _= .- --
| |
| g i
| |
| 9
| |
| , k I
| |
| .l 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLaWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(BI SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA Ct3eENTS l
| |
| 1 201.0 Desiys and apptIcation consideration shalt See Criterion No. 140.0.
| |
| ; include the considerations Listed in Table 1
| |
| ; (of IEEE 387-1977).
| |
| i l
| |
| ! 204.0 The Controt Room and cable spreading room do see criterion No. 131.0.
| |
| not contain hiq$-energy ecpaipment such as switchgear, MCCs, transformers, rotating equipment, high energy piping, or other l potentist sources of missites.
| |
| ' 205.0 Identification of Safety Loads See criteria Nos. 154.0, 155.0, and 156.0.
| |
| The safety loads connected to Class 1E f
| |
| j 125 WW: systems are identified in Tables 8.3 4 and 8.3-4A. In addition, the tables l
| |
| j indicate the samisas tength of operating time j recpaired for each toad Leon toss of AC power.
| |
| The method of distinguishing between Class i 1E and non-Class 1E 1oads ia defined in Stesection 8.3.1.3.
| |
| i i
| |
| i i
| |
| i 62 DAP FORM E-032, REV. 2, 08/13/86 2
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| Q
| |
| . : .O DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeENTS
| |
| %.0 Safe Shutdown capability FPPR Rev. 3 1. Verify the shutdown !rst. aft 2.5.3.4 describes a shut &w: scerv*rio that Fire protection features should be provided 2.2 provides for both achieving and for structures, systems, and components 2.5.1 maintaining hot stan e y.
| |
| important to safe shutdow1. These features 2.5.1 shouId be capabte of liniting iire damage so 2.5.1.1 2. Verify the shutdown analysis tha** 2.5.1.2 describes a shutdown scenario that 2.5.3.3 provides for both achieving and (a) One train of systems necessary to 2.5.3.4 maintaining cold shutdows.
| |
| achieve and maintain hot shutdown conditions 2.5.3.5 from either the controt room or emergency 3. Verify that the shut &m scenario control station (s) is free of fire damage, addresses loss of offsite power.
| |
| and
| |
| : 4. V?rify the shutdown analysis (b) Systems necessary to achieve and defines shutdom fmetions.
| |
| maintain cold shutdows from either the control room or emergency control station (s) 5. Verify the shutdown analysis can be repaired within 72 hours. ad& esses the following primary shut &m fmetions:
| |
| : 4. Reactivity control includire cold shutdown.
| |
| B. Reactor coolant inventory control.
| |
| C. Reactor coolant systaa pressure control.
| |
| D. Initial decay heat removat and long term decay heat removal.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E-040, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| A . . .
| |
| O DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/M4 CGOENTS
| |
| : 6. Verify the shutdoun analysis addresses the following secondary shutdone fwictions:
| |
| A. Monitorirg and;
| |
| : 5. S p t (NVAC, coolity unter and herestion).
| |
| 97.0 Alternative or Dedicated Shutdown Capability FPMt Rev. 3 1. Verify the shutdom analysis 4.0 descrires an alternative or dedicated Alternative or dedicated shutdown capability 4.5.3.2 scenario that p mvides for achievine provided for a specific fire aree should be and usintaining hot stan 6 y.
| |
| able at achieve and maintain si& critical reactivity conditions in the reactor, 2. Verify the sluatdown analysis maintain reactor coolant irwentory, achieve describes an alternate or dedicated and maintain hot stanty* conditions for a scenerlo that provides for achieving PWR (hot shutdourf for a sla) and achieve and mairitainine cold shutdoun.
| |
| cold shutdoun* conditions within 72 hours and maintian cold shutdoom conditions thereaf ter. 3. Verify the " normal" range for the Durire the postfire shutdoen, the reactor process variables darirg loss of AC cwlant systes process variables shall be power.
| |
| maintained within those predicted for a loss of norant ac power, and the fission predact 4. Verify the shutdoun analysis bow dery inegrity shall not be effected, describes a scenerlo that will maintain i.e., there shall be no fuel clad damage, process variables within the "nonnel" rteture, or any primary coolant bomdary, or range.
| |
| rtpture of the contairment boundary.
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E 060, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| v DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ! No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PACE) OF VERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGeENTS
| |
| * As defined in the Standard Technical Specifications.
| |
| 96.0 The performance goals for the shutdtne FPPR Rev. 3 1. Verify the shutdoun anetysis f mctions should be: 2.5.5 defines shutdoen fmettons.
| |
| 2.5.1
| |
| : e. The reactivity control f metion should be 2.5.1.1 2. Verify the shutdoun anetysis capable of achievire and maintaining cold 2.5.1.2 addresses the following primary shutdoom reactivity corutitions. 2.5.3.3 shutdown f metions:
| |
| 2.5.3.4
| |
| : b. The reactor coolant makes ,fmetion 2.5.3.5 A. Reactivity control including should be capable of maintainity the reactor cold shutdane.
| |
| coolant levet above the top of the core for B. Reactor coolant inventory puts and be within the tevet indication in control.
| |
| i the pressurizer for PWRs. C. Reector coolant systen pressure
| |
| { control.
| |
| ! c. The reactor heet removal fmetion should D. Initiet decay heat removal and be capable of achieving and maintaining decay long term decay heat removal.
| |
| heat removet.
| |
| ; 3. Verify the shutdoun anetysis j d. The process monitoring function should be addresses the following secondary l
| |
| capable of providing direct readings of the shutdoem fmetions:
| |
| i process verf ables necessary to perfone and control the above functions. A. Monitorirg and S. Stgeort (HVAC, cooling water, l
| |
| : e. The sagportirvj fmetions should be and tibrication).
| |
| capable of providing the process cooling, 3 DAP FORM E-040, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| v' DESIGN REVIEW EVALUAft0N CIECKLIST IRAWER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION ' SAT /131 SAT /
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS tierication etc., necessary to permit the operation of the eg ipment used for safe shutdone ftmetions.
| |
| 99.0 The shutdoem capability for soecific fire 2.2 1. Verify dether the same attemete areas may be snipe for each swh aree, or it 2.2.1 shutdoom system is used for cable may be one uni p e combination of systems for spreading and control roan fires.
| |
| atI such erees. In eltt.er case, the alternettve shutdonc capability shalt be 2. Verify the shutdoun system has been independent of the specific fire aree(s) and evetuated to be operationet with shetI accommodete postfIre canditiens dere offsite power.
| |
| offsite power is evellable and where offsite power is not eveitable for 72 hours. 3. Verify the shutdann system has been Proceskres shall be in effect to implement evetuated to be operational with the this capability. toes of offsite power.
| |
| 100.0 If the capability to achieve and maintain Figire C1 1. Verify that alternate or dedicated cold shutdown will not be eveitable h=e=== Figure C16 shutdoen systems are capable of being of fire damage, the e pignment and systaus pouered from onsite sources.
| |
| compristre the means to achieve and maintain the hot stsuty and hot shutdoem corufitions 2. If systemi not pouered from onsite shall be capable of maintaining such source, verify an evolustion that conditions until cold shutdoem can be dan ==nts the system's adspacy.
| |
| achieved. If such e p ipment and systems will not be capable of being powered by both 3. Verify that ansite power sources onsite and offsite electric power sytems are capable of operating the system for i because of fire damage, an independent onsite 72 hours.
| |
| l 4 DAP FORM E-040, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| l 1
| |
| t i
| |
| ; DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IR8WER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (nnnasmT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(31 NC/WA CGNENTS 1
| |
| t power sytem shall be provided. The rseher of operating shift personnet, exclusive of fire brigade members, rewired to operate such I equipment and systems shall be onsite at all l times, a
| |
| )
| |
| i i
| |
| I i
| |
| l i
| |
| i 1
| |
| l 1
| |
| 5 DAP FORN E 060, REV. 2, 03/13/86 I L
| |
| - I
| |
| | |
| 'N . ,
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| 94.0 Safe Shutdown Capability FPPR Rev.3 1. Verify the systems used to provide 2.5.3.1 reactivity control includire cold
| |
| ; Fire protection features should be provided 2.5.3.1 shutdoen.
| |
| 1 for structures, systems, and components 2.5.3.2 important to safe shutdown. These features 2.5.3.3 2. Verify eat h==nts the W=ey should be capable of Limiting fire damage so 2.5.3.4 of the reactivity control system.
| |
| that: 2.5.3.4
| |
| , 2.5.4.7 3. Verify the systems used to provide
| |
| ! (a) One train of systems necessary to 2.5.4.10 reactor coolant inventory control.
| |
| achieve and maintain hot shutdown conditions 2.5.4.10 from either the control room or emeegency 2.5.3.5 3a. Verify eat h==nts the W=ey control station (s) is free of fire damage, 2.5.3.5 of the reactor coolant irwentory and 2.5.3.5 system.
| |
| 2.5.4.6 (b) Systems necessary to achieve and 4. Verify the system used to provide maintain cold shutdoen from either the reactor coolant pressure control, control room or emergency control station (s) can be repaired within 72 hours. 5. Verify what h==nts the W=ey of the pressure control system.
| |
| : 6. Varify the system used to provide initial and tone term heat renoval.
| |
| : 7. Verify what documents the W=ey of the heat removat systems.
| |
| : 8. Verify whether heet tracing is regaired to support a post-fire hot stancby system.
| |
| 1 DAP FORN E 041, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| s v DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| l I
| |
| : 9. Verify whether a Ltbrication system is recpaired to styport a post fire hot staruby system.
| |
| , 10. Verify if a cooling water systen is regJired to support a post fire hot stantby system (for pump cooling or heet enchanger operation).
| |
| 94.1 11. Verify if MVAC is recpJired to sigport a post-fire system (including personnet access).
| |
| I i
| |
| : 12. Verify the instrtmentation that will be used to annitor the reactivity control.
| |
| l
| |
| : 13. Verify the documentation of the
| |
| ] W =ey of the reactivity monitoring
| |
| ! capabitity.
| |
| : 14. Verify the instruusntation that i
| |
| ulti be used to monitor the reactor 1
| |
| coolant inventory control system.
| |
| a
| |
| : 15. Verify the documentation of the adequacy of the reactor coolant 2 DAP FORN E-041, REV. 2, 08/13/86 j
| |
| i ,
| |
| i l
| |
| | |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmeER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS irmntory sonitoring capability.
| |
| i 16. Verify the instrumentation that will be used to sanitor the reactor coolant pressure centrol system.
| |
| l l 17. Verify est documents the W-y i of the roector coolant pressure l annitoring capability.
| |
| l j 18. Verify the instrumentation that I will be used to annitor the heat I removal capability.
| |
| l
| |
| : 19. Verify eat documents the adecpancy l
| |
| of the heet removat sanitoring capability.
| |
| : 20. Verify the instr e tation that j wiit be used to monitor the sipport systems.
| |
| : 21. Verify eat documents the adecpecy of the support system sonitoring capabitity.
| |
| 4
| |
| : 22. Verfly that procedJre (or
| |
| ! guideline) was utilized to identify the components (equipment) of a shutdown 3 DAP FORM E 041, REV. 2, 08/13/86 i
| |
| i a
| |
| | |
| n N U J ' '
| |
| C-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST MlmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPil0N SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDeqENTS systaa to ensure ade<pate performance of the system.
| |
| : 23. Verify that an adequate raaber of i components have been identified.
| |
| 96.0 The performance goals for the shutdom FPMt Rev.3 1. Verify the systems that are used to functicns should be: 2.5.1.1 provide hot stancby reactivity control 2.5.1.2 for alternate shutdom.
| |
| (a) The reactivity centrol function should 2.5.3.5 be capable of achievire and maintaining cold Figure C 3 2. Verify the system that is used to shutdom reactivity cceditions. C-10 provide cold shutdom reactivity Figure C-8 control for alternate shutdom.
| |
| , (b) The reactor coolant make w fmetion C-5 C-9 ahould be capable of maintaining the reactor C-10 C-11 3. Verify the docusantation that coolant level above the top of the core for addresses the W m cf the BWR's and be within the tevel indication in reactivity control system.
| |
| the pressurizer fo PWs.
| |
| ]
| |
| ; 4. Verify the systems used to provide 1 (c). The reactor heat removal fmetion reactor coolant inventory control.
| |
| I should be capable of achievirig ord j maintaining decay heat removat. 5. Verify the documentation that addresses the adequacy of the reactor l (d). The process monitoring f metion should coolant inventory systems.
| |
| be capable of providing direct readings of the process variables necessary to perform 6. Verify the system used to provide and control the above functions. reactor coolant pressure control.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E-041, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| k t
| |
| I DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLM8ER , REV._,DAT E l
| |
| I REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCUENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COWENTS i -
| |
| (e). The sup orting f metions should be 7. Verify the documentation that capable of providing the process cooling, addresses the adegJacy of the reactor librication, etc. necessary to permit the coolant pressure control systas.
| |
| operation of the egalpment used for safe shutdom fmetions. 8. Verify the systems used to provide decay heat removal.
| |
| : 9. Verify the documentation ackfressing the % = y of the heat removal system.
| |
| I 10. Verify the alternate shutdom I
| |
| system provides the following instrumentetion:
| |
| : a. Pressurizer pressure and level.
| |
| 1 b. Reactor coolant hot tog temperature or exit corp thernacotete and cold tog j temperature.
| |
| l
| |
| : c. Steam generator pressure and level (vide-range).
| |
| : d. Source range flux monitor.
| |
| : e. Diagnostic instrumentation for shutdom systems,
| |
| : f. Level indication for att tanks used.
| |
| 98.1 11. Verify Wiether heat tracing of l
| |
| l 5 DAP FORM E-041, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| {
| |
| | |
| ; O-i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,0 ATE 4
| |
| l REFERENCE DEsat!PTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION NC/NA CCBOENTS
| |
| ]
| |
| RWST's piping is re@ied for an alternate safe shutdown system.
| |
| ; 12. Verify s ether a (thrication system is re w ired to stgport an alternate shutdom system.
| |
| : 13. Verify dether cooling water is
| |
| ; rewired to steport alternate shutdom systems.
| |
| ] 14. Verify d ether NVAC is re @ irad to sipport a post-fire alternate shutdoom system.
| |
| : 15. Verify that a procedare (or guldetine) was utilized to idontify the components of the alternate systems to l ensure ade@ ate performance of the I
| |
| systems.
| |
| : 16. Verify that en adequate mmber of components have been identiffed.
| |
| l l
| |
| 99.0 The shutdown capability for specific fire FPPR Rev.3 Verify whether the same alternate or areas may be unique for each such area, or it 4.1 dedicated safe shutdown systen is used
| |
| {
| |
| may be one uni @ e combination of systems for for a control roan and cable spreading i att such areas. In either case, the room fire.
| |
| 6 DAP FORM E-041, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| O i . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIO: SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION WC/NA CGOENTS I
| |
| i alternative shutchn capability shall be indeperdent of the specific fire areas (s) and '
| |
| , shall acc<=wkte postfire conditions dere offsite power is available and where offsite power is not avaitable for 72 hours.
| |
| Procockres shall be in effect to implement this capability.
| |
| 100.0 If the capability to achieve ard maintain FPPR Rev. 3 1. Verify the alternate shutdom system cold shutdom will not be avaltable because Figure C 1 is capable of being powered frum onsite of fire damage, the acpJipment and systems sources.
| |
| comprising the means to achieve and smintain the hot stancby and hot shutdom conditions 2. Verify the docusantation of the shall be capable of maintaining such arkry m of the onsite source.
| |
| conditions tntiL cold shutdoen can be
| |
| , achieved. If such egalpment and systems ullt j not be capable of being powered by both l onsite and offsite electric power systems because of fire damage, an independent onsite power system shall be provided. The number of operating shif t persomet, exclusive of fire brigade ers, regJired to operate l such egJipment and systens shalt be onsite at att times.
| |
| I
| |
| ; 102.0 Shutdom systems instatted to ensure postfire FPPR Rev.3 1. Verify whether non-safety systems shutck)un capability need not be designed to (eqJipment) are usect for safe shutdom.
| |
| 4 7 DAP FORM E 041, REV. 2, 08/13/86 I
| |
| i 1
| |
| | |
| h e ~
| |
| I i
| |
| l I
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST ImmRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| mo. CRITERIA (DottmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS l
| |
| t l unet seismic Category 1 criteria, sirgte fatture criteria or other desiys basis 2. Verify interface between the l
| |
| ; accident c,riteria, except idwre recpaired for non-safety and safety-related systems other reasons, e.g., because of interface used for safe shutdonn.
| |
| with or ispect on existirg safety systems, or because of adverse valve actions chae to fire damage.
| |
| l i
| |
| i 1
| |
| ! i 1
| |
| I 1
| |
| l i
| |
| I l
| |
| 8 DAP FORM E 061, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N i . .' . e*
| |
| j l
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| ] REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCDeENTS i
| |
| j j 94.0 Safe Shutdows capability FPPR Rev.3 1) Verify that a procedJre (or j established criteria) was utilized to j Fire protection features should be provided identify the circuits / cables necessary for structures, systems, and ctuponects to sigport operation of the shutdoom
| |
| ; important to safe shutdoen. These features ogsipment.
| |
| should be capable of timiting fire % so that: 2) Verify application of the procedure j
| |
| (or criteria) to identify j (a) One train of systems necessary to circuits / cables.
| |
| ; achieve and maintain hot shutdown conditions from either the control roan or amergency j control station (s) is free of fire damage, I and (b) Systems necessary to achieve and maintain cold shutdoom from either the control roam or emergency control station (s) can be repaired within 72 hours.
| |
| I i
| |
| 95.0 To meet the guidelines of Position C.5.b.1 FPPR Rev.3 1) Verify that a procedJre (or (criteria 94.5), one of the fotLowing means established criteria) was utilized to of ensuring that one of the redtsident trains determine separation of rodadant
| |
| ! is free of fire damage should be provided: circuits / cables necessary to steport i operation of the shutdown equipment.
| |
| (a) Separation of cables and egJipment and l associated circuits of redteident trains by a 2) Verify that separation regLairements fire barrier having a 3-hour rating, of red mdent circuits / cables have been Structural steel forming a part of or steport properly identified.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E-042, REV. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N .. +
| |
| (- v J i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMRER , REY._ ,DATE
| |
| ] REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION K/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| l
| |
| } such fire barriers should be protected to j provide fire resistance swivalent to that regaired of the barrier, (b) Separation of cables and agalpment and associated circuits of redsident trains by a horizontat distance of more than 20 feet with no intervening combustible or fire hazards.
| |
| In addition, fire detectors and an automatic fire sagspression system should be installed
| |
| , in the fire area, or i
| |
| (c) Enclosure of cable and agalpannt and associated circuits of one redmdant train in a fire barrier having a 1 hour rating. In addition, fire detectors and an autountic i fire stggiression system should be instetted in the fire area.
| |
| ! 96.0 If the guidelines of Positions C.5.b.1 FPPR Rev. 3 1) Verify that a procedare (or (criteria 96.0) and C.5.b.2 (criteria 95.0) established criteria) was utilized to camot be set, then alternative or dedicated determine Wiysical and electricat
| |
| ; shutdom capability and its associated independence of the atternative circuits independent of cables, systems or shutdom circuits / cables.
| |
| ; components in the area, room, or zone m der consideration should be providad. 2) Verify application of the procedure I to provide independence of the atternative shutdom circuits / cables.
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-042, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| i
| |
| | |
| i
| |
| [ *) %.
| |
| .l I
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIou
| |
| ) CNECKLIST MUESER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (Dot 2SENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION IIC/MA CGOENTS i
| |
| I.
| |
| I 3 102.0 Shutcham systems installed to ensure postfire FPPR verify that non-safety reteted transfer l shutdoom capability need not be dosipated to switches utilized in Class 1E circuits f meet selenic Category 1 criterie, single to provide electrical isolation were l feiture criteria or other desi p beels adespately reviewed for other desip
| |
| ] accident criteria, escept towre recpaired for basis accident criteria.
| |
| j ether reasons, e.g., because of interface with or lepect on esisting safety systems, or I
| |
| because of adverse valve actions char to fire desmee.
| |
| I 5
| |
| i 3
| |
| 1 i
| |
| l i
| |
| l 3 DAP FORM E-042, REV. 2 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLmRER ,REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATimi MC/NA CGeENTS 99.0 The shutdom capability for specific fire FPPR Rev.3 Review FPPR to determine idiether areas may be miemt for each such area, or it auttiple alternate and/or dedicated any be one misse combination of systems for shutdom models will be used for fires att such areas. In either case, the in variais areas. For multiple models, alternative shutdonc capability shall be verify separate procedures are j independent of the specific fire area (s) and available. Watkdoom selected shalL accete postfire conditions idiere proce&res and/or portions of 1 of fsite power is available and ediere offsite procochares.
| |
| power is not available for 72 hours.
| |
| I Procedures shall be in effect to laptement this capability.
| |
| 100.0 ff the capability to achieve and maintain FPMt Rev.3 Verify an analysis of persomet cold shutdown will not be available because regsfred for start-g and operation of of fire damage, the ecpJipment and systems the alternate shutdown systems has bwn
| |
| ; comprisire the means to achieve and maintain perforimed. Verify the correct rumber the hot stanchy and hot shutdown conditions of people are avaltable on site at alt
| |
| ] shott be capable of maintaining such times. Compare annual actions recpJired conditions etit cold shutdoom can be ty procedure with manual actions achieved. If such egsipment and systems will identified in shutdone analysis.
| |
| not be capable of being powered by both Watkdoom selected prococharat tasks and
| |
| ! onsite and offsite electric power systems verify persomet analysis time tines.
| |
| I because of fire damage, an independent onsite power system shall be provided. The raater l of operating shif t persomet, exclusive of l fire brigade members, required to operate i
| |
| such egJipsent and systems shall be onsite at l att times.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E-044, REV. 2, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| . S -%
| |
| 1 l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVAtuATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| i No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATICRI NC/NA CGOENTS l
| |
| l j 101.0 Epipment and systems comprising the means to FPMt Rev.3 Watkdown selected marsant actions of the j achieve and maintain cold shutdem conditions procodres. Verify processes and
| |
| ! should not be W by fire, or the fire controls are in piece concerning the 1-demge to etd e@ipment and systems should storage and maintenance of meteriets be tioited to that the systems can be made re@ ired for system repairs. Verify 4 operste and cold shutdam achieved within 72 time lines for perfonsing selected i hours. Noteriets for such repairs shett be repairs.
| |
| reediIy eveltabte orsite and procedares shoti be in ef fect to implement such repairs. If
| |
| ! such egJipment and systems used prior to 72 j hours after the fire will not be capable of being pouered by both onsite and offsite j electric power systems because of fire damage, an independent onsite pouer system i
| |
| should be provided. E@ipment and systems i tsed af ter 72 hours any be powered by of fsite q power anty.
| |
| i I
| |
| 9 l
| |
| l t
| |
| 1 2 DAP FORN E-044, REV. 2, 08/13/86 4
| |
| | |
| .A4,
| |
| (
| |
| A \
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRAIRER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCIAIENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION HC/NA CGeENTS 95.0 To meet the guidelines of Position C.5.b.1 CP-EI 4.0 58 1) Verify that a proce&Jre/ guideline (criteria 96.0), one of the following means was utilized to evaluate ccuptiance to of ensuring that one of the rededent trains the criteria.
| |
| is free of fire damage should be providad:
| |
| : 2) Using the selected fire areas, (a) Separation of cables and espalpment and verify that reemdant epipment and associated circuits of red edent trains by a cabling are protected in accordance fire barrier having a 3 hour rating. with the criteria.
| |
| Structural steel fornirg a part of or sg porting such fire barriers should be a) Identify the components within protected to provide fire resistance the fire areas.
| |
| espaivalent to that recpaired of the barrier, b) Identify the circuits within the fire areas.
| |
| (b) Sgaration of cables and espaipment and c) Identify the associated circuits associated circuits of rodadant trains by a within the fire areas.
| |
| horizontet distance of more than 20 feet with d) Identify the method of no intervening combustible or fire hazards. compliance.
| |
| In addition, fire detectors and an automatic e) Verify confonamnce to the fire s@pression system should be instatted criteria.
| |
| in the fire aree, or (c) Enclosure of cable and equigrant and associated circuits of one rededent train in a fire barrier having a 1-hour rating. In addition, fire detectors and an automatic fire sg pression system should be instatted in the fire area.
| |
| %.0 If the guidelines of Positions C.S.b.1 P174-02 1) Verify that a procedare/ guideline 1 DAP FORM E-065, REY. 2, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| # ..- - m DESIGil REVIEW EWLUATION CHECKLIST IRAIRER ,REV._ ,DATE 1
| |
| i REFERENCE DESG IPTION SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (DOCIAENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI NC/NA CDGENTS l
| |
| l 1
| |
| ; (criterie 96.0) and C.5.b.2 (criteria 95.0) ins utilized to evetuate compliance to
| |
| ! camot be set, then alternettve or dedicated the criteria (procesre should identify l shutdann capability and its eseociated editch areas respaire alternettve circuits i. , A.; of caldes, systees or shutdanm),
| |
| ragw-unts in the eres, rocer, or zone inder f consideration should be provided. 2) using the selected erees, verify
| |
| , application of the procedare/ guideline. '
| |
| l 1
| |
| i I
| |
| l 1,
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-045, REV. 2, 08/13/86 1
| |
| I i
| |
| j
| |
| | |
| . w 0. ,
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNE0CLIST IRaeER .REV._ ,DATE REFEREN DESGIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| MO. CRITERIA (D0031ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATICRI NC/uA CGeENTS 2.0 Egaipment shall be located, instatted, ES-100 Verify in the electrical erection spec assembled, and/or comected in strict sect. 1.3 that compliance regairements include accordance with the fottowing as applicables E1-1701, Sh. 1 tatest approwet-for-corstruction drawings and/or murusfacturer's (1) Latest approved-for-c e struction instructiers (IEEE 336 1971 Section 4).
| |
| & mdings (2) Manufacturers' instructiore verify that equipment ammtirg (3) Instattation specifications and regairements are based on structural procedares criteria or manufactwer's recommendations.
| |
| ! Care shalt be especir, tty exercised in j following the provisions of the above verify that instattation instructions
| |
| , h - nts for operations such as: inctude itaus such as weld or boIt stres, meteriets, tocitweehers, torgae
| |
| ! (1) Cabte putting regairements, esponsion anchors, j (2) Cable splicing groutire and shie materials, motor (3) Cable terminettne fo m dations, and ma nting with respect (4) Cable routirg including maintainirg to vibrations.
| |
| i regaired separation between redsident systems l (5) Tagging and/or identifying various items I incitafing cable
| |
| ! (6) Installing electric and Irstrtmentation penetration =dtles and asswing the
| |
| ; integrity of the c mtaltument seats.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test rewirements of ES-100 Verify that the electrical instattation i
| |
| sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be sect. 2.17 & design doctments (drawings, specs.)
| |
| I addressed ty the instattation desip 2.18 include the inspection and test i
| |
| i 1 DAP FORM E-046, REV. O, 06/26/36 I
| |
| l 1
| |
| | |
| f . .-~ -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST imaWER ,REV._ ,DATE j REFERENM DESCRIPTI(Bl SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DottmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA Cl30ENTS 1
| |
| i i h - nts (ie. specification and/or regairements of sectiors 5 & 6 of IEEE i attachments, drawings, notes, etc.). 336-71.
| |
| I i
| |
| t i 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, ES-100 Verify that electrical instattation evaluation, and records regairements of sect. 6.15 desipi dociments and erection specs.
| |
| f Sectiors 7. ed 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shalt be include the inspection ard test
| |
| ! addressed Iv the installation desipi regairammts of Sections 7 & 8 of IEEE 4
| |
| documents. 336-1971.
| |
| ; 17.0 Instattation and Testing standard. ES-100 Verify the electrical instattation i
| |
| Sect. 4.7 procedures and electrical erection The penetration assembly shalt be instatted, specification for teak rate test and inspected, and tested in accordance with the electrical test of penetration assembly j . ASBEE Seiter and Pressure vesset Code, Section to comply with IEEE 317-76, section 8.
| |
| i III, $dsection NE for Class NC P- - _ as.
| |
| Instattation Prwm.
| |
| l The instattation procedares shalt include j adapante measures to prevent duance to the electric penetration assembly, Leak Rate Test.
| |
| A teak rate test shall be perforimod on each i electric penetration assembly and aperture l seat followire instattation. The test shall 2 DAP FORM E-046, REV. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| | |
| C DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECXLIST NLaeER .REV. _ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /ta6AT/
| |
| NO. GITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATICBI NC/M4 C0 GENTS j
| |
| ] he capable of detecting a leak rate of 1 X j 10E-02 std 1 X 10EQ3 cet/s or less of dry 3 citrogen with rated pressure at a sient
| |
| } temperature. The electric penetretion
| |
| ) asaeely and aperature seet shall be either
| |
| ! desipied for or field rigged to accept this test. The totet teakage rate of dry nitrogen .
| |
| shalt not escoed 1 X 10E-02 std 1 X 10E03 cogs.
| |
| NOTE 1: The above mentioned teek rate of 1 X 10E-02 std 1 X 10EG3 cars of dry nitrogen, for field testing, is not to be confused with j the more stringent pro &ction of leek rate
| |
| ! respairements in Section 7.1.
| |
| i
| |
| , NOTE 2: laten method of penetration attachment is ty weldirg, the aperature seats (the wettents) should be tested after instattation recpaired by Section III of ASBE I
| |
| goiter and Presswe vesset Code editch may permit testire the aperature seats as port of j the contaitument integrated Leak rate test.
| |
| t Electrical Tests.
| |
| l Af ter the penetration assembly is instatted, I
| |
| each conchJctor may be given the following tests:
| |
| I i
| |
| l 3 DAP FORM E-066, REV. O, 06/26/86 '
| |
| i I I
| |
| | |
| e -
| |
| DESIGI KVIEW EvaluATIGI CE ELIST inseER .KV._ ,DATE KFERENCE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (000 M NT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(BI NC/ lea CGeENTS (1) Contirmalty.
| |
| (2) Insulation resistance to grow d.
| |
| Dietectric strength tests may be destructiw in nature. If sash dietectric strength tests are specified, they shall comply with Section ,
| |
| 7.3 except that test voltages used ehett not escoed 80 percent of the values shoun in that section. The preceding electrical test may be performed before of af ter enternet (field) cables are comected to the penetration asesehty.
| |
| 21.0 Each dieset generator and its associated In the electrical toyout drawings and o wipment is located in a separate room with specifications, wrify the separation melts desipied to protect the dieset and solemic category criteria as generators and associated e pipment against specified in this criterie.
| |
| an $$E, tornados, missiles, and fire.
| |
| 24.0 Two Selassic Category I Dieset Canerator Verify en the electrical drawings for guildings, which are part of the Safeguards diesel generator buildings, that they guildings, are provided as sheen in Figures are seismic Category I safeguards 1.2-11 and 1.2-17. che building contains buildires.
| |
| diesel generators 1EG1 and 1EG2, instetted as part of thit 1 construction; the second building caontains 2EG1, and 2EG2, instatted 4 DAP Foltet E-066. REV. O, 06/26/86 f
| |
| l 1
| |
| w
| |
| | |
| __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. - _ _ _ _ - _ _ . ._.___-- _- . . . _ . _ - . . _, .- -. . _ _ . _ . - _ _ - - -._-- ~ .
| |
| ; e * -
| |
| \
| |
| l 1
| |
| J DESIGN REVIEW EvnLuATION CECKLIST IR8eER .NEV._ ,DATE 4
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTIM SAT /tsISAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (D00 M NT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIGI NC/NA CDOENTS I
| |
| l i es part of unit 2 construction.
| |
| 4 I
| |
| a j 106.0 Class 1E espalpment and circuits are cteerty El-0030 Verify for selected enuntirg/fondation identified on hws and & amines in El-0727
| |
| * ewings that are for Ctess 1E
| |
| ), accordance with IEEE 496-1974. electricot espalpeant, that they are identified with the ters w teer Safety Relater on the title or first page of the draulnes (IEEE 496-1974).
| |
| I I
| |
| I J
| |
| t I
| |
| i i
| |
| l, I
| |
| 1 i '
| |
| I i 1 l
| |
| 1 1
| |
| l 5 DAP Faitst E-066, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EvattJATION CIECKLIST NL81gER . AEV._,DATE REFEREME DESGIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATICBI NC/uA CDeENTS 2.0 EqJipment shall be located, instatted, ES 100 SEC. Verify in the specification that assembled, and/or comected in strict 1.3, 2.26 consdience respirements include latert accordance with the following as applicalde: SEC. 4.7 approved-for-construction draulnes and amnufacttrer's instructions.
| |
| (1) Latest approved-for-construction drawings Verify that electrical continuity for (2) Isanufacturers' instructions gramd currents is provided throughout (3) Instattation specifications and the raceumy system of trays, coruhits, procedures homes, and f Lealbte conekits.
| |
| Care shalt be especially esercised in Check that design ac h tes following the provisions of the above instattation practices such as h w ts for operations such as: clearance between trays and between trays and ceiling to facilitate calde (1) Cable puttire instattation. Verify that instattation (2) Cable splicing Instructions and timitations on the use (3) Cable terminatire of tray covers are addressed.
| |
| (4) Cable routfrg including maintainire respired separation between re&ndant systems (5) Taggire and/or identifying various items incttsiing calde (6) Installing electric and instrumentation penetration assemblies and assuring the integrity of the contairement seats.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test respirements of ES-100, SEC. Verify that the specification incitades Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shatl be 2.17 & 2.18 recpirements for inspection & tests per addressed by the instattation deslyi section 5 & 6 of IEEE 336-1971, or 1 DAP F0lNE E-047, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALIJATION CECKLIST IASWER .KV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTI(BI SAT /tSISAT/
| |
| N0. CRITERIA (D00MNT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIGI IIC/ IIA CG W NTS cbcaments (ie. specification and/or ,
| |
| refers to other proce&res, attachaunts, drawings, notes, etc.).
| |
| 4.0 The inspection and test data erulysis, ES-10, SEC. Verify that the specification includes evetuatim, and records respairements of 6.15 respairments for processing inspection Sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be & test data and technical records addressed by the trutettetton design retention.
| |
| h -rw s.
| |
| 5.0 Catdes are instatted in ladder-type trays, Verify that structuret interface totetty enclosed trays, conchaf ts, and deciments for setemic cat I tray indergroimd &ctbares. In generet, the cable sipports exist and that troy si4 port !
| |
| tray system conforms to NEstA VE 1-1971 (39), tocations are specified. i Calde Troy System. Troys respairing seismicatty cyantified sipports are anstyred and sigports are located as recpaired.
| |
| 6.0 sigports for the seismic Category I In the physical layout due. verify the electrical catde troy and con < syste are setemic cat. for cable trays to comply desipwd to resist the gravity and seismic with FSalt 3.100.3. Verify that loads leposed on them by the cable trays structural design criteria include and/or concisits. weights of cables and tray meterial, '
| |
| seismic toads and concentrated loads (IEEE 422, sect. 13.4.4).
| |
| i ,
| |
| l 2 DAP FORfl E 067, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| I j DESIGN REVIEW Es tunTION
| |
| ; CIECKLIST IRSWER .AEV._ , LATE I REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(Ni SAT /tatsAT/
| |
| ) 110. CRITERIA p amsT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATIGI NC/un CtsgENTS i
| |
| a 7.0 Simports for the cable trays are sede of E1-1705 Check tray sigport drawirgs for (tructural steel members, and sipports for specification of asteriets and the the conduits are made of structural steel or presence of transverse and longitudinal 1 mistrut members. The cable tray or condait bracing.
| |
| f raceway sipport systems are adegately braced j in the transwerse and longitudinet directions Check installation instrictions for the i to accatet for the loadires in these use of espansion anchors and tray j directions. attachments to hangers.
| |
| 8.0 In a vertical stack of trays, except for GTu-2441, Fig. Verify on drawings and specification
| |
| ] short distances et vertical to horizontal 1 tne troy order by voltage tevel as
| |
| ; transitions, the highest voltage level is on ES-100 stated in criteria.
| |
| I the top, with touer trays descending in order El-1701 of voltese tevet, control trays and finetty El-1702 j instrumentation trays et the louest level. caste & RACEm i J
| |
| erasraaF REP e i 2,10 l
| |
| 9.0 m en Class 1E cables are routed between E1 1702 Verify that electrical erection adjacent solamic Category I buildirgs, (leeve specification or she. containsthese l ene buildire and enter another building) one construction details in accordance with
| |
| {
| |
| buildire ustt is provided with rigid FSAR 8.3.1.4.3. I metal condait sleeves and the other buildirg l watt has a relatively large opening depending
| |
| ; on the raaber and size of enhedded sleeves.
| |
| , Ctess 1E cables are routed between seismic Category I building watts by either of the i
| |
| i j 3 DAP Falut E-067, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| l t
| |
| | |
| 1
| |
| [ m - -
| |
| \ \
| |
| 1
| |
| ] DESIGN REVIEW EVALIJATION
| |
| ; CE MLIST imaWER ,KV._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFEREleCE DESCRIPTICBI SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (DOCUIENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATION IIC/MA CGOENTS l
| |
| 4 following methods:
| |
| , s. men cable tray is instatted on the side j with well openings, the tray will be routed
| |
| ; through the steewes onto cable tre<,
| |
| or sleeves witL be entended throudi i the nell opening with short tergths of condait enablirg cables to be routed onto j cable troy rismirg alorg the ueLL. At the j opposite oral of the % sleeves, l continous coruhalt or cable tray will be J instatted; l
| |
| i
| |
| ; b. men continuous condait is rm between j tuo such adjacent buildirgs, a flexible connection is achieved by using ligald tight I
| |
| flexible metal condait. The flexible condait is instatted on the side with the melt opening.
| |
| j 11.0 Cable troy fitt criteria generetty tielt the verify that tray filt criteria Limits etassation of cross-sectional erees of control fitt to 301 and 40E of cross sect. aree j cables and power cables to a monises of 40 of power and control tray respectively.
| |
| j and 30 percent, respectively, of the usable i k cross-section of the troy. Ilouever, these verify that design process provides the percentages any be exceeded provided the checks as stated in this criteria.
| |
| ! foLtowing conditions are satisifled: -
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E-067, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| | |
| t I
| |
| 1 DESIGII REVIEW Ev4LunTION l CECKLIST INE .REV. _ ,DATE REFERDICE DESCRIPTI(BI SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DrJAENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATIoll NC/uA CGeENTS
| |
| : 1. Cables do not estatus above the sideraits j of the cable tray.
| |
| I 2. For power caldes - the therent reting of
| |
| ! the cable is not exceeded.
| |
| l 3. Catde troy sigport design is adopete.
| |
| 12.0 In the case of audium voltage and targer ES-100 SEC. 4.2 werify dremires mut/ar specification 600-V power caldes, ideen sized for maintained for instructions as stated in criteria space, a miniman separation of one-garter of regarding spacing arid tray fitt for the diameter of the targest calde is medita and larger 600W power cables, j maintained. For this case, fitt may exceed i 30 percent but is tioited to a single catde I
| |
| toyer. Cordalt fitt for both power sid controt catdes is tielted in accorderte with j the EC.
| |
| 15.0 Cable trays dich are not overfitted any have ES-100 Check that specification contains these catnes extending above the top of the catde instructions to contractor, tray sideraits as a result of specific instattations confiprettors. This situation may occur as caldes enter or exit trays, at calde tray fittirg sta:h as toes and crosses,
| |
| ; and roer tie-dmes points for cables. Cables
| |
| ] may extend above the top of calde trar j sideraits if the situation does not result in 1 an electrical or mechanical separation l problem and the cables are not routed near I
| |
| 5 Dap FORet E-067, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| 1,
| |
| )
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW ElmhLunTION CIEELIST laseER .KV.sDATE
| |
| ! DESCRIPTitti REFEREME SAT /LAISAT/
| |
| j 20. M ITERIA (nnrimsmT, PAGE) 0F 1ERIFICATIGI WC/uA CGsENTS 1
| |
| i 1
| |
| ] potential hazards dich may came gerysical J dmunge to the catdes.
| |
| 1 l
| |
| i
| |
| ! 16.0 Catdes are routed in separate receumy systems Verify on the drawings that caldes are according to voltage and fisiction as fottous: routed in esperate raceuer systems
| |
| ] according to vottage and fisiction as
| |
| : a. 6.9-kV power described in the Criteria.
| |
| t b. Low-voltage pouer (tess than 600 VAC) and
| |
| ! 125 1sc powee I c. AC and DC control (msy caontain 125-ice l or 120-vac peuer caldes provided the carrent j they norimally carry does not onceed the l sininas aspecity of control cordstors in the recommy system)
| |
| : d. Instrimentation catdes.
| |
| i !
| |
| I j 66.0 IEEE 386 (1974) Section 3, Recausy ES-100, SEC. Verify in the catde schodste and
| |
| ) 3.9 electrical layout drawings that
| |
| ; Interlocked armoa enclosirg catde should not aintertecked armor enclostre cable i be construed as a recemy. shastd not be construed as a recourr a j i as specified by Res. Guide 1.75 (P.C2) i
| |
| { and IEEE STD 306-74 sec. 3.
| |
| l i i l i
| |
| 6 DAP FORM E-067, REY. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| | |
| i l DESIGil REVIEW EwALUATIou j CIEELIST IR8eER .REV._ ,DATE I
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(NI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l 110. M ITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F WRIFICATI(NI IIC/ IIA CGOENTS i
| |
| 1 l 81.0 Generet Plant Areas. ES 100, SEC In the electricot layout draulnes 1 . 4.11 GTu-2441 worify the miniana separation distance in plant erees from dich potentist hazards SEC 6 betusen rodadent cetde trays and such as missiles, enternet fires, and pipe E1 1792-02 potentist heaerds ou d as missite, i dip are eactuted, the minima separation enternet fires & pipe d ip. (IEEE l distance between reemdent calde trays shett 306-74) 5.1.4.
| |
| he determined by Section 5.1.1.2 or, dere
| |
| ) the conditions of Section 5.1.1.3 are met,
| |
| ; shott be 3 feet between trays separated j horizontally and 5 feet betusen trars j esperated verticalty. If, in addition, hip i energy electric egalpment such as eultchgeer, i transformers, and rotstfrg espalpment is l escluded and power cables are instetted in enclosed receuers that spatify as barriers, or there are no pouer cables, the minima i esperatisi distance may be as specified in
| |
| { Section 5.1.3.
| |
| ; 90.0 The miniones esperation distances specified in verify the physical toyeut draulnes and Section 5.1.3 and 5.1.4. are based on open electricot erection spec. (and cable wentiIeted cabte trays of elther the tadder fitt cetcutatlon) for comptlance of
| |
| ) or tronch type as defined in IIDIA ME 1-1971, IEEE 306-1974 (5.1.1.3).
| |
| Cable Tror Systems. leere these distances
| |
| ; are taed to provide adespate physical
| |
| { esperation:
| |
| (1) Cables and racemeys Irwotwed shall be 7 DAP FORII E-067, REV. O, 06/26/86 I
| |
| | |
| ~ . -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EwaltJATION CNEMLIST IRalBER .EEV._ ,DATE l REFERO G DESCRIPTIGs SAT /LaesAT/
| |
| MD. CRITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) OF WRIFICATIGI RC/uA CGeENTS flame retardant; , ;
| |
| )
| |
| i (2) The design beels shall be that the cetdo troys uitt not be fILted above the side raits; j
| |
| 1 (3) memords ehett be timited to failures or
| |
| { feutts internet to electric e pipment or catdes; If teseer esperation distances are used they i
| |
| shatt be established as in section 5.1.1.2.
| |
| 91.0 Identification.
| |
| j In the electricot erection i specification verify that = W Class
| |
| { Esposed Class 1E recomeys shalt be marked in 1E receuoys are marked and identified
| |
| ; a distinct periennent manner at intervets not as described in this criterie.
| |
| to emceed 15 feet and at points of entry to and esiting from enctooed erees. Class 1E
| |
| , receumys shall be marked prior to i instettetten of their caldes.
| |
| Catdes instatted in these raceways ehett be marked in a marmer of sufficient chrability
| |
| , and at a sufficient raaber of points to
| |
| ! facilitate initiet verification that the instattotion is in conformance with the f separation criteria. These catde merkings
| |
| ) a Dae Fonse E-067, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| I
| |
| : g. .
| |
| l t
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EWhLUATIGI CEmLIST IRaeER .REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFEREIICE DESSIPTIGE SAT /LatSAT/
| |
| l NO. MITERIA (000aENT, PAEE) 0F WRIFICATIGI IIC/ IIA CGOENTS l
| |
| sha1L be apptied prior to or charing
| |
| , instatlation.
| |
| ; Class 1E cables shalt be identified by a
| |
| ; perumnant marker at each erut in accordance l with the design taulnes or cable schedate.
| |
| .i The method of identification used to meet the above regsirements shall readily distirguish between rodmdent Class TE systems and between Class 1E and non-Class 1E systems.
| |
| l 100.0 The fourth character of a cable tray verify that specification contains
| |
| {' identification number identifies idiether or these instructiers to contractors.
| |
| not the given raceuer contains safety-related j cables. The fourth character is obtained j frasi the first tetter of the aggnicable train i or reactor protection chamet color code ...
| |
| i For non-safety-related receuers, the fourth I character is 'K'.
| |
| l l 102.0 In addition to the tag raabers, Class 1E In the electrical specification verify
| |
| ! ecpalpment, racewers, arut cables in raceways the color cedire identification to are identified by the foltcuing color codirg comply with this criteria.
| |
| system:
| |
| : a. ESF Systen 9 DAP FORN E-047, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| ! DESIGN REVIEW EVAWATION 1
| |
| 2 CIEELIST InseER ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERDICE DESCRIPTION SAT /LSISAT/
| |
| 110. G ITERIA (D00AEENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COOENTS 1
| |
| i Train A Drarge (0)
| |
| ! ' Train B Green (G) i b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems l st Chamet Levet j Chamet 1 Red (R) j Channel 2 White (v) _
| |
| Channel 3 stue (s) i Chamet 4 Tettou (T) i j c. Associated Circuits I
| |
| J Associated Train A Orange with white j stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with site y
| |
| stripes (G) '
| |
| : d. leon-Class 1E Circuits I
| |
| t 1 Train C Black (B) 1 1
| |
| : e. Non-Class 1E Calde Re:euers and Ecpalpment a
| |
| Natural raceumys color or natural espaipment color 104.0 Exposed raceways containing Class 1E cables In the electrical erection J
| |
| 10 DAP FolWE E-047, REv. O, 06/26/86 1
| |
| l i
| |
| i l i i
| |
| | |
| e-e DESIGN REVIEW EvnttJATION CIEELIST NLAGER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTI(31 SAT /ulSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS are marked by the color codes described specification wrify the recpairements prevloisty in a distinct permanent menner et of FSAR 8.3.1.3(4b) for color codite intervets not to exceed 15 ft and at points merking Intervels and pre instattation of entry to and exit from anctoned areas. Instructions.
| |
| These receueys are marked prior to the installation of their cables.
| |
| 1 11 DAP F0ml E-047, REY. 0, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| _t_s -
| |
| p DESIGI REVIEW EVALunTION CIECKLIST IRAWER .NEV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00AENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI 11C/NA CGOENTS I
| |
| 2.0 EgJipment shall be located, instetted, ES 100 SEC. Verify in the electrical erection assembled, and/or comected in strict 1.3, 2.26 AND specification that compliance accordance with the following as applicable: 4.7 regJirements include latest approved for construction drawires and/or (1) Latest approved-for-construction manufacturer's instructions.
| |
| drawings (2) Nanufacturers' instructions verify that electrical contfruJity for (3) Installation specifications and ground currents is provided throtshout I
| |
| proce&res the raceway system of trays, condalts, homee, and flealble condJits.
| |
| Care shall be especially exercised in following the provisions of the above doctments for operations such as:
| |
| l
| |
| ; (1) Cable putting
| |
| ; (2) Cable splicing
| |
| ) (3) Cable terminating (4) Cable routing including maintainire
| |
| ! regaired separation between rodadent systems j (5) Taggire and/or identifying verlous items including cable (6) Installing electric and instrumentation penetration essemblies and assuring the integrity of the contairment seals.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test regJirements of ES 100 SEC. Verify that the electrical erection Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be 2.17 & 2.18 spec. and latest trutallation desir addressed by the installation desim h m ts include the inspection and 1 DAP FORM E 48, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| v . -
| |
| DESIGIl REVIEW EVAtunTION CIERLIST IRAGER .REV._ ,DATE REFERE18CE DESGIPTIGI SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (00(18ENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA COSENTS l
| |
| h=mts (ie. opecification and/or test respirements of Sections $46 of l sttachments, dramirws, notes, etc.). IEEE 336-1971.
| |
| l
| |
| ! 4.0 The inspection and test data anstysis, ES-100 SEC. Verify that the electrical erection i evetuation, and records recpirements of 6.15 spec. Inctistes respirements for l Sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be proceseire, inspection, and teet data addressed by the installation doel p and tecMical records retention.
| |
| i h M s.
| |
| { 6.0 Steports for the seismic Category I On the physical toyout drawings verify i electricot cable tray and conchaf t system are that the solemic category for conduits
| |
| ! desi r ed to reelst the gravity and solemic complies with FSAR 3.105.3.
| |
| i toads luposed on them by the cable troys and/or conduits. Verify that structural design criterie include weights of cables and conduit l material and seismic toeds, i
| |
| ; 7.0 Sigporto for the cable trays are made of Et 1705 Check conchit steport &amings for l structuret steet members, and es4 ports for specification of meteriets and the
| |
| ; the conduits are made of structuret steel or presence of transverse and longitudinal taistrut members. The cable troy or conchit bracing.
| |
| raceumy eL9 port systems are adequately braced in the transverse and longitudinal directions Check installstion Instructions for the to accotet for the loadings in these use of empension anchors.
| |
| directions.
| |
| l 2 DAP FORM E-48, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| 1 DESIGil REVIEW EVALUATICII
| |
| ! CIECKLIST HLSIEER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERElICE DESCRIPTIGI SAT /talSAT/
| |
| No. OtITERIA (DoctalENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/ IIA CGsEllTS 9.0 men Class 1E cables are routed between El 1702 Verify that the electrical erection adjacent solemic Category I guildirge, (leeve specification or drawirge contain these one buildity and enter another building) one corstruction details in accordance with l
| |
| buildfrg welt is provided with h rigid FSAR 8.3.1.4.3.
| |
| : metal conduit sleeves and the other buildire watt has a rotatively terge opening depending l
| |
| i on the rumber and size of sleeves.
| |
| Class 1E cables are routed between seismic Category I building walls by either of the following methods:
| |
| : a. men cable tray is installed on the side with weLL openings, the tray witL be routed through the h sleeves onto cable tray, or M stseves wiLL be extended through
| |
| ; the watt openire with short lengths of i conduit enablire cables to be routed onto f cable troy ru ning along the wett. At the
| |
| ! opposite end of the sleeves, f continous consatt or cable tray will be j instatted; i
| |
| : b. men continuous cordait is rm between two such adjacent buildires, a flexible i connection is achieved by using tigald tight j flexible metal condJit. The flexible con & sit is instetted on the side with the well opening.
| |
| 3 DAP FORet E 48, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| ! l
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| O' DESIGM AEVIEW EVALUATION CIEtXLIST NLMBER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DE3GIPTI(M SAT /tMSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 18ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGoENTS 1
| |
| i 1
| |
| 14.0 Class 1E switchgear ro es are located El-0726 verify on the electrical Installation adjacent to the dieset generator buildings to El-0727 deelyn draulnes that cable between l minimize the tength of the cable r e s betusen El 0717 Clasa IE switchseer and associated
| |
| ; the switchgear and associated diesel diesel generator is rsm entirely in 4
| |
| generators and reduce the possibility of cordaf ts.
| |
| anchanical desage to the connections.
| |
| Additionet protection is provided to the generator toads by rtsining the cables entirely in cordatte.
| |
| 16.0 Cables are routed in separate raceway systems verify the draufree that cables are according to voltage and fmetion as tottous: routed in separate raceuer systems according to the voltage levet and
| |
| : e. 6.9-kV power ftmetion as described in the criteria.
| |
| : b. Low-voltage power (less than 600 VAC) and 125 E power
| |
| : c. AC and DC control (may caontain 125 E
| |
| ! cr 120 VAC power cables provided the current they norsetty carry does not exceed the minieue aupacity of control cordctors in the receuey system)
| |
| : d. Instrumentation cables.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 48, Riv. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| . ~
| |
| l DESIM REVIEW EVALUATION CIEGLIST IR8CER ,REV._ ,DATE l REFERENCE DEsmIPTim SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| } No. MITERIA (DOC 18ENT, PAGE) 0F VER!FICATim NC/NA CODENTS -
| |
| 66.0 IEEE 386 (1974) Section 3, Recausy ES 100 SEC. 3.9 Derify in the cable schedste and electrical toyaut & aulnes that Interlocked armor enclosing calde should not
| |
| " Interlocked armor encloofre cable be construed as a raceusy.
| |
| should not be construed as a racemey" as spectfled by Respatatory Guide 1.75 P. C2. and IEEE 386-74 Section 3.
| |
| 91.0 Identiffestion. In the electrical erer.tlen specification, verify that e gased l Fugm.d Class 1E raceumys shall be marked in Ctess 1E recouers are omrked and a distinct permanent mmmer at intervels not IdontifIed as described in thIs j to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to I
| |
| criteria.
| |
| and emiting from enclosed areas. Ctess 1E raceways shall be marked prior to Instattation of their cables.
| |
| ; Caldes instetted in these raceusys shall be marked in a momer of sufficient darability and at a sufficient rumber of points to facilitate Initial verification that the Instatlation is in conformance with the separation criteria. These calde omrkings shatt be apptied prior to or darIng
| |
| ; instatlation.
| |
| Class 1E cables shall be Identified by a pennenent marker at each end in accordance 5 DAP FORM E-48, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| e -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CEKLIST lamber ,KV._ ,DATE REFERENG DESCRIPTION SAT /talSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (D00 M NT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CG M NTS with the design drawings or cable schedale.
| |
| The method of identification used to meet the above regJirements shalt reedity distimish -
| |
| between twdsdent Class 1E systems and between Class 1E and non-Class 1E systems.
| |
| l 102.0 In addition to the tag numbers, Class 1E in the electrical erectiori equipamt, raceways, and cables in raceways specification verify the color coding are identified by the following color codity identification to comply with this system: criteria.
| |
| : a. ESF System Train A Orange (0)
| |
| Train 3 Green (G)
| |
| : b. Reactor Protection System and ESF Systems at Chamet Levet Chamel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channet 2 mite (W)
| |
| Chamet 3 Blue (B)
| |
| Chamet 4 Yellow (T)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits Associated Train A Orange with 4 8te stripes (0) 6 DAP FORM E 48, REV. O, 06/26/86 l
| |
| | |
| a -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIENLIST ImmeER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENG DESCRIPTIGI SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO. GITERIA (D003ENT, PAGE) 0F W RIFICATI M NC/NA CGOENTS Associated Train 8 Green with thite stripes (G)
| |
| : d. Non-Ctess 1E Circuits 1
| |
| Train C Black (5)
| |
| : e. Non-Ctess 1E Cable Recousys and EcpJipment
| |
| 'l j Natural receways color or naturet
| |
| ; ecpJlpment color 104.0 Exposed receways contelning Ctess 1E cables
| |
| ; In the electricot erection are eerked by the color codes described specification verify the recpJfreeents previounty in a distinct perennent menner et of FSAR 8.3.1.3(4b) for cotoe code intervets not to exceed 15 ft and at points eerkins intervets e d pre-Instattation of entry to and exit from enctooed erees. Instructions.
| |
| ' These recoveys are marked prior to the installation of their cables.
| |
| l l
| |
| l 7 DAP FORM E-48, REV. O, 06/26/86 i
| |
| 1 l
| |
| | |
| l' A.
| |
| ) DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION I
| |
| CEELIST NLAGER .REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESGIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. OtITERIA (DottmENT, PAGE) 0F WERIflCATIGI NC/NA CGeENTS 2.0 E gipment shall be located, instetted, ES 100 Verify in the specification that assembled, and/or comected in strict sect. 1.3, compliance re yfrements include latest accordance with the following as applicable: 2.2f., 4.7 a p roved for-construction
| |
| * avings and manufacturer's instructions.
| |
| (1) Latest approved for-construction drawings (2) Manufacturers' instructions (3) Instattation specifications and procesares care shatt be especialty exercised in followleg the provisions of the above
| |
| ! h-nts for operations such as:
| |
| (1) Cable putting (2) Cable splicing (3) Cable terminating (4) Cable routing including maintaining regired seperation between redaidant systems (5) Tagging and/or identifying verlaus items including cable (6) Installing electric and instrumentation penetration assembtles and assuring the integrity of the containment seats.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test regairements of ES-100 Verify that the epocification includes Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be Sect. 2.17 and re y frements for inspection and tests I
| |
| addressed by the installation deste 2.18 per section 5 and 6 of IEEE 336 71, or 1 DAP FORM E-049, REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| &? y w DESIGet REVIEW EVALUATION CIEMLIST IRaeER . REY. ,,DATE REFEREIICE DESQtIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| 110. CRITERIA (00CL8ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI IIC/18A CGsENTS I
| |
| l
| |
| ! h = nts (ie. specification and/or refers to other procedares.
| |
| j attachments, draufree, notes, etc.).
| |
| 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, Es-100 verify that the specification includes evetuation, and records rewirements of sect. 6.15 regairements for processing inspectirn
| |
| { sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shalt be and test data and technical records
| |
| ! addressed by the instettetton desi m retention.
| |
| )
| |
| I hMs.
| |
| 10.0 Class 1E cables are routed betusen ES 100 Verify that specification and draulnes non-adjacent seismic Category I buildings wie sect. 5.2.2, contain solemic regairements and category I duct borts. The dact banks 5.8 dactbart extentions to condait system consist of rigid motel condalts encased in El 1702 as stated in criteria.
| |
| ! concrete restfrg on bedding and hock fitt
| |
| , materlats. Duct bank rigid conduit ends and Verify that the following regairements
| |
| ! building rigid condait ends are cormocted by are adequately addressed in the means of flealbte metet-conduits. epecification and draulnes:
| |
| l 1) ogport spectry prior to concrete pour;
| |
| : 2) concrete and reber piscing, soit compactire, concrete testirg; restriction on reber ptactre eroned single dets; i
| |
| : 3) grotmding provisions in sur60tes,
| |
| ; 2 DAP FORM E-069 REV. O, 06/26/86
| |
| | |
| $ r ..
| |
| 3 4
| |
| ] DESIGIf REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRaeER .REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFEREllCE DEsmIPTI(Bl SAT /talSAT/
| |
| NO. MITERIA (DOCI M NT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION IIC/ IIA CGOENTS l
| |
| l l
| |
| l includire cetdo trays and metholes comections to gromd grid; i
| |
| : 4) eartote diaerelans to ettou for i cetde bendire;
| |
| : 5) esperetten between redsident cisets a duct endings.
| |
| i 6) dactbanks below freet line and steping touards ear 60tes, drainese -
| |
| provistors in ear 60tes.
| |
| i l
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-049, REV. O, 06/26/86 l -
| |
| | |
| .6- p c.
| |
| O Cs -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NimBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DocimENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS 2.0 Ewipment shall be located, installed, ES-100 Verify that the specification prwides assembled, and/or comected in strict Pages 4-9, art =ry=te instructions on ecceptable accordance with the following as applicable: 4-10, 4-11, materials and practices for aplices and 4 12, 4-13 terminations.
| |
| (1) Latest approved for-construction App. B drawings DCi s's 9001, Check that the design provides (2) Manufacturers' instructions 10013, 12267, installation instructions for such (3) Installation specifications and 22326 items as:
| |
| procedures Construction ProcedJre No.: 1) Proper overlap and size of Care shall be especiatty exercised in 35-1195-EEI-8 inautating materiets following the provisions of the at a e Rev. 5 2) Certified tools for crisp terminels l documents for operations such as: Appendix (C) 3) Matching of splice and termination El 1702 barrels to condJctor AWG.
| |
| (1) Cable putting 4) 8Kv voltage stress relief.
| |
| (2) Cable splicing (3) Cable terminating Also verify that drawings or spec. have (4) Cable routing including maintaining instructions for re@lred cable slack regJired separation between redadant systems before termination.
| |
| j (5) Tagging and/or identifying various items incitding cable (6) Installing electric and instrumentation penetration assembtles and assuring the integrity of the containment seats.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test re@ lrements of ES 100 Verify that applicable inspection and
| |
| , Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336 1971 shall be Page 2 11 test requirements are incitzled in the addressed ty the installation design App. 8 specification.
| |
| I 1 DAP FORet E-050, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| r f) ~.f..
| |
| (_) d DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPilms SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctMNT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COgENTS documents (ie. specification and/or Attachment I attachments, drawings, notes, etc.). Pages 5-1-1-5 and B-1-1-6 Construction Procedure No.:
| |
| 35-1195-EEI-8 Appendix 'C'
| |
| . Section C-15 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, ES 100 Verify that applicable e nluation and evaluation, and records re w irements of Pages 2 2, 2 8, records re wirements are included in Sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shalt be 2 11, 2 12, the specification.
| |
| addressed by the instattation desi m 2-13, 2 14, documents. 2-15 13.0 IEEE 384(1974) - Section 5.1.1.3 should be ES 100 Verify that desim output documents
| |
| , s o lemented as follows: Page B 1-1 1 prohibit cable splices in receways, or, if permitted, an analysis exists in the
| |
| "(4) Cable splices in raceways should be FSAR justifying then.
| |
| 4 prohibited."
| |
| Basis: Splices have been identified as the initiating cause of several fires in raceways. Even d ere the separation distance is adewate to prevent a fire in the raceways of one division from affecting cables in a redundant division, all practical means 2 DAP FORM E-050, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| Y m,9 l
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| { N0. CR11ERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CIBOENTS j should be used to prevent the occurence of a l fire. This position egelnet splices in j receueys is therefore prudent. Splices are 1
| |
| not, by themselves, inacceptable. If they
| |
| ; eulst, the resulting design should be j justifled by onetyees. The onetyses shoutd be stheitted as part of the Safety Anotysis i
| |
| Report.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| j 1
| |
| 1 I
| |
| i
| |
| ,I
| |
| }
| |
| 4 0
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E 050, REY. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| k
| |
| ~ 9' A v
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMgER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION COWENTS NC/NA i
| |
| 2.0 EcpJipment shall be located, instat ted, ES-100 Verify that the specification provides i assembled, and/or comected in strict Pages 4-9, adequate instructions on acceptable accordance with the following as applicable: 4-10, 4-11, materlats and practices for splices and 4-12, 4-13, i
| |
| terminations.
| |
| (1) Latest approved-for-construction 4 14, 4 15 drawings App. g Check that the design provides (2) Manufacturers' instructions DCA's 82170, installation instructions for such (3) Instattation specifications and 7747, 9001, items as:
| |
| procedures 9444, 9695, 12183, 12267, 1) proper overlap and size of Care shall be especially exercised in 12644, 22326, insulating materials,
| |
| ) following the provisions of the above 22660 2) staggering of multi cordctor documents for operations such as: aplices, j 3) certified tools for crisp (1) Cable putting terminals, (2) Cable splicing 4) matching of splice and terminatie.
| |
| (3) Cable terminating barrels to condJctor AWG.
| |
| (4) Cable routing includirg maintaining a regJired separation between redJndant systems Also, verify that drawings or (5) Tagging and/or identifying various items specification have instructions fr,r including cable regsfred cable stack before (6) Installing electric and instrtmentation termination.
| |
| penetration assemblies and assuring the l
| |
| Integrity of the containment seats.
| |
| 3.0 The inspection and test regJirements of ES 100 Verify that applicable inspection and Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be Pages 2 2, 2 11 test requirements are incitsfed in the i addressed by the installation design App. e specification.
| |
| 1 DAP FORM E 051, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| C
| |
| \
| |
| h/ h/ - "
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS h ==nts (ie. specification and/or Page B-5 attachaunts, drawings, notes, etc.). Attacheant 1 Pages 5 1 2 3 and B-1 2 4 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, ES 100 Verify that applicable evaluation and evaluation, and records rewirements of PAges 2 2, 2-8, records re wirements are included in Secticos 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shalt be 2-11. 2-12, the specification.
| |
| addressed ty the instattation design 2-13, 2 14, documents. 2-15 DCA #10013 13.0 IEEE 384(1974) - Section 5.1.1.3 should be El-1701 Verify that design output h==nts stgplemented as follows: prohibit cable splices in raceways, or, if permitted, an analysis exists in the
| |
| "(4) Cable splices in raceways should be FSAR justifying them.
| |
| prd ibited."
| |
| Basis: Splices have been identified as the initiating cause of several fires in raceways. Even d ere the separation distance is adew ate to prevent a fire in the raceways of one division fresa affecting cables in a redsulant division, att practical means should be used to prevent the occurance of a fire. This position against splices in raceways is therefore prtzient. Splices are 2 DAP FORM E C5t REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| p %
| |
| O V
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST IRmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CCMMENTS not, ty themselves, snacceptable. If they exist, the resulting design should be justified by analyses. The analyses should be sibnitted as part of the Safety Analysis Report.
| |
| 46.0 Att Class 1E control boards are deslysed in Verify that procedures exist to accordance with the IEEE 420-173 regJirments minimize butt wire splices and allow with the fotlowing clarification: than only on low power apptications such as controt cables.
| |
| Lens and buttons for aproximately forty (40) safety system inoperable indication lights and for sixteen (16) non-safety valve control devices are constructed of " LEMAN" (poly carbonate) and "CELON" respectively. These indicating tights / buttons are granged and enclosed in metal hotsing to provide separation between them and other equipment on the main control board. Cable connections are provided on the back plate of the housing for externet wiring. Internal fire (unlikely event) in the housing will not significantly degrade the integrity of the main control board.
| |
| Wire splices are used in limited applications on field cables that terminate in certain Class 1E panels, cabinets, or racks. The 3 DAP FORM E 051, REV, 0, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| p - l2 O
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION d
| |
| CHECKLIST MlmOER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA C0peqENTS
| |
| ; nomal design is to teminate field cables without the tse of wire splices. The wire
| |
| ; splices are only used when additional length is regJired for the field wire and it was not judged reasonable to pull e new field cable.
| |
| The use of such wire splices has been minimized.
| |
| The wire splicos are butt splices. The crimpire technique, device and materials used j for the splices are identical to those used j for the teminst lugs in that penet. The
| |
| ; wire splices are only allowed on low power i
| |
| applications such as control cables. Since previounty accepted crisping methods and materlats are used the splices are timited to low pouer circuits and to field cables that I
| |
| already teminate in the panel, and the regaired wire separation and wire tudies I
| |
| j s p t is maintained, the wire aplices are not expected to sipificantly alter the heat i toad in the penet, the probability of a fire
| |
| ] or the operability of any equipment or cables in that penet, i
| |
| a j 4 DAP FORM E-051, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| D .- =
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NuteER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l tD. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COOqENTS i
| |
| i
| |
| ]
| |
| 1.0 Physical locations of Class 1E e@lpment are ES-100 In the electrical erection selected to minimize vulnerability to Sect. 4.11 specification verify that the
| |
| @ ysical damage. The degree of separation GTN-2441 re@irements for Class 1E equipment and takes into accourit the potential hazards in a sect. 5 & 11 separation criteria complies with the I
| |
| particular area. Separation is achieved by stated criteria.
| |
| Locating egipment and circuits in separate rooms, maintaining distance, or by use of barriers. The potential hazard of non-safety related equipment failure on safety-related rechadant e@ipment is considered in choice of e@ipment location or
| |
| , protection.
| |
| i i 2.0 Equipment shall be located, installed, ES 100 Verify in the electrical erection spec assembled, and/or connected in strict Sect, 6 that compliance re@iremgnts include accordance with the following as aplicable: latest approvet for constr w tlan drawings and/or manufacturer's.
| |
| (1) Latest approved-for construction instructions (IEEE 336-1971 Section 4).
| |
| drawings i (2) Manufacturers' instructions j (3) Installation specifications and i procedures Care shall be especially exercised in f following the provisions of the above
| |
| ; documents for operations such as:
| |
| J (1) Cable putting 1 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86 1
| |
| | |
| "N g . .
| |
| l i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i i
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION- NC/NA COBENTS i
| |
| (2) Cable splicing
| |
| , (3) Cable terminating (4) Cable routing including maintaining repired separation between re&ndant systems (5) Tagging and/or identifying various items including cable (6) Instalting electric and instrumentation penetration asseetzlies and assuring the integrity of the contalruent seats.
| |
| , 3.0 The inspection and test rewirements of ES 100 Verify that the electrical installation Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be sect. 2.17 & deste documents (drawings, specs.)
| |
| addressed ty the instattation design 2.18 include the inspection and test documents (ie. specification and/or re @ lraments of Sections 5 & 6 of IEEE j attachments, drawings, notes, etc.). 336-1971.
| |
| ; 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, ES 100 Verify that electrical Installation l evaluation, and records rewirements of Sect. 6.15 design documents and erection specs.
| |
| Sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be include the evaluation and records addre; sed by the installation design re@lraments of Sections 7 & 8 of IEEE
| |
| ; documents. 336-1971.
| |
| 5.0 Cables are installed in ladder type trays, ES-100 Verify that the electrical instattation
| |
| , totally enclosed trays, conduits, and Pg. 4-15 design documents ackfress solemically l tswierground &ctbanks. In general, the cable ES-19 @ellfled supports for trays requiring tray system conforms to NEMA VE 1-1971 L39), such.
| |
| i i 2 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| )
| |
| i, I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| l o - -
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION I
| |
| CNECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS
| |
| , Cable Trey System. Trays recpJiring
| |
| ] seiseical1y galified sigports are anaIyzed and steports are located as regaired.
| |
| 6.0 Sagports for the Seismic Category I ES-100 Verify that the epocification electrical cable tray and con &Jit system are Pg. 4 16, 4-17 adegately defines the recpJirements of desi ped to resist the gravity and seismic cable tray stpports.
| |
| toads imposed on them by the cable trays and/or condJits.
| |
| 7.0 Steports for the cable trays are made of ES-100 Verify that the specification structural steet members, and sipports for Pg. 4-16, 4 17 adegately defines the material the con &Jits are made of structural stoet or regJirements for the cable tray t smistrut members. The cable tray or condait sagports. '
| |
| raceway sigport systems are adequately braced in the transverse and longitudinal directions to accoint for the loadirus in these directions.
| |
| i 8.0 In a vertical stack of trays, except for ES-100 Verify that the specification short distances at vertical to horizontal Pg. 4-35 identifies the stacking of trays by transitions, the highest voltage tevel is on GTN 2441 voltage level as required by the the top, with lower trays descending in order Fig. 1 criteria.
| |
| of voltage level, control trays and finally instrumentation trays at the lowest level.
| |
| 3 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| A . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NimBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAil0N NC/NA COWENTS 9.0 m en Class 1E cables are routed between Verify that the specification adjacent seismic Category I Buildings, (leave %=tely specifies routing one buildire and enter another building) one regJirements between adjacent seismic building walt is provided with ==har*ied rigid Category I buildings.
| |
| metal conduit sleeves and the other building well has a relatively large opening depending on the nw ber and site of embedded sleeves.
| |
| Class 1E cables are routed between seismic Category I building walls by either of the following methods:
| |
| : a. M en cable tray is installed on the side with watt openings, the tray will be routed through the embed $ed sleeves onto cable tray, or embedded sleeves will be extended through the wolt opening with short lengths of conduit enabling cables to be routed onto cable tray rtnning along the wall. At the opposite end of the embedded sleeves, j continous conduit or cable tray will be installed;
| |
| ] b. men contiruJous condJit is rtn between i two such adjacent buildings, a flexible I
| |
| comection is achieved by using ligJid tight flexible metal condJit. The flexible conduit is instatted on the side with the watt opening.
| |
| 4 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| , i I
| |
| | |
| o 3 o-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NtmgER ,REV._ ,0 ATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO.CRITFRIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATIGl NC/NA COWENTS l
| |
| 10.0 Class 1E cables are routed between ES-100 Verify that the specification contains non-adjacent seismic Category I buildings via sect. 5.2.2, &ct bank seismic recpairements and dict Category I duct banks. The dJct banks 5.8 bort flexible connections to the consist of rigid metal condJits encased in conchait system as stated in the concrete resting on beckfing and back-fitt criteria, meterials. Duct bank rigid conduit ends and buildire rigid condJit ends are comected by Verify that the following regJirements means of flexible metal conduits. are adecpJetely acMressed in the specification:
| |
| 1
| |
| : 1) set spectre prior to concrete pour; l 2) concrete and reber placing, soit j compactirs, concrete testirg;
| |
| : 3) grotoding provisions in murdeles, including cable shields;
| |
| : 4) mordete dimensions to atlow for cable bending radius Limitations;
| |
| : 5) separation between redandant dacts at dtst endings.
| |
| i 12.0 In the case of medium voltage and larger ES-100 Verify drawings and/or specification 5 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| N . .
| |
| v i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLmgER , REY._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/MA CGgENTS j 600-V power cables, een stred for maintained Sect. 4.2 for instructions as stated in criteria i space, a minimum separation of one-garter of regarding spacing and tray fitt for
| |
| ! the diameter of the targest cable is medium voltage and targer 600-V power maintained. For this case, fitt any exceed cables.
| |
| 30 percent but is Limited to a single cable toyer. Conduit fitt for both power and control cables is Limited in accordence with the NEC.
| |
| I 13.0 IEEE 384(1974) - Section 5.1.1.3 should be .ES-100 Verify that the specification contains sigptemented as follows: prohibitive instructions on cable 4 eptices in raceusys and, if j "(4) Cable splices in raceusys should be appropriate, contains exceptions prohibited." thereto.
| |
| Basis: Splices have been identified as the initiating cause of several fires in racemeys. Even d ere the separation distance 4
| |
| is adee mte to prevent a fire in the racemeys of one division from affecting cables in a redandant division, att practical means
| |
| ] should be used to prevent the occurance of a fire. This position against splices in racemeys is therefore prudent. Splices are not, by themselves, mecceptable. If they exist, the resulting design should be justified by analyses. The analyses should be siteitted as part of the Safety Analysis
| |
| : 6 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| I DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST NLAGER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| l
| |
| ; REFERENE DESCRIPTION SAT /LalSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS Report.
| |
| 15.0 Cable trays d ich are not overfitted may have ES 100 theck that specification contains these j cables extending above the top of the cable instructions to contractor.
| |
| j tray sideraits as a result of specific l Instattations configurations. This situation may occur as cables enter or sit trays, at
| |
| { cable tray fittig such as toes and crosses, and near tie doun points for cables. Cables may extend above the top of cable tray i sideraits if the situation does not result in an electrical or mechanical separation problem and the cables are not routed neer potential hazards dich may cause physical 1 damage to the A les, i
| |
| 14.0 Cables are routed in separate raceway systems ES-100 Verify in the specification that there according to voltage and fmetton as foltous: are instructions on installine cables in raceusys systems.
| |
| : a. 6.9-kV power 1 b. Low-voltage power (less than 600 VAC) and 125 VDC power
| |
| : c. AC and DC control (may contain 125 VDC or j 120 VAC power cables provided the current 4 thay normally carry does not exceed the j
| |
| 7 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 d
| |
| | |
| O . .
| |
| i l
| |
| ~
| |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST NLMBER , REY._ ,0 ATE
| |
| ]
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
| |
| * SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (D00 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION CONENTS NC/NA i minisue agacity of control cordstors in the raceway system)
| |
| ] d. Instrumentation cables.
| |
| l
| |
| ; 17.0 Installation and Testire Standard. ES 100 Verify that the electrical instattation Sect. 4.7 procodres and electrical erection The penetration assembly shall be installed, specification r g irements for leak inspected, and tested in accor h e with the rete and electrical test for l AssE Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section penetration assemblies comply with IEEE l III, Stheection NE for Class NC Components. 317-1976, Section 8.
| |
| Instaltation ProcedJres.
| |
| 4 The installation procedares shall include l W =te measures to prevent daange to the electric penetration assembly.
| |
| i Leak Rate Test.
| |
| ) A teak rate test shall be performed on each electric penetration assembly and operture j seat following instattation. The test shall I be capable of detecting a leak rate of 1 X 10E-02 std 1 X 10E03 csVs or less of dry nitrogen with rated pressure at emblent temperature. The electric penetration assenbty and aperature seat shall be either 8 DAP FORN E 052, REY. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| }
| |
| | |
| i t
| |
| l DES!G:: REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRSWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DES (XIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ; NO. CRITERIA (DOCLSIENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS
| |
| .l destynd for or field rigged to accept this i test. The total Iclage rate of dry nitrogen shalt not exceed 1 X 10E-02 std 1 X 10E03 cm/s.
| |
| I
| |
| ! NOTE 1: The above mentioned teak rate of 1 X 10E-02 std 1 X 10E03 can/s of dry nitrogen, for field testing, is not to be confused with I
| |
| the more stringent prodztion of teak rate re@irements in Section 7.1.
| |
| 4 i
| |
| NOTE 2: When method of penetration attachment is by welding, the aperature seats (the weldments) should be tested after installation rewired by Section III of ASIE soller arul Pressure vessel Code idiich any permit testing the aperature seats as part of the contairunent integrated teak rate test.
| |
| Electrical Tests.
| |
| After the penetration assembly is installed, each condxtor may be given the following tests:
| |
| (1) Contiruity.
| |
| (2) Insulation resistance to ground.
| |
| Dielectric strength tests may be destructive 9 DAP FORM E 052, REY. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| s a
| |
| | |
| O O O~
| |
| :l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CDOENTS in nature. If such dielectric strength tests i are specified, they shall comply with Section l 7.3 except that test voltages used shall not exceed 80 percent of the values shown in that section. The preceding electrical test may be performed before of after external (field) cables are connected to the penetration assembly, a
| |
| 19.0 IEEE 422 1973, Guide for the Design and Verify that the spec includes IEEE Installation of Cable Systems in Power 422-1973 recpairements for the desim Generatirup Stations (Draf t 3), is implemented and instattation of cable systems.
| |
| in the design of the safety-related systems.
| |
| I (Note: IEEE 422 addresses: physical f separation of medlun-voltage power,
| |
| ) tow-vottage power and control, and low-levet l si p al cables; separation and identification of rechadant cable systems; shielding and shield grotndirgp; installation and handling recommendations (including cable putLing
| |
| { considerations); acceptance testing of cable systems; raceuoys.)
| |
| 37.0 The minisua separation distance between Class ES-100 In the specification verify that the 1E ocpalpment and wiring internal to the GTN 2441 minlaun separation distance between 1 control switchboards can be established by Pg. 15 Class 1E ecysipment and wiring internal analysis of the proposed instattation. This to control switchboards is adegantely 10 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| k C% O. .
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NUMBER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| i No. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COGENTS ana1ysis shett be based on testa perfonned to specified.
| |
| determine the flame retardant characteristics of the wiring, wiring materlats, e @ipment, and other materials internal to the control switchboard. W ere the control switchboard seterlats are flame retardant and analysis is not performed, the minisun separation distance shall be 6 in. in the event the above separation distances are not maintained, barriers shall be instatted between re&ndent Class 1E egalpment and wiring.
| |
| 39.0 mere rededent Class 1E wiring is terminated ES 100 Verify that the electrical erection on a comunon device, the provisions of Section GTN 2441 wification adegantely defined the 5.6.2 shall be met. Pg. 16 re@lrguents for terminating rodadant
| |
| ~
| |
| Class 1E wiring on a common device.
| |
| 40.0 Non-Class 1E wiring not separated fran Class ES-100 Verify that the electrical erection i
| |
| 1E wiring by the minisun separation distance GTN 2441 specification defines the appropriate 5
| |
| (determined in Section 5.6.2) or by a barrier Pg. 16 regairements den non-Class 1E wiring shall be treated as associated circuits in is not separated from Class 1E wiring.
| |
| { accordance with the re@irements of Section 4.5.
| |
| 41.0 Re&ndant Cles: 1E cables entering the ES-100 In the specification check that the 11 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| 3
| |
| | |
| o-DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGGENTS control board enclosure shall meet the GTN-2441 re@lraments for redtsident Class 1E regairements of IEEE 384-1974 Section 5.1.3. Pg. 16 cables entering the control board enclosures are stated antaryantely.
| |
| l 1
| |
| ; 42.0 Re&ndant Class 1E instruments shall be ES-100 In the specification verify that the l located in separate cabinets or compartments GTN-2441 recpairements for routing external l of a cabinet. Pg.16 cables to redJndant Class 1E instruments in instrument cabinets are mere redmdant Class 1E instruments are property defined, located in separate compartments of a single cabinet, attention must be given to routing l of externet cables to the instruments to l
| |
| assure that cable separation is retained.
| |
| i In location Class 1E instrument cabinets, attention sust be given to t'he effects of att pertinent destyi basis events.
| |
| 56.0 Safety-related agalpment, exposed raceusys, ES-100 Verify that the electrical erection j and cables are identified by distinct color GTN-2441 specification specified the markers so that the pt et personnet can Pg. 9 recpairements for color markers for distinpJish, without resortire to any eq=are raceways, safety related l reference material, between the various ocpalpment, and cables.
| |
| rechndant Class 1E systems and between redmdant Class 1E systems and non Class 1E circuits.
| |
| 12 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| i I
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| r i O- -
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| , CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE j REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ] NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS j
| |
| 68.0 Associated circuits instatted in accordance ES 100 Verification is performed u1 der
| |
| ! with Section 4.5(1) of IEEE 384 (1974) should Giu 2441 Criterion No. 54.0.
| |
| l be stbject to att regJirements placed on Pg. 5 Class 1E circuits such as cable derating, environmental gJatification, flaae
| |
| , retardance, splicing, restrictions, and
| |
| ; raceway fitt taless it can be desenstrated
| |
| ^
| |
| that the absence of such requirements could not signifIcantty redJce the avalLabitity of the Class 1E circuits.
| |
| I 69.0 IEEE 384 (1974) - Non-Class 1E ES 100 Verify in the electrical erection instrtmentation and control circuits should GTu 2441 specification that regJirements for not be exempted from the provisions of Pg. 5 separation of non Class 1E and Section 4.6.2. associated circuits are clearly defined, and that non-Class 1E instrumentation and control circuits
| |
| ; are not exempted.
| |
| 84.0 Methods of Separation. ES-100 Verify that the electrical erection
| |
| , GTM 2441 specification defines the method of The separation of circuits and ogJipment Pg. 4 separation as stated in criteria, shall be achieved by safety class structures, distance, or barriers, or any containation thereof.
| |
| I i
| |
| 13 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| 3 -
| |
| (a l
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION
| |
| , CNECKLIST IRAISER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| ' REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS 86.0 Associated Circuits. ES 100 Verification is performed m der GTM 2441 Criterion No. 54.0.
| |
| Associated circuits shall comply with one of Pg. S the following:
| |
| i (1) They shall be tmigaety identified as such and shall remain with, or be separated j the same as, those Class 1E circuits with
| |
| ; dich they are associated; (2) They shatI be in accordance with (1) above from the Class 1E equipment to and l including an isolation device. Beyond the
| |
| ; isolation device, a circuit is not stbject to l the regairements to this document provided it i does not again become associated with a Class 1E system; (3) They shall be analyzed or tested to
| |
| ) demonstrate that Class 1E circuits are not l degraded below an acceptable level.
| |
| l 87.0 Separation from Class 1E Circuits. ES-100 Verification is performed tnder GTN 2441 Criterion No. 40.0.
| |
| i Non-Class 1E circuits shall be separated from Pg. 5 j Class 1E circuits by the minimus separation
| |
| ] requirements specified in sections 5.1.3, j 14 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| J
| |
| . s l
| |
| I l
| |
| I j DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLOWER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| NO.CRITER!A (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COMENTS i
| |
| I
| |
| ; 5.1.4, or 5.6, or they become associated j circuits.
| |
| l l
| |
| l 88.0 Separation from Associated Circuits. ES-100 Verification is performed mder GTN 2441 Criterion No. 69.0.
| |
| < Non-Class 1E circuits shalt be separated from Pg. 5 4 associated circuits by the minimum separation regairements specified in Sections 5.1.3,
| |
| ; 5.1.4, or 5.6.2 or (1) the offects of lesser j separatim between the non-Class 1E circuits
| |
| ) and the associated circuits shall be analyzed
| |
| ; to demonstrate that Class 1E circuits are not degraded below an acceptable tevet or (2)
| |
| { they become associated circuits. Non-Class l 1E instrumentation and control circuite are j not regaired to be separated from associated i circuits.
| |
| 90.0 The mininass separation distances specified in ES-100 In the electrical erection i Section 5.1.3 and 5.1.4. are based on open Giu 2441 specification verify that the ventilated cable trays of either the ladder Pg. 7 regJirements for minimum separation ,
| |
| or trough type as defined in NEMA NE 1 1971, distances are defined %=tely.
| |
| Cable Troy Systems. Where these distances are used to provide adequate physical separation:
| |
| i
| |
| ! (1) Cables and raceways involved shatI be 15 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 I
| |
| I i
| |
| | |
| j \
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| ) NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICM NC/NA CGOENTS I
| |
| 1 l flame retardant; 1
| |
| (2) The design basis shall be that the calde j trays will not be fitted above the side rails;
| |
| ] (3) Mazards shall be limited to faltures or faults internal to electric ecpalpeent or cables; i
| |
| j If lesser separation distances are used they shatI be established es in Section 5.1.1.2.
| |
| I l 91.0 Identification. ES-100 In the electrical erection GTN 2441 specification verify that the method of
| |
| ; Exposed Class 1E raceways shall be marked in Pg. 9 cable and raceway identification is a distinct permanent manner at Ir.tervals not property defined.
| |
| ] to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to j and exiting fram enclosed areas. Class 1E l receways shall be marked prior to a instattation of their cables.
| |
| Cables tratatted in these receways shall be I marked in a momer of sufficient durability and at a sufficient ramber of points to
| |
| } facilitate initial verification that the instat tation is in conformance with the separation criteria. These cable markings l 16 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| 1 i
| |
| | |
| \
| |
| 1 DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST ImmBER ,REV._ ,DATE l
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC 1 MENT, PAGE) OF VERIFICATION NC/NA CGOENTS
| |
| ! shall be esplied prior to or & ring t instattation.
| |
| I i
| |
| Class 1E cables shall be identified by a permanent marker at each end in accordance with the design drawings or cable sche &te.
| |
| The method of identification used to meet the above re @irements shalt readily distinguish between re&ndant Class 1E systems ard between Class 1E and non-Class 1E systems.
| |
| , 100.0 The fourth character of a cable tray ES 100 Verify that the electrical erection identification number identifies whether or Pg. 2 25 & 2-30 specification ado p etely defined the
| |
| ; not the given raceway contains safety-related regairements for identification in cables. The fourth character is obtained accordance with the stated criteria.
| |
| ! from the first letter of the applicable train or reactor protection channel color code ...
| |
| For non-safety-related raceways, the fourth character is 'K'.
| |
| 101.0 The second character in the cable raaber 'ES-100 Verify that the electrical erection j identifies the cable color code. In Pg. 2-25 & 2 30 specification % tely defined the
| |
| ; addition, the first character of each cable remirements for identification in ramber indicates whether the cable is safety accordance with the stated criteria.
| |
| train or chamel oriented (E), associated j train (A), or non-safety-related (N).
| |
| j 17 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| l i
| |
| | |
| I I
| |
| l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATIou CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTim SAT /LMSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI m NC/NA CDetNTS l
| |
| I 102.0 In eMition to the tag rambers, Class 1E ES-100 Verify that the electrical erection f epipannt, racemeys, and cables in raceuers sect. 2-26 specification and/or L.sycut draulnes j are identified by the,following color coding property specify the identifying color i
| |
| systaa: codes of Class IE acpJipsont and raceways as described by the criteria.
| |
| : a. ESF Systaa Train A Orange (0)
| |
| ! Train 3 Creen (G) 4 l
| |
| l b. Reactor Protection Systen and ESF Systees l at Chamel Level j
| |
| Channel 1 Red (R)
| |
| Channel 2 White (W)
| |
| Channel 3 Stue (5)
| |
| Channel 4 Yettou (Y)
| |
| : c. Associated Circuits I
| |
| j Associated Train A Orarge with white stripes (0)
| |
| Associated Train B Green with s ite ,
| |
| j stripes (G) i I d. Non-Class 1E Circuits l Train C Black (8)
| |
| ) 18 DAP FORM E 052, REV. O, 08/13/86 1
| |
| l 1
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA COeENTS l
| |
| 1 I
| |
| : e. Non-Class 1E Cable Raceways and EgJipment l
| |
| Natural raceways color or natural 4 ocpJtpoent color i
| |
| l l 103.0 The preceding color codire is applied to the ES 100 Verify that the electrical erection
| |
| ] Class 1E ocpJlpment on an area dich is Sect. 2.26 spec. for the raceway installation i readily visible (e.g., close to nameplate or rocsaires color coding to be readily l identification tag raaber). visible.
| |
| l l
| |
| l 104.0 Exposed receways containing Class 1E cables ES-100 In the electrical erection i are marked by the color codes described Sect. 2.26 specification verify the criteria previously in a distinct permanent mamer at regairements for color code merking intervals not to exceed 15 ft and at points intervals and pre-instattation I
| |
| of entry to and exit from, enclosed areas, instructions.
| |
| Titese raceways are marked prior to the instattation of their cables.
| |
| i 105.0 In generat, att Class 1E and associated ES-100 In the electrical erection cat.ses are Jacket color-coded throughout Sect. 2.26 specification verify that the field their entire tength. Cab 8e jackets that color codire recpJirements prior to regJire field color coding prior to installation are adegJetely specified.
| |
| instattation will be so worked at intervals not to exceed five feet. Cable jackets that regJire field color coding after installation 19 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 I
| |
| | |
| f J O~ ~
| |
| I.
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALLETIon CHECKLIST NLSWER , REY._ ,DATE 1
| |
| No. CRITERIA ( T AGE) 0F VE CBI MA CuleENTS I
| |
| l
| |
| ; (dae to reclassification of cables from
| |
| ! essociated Class 1E to Class IE, or vice versa, after their initial pult) ulLL be field color coded as foitous:
| |
| 1 1
| |
| ; i) men entering and exiting epipment, f recevey, and inside jtsiction/ pull boxes.
| |
| I
| |
| ! 11) Alt exposed portions of the cables wiLL
| |
| ; be worked at intervels not to exceed five j feet.
| |
| i, l lii) Portions of installed cables in condJit
| |
| ; or troys will not be field color coded.
| |
| i u
| |
| 111.0 In plant areas dich are free from potential ES 100 In the electrical erection l hazards such as missiles, external fires, and GTu 2641 specification verify that the miniaun i pipe iAlp, the minimum separation between Pg. 8 separation respairements in the plant l redsident cable trays is 3 ft. between trays erees free from potentist hazards are separated horizontalty and 5 ft. between specified per the criterie.
| |
| trays separated verticatty.
| |
| I 112.0 In the cable spreading aree and the Control ES-100 In the electrical erection Room, the minisun separation between GTu 2641 specification verify that the minisun
| |
| ! redtsident cable trays is 1 f t, between trays Pg. 8 separation recpsirements in the cable separated horizontally and 3 ft. between spreading room and control room are trays separated verticalty. specified per the criterie.
| |
| i 20 DAP FORf9 E-052, REv. O, 08/13/86 I
| |
| | |
| C O' '
| |
| i f
| |
| l l DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION f CNECKLIST MlmBER ,REV._ ,DATE l REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGl NC/NA COWENTS l
| |
| 113.0 were plant arrangements preclude maintaining ES-100 In the electriest erection the minisua separation distance the redsulent GTu 2441 specification verify that the specific circuits are rm in solidty enclosed recouers Pg. 8 instructions specified if plant -
| |
| l or other barriers provided between redtsident arraneaments precliste maintaining the circuits. The miniaun distances between minimum separation distance are in j these redsident, enclosed raceways and accordance with the stated criteria.
| |
| l between barriers and raceways are in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.75.
| |
| k l
| |
| 114.0 The cable spreading aree is the space below ES-100 Verification is performed imider the Control Roam where instrumentation and GTN-2441 Criterion No. 112.0.
| |
| control cable converge prior to enterire the control, termination, or instrument penets.
| |
| This area does not contain high-energy j equipment such as switchgear, transformers, j rotatire epipment, or potential sources of
| |
| ) missiles of pipe dip. Flanumble materiet is j not stored or instatted in this aree. Cable constructions are patified in accordance
| |
| ] with IEEE 383. The circuits in this area are ,
| |
| l timited to control and instrument fisictions i and those power sigply circuits serving the
| |
| } Control Roam. Power circuits are not routed in this aree, except power cables serving
| |
| ; instrument and Control Room distribution j penets. There power cables are encased in I
| |
| i 21 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| 1 l
| |
| l DESIGal REVIEW EVALUATICII
| |
| ! CNECKLIST IR8WER ,REV._ ,DATE i
| |
| i REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ! NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATIGI NC/NA CO M NTS concrete or rm in rigid steel condaits frae the point dere they enter this area.
| |
| , In this area, a minisam separation of 1 foot horizantal and 3 feet vertical is maintained between redJndent trays, lawre receuey arrargements preclude maintaining the miniana i separation distance, the rodadant circuits are rm in enctooed receveys or barriers are provided between rededent circuits.
| |
| i.
| |
| l I
| |
| i
| |
| ) 22 DAP FORM E-052, REV. O, 08/13/86 t
| |
| | |
| N d' .
| |
| I i
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NtasER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOClMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA ComENTS i
| |
| j 2.0 Equipment shall be located, installed, verify in the desipi documents
| |
| ; assembled, and/or comected in strict (drawings and/or specification) that accordance with the following as applicable; cable putting tensions are within the limits of the aarusfacturer's ammisun i (1) Latest approved-for-construction allowable putting tension. Also verify I drawings that documents include the necessary l (2) Manufacturers' instructions instructions and procedares for cable (3) InstatLation specifications and putting to avoid any physicat damage procedares daring the putting process.
| |
| Care shall be especially exercised in Verify that the design acchtes following the provisions of the above auch installation practices as:
| |
| documents for operations such as:
| |
| , 1) Cable bending radius (1) Cable putting 2) Protection of cables instetted in
| |
| ; (2) Cable splicing receways penetrating through floors
| |
| { (3) Cable terminatire 3) Sagports for vertically suspended
| |
| ! (4) Cable routing including maintaining cables.
| |
| ! regJired separation between reemdant systems i (5) Tagging and/or identifying various items Also verify that drawings or inetuding cabte specification has instructions for j (6) Installing electric and instrtmentation regJired cable stack before penetration assemblies and asstring the tenmination.
| |
| j integrity of the contairument seets.
| |
| 1 i
| |
| ! 3.0 The inspection and test regairements of Verify that the design documents ,
| |
| i Sections 5. and 6. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be (drawings, notes, and/or specification) addressed by the instattation design have the agplicable inspection and test i
| |
| j 1 DAP FORM E 053, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| \
| |
| I l
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| - -_=--__
| |
| x %s. .
| |
| i l
| |
| l 1
| |
| q DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION 1
| |
| CHECKLIST NLAISER ,REV._ ,DATE J
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATI(M NC/NA CGOENTS h w ts (ie specification and/or re @irements to test the cable attachments, drawings, setas, etc.). Instattation.
| |
| 4.0 The inspection and test data analysis, verify that desie documents include evolustion, and records regirements of applicable evaluation and records Sections 7. and 8. of IEEE 336-1971 shall be re g irements for the cable l addressed by the installation desi p instattation.
| |
| j documents.
| |
| I j 19.0 IEEE 422-1973, Guide for the Design and Verify that the design documents Instattation of Cable Systems in Power include the proce & res and instructions Generating Stations (Draft 3), is implemented for cable putting and amminam putt in the design of the safety-related systems, distance to comply with marufacturer's (Note: IEEE 422 a&# esses: physicat rewirements.
| |
| l separation of medium-voltage power, tou-voltage power and control, and Low-level Review selected cable pulling tension si pal cables; separation and identification calculations or approach / methodology to of redsident cable systems; shleiding and ensure compliance with IEEE 422 and/or shield grou1 ding; instattation and handling marufacturer's requirements.
| |
| recommendations (including cable putting considerations); acceptance testing of cable j systems; raceways.)
| |
| {
| |
| i l
| |
| 2 DAP FORM E-053, REV. O, 08/13/86 1
| |
| | |
| , ud I
| |
| l j
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CIECKLIST IRAqBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFEREME DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| ; NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, F4GE) 0F VERIFICATI(28 NC/NA CCDetNTS I
| |
| 1.0 AC Essential arul/or DC Emergency Lighting Review lighting plan drawirgs for the systems are provided in those locations dere Diesel Generator Rooms, safeguard
| |
| , safety-related fmetions are perforund or Guilding, and Auxiliary Buildirg; for dere persomet safety is involved. They are all primary interior access routes to desipwd to provide adequate ittumination for and from the above buildings and for the safe shutdom of the plant and the all primary exits, ensure that AC
| |
| : evacuation of personnet. These areas incitate essential and/or DC emergency lf$tirg the following: systems are provided.
| |
| ; 1. Control Roan Also verify that such tighting systems
| |
| ; are provided for selected remote and
| |
| : 2. Dieset Generator Room alternate shutdown e pipment locations.
| |
| : 3. Remote shutdoun panel Locations (which include the Not Shutdoen Panel and the Shutdonn Transfer Panet)
| |
| : 4. Areas re w ired for control of safety-related e @ipment to accomplish attemate shut &nn from outside the control roas
| |
| : 5. Primary interior access routes to and from the preceding areas
| |
| : 6. Primary exits.
| |
| i 2.0 The primary plant AC Essential Lighting is Review single line drawings to ensure 1 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86 1
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST MlmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOC MENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAit0N NC/NA CIBgENTS provided by AC systems having comections to that att AC essential lighting is fram the onsite stan ty diesel generators. During motor control centers accessible to the all operating conditions or a LOCA and in the diesel generators. Also review event of the loss of att offsite AC pouer, schematic diagrams for the AC essential onsite stantRzy diesel generator power is tightire panel feeder breakers and the available to the AC Essentist Lighting safeguard MCC feeder breakers in the System. 480-V Class 1E switchgear to ensure that they remain closed darirg a LOCA or loss of offsite power.
| |
| 3.0 The ittuninetion levet provided by the AC Review lighting layout drauires for the Essentist Lighting System is as foltous: control room board area and selected primary areas to ensure that
| |
| : 1. For the Contral Room, in the control illumination levels specified in the
| |
| ~
| |
| board aree, there is futt ittumination, criteria are provided. The review will be perfonned by coupering the type and
| |
| : 2. For other primary plant areas re @lring rumber of lighting fixtures available AC essential Lighting, the ittumination level on the AC Essential Lightirg System to ranges from futt litumination to nonnat (ie., futt) illumination fixture approximately one-fifth to one-tenth of futt availability, ittunination.
| |
| 4.0 Outside the Contairument and Fuel guilding, AC See criterion No. 1.0 for AC essential Essential Lighting is provided in primary tighting for areas outside the plant areas re@ ired for safe shutdom and in containment and the fuel building. For major interior access / egress routes between inside the contalrunent, drawings will these areas. Inside the Contairunent, AC be reviewed to ensure that att 2 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| p . .
| |
| O U
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLBgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /'JISAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCUEENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGeqENTS tightire is provided for emergency egress. emergency egress areas have essential This AC tighting is sigptied power from the Lightirg. Furthensore, review will be stenchy dieset generators darire a loss of made of the breaker schematics to of f-site power but is shed darirg a LOCA. AC ensure that the molded-case breakers Essential Lighting is not provided in the inside the leCC's IEB3-2 and IEB4 2 Fuet Building, Service Water Intake feeding contelteent LIWiting Structure, and Turbine Building. transformers ELTANT-18 and -19 respectively witL be shed darirg a LOCA but not for a loss of cffsite power.
| |
| 5.0 The DC Emergency Lighting System ccmsists of Review the lighting drawings to ensure lights connected to the station betteries or adespante DC emergency tightire is individJet bettery packs. DC Emergency provided per the criterie in selected Lightire is provided in att areas needed for erees necessary for operation of safe the operation of safe shutdows ecpalpment and shutdast ocpalpment, in the control in the primary interior access /egrees routes room, and in selected areas for safe between these arees. This Lighting is egrees. Review bettery pack provided by 8 hour rated bettery packs except specification and lightirg drawings to in the control room ediere lighting is confirm proper rating of individuet provided from the Train A and Train 3 Ctess bettery packs and use of seated beam 1E station betteries. DC Emergency Lightirg type Leops.
| |
| is also provided for safe egress in other areas of the plant which include the Contairment, Fuel Building, Service Water Intake Structure, Turbine Building, and non-safety related areas of the Auxiliary guilding. Power is supplied from the station batteries or irdividual bettery packs. The 3 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| O I
| |
| O%
| |
| i DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION j CNECKLIST NLmgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| No. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PACE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS 4 bettery pack rating is 8 hours except for the I
| |
| Turbine guilding iAlch has 4 hour rated bettery packs. sattery pack tights are i seated been type.
| |
| ; 6.0 The DC Emergency Lights comected to *he Review schematic diagram and wiring to j station betteries are normat ty de-energized. confirm operation of the DC emergency i
| |
| The contactor in the DC Emergency Lighting ti$ts on toss of AC power.
| |
| penets is nornetty held open by a feed from the AC Lighting System. DC Emergency Lights l are activated by the loss of power to the AC
| |
| ; Lighting Systems.
| |
| 7.0 IndividJat bettery packs are nonmally mder a Review bettery pack drawings and float charge from the AC tighting power manufacturer's data for proper simplies for their respective areas. If an operation per criteria.
| |
| AC tighting power supply is lost, the respective DC tights are activitated from
| |
| ) their individant bettery packs by their respective relays.
| |
| 1 8.0 The llWiting (AC and DC) in the Control Room, Review lighting drawings for selected l the primary plant (non-contairument) essential arees to ensure proper train assignment control areas and the primary interior access and electrical feed, as indicated in f routes between them are arranged in a the criteria.
| |
| ; staggered pattern and atternately fed from l
| |
| ! 4 DAP FORM E-054, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| j i
| |
| l l
| |
| | |
| g N . .
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NLMgER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCitIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGsENTS the redisident trains and/or from setf contained bettery packs energized fr a either Train A Train g, or Normat AC sources. As an atteenste, d ere the engineered safety features (ESF) ogJipment is energized from a particular train, AC essential and DC emergency tightire from the same train is provided in that area and in the prienry access route to it. These practices ensure W =te Lighting in these areas teder any possible electrical siegte-failure condition.
| |
| 9.0 The AC Essential Lighting Systems are Review the lighting drawinen to ensure comected to Class 1E power system buses AC essential lighting systems are through Class 1E circuit breemers in 480 volt comocted throtgh 1E Class circuit Isotor Control Centers, Class 1E 480 breakers, Class 1E 480-120/208-volt vatt 120/208 volt step-doun transformers, swid transformers, and Class 1E tighting Class 1E tighting distribution penets. The panelboards, power cables from the 480 volt Motor Control Center to the primary side of the 480 volt Revleu power cable wiring to ensure step-done transformer and fram the secondary compliance with "1E" criteria as side of the step-doun transformer to the applicable.
| |
| Lighting distribution penet are Class 1E.
| |
| The cable raceumy system for these power Revleu selected ti $ ting raceways for cables is desiputed Seismic Category I. The compliance with criteria requiremnts.
| |
| feeder cables from the lighting distribution penets to the lighting fixture outlet boxes Verify that an anstysis exists to are Class 1E and the condait system for these demonstrate operability of lighting 5 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86 i
| |
| | |
| m O
| |
| e
| |
| * u DESIGN PEVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NL8WER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCitIPTION SAT /UNSAT/
| |
| l,
| |
| ~ NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATION NC/NA CGeENTS J
| |
| 3 feeder cables is Seismic Category II, feeder cables, as indicated in the last Operability of these feeder catdes is sentence of the criterion.
| |
| . W =tely ensured through analysis that shows that the combined conduit stresses do I not exceed 901 of their yield value.
| |
| 10.0 The AC essential lighting fixtures, fixture Review the instattation details for the j primary engports, temps, and bulbs are AC essential lighting fixtures to l
| |
| classified non-nuclear safety grade (NNS). verify that restraining cables are used and that they meet the criteria Restraining cables, with associated hardware regJirements.
| |
| (ctips, clamps, v botts, clevises, and tumbuckles) are used to prevent the AC Also, per Criterion No. 13.0, verify essential Lighting fixtures and fixture that two restraints are used.
| |
| primary steports from fatting & ring a safe shutdans) earthgJake. These items are sigptied with certificates of compilance by the annufacturer that they meet applicable standards, ircluding MIL-Specification for the cable. The destyi and construction of the restraints must meet the requirements of Seismic Category II criteria. They are instatted in accordance with quality assurance proce&res.
| |
| t 11.0 Tne DC Emergency Lighting Systems comected Review drawings to verify that the DC to the Class 1E station battery have the Emergency Lighting System power cables 6 DAP FORM E-054, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| r .
| |
| * k I
| |
| i 1
| |
| 1 1
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CHECKLIST NLMBER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION CGgENTS NC/NA l
| |
| 2 foltouing Class 1E components: station are desi p ted Class 1E from the DC betteries, DC switchcoord, power cable from switchboard to distribution panels and the DC switchboerd to the DC Lighting to tighting fixture outlet bones, and
| |
| ) distribution penets and from the DC ti$ tire that they are routed in solemic l distribution panels to the lighting fixture category I racemeys.
| |
| autlet bones. The racemey systen for the power calde is Seismic Category I.
| |
| )
| |
| : 12.0 The DC emergency lighting fixtures, tamps, Review the installation details for the fixture primary sipports, seated been temps, DC emergency tighting fixtures to j and sigports, indivi&ol seated beest bettery verify that restraining cables are used j packs and supports are non-nuclear grade and-that they meet the criterion l (NNS) components and meteriet. regJirements.
| |
| Restraining catdes, with associated herdance Also, per criterion No. 13.0, verify
| |
| ] (ctips, clamps, v bolts, clevises, and that two restraints are used.
| |
| turrtuckles) are used to prevent the DC i emergency tightire fixtures, Indivient bettery packs, and fixture and bettery pack primary styports from falling daring a safe j shutdoin earthganke.
| |
| These restraints are procured and instatted in the same momer as the restraints for the AC Essentist Lighting System.
| |
| I 13.0 Restraints are also placed on normal Iighting Review the instattation details for i
| |
| 1 7 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86
| |
| | |
| . =
| |
| J v DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST NueCR ,REV. _ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F WERIFICATION NC/NA CGgENTS
| |
| ~
| |
| system fixtures sere re@ ired in areas of selected nonent lightirg fixtures to the primary plant to ensure the integrity of verify the use of restraints to ensure safety related emipment dring seismic the integrity of safety-related event. They are procured and instatted in equipment.
| |
| I the same manner as those used on the AC I Essential and DC Emergency Lighting Systems except that for AC Essential and DC Emergency j Lightire Systems, two restraints are used per fixture d ite for the nonmet Lighting systems, one or two restraints per fixture are used for those fixtures regiring i restraints.
| |
| 4 1
| |
| l 14.0 In the areas in dich the use of mercury is Review drawires for the use of Mercury f restricted, re s tar or tegsten halogen vapor lamps and verify that such Lamps incardescent temps are used for the Normal, are not used in Mercury-restricted AC Essential, and DC Emergency Lighting arees.
| |
| systems. The Lightire for security areas is i
| |
| 1 discussed in Section 13.6 (of the FSAR).
| |
| i 1
| |
| l 15.0 The AC Essential and DC Energency Lightfrg Review lighting drawings for electrical systmas are independent of each other. Any independence between the AC essential electrical fatture in one system does not and DC emergency lighting system.
| |
| j cause the other system to be inoperable.
| |
| l Furthenmore, in critical control areas the i Lighting is either red edent (i.e.,
| |
| l overlapping from adjacent areas) or energized j fram the same train as the ewipment on that 8 DAP FORM E 054, REV. O, 08/13/86 4
| |
| I
| |
| | |
| 6 m . ~
| |
| N l
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CECKLIST msISER ,REV._ ,DATE _ _
| |
| REFERENCE DESCRIPT!0N SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| ]
| |
| j NO. CRITERIA (DOCLMENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICAi!ON C(BsENTS NC/NA I
| |
| j eree and/or provided by self contained j bettery packs energized from either Train A, 4
| |
| Train B, or Morant AC acurces. The l integrated design cf these systems provides i adespete emergency station tighting in all j erees recpaired for control of safety-related i eswipment and in the major interior access j routes to and fram these areas.
| |
| 11.0 Lightire and e-mication BTP DES Revleued e der criterion so. 45.0 of 9.5-1 C.5.g DAP E-037.
| |
| Lighting and two-way consunication are vital j to safe shutdom and emergency response in I the events of fire. Suitable fixed and
| |
| ! portable emergency Lighting and commmication i devices should be provided as foltous:
| |
| i 1
| |
| ) (1) Fixed self-contained lighting consisting l
| |
| l of fluorescent or seated-beam mits with l indivicksal 8 hour minimum bettery power f st4 plies should be provided in areas that must be marmed for safe shutdown and for
| |
| } access and egress routes to and from att fire j areas. Safe shutdoun arees incitate those
| |
| ! regaired to be manned if the control roon j oust be evacuated.
| |
| (2) Suitable seated beam bettery-powered 9 DAP FORM E-054, REV. O, 08/13/86 l
| |
| | |
| f rs * **
| |
| i i
| |
| DESIGN REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST IRmRER ,REV._ ,DATE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SAT /tmSAT/
| |
| i NO. CRITERIA (DoctmENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATICBI NC/NA CGeENTS I.
| |
| l portable hand tights should be provided for
| |
| : emergency use by the fire brigade and other operatiors persomel required to achieve safe 3
| |
| ptant shuttkam.
| |
| l j (3) Fized emergency communications
| |
| ] indeperdent of the norant plant commamication system should be instetted at preselected stations.
| |
| ]
| |
| 1 (4) A portable radio commamications system shouId be pravided for use by the fire
| |
| ; brigade and other operations persomel
| |
| -l regaired to achieve safe plant shutdoun.
| |
| This system should not interfere with the I commamications capabilities of the plant l security force. Fixed repeeters instatted to
| |
| ! penmit use of portable radio commamication f tmits should be protected from exposure fire I
| |
| damage. Preoperational and periodic testire should demonstrate that the fregamcies used for portable radio commmication will not effect the actuation of protective retsys.
| |
| l l
| |
| 17.0 Lighting Revieu lighting transfonner manufacturer's data for tap i
| |
| Plant lighting litumination levels uilt very adjustability and verify suitability at with the minimum through maximum bus voltages nonnet bus operating voltages.
| |
| 10 DAP FORM E-054, REV. O, 08/13/86 j
| |
| l
| |
| | |
| i
| |
| \N m
| |
| i DESIGIl REVIEW EVALUATION CNECKLIST InseER .REV._ ,DATE l a j REFERENCE DESCRIPTI(RI SAT /tssSAT/
| |
| l h0. CRITERIA (doc 181ENT, PAGE) 0F VERIFICATI(31 NC/NA C M NTS I
| |
| i l
| |
| indicated. Lighting transformers have j adjustable taps ediich uilt be set to provide i adapate illamination at norent operating bus voltages. DC tighting is also avellable in
| |
| ; the event of loss of the AC system.
| |
| ,i l 18.0 The desip bases arui/or criteria contained in Rewfou selected tightirg criteria from
| |
| ! the Ittiminatire Engineerirg Society (lES) IES Lightirg Menecok, 5th Ed. (1972) I i
| |
| Lightire Narwaww*, 5th ed. (1972) are for implementation in the desim of implemented in the design of the safety-related tighting systems.
| |
| j safety-retsted systems.
| |
| i
| |
| : l. .
| |
| t A t 1
| |
| i l
| |
| j ,
| |
| I i
| |
| j ,, .P ,- E.m. m.o. . m ,.
| |
| 1 1
| |
| l ,
| |
| 1
| |
| | |
| INSTRUCTION SHEET (CPP's)
| |
| Remove Insert Notes Table of Contents Table of Contents 05/28/86 09/17/86 CPP-005, Rev. 3 In front of Change Notice 001 CPP-005, Rev. 3 CPP-011, Rev. O CPP-011, Rev. 2 CPP-011, Rev. 2 In front of Change Notice 001 CPP-011, Rev. 2 CPP-012, Rev. 1 CPP-012, Rev. 2 CPP-016, Rev. 2 CPP-016, Rev. 3 CPP-016, Rev. 3 Behind Attachment 6.2 CPP-016, Rev. 3 CPP-017, Rev. 1 CPP-017, Rev. 2 CPP-018, Rev. 1 In front of Change Notice 001 CPP-018, Rev. 1 i
| |
| CPP-020, Rev. 1 Change Notice 001 CPP-020, Rev. 1 CPP-020, Rev. 2 CPP-021, Rev. O CPP-021, Rev. 1 CPP-021, Rev. 1 In front of Change Notice 001 CPP-021, Rev. 1 CPP-026, Rev. O CPP-026, Rev. O In front of Change Notice 001 CPP-026, Rev. O CPP-026, Rev. 0 In front of Change Notice 002 CPP-026, Rev. O Change Notice 001
| |
| | |
| ~
| |
| . .. :y , 1
| |
| ~
| |
| \
| |
| 4 t 1 :'
| |
| : u. '' .. _ ] Pcg3 1 of 2
| |
| ( n .... c *"uh CNL1 _
| |
| :-i m)r _
| |
| COMANCHE PEAK RESPONSE TEAM QA/QC REVIEW TEAM PROJECT PROCEDURES TABLE OF CONTENTS -
| |
| 09/17/86 gp fi{e - Col 6 CPP TITLE CHANGE NUMBER REV DATE NOTICE DATE Table of Contents 09/17/86 CPP-001 Preparation of Project 2 01/07/86 1 02/18/86 Procedures and Quality 2 07/08/86 Instructions CPP-002 Correspondence Control 1 01/07/86 CPP-003 Indoctrination, Training and 3 12/10/85 1 03/24/86 Certification of Personnel 2 04/17/86 3 06/25/86 L 4 07/11/86 CPP-004 Project Working Files 2 12/17/85 CPP-005 Establishing Population 3 05/28/86 1 08/21/86 CPP-006 Sample Selection 2 01/30/86 CPP-007 Preparation of Checklists 2 01/07/86 1 02/21/86 and Data Base Reports CPP-008 Preparation of Verification 2 01/07/86 1 06/30/86 Packages CPP-009 Performance of Reinspections 4 01/17/86 and Documentation Reviews CPP-010 Preparation of Deviation 7 05/12/86 1 05/15/86 Reports CPP-011 Evaluations of Adverse Trend 2 08/21/86 1 09/09/86 Analyses, Construction Deficiencies and QA/QC Program Deficiencies CPP-012 QA/QC Interface with 2 07/31/86 Constructor and TUCCO 5057-C/ERCOLD
| |
| | |
| r l
| |
| 1
| |
| , P&g2 2 of 2
| |
| /~
| |
| N~h-] CPP TITLE CRANGE NUMBER REV DATE NOTICE DATE CPP-013 Collective Evaluation of the 1 01/22/86 Quality of Construction CPP-014 Collective Evaluation of 2 12/19/85 Construction QA/QC Program CPP-015 Special Evaluation Team (SET) 0 07/22/85 (Limited Distribution)
| |
| CPP-016 Safety Significance 3 09/17/86 Evaluations of Deviations Reports CPP-017 Preparation of QA/QC Program 2 08/13/86 Deviation Reports CPP-018 QA/QC Interface with the 1 01/29/86 1 07/24/86 Design Adequacy Program CPP-019 Cancelled 05/16/86
| |
| () CPP-020 Out-of-Scope Observations 2 09/12/86 CPP-021 CPSES Project Corrective 1 08/13/86 1 09/09/86 Action CPP-022 Supplementary Evaluation of 0 09/27/85 1 05/21/86 Visual Welding Inspection .
| |
| Techniques CPP-023 Category I Programmatic ISAP O 01/30/86 Instructions / Checklists CPP-024 Issue-Specific Action Plan 0 03/18/86 1 04/04/86 Revisions CPP-025 QC Inspector Qualification 0 03/31/86 Evaluation CPP-026 Final Review of ISAP VII.c 0 07/23/86 1 07/30/86 Working Files 2 08/14/86 0
| |
| 5057-C/ERCOLD}}
| |
